V90
C R O S S C O U N T R Y
OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope your Volvo will give you many years of happy motoring. The
vehicle is designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passen-
gers. Volvo strives to design one of the world's safest passenger vehi-
cles. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environ-
mental requirements.
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read
the instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's
manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Manual) and on Volvo Cars support page (support.volvocars.com).
We also encourage everyone to always use seat belts in this and other
vehicles. You should also not drive if you are under the influence of alco-
hol or medicines or if your ability to drive is for some other reason
impaired.
2
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Owner's information
16
Owner's Manual in the center display
17
Navigate in the Owner's Manual in
the center display
18
Owner's manual in mobile devices
20
Volvo Cars support site
21
Using the Owner's Manual
21
The Owner's Manual and the envi-
ronment
24
YOUR VOLVO
Contacting Volvo
26
Volvo ID
26
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
26
Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure
27
IntelliSafe - driver support
28
Sensus - connection and entertainment
30
Software Updates
33
Data recording
33
Terms & Conditions for Services
35
Customer Privacy Policy
35
Important information on accessories
and extra equipment
35
Accessory installation
36
Connecting equipment to the vehi-
cle's data link connector
37
Technician certification
38
Viewing the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
38
Volvo Structural Parts Statement
39
Driver distraction
39
SAFETY
Safety
42
Safety during pregnancy
43
Occupant safety
43
Reporting safety defects
44
Recall information
45
Whiplash Protection System
46
Seat belts
47
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts
48
Seat belt tensioners
50
Resetting the electric seat belt ten-
sioners
51
Door and seat belt reminders
51
Airbags
52
Driver/passenger-side airbags
53
Occupant weight sensor
56
Side airbags
59
Inflatable curtain
60
Safety mode
61
Starting and moving the vehicle
when it is in safety mode
62
Child safety
63
Child restraints
65
Infant seats
67
Convertible seats
69
Booster cushions
71
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
Top tether anchors
72
Lower child seat attachment points
73
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
74
Integrated booster cushion*
75
Folding up the integrated booster
cushion*
77
Folding down the integrated booster
cushion*
78
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Instruments and controls in left-hand
drive vehicles
82
Instrument panel
84
Instrument panel settings
88
Fuel gauge
89
Trip computer
89
Displaying trip data in the instrument
panel
91
Resetting the trip odometer
92
Displaying trip statistics in the center
display
92
Trip statistics settings
93
Date and time
94
Ambient temperature sensor
94
Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
95
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
97
Instrument panel licenses
98
App menu in instrument panel
104
Handling the App menu in the instru-
ment panel
105
Messages in the instrument panel
106
Handling messages in the instru-
ment panel
107
Handling messages saved from the
instrument panel
109
Center display overview
111
Handling the center display
114
Activating and deactivating the cen-
ter display
117
Navigating in the center display's views
117
Handling tiles in the center display
121
Function view in the center display
124
Moving apps and buttons in the cen-
ter display
126
Symbols in the center display status bar
126
Using the center display keyboard
128
Changing keyboard language in the
center display
131
Entering characters, letters and
words by hand in the center display
131
Changing the appearance of the
center display
133
Turning off and adjusting the volume
of the center display system sounds
133
Changing system units of measurement
134
Changing system language
134
Changing settings in the center dis-
play's Top view
134
Opening contextual setting in the
center display
135
Resetting user data when the vehicle
changes owners
136
Resetting center display settings
136
Table of settings in the center display
137
4
Driver profiles
138
Selecting a driver profile
139
Changing a driver profile's name
139
Protecting a driver profile
140
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
140
Resetting driver profile settings
141
Messages in the center display
142
Handling messages in the center display
142
Handling messages saved from the
center display
143
Head-up display*
144
Activating and deactivating the head-
up display*
145
Head-up display settings*
146
Voice control
147
Using voice commands
148
Voice control for cellular phones
149
Voice control for radio and media
150
Voice control settings
150
LIGHTING
Lighting panel and controls
154
Adjusting light functions via the cen-
ter display
155
Parking lights
156
Daytime running lights
156
Low beams
157
Using high beam
158
Active high beam
159
Using turn signals
160
Active Bending Lights*
161
Front fog lights/cornering illumination*
161
Rear fog light
162
Brake lights
163
Emergency brake lights
163
Hazard warning flashers
163
Using home safe lighting
164
Welcome Light
164
Interior Lighting
164
Adjusting interior lighting
166
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors
170
Pinch protection for windows and
sun curtains
170
Reset procedure for pinch protection
171
Power windows
171
Operating the power windows
172
Using sun curtains*
173
Rearview/door mirrors
173
Adjusting the rearview mirror dim-
ming function
174
Adjusting the door mirrors
175
Panoramic roof*
176
Operating the panoramic roof*
177
Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun
curtain
179
Wiper blades and washer fluid
180
Using the windshield wipers
180
Using the rain sensor
181
Using the rain sensor's memory function
182
Using the windshield and headlight
washers
183
Using the rear window wiper/washer
184
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up
185
5
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seats
188
Power* front seats
189
Adjusting the power* front seats
189
Storing positions for seats, mirrors
and head-up display*
190
Using stored positions for seats, mir-
rors and head-up display*
191
Front seat massage* settings
192
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
193
Adjusting* front seat cushion length
193
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
194
Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
195
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
196
Folding down the rear seat backrests
197
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
199
Steering wheel controls and horn
201
Adjusting the steering wheel
201
CLIMATE CONTROL
Climate
204
Climate zones
204
Climate control sensors
205
Perceived temperature
205
Climate control system voice commands
206
Air quality
207
Clean Zone*
207
Clean Zone Interior Package*
208
Interior Air Quality System*
208
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
209
Passenger compartment air filter
209
Air distribution
210
Adjusting air distribution
210
Opening, closing and directing air vents
211
Air distribution options
213
Climate system controls
216
Activating and deactivating power
front seats*
218
Activating and deactivating the
heated front seat*
219
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear seats*
219
Activating and deactivating front seat
ventilation*
220
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
221
Activating and deactivating automatic
steering wheel heating*
222
Activating auto climate control
222
Activating and deactivating recirculation
223
Activating and deactivating the recir-
culation timer setting
223
Activating and deactivating max defroster
224
Activating and deactivating the
heated windshield*
225
Activating and deactivating automatic
windshield heating*
226
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door mirrors
226
Automatically activating and deacti-
vating the heated rear window and
door mirrors
227
Setting the blower speed for the
front seats
227
Setting the blower speed for the rear
seats*
228
Setting the temperature for the front
seats
229
Setting the temperature for the rear
seats*
230
Synchronize temperature
231
Activating and deactivating air condi-
tioning
231
6
Parking climate*
232
Preconditioning*
233
Starting and stopping preconditioning*
233
Preconditioning timer*
234
Adding and editing timer settings for
preconditioning*
234
Activating and deactivating precondi-
tioning timer*
235
Deleting preconditioning timer settings*
236
Climate comfort retaining function*
236
Starting and switching off the cli-
mate retaining function when parking*
237
Parking climate symbols and messages*
238
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Lock indication
240
Lock confirmation settings
241
Remote key
241
Locking and unlocking using the
remote key
244
Settings for remote and inside door
unlock
245
Unlocking the tailgate using the
remote key
245
Remote key range
246
Replacing the remote key's battery
247
Ordering additional remote keys
250
Red Key - restricted remote key*
251
Red Key* settings
251
Detachable key blade
252
Locking and unlocking with detacha-
ble key blade
253
Electronic immobilizer
255
Start and lock system type designations
255
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
256
Keyless locking and unlocking*
257
Keyless unlock settings*
259
Keyless tailgate unlock*
259
Antenna locations for the start and
lock system
260
Locking and unlocking from inside
the vehicle
260
Unlocking the tailgate from inside
the vehicle
262
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
262
Automatic locking when driving
264
Opening and closing the power tailgate*
264
Setting a maximum height for the
power tailgate*
267
Foot movement tailgate operation*
268
Private Locking
269
Activating and deactivating private
locking
269
Alarm
270
Arming and disarming the alarm
271
7
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver support systems
276
Speed-dependent steering wheel
resistance
276
Electronic Stability Control
277
Electronic Stability Control Sport mode
278
Activating/deactivating Sport mode
in Electronic Stability Control
279
Electronic Stability Control Sport
mode limitations
279
Electronic Stability Control symbols
and messages
280
Speed limiter
281
Activating and starting Speed Limiter
282
Managing Speed Limiter speed
282
Deactivating and putting Speed Lim-
iter in standby mode
283
Reactivating Speed Limiter from
standby mode
284
Turning off Cruise Control
284
Cruise Control limitations
285
Automatic Speed Limiter
285
Activating/deactivating Automatic
Speed Limiter
287
Changing Automatic Speed Limiter
tolerance
288
Automatic Speed Limiter limitations
289
Cruise control
289
Activating and starting Cruise Control
290
Managing Cruise Control speed
291
Deactivating and putting Cruise Con-
trol in standby mode
293
Reactivating Cruise Control from
standby mode
293
Switching off Cruise Control
294
Distance Alert*
295
Head-up display for Distance Alert
295
Activating/deactivating Distance Alert
296
Setting a time interval for Distance Alert
296
Distance Alert limitations
297
Adaptive Cruise Control*
298
Adaptive Cruise Control and collision
warning
301
Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise
Control with collision warning
302
Activating and starting Adaptive
Cruise Control
302
Managing Adaptive Cruise Control speed
303
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control time
intervals
304
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive
Cruise Control
305
Passing assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control
307
Starting passing assistance with
Adaptive Cruise Control
308
Limitations of passing assistance
with Adaptive Cruise Control
308
Switching target vehicles with Adap-
tive Cruise Control
308
Automatic braking with Adaptive
Cruise Control
309
Adaptive Cruise Control limitations
310
Switching between Cruise Control
and Adaptive Cruise Control
311
Symbols and messages for Adaptive
Cruise Control
312
Pilot Assist
314
Pilot Assist and collision warning
317
Head-up display for Pilot Assist dur-
ing collision risks
318
Activating and starting Pilot Assist
318
Managing Pilot Assist speed
320
Setting a time interval for Pilot Assist
321
Deactivating/reactivating Pilot Assist
322
Passing assistance with Pilot Assist
324
Starting passing assistance with
Pilot Assist
325
Passing assistance with Pilot Assist
limitations
325
Switching target vehicles with Pilot Assist
325
Auto-hold braking with Pilot Assist
326
Pilot Assist limitations
327
8
Pilot Assist* symbols and messages
328
Radar sensor
330
Radar sensor limitations
331
Recommended maintenance for the
radar sensor
334
Radar sensor type approval
334
Camera
335
Camera limitations
336
Recommended maintenance for the
camera/radar sensor
339
City Safety™
339
City Safety parameters and sub-functions
340
Setting a warning distance for City Safety
342
Detecting obstacles with City Safety
343
City Safety in crossing traffic
345
Limitations of City Safety in crossing
traffic
346
City Safety and delayed evasive
maneuvers
347
City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles
348
City Safety limitations
349
City Safety messages
351
Rear Collision Warning
352
Rear Collision Warning limitations
352
BLIS*
353
Activating/deactivating BLIS
354
BLIS limitations
355
Recommended maintenance for BLIS
356
BLIS messages
357
Cross Traffic Alert*
358
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert
359
Cross Traffic Alert limitations
359
Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert
360
Cross Traffic Alert messages
361
Road Sign Information*
362
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
363
Road Sign Information and sign displays
364
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation
364
Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings
365
Activating/deactivating Speed Warn-
ing in Road Sign Information
366
Road Sign Information with speed
camera information
366
Road Sign Information limitations
367
Driver Alert Control
368
Activating/deactivating Driver Alert
Control
369
Selecting guidance to a rest area if
the Driver Alert Control warning has
been given
370
Driver Alert Control limitations
370
Lane Keeping Aid
370
Steering assistance with Lane Keep-
ing Aid
372
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid
373
Selecting type of assistance for Lane
Keeping Aid
373
Lane Keeping Aid limitations
374
Lane Keeping Aid symbols and mes-
sages
375
Lane Keeping Aid symbols in the
instrument panel
377
Steering assistance at risk of collision
378
Activating/deactivating steering
assistance during collision risks
378
Run-Off Mitigation with steering
assistance
379
Run-Off Mitigation with steering
assistance levels
379
Activating/deactivating Run-Off Miti-
gation with steering assistance
380
Limitations of Run-Off Mitigation
with steering assistance
381
Steering assistance during collision
risks from oncoming traffic
381
9
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance during collision risks with
oncoming vehicles
382
Limitations of steering assistance
during collision risks from oncoming
traffic
383
Steering assistance during collision
risks from behind*
384
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance during collision risks from
behind*
385
Limitations of steering assistance
during collision risks from behind
385
Symbols and messages for steering
assistance during collision risks
387
Park Assist*
388
Park Assist front, rear and sides
389
Activating/deactivating Park Assist
390
Park Assist limitations
391
Recommended maintenance for
Park Assist
392
Park Assist symbols and messages
393
Park Assist Camera*
394
Park Assist Camera views
395
Park Assist Camera trajectory lines
397
Sensor field from Park Assist for
Park Assist Camera
399
Starting the Park Assist Camera
400
Park Assist Camera limitations
401
Recommended maintenance of the
Park Assist Camera
402
Park Assist Camera symbols and
messages
403
Park Assist Pilot*
404
Types of parking with Park Assist Pilot
404
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
406
Leaving a parking space with Park
Assist Pilot
408
Park Assist Pilot* limitations
409
Recommended maintenance for
Park Assist Pilot
411
Park Assist Pilot* messages
412
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the vehicle
414
Switching off the vehicle
416
Ignition modes
416
Selecting ignition mode
417
Brake functions
418
Brakes
418
Brake Assist System
420
Braking on wet roads
420
Braking on salted roads
420
Maintenance of the brake system
421
Parking brake
421
Activating and deactivating the park-
ing brake
422
Settings for automatically activating
the parking brake
423
Parking on a hill
423
Parking brake malfunction
424
Auto-hold brakes
425
Activating and deactivating Auto-
hold at a standstill
425
Hill Start Assist
426
Braking assist after a collision
426
Transmission
427
Gear selector positions for automatic
transmissions
428
10
Using the steering wheel paddles* to
shift
429
Shiftlock
431
Deactivating the automatic shiftlock
431
The kickdown function
432
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
433
Drive modes*
433
Changing drive mode*
435
ECO drive mode
435
Activating and deactivating ECO
drive mode using the function button
438
Start/Stop function
438
Driving with the Start/Stop function
438
Temporarily deactivating the Start/
Stop function
440
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
440
Leveling control* and suspension
442
Leveling control settings*
444
Low Speed Control
444
Activating and deactivating Low
Speed Control using the function button
445
Hill Descent Control
445
Activating and deactivating Hill
Descent Control using the function
button
446
Economical driving
447
Preparing for a long trip
448
Winter driving
449
Driving through standing water
449
Opening/closing the fuel filler door
450
Refueling
450
Fuel
451
Octane rating
452
Emission controls
454
Overheating of engine and transmission
455
Battery drain
456
Jump starting using another battery
456
Retractable towbar*
457
Driving with a trailer
460
Trailer Stability Assist*
461
Checking trailer lights
462
Towing using a towline
463
Attaching and removing the towing eyelet
464
Recovery
466
HomeLink
®
*
467
Programming HomeLink
®
*
468
Using HomeLink
®
*
469
Type approval for HomeLink
®
*
470
Compass*
470
Activating and deactivating the compass*
471
Calibrating the compass*
471
11
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Audio, media and Internet
474
Sound settings
474
Sound experience*
475
Apps
476
Download apps
477
Updating apps
478
Deleting apps
478
Radio
479
Starting the radio
479
Changing waveband and radio station
480
Searching for a radio station
481
Storing radio favorites
481
Radio settings
482
RBDS
483
HD Radio™
483
Activating and deactivating the HD
Radio™
484
HD Radio™ sub-channels
485
HD Radio™ limitations
486
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
486
Using SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
487
Settings for SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
489
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
*
490
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Weather
492
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Notifications
493
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Fuel
494
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Sports
495
Media player
496
Playing media
496
Controlling and changing media
498
Media searches
499
Gracenote
®
499
CD player*
500
Video
500
Playing video
501
Playing DivX
®
501
Video settings
501
Streaming media via Bluetooth
®
502
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
502
Playing media via the USB port
502
Connecting a device via the USB port
503
Technical specifications for USB devices
503
Compatible file formats for media
504
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
505
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
505
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
506
Tips for using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
507
Android Auto*
508
Using Android Auto*
508
Settings for Android Auto*
509
Tips for using Android Auto*
510
Phone
510
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
511
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
513
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
513
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone
514
Switch between phones connected
via Bluetooth
514
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected
devices
514
Handling phone calls
515
Handling text messages
516
Text message settings
517
Managing the phone book
517
Phone settings
518
Settings for Bluetooth devices
519
Internet-connected vehicle*
519
Connecting the vehicle to the Inter-
net via a Bluetooth-connected phone
521
12
Connecting the vehicle to the Inter-
net via a phone (Wi-Fi)
521
Connecting the vehicle to the Inter-
net via vehicle modem (SIM card)
522
Vehicle modem settings
523
Sharing Internet from the vehicle via
Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)
523
No or poor Internet connection
524
Deleting Wi-Fi networks
525
Wi-Fi technology and security
525
Terms of use and data sharing
526
Activating and deactivating data sharing
526
Hard disk storage space
526
License agreement for audio and media
527
WHEELS AND TIRES
Tires
538
Tire direction of rotation
540
Tread wear indicator
541
Tire terminology
541
Tire sidewall designations
542
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
544
Checking tire pressure
545
Adjusting tire pressure
546
Recommended tire pressure
547
Tire pressure monitoring system*
547
Calibrating the tire pressure monitor-
ing system*
549
Viewing tire pressure status in the
center display*
550
Action when warned of low tire pressure
551
When changing wheels
552
Tool kit
552
Jack*
553
Wheel bolts
553
Removing a wheel
554
Installing a wheel
556
Spare wheel
557
Accessing the spare wheel
558
Snow tires
559
Snow chains
559
Tire sealing system
560
Using the tire sealing system
561
Inflate tires with the compressor
included in the tire sealing system
565
Determining the vehicle's permitted
weight
566
13
LOADING, STORAGE AND
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior
570
Tunnel console
571
Electrical outlets
572
Using the electrical outlets
574
Using the glove compartment
575
Sun visors
576
Cargo compartment
577
Loading recommendations
577
Roof loads and load carriers
578
Grocery bag holders
579
Load anchoring eyelets
580
Rear seat ski hatch
580
Installing and removing the cargo
compartment cover*
580
Operating the cargo compartment cover*
581
Installing and removing the steel
cargo grid*
583
Installing and removing the cargo net*
585
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo's service program
588
Data transfer between vehicle and
workshop over Wi-Fi
590
Download Center
591
Handling system updates via Down-
load Center
591
Vehicle status
592
Scheduling service and repairs
593
Sending vehicle information to the
workshop
594
Hoisting the vehicle
596
Opening and closing the hood
598
Climate control system service
599
Replacing a windshield with head-up
display*
599
Engine compartment overview
600
Engine oil
600
Checking and filling engine oil
601
Refilling coolant
603
Replacing bulbs
604
Removing the plastic cover to
replace bulbs
605
Location of exterior lights
606
Replacing the low beam headlight bulbs
607
Replacing the high beam headlight bulbs
607
Replacing daytime running lights/
front parking light bulbs
608
Replacing front turn signal bulbs
609
Replacing backup lights
610
Replacing the rear fog light bulb
610
Bulb specifications
611
Start battery
612
Support battery
615
Battery symbols
616
Fuses and fuseboxes
617
Replacing fuses
618
Fuses in the engine compartment
619
Fuses under the glove compartment
622
Fuses in the cargo compartment
625
Cleaning the interior
629
Cleaning the center display
629
Cleaning the head-up display*
630
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceil-
ing liner
631
Cleaning the seat belt
631
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
631
Cleaning leather upholstery
632
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
633
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood surfaces
634
14
Cleaning the exterior
634
Polishing and waxing
635
Hand washing
635
Automatic car washes
637
High-pressure washing
638
Cleaning the wiper blades
638
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and
trim components
639
Cleaning rims
640
Corrosion protection
640
Paintwork
641
Touching up minor paint damage
641
Color codes
642
Changing rear window wipers
643
Replacing windshield wiper blades
644
Windshield wipers in the service position
645
Filling washer fluid
646
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
648
Dimensions
651
Weights
653
Towing capacity and tongue weight
654
Engine specifications
655
Engine oil specifications
656
Coolant specifications
657
Transmission fluid specifications
657
Brake fluid specifications
657
Fuel tank volume
658
Air conditioning specifications
658
Approved tire pressure
659
INDEX
Index 661
OWNER'S INFORMATION
OWNER'S INFORMATION
16
Owner's information
Owner's information is available in several differ-
ent formats, both digital and printed. The
Owner's Manual is available on the vehicle's
center display, as a mobile app and on Volvo
Cars' support website. There is also a Quick
Guide in the glove compartment, as well as a
supplement to the Owner's Manual containing
information about e.g. fuses, specifications, etc.
A printed Owner's Manual can be ordered.
Vehicle's center display
1
In the center display, pull down
Top view and tap
Owner's
manual. This gives you access
to visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the vehi-
cle. The information is searcha-
ble and is divided into catego-
ries.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual".
Download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and select
your vehicle model. The app
contains instructive videos and
offers visual navigation, includ-
ing exterior and interior images of the vehicle.
You can easily navigate between sections in the
Owner's Manual and the contents are searchable.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country.
Owner's Manuals are available
here for viewing online and in
PDF format. The support site
also contains instructive videos
and additional information and
assistance concerning your vehicle and owning a
Volvo. The website is available on most markets.
Printed information
The glove compartment con-
tains a printed supplement to
the Owner's Manual
1
, which
contains information on fuses
and specifications as well as a
summary of important and
practical information.
There is also a printed Quick Guide with useful
information about the most commonly used fea-
tures and functions in your vehicle.
Other printed information may also be provided in
the vehicle, depending on equipment level, mar-
ket, etc.
A printed Owner's Manual and accompanying
supplement can also be ordered. Contact a Volvo
retailer to order.
1
For markets without Owner's Manuals in the center display, a complete printed manual is provided along with the vehicle.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
}}
17
CAUTION
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering to
all applicable laws and regulations. It is also
important that the vehicle is operated, main-
tained and serviced according to Volvo's rec-
ommendations provided in the owner's infor-
mation.
If the information in the center display differs
from the printed information, the printed infor-
mation always takes precedence.
NOTE
Changing languages in the center display
could mean that certain owner's information
will not comply with national or local laws and
regulations. Do not change to a language that
you do not fully understand, as this could
make it difficult to navigate back through the
menu.
Related information
•
Owner's Manual in the center display
(p. 17)
•
Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
•
Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)
Owner's Manual in the center
display
A digital version of the Owner's Manual is availa-
ble in the vehicle's center display
2
.
The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed
from Top view and in certain cases, the contex-
tual Owner's Manual can also be accessed from
Top view.
NOTE
The digital Owner's Manual is not available
during driving.
OWNER'S MANUAL
Top view with button for Owner's Manual.
To open the Owner's Manual, pull down Top view
in the center display and tap
Owner's manual.
The information in the Owner's Manual can be
accessed directly via the Owner's Manual start
page or via its Top menu.
2
Available in most markets.
||
OWNER'S INFORMATION
18
Contextual Owner's Manual
Top view with button for contextual Owner's Manual.
The contextual Owner's Manual is a shortcut to
an article in the Owner's Manual describing the
active function displayed on the screen. When a
contextual Owner's Manual is available, it will be
shown to the right of
Owner's manual in Top
view.
Tap the contextual Owner's Manual to open an
article in the Owner's Manual related to the infor-
mation displayed on the screen. For example, tap
Navigation Manual to open an article related to
navigation.
Certain apps in the vehicle only. For third-party
apps that have been downloaded, it is not possi-
ble to e.g. access app-specific articles.
Related information
•
Navigate in the Owner's Manual in the center
display (p. 18)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
•
Download apps (p. 477)
Navigate in the Owner's Manual in
the center display
The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed
from the center display's Top view. The contents
are searchable and it is easy to navigate among
the various sections.
The Owner's Manual is accessed from Top view.
–
To open the Owner's Manual, pull down Top
view in the center display and tap
Owner's
manual.
There are a number of ways to find information in
the Owner's Manual. The options can be
accessed from the Owner's Manual start page
and from the Top menu.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
}}
19
Opening the menu in the Top menu
–
Tap in the upper list in the Owner's
Manual.
> A menu will open, displaying different
options for finding information:
Start page
Tap the symbol to return to the
Owner's Manual start page.
Categories
The articles in the Owner's
Manual are structured into
main and sub-categories. The
same article may appear in sev-
eral relevant categories in order
to help make them easier to
find.
1.
Tap
Categories.
> The main categories are listed.
2.
Tap a main category (
).
>
A list of sub-categories (
) and articles
(
) will appear.
3. Tap an article to open it.
To go back, tap the left arrow.
Quick Guide
Tap the symbol to go to a page
with links to a selection of use-
ful articles about the vehicle's
most commonly used features
and functions. The articles can
also be accessed via catego-
ries, but have been collected
here for quick access. Tap an article to read it in
its entirety.
Exterior and interior hotspots
Exterior and interior overviews
of the vehicle. Hotspots are
provided for certain functions,
components, etc. Tap a hotspot
to come to a relevant article.
1.
Press
Exterior or Interior.
> Exterior or interior images of the vehicle
are shown with hotspots. The hotspots
lead to articles about the corresponding
function, component, etc. Swipe the
screen horizontally to scroll between the
images.
2. Tap a hotspot.
> The title of a relevant article will be dis-
played.
3. Tap the title to open the article.
To go back, tap the left arrow.
Favorites
Tap the symbol to go to articles
saved as favorites. Tap an arti-
cle to read it in its entirety.
Saving or deleting favorite articles
Save an article as a favorite by tapping the at
the upper right when the article is open. When an
article has been saved as a favorite, the star sym-
bol will be filled in:
.
To remove an article from the list of favorites, tap
its star again.
Video
Tap the symbol to go to brief
instructive videos for various
functions in the vehicle.
||
OWNER'S INFORMATION
20
Information
Tap the symbol for information
about the current version of the
Owner's Manual in your vehicle
and other useful information.
Using the search function in the Top
menu
1.
Tap in the Owner's Manual upper menu.
A keyboard will appear at the bottom of the
screen.
2. Enter a search word, e.g. "seat belt".
> Suggested articles and categories will be
displayed as characters are entered.
3. Tap the article or category to read it.
Related information
•
Owner's Manual in the center display (p. 17)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 128)
•
Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)
Owner's manual in mobile devices
The Owner's Manual is available as a mobile
app
3
and can be downloaded from the App
Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for
both smartphones and tablets.
The Owner's Manual can be
downloaded as a mobile app
from the App Store or Google
Play. This QR code will take
you directly to the app. You can
also search for "Volvo manual"
in the App Store or Google
Play.
The app contains videos and exterior/interior
images of the vehicle. These images contain hot-
spots for various functions, components, etc.,
which lead directly to related information. You
can easily navigate between sections in the
Owner's Manual and the contents are searchable.
The mobile app is available on both App Store and Goo-
gle Play.
Related information
•
Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)
3
Certain mobile devices.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
}}
* Option/accessory.
21
Volvo Cars support site
Volvo Cars' website and support site contain
additional information about your vehicle.
Online support
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The
support site is available in most markets.
The site contains support for e.g. Internet-based
services and functions, Volvo On Call, the naviga-
tion system* and apps. Videos and step-by-step
instructions explain various procedures, such as
how to connect the vehicle to the Internet via a
cellular phone.
Downloadable information
Maps
For vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation
maps can be downloaded from the support site.
Mobile apps
Beginning with model year 2014, the Owner's
Manual is available as an app for certain Volvo
models. The Volvo On Call app can also be down-
loaded from the support site.
Owner's manuals in PDF format
Owner's Manuals are available for downloading in
PDF format. Select the vehicle model and year to
download the desired manual.
Contact
Contact information for customer support and
your nearest Volvo retailer are available on the
support site.
Related information
•
Contacting Volvo (p. 26)
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
Using the Owner's Manual
Reading your Owner's Manual is a good way to
get to know your new Volvo, preferably before
driving it for the first time.
Reading your Owner's Manual is a good way to
familiarize yourself with new features and func-
tions, get advice on the best way to handle your
vehicle in different situations, and to learn how to
get the most out of everything your Volvo has to
offer. Pay particular attention to the safety warn-
ings provided in the Owner's Manual.
The intention of this owner's information is to
explain all of the possible features, functions and
options included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not
intended as an indication or guarantee that all of
these features, functions and options are
included in every vehicle. Some terminology used
may not exactly match terminology used in sales,
marketing and advertising materials.
Volvo continuously works to develop and improve
our products. Modifications can mean that infor-
mation, descriptions and illustrations in the
Owner's Manual differ from the equipment in the
vehicle. We reserve the right to make changes
without prior notice.
Do not remove this manual from the vehicle. If a
problem should occur, you will not have the nec-
essary information on where and how to get pro-
fessional assistance.
© Volvo Car Corporation
||
OWNER'S INFORMATION
* Option/accessory.
22
Option/accessory
In addition to standard equipment, the Owner's
Manual also describes options (factory-installed
equipment) and certain accessories (extra retro-
fitted equipment).
All options and accessories are marked with an
asterisk: *.
The equipment described in the Owner's Manual
is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may be
equipped differently depending on market
requirements and national or local laws and regu-
lations.
For more information on which equipment is
standard and which is an option or accessory,
please contact your Volvo retailer.
Footnotes
Certain parts of the Owner's Manual contain
information in the form of footnotes at the bot-
tom of the page or at the end of a table. This
information supplements the text that the foot-
note number refers to. If the footnote refers to
text in a table, a letter is used instead of a num-
ber.
Messages
There are several displays in the vehicle that
show messages and menu texts. The appearance
of these texts differs from the normal texts provi-
ded. Example of messages and menu texts:
Phone, New message.
Decals
There are various types of decals affixed in the
vehicle to communicate important information in
a clear and concise manner. The importance of
these decals is explained as follows, in descend-
ing order of importance.
Risk of injury
Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning field,
white text/image on a black message field. Used
to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of
this type could result in serious injury or death.
Risk of damage
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a
warning of this type could result in damage.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
23
Information
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black message field.
NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner's Manual do
not claim to be exact reproductions of those
found in the vehicle. The purpose is to show
approximately how they look and about where
they are located. The information that applies
for your vehicle in particular is found on the
decal on the vehicle.
Procedures
Procedures that must be carried out in a certain
order are shown as numbered lists in the
Owner's Manual.
When a series of illustrations are provided
along with the step-by-step instructions, the
numbers of the steps correspond with the
numbers of the illustrations.
Lists using letters instead of numbers are
used in cases where the order in which the
instructions are carried out is not important.
Arrows with or without numbers are used to
indicate the direction of movement.
Arrows with letters are used to indicate a
movement in cases where the order in which
the instructions are carried out is not impor-
tant.
If there are no illustrations associated with step-
by-step instructions, the steps are indicated by
ordinary numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
general overview illustrations of components.
The corresponding number is used in the
position list's description of that component.
Bullet lists
Bullets are used for items (components, func-
tions, information, etc.) that can be listed in a ran-
dom order.
For example:
•
Coolant
•
Engine oil
Related information
Related information offers references to other
parts of the manual containing information asso-
ciated with the information you are currently
reading.
Illustrations, images and video clips
Illustrations, images and video clips used in the
Owner's Manual are sometimes generic and are
intended to provide an overview or an example of
a certain function or feature. They may vary
depending on equipment level and market and
may differ from the appearance of your vehicle.
Continues on next page
}}
This symbol is shown in the lower right-hand
corner to indicate that the current topic continues
on the next page.
Continuation from previous page
||
This symbol is shown in the upper left-hand
corner to indicate that the current topic is a con-
tinuation from the previous page.
Related information
•
Owner's Manual in the center display (p. 17)
•
Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
OWNER'S INFORMATION
24
The Owner's Manual and the
environment
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper from
responsibly managed forests.
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)
®
symbol
certifies that the paper pulp in the printed
Owner's Manual comes from FSC
®
-certified for-
ests or other responsibly managed sources.
Related information
•
Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure (p. 27)
YOUR VOLVO
YOUR VOLVO
26
Contacting Volvo
Use the following contact information if you
would like to get in touch with Volvo in the Uni-
ted States or Canada.
In the USA:
Volvo Car USA, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive,
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada:
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.com/ca
Volvo ID
Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives you access
to a range of services using a single username
and password.
Examples of services:
•
Volvo On Call-app - check your vehicle using
your phone. You can check fuel level, find the
nearest gas station and lock the vehicle
remotely.
•
Send to Car – send addresses from online
map services directly to the vehicle.
•
Book service and repairs – register your pre-
ferred workshop/retailer on volvocars.com to
schedule service directly from the vehicle.
NOTE
If the username/password for a service (e.g.
Volvo On Call) is changed, the change will
also automatically be applied to other serv-
ices.
A Volvo ID can be created from the vehicle or the
Volvo On Call app.
When a Volvo ID is registered in the vehicle, addi-
tional services are available.
Related information
•
Creating and registering a Volvo ID (p. 26)
•
Scheduling service and repairs (p. 593)
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
A Volvo ID can be created in two ways. If your
Volvo ID was created with the Volvo On Call
app, the Volvo IDmust also be registered to the
vehicle to enable access to the Volvo ID serv-
ices.
Creating a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app
1.
Download the Volvo ID app from
Download
Center in the center display's App view.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that will be sent auto-
matically to this email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and is
automatically registered to the vehicle.
The Volvo ID services can now be used.
YOUR VOLVO
}}
* Option/accessory.
27
Creating a Volvo ID using the Volvo On Call
app
1
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On
Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2. On the app's start page, create a Volvo ID
and enter a personal email address.
3. Follow the instructions that will be sent auto-
matically to this email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. See
below for information on how the ID is
registered to the vehicle.
Registering your Volvo ID to the vehicle
If your Volvo ID was created using the Volvo On
Call app, follow these steps to register the ID to
the vehicle:
1. If you have not already done so, download
the Volvo ID app from
Download Center in
the center display's App view.
NOTE
To download apps the vehicle must be con-
nected to the internet.
2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that will be automati-
cally sent to the email address connected to
your Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID has now been registered to
the vehicle. The Volvo ID services can now
be used.
Related information
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
•
Download apps (p. 477)
•
Handling system updates via Download Cen-
ter (p. 591)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure
Volvo is committed to the well-being of its cus-
tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, we
care about the environment in which we all live.
Concern for the environment means an everyday
involvement in reducing our environmental
impact.
Volvo's environmental activities are based on a
holistic view, which means we consider the over-
all environmental impact of a product throughout
its complete life cycle. In this context, design, pro-
duction, product use, and recycling are all impor-
tant considerations. In production, Volvo has
partly or completely phased out several chemicals
including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and
cadmium; and reduced the number of chemicals
used in our plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into
production a three-way catalytic converter with a
Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen sen-
sor, in 1976. The current version of this highly
efficient system reduces emissions of harmful
substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the exhaust pipe
by approximately 95 - 99% and the search to
eliminate the remaining emissions continues.
Volvo is the only automobile manufacturer to
offer CFC-free retrofit kits for the air conditioning
system of all models as far back as the 1975
model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls
and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our
1
Vehicles with Volvo On Call.
||
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
28
goal. In addition to continuous environmental
refinement of conventional gasoline-powered
internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively
looking at advanced technology alternative-fuel
vehicles.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner
in the work to lessen the vehicle's impact on the
environment. To reduce your vehicle's environ-
mental impact, you can:
•
Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel economy
with improperly inflated tires.
•
Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet.
•
Drive at a constant speed whenever possible.
•
See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspection
if the check engine (malfunction indicator)
light illuminates, or stays on after the vehicle
has started.
•
Properly dispose of any vehicle-related waste
such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake
pads, etc.
•
When cleaning your vehicle, please use gen-
uine Volvo car care products. All Volvo car
care products are formulated to be environ-
mentally friendly.
Related information
•
Economical driving (p. 447)
•
Starting and stopping preconditioning*
(p. 233)
•
The Owner's Manual and the environment
(p. 24)
•
Air quality (p. 207)
IntelliSafe - driver support
IntelliSafe is Volvo Cars' philosophy regarding
vehicle safety. IntelliSafe consists of a number of
systems, both standard and optional, that are
designed to help make driving safer, prevent
accidents and protect passengers and other
road users.
Support
IntelliSafe includes driver support functions such
as Adaptive cruise control* which helps the driver
to maintain an even speed combined with a pre-
selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Pilot Assist
2
helps the driver keep the vehicle in
the current traffic lane by providing steering
assistance and maintaining an even speed and a
set time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver pull into and
out of parking spaces.
Other examples of systems that can help the
driver are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
systems.
Prevention
City Safety is a function intended to help prevent
accidents. The function can help prevent or miti-
gate a collision with pedestrians, cyclists, large
animals or other vehicles. Light, sound and pulsa-
tions in the brake pedal are provided to alert of a
2
Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.
YOUR VOLVO
29
possible collision and help the driver act in time
to prevent it. If the driver does not react to the
warning and the risk of collision is determined to
be imminent, City Safety can automatically apply
the brakes.
Lane assistance (LKA) is another example of a
function that can help prevent accidents by help-
ing the driver - on expressways and similar larger
roads - to reduce the risk of the car accidentally
leaving its own lane.
The function Steering aid during increased
collision risk can help the driver reduce the risk
of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or
colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by
actively steering the car back into its lane and/or
swerving.
Protection
To help protect the driver and passengers, the
vehicle is equipped with seat belt tensioners that
pull the seat belts taut in collisions and other crit-
ical situations. The vehicle also has airbags, inflat-
able curtains and the Whiplash Protection
System (WHIPS), which helps prevent whiplash
injuries.
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 276)
•
Active high beam (p. 159)
•
Safety (p. 42)
•
Seat belts (p. 47)
•
Airbags (p. 52)
•
Whiplash Protection System (p. 46)
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
30
Sensus - connection and
entertainment
Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet,
use apps, and turn your vehicle into a Wi-Fi hot-
spot.
This is Sensus
Sensus provides an intelligent interface and
Internet connection to the digital world. An intui-
tive navigation structure offers access to relevant
assistance, information and entertainment when
it is needed, without distracting the driver.
Sensus includes all of the solutions in the vehicle
related to entertainment, Internet connection and
navigation*, and serves as the user interface
between the driver and the vehicle. Sensus is
what makes communication between you, the
vehicle and the world around you possible.
Information when it's needed, where it's
needed
The vehicle's displays present the right informa-
tion at the right time. Information is presented in
different displays depending on how it should be
prioritized by the driver.
YOUR VOLVO
}}
* Option/accessory.
31
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritized.
Head-up display*
The head-up display presents information that
the driver should react to immediately.
For example, traffic warnings, speed information
and navigation messages*. Road sign information
and incoming phone calls are also shown in the
head-up display. These can be handled using the
right-side steering wheel keypad or the center
display.
Instrument panel
12"* instrument panel.
||
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
32
8-inch instrument panel.
The instrument panel displays information
such as speed, incoming phone calls or the track
currently playing. It is controlled using the steer-
ing wheel keypads.
Center display
Many of the vehicle's main functions are con-
trolled from the center display, a touchscreen that
reacts to taps and other gestures. This minimizes
the number of physical buttons and controls nee-
ded in the vehicle. The screen can also be oper-
ated while wearing gloves.
The center display is used to control e.g. the cli-
mate and entertainment systems and to adjust
the power seats*. The information presented in
the center display can be handled by the driver
or, in some situations, by a passenger.
Voice control system
The voice control system ena-
bles the driver to control certain
vehicle functions without taking
their hands off the wheel. The
system can understand natural
speech. Use voice commands
to e.g. play a song, make a
phone call, increase the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment or have a text message
read aloud.
Related information
•
Head-up display* (p. 144)
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
•
Voice control (p. 147)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Sharing Internet from the vehicle via Wi-Fi
hotspot (tethering) (p. 523)
YOUR VOLVO
}}
33
Software Updates
So that you as a Volvo customer shall have the
best possible experience from your car, Volvo is
continuously developing the systems in the cars
and the services that you are offered.
You can update the software in your Volvo to the
latest version when your car is serviced at an
authorized Volvo dealer. The latest software
update gives you access to new functions and
improvements, as well as previous improvements
included with previous software updates.
For more information about released updates and
answers to frequently asked questions, please go
to support.volvocars.com.
NOTE
Functionality after updating may vary depend-
ing on market, model, model year and options.
Related information
•
Sensus - connection and entertainment
(p. 30)
•
Handling system updates via Download Cen-
ter (p. 591)
Data recording
As part of Volvo's commitment to safety and
quality, certain information is recorded regarding
vehicle operation, functionality and incidents.
US market only:
EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data are recorded by the
EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
ASDR
This vehicle is equipped with an Active Safety
Data Recorder (ASDR). This data recorder can
record information related to the usage of the
car, functional errors and active safety actuations
(e.g. auto brake). The information saved is used
by technicians for service and maintenance to
diagnose and repair possible faults that has
occurred in the vehicle and to fulfil certain legal
requirements. The registered data can also, in
congregated form, be used for research- and
product development –purposes to continuously
improve the safety and quality of Volvo Cars. For
more information contact your local Volvo retailer.
||
YOUR VOLVO
34
Canadian market only:
This vehicle is equipped with an “Event Data
Recorder” (EDR). The main purpose of the EDR
is to register and record data in traffic accidents
or accident-like situations, e.g. if an airbag
deploys or if the vehicle hits an obstacle in the
road. This data is recorded in order to help under-
stand how the vehicle's systems perform in these
types of situations. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time, usually
30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data in traffic accidents or accident-like situations
such as:
•
How the various systems in the vehicle per-
formed;
•
Whether the driver and passenger seat belts
were tightened/buckled;
•
The driver's use of the accelerator/brake
pedal;
•
How fast the vehicle was moving.
This data can help provide a better understanding
of the circumstances in which traffic accidents
and injuries occur. The EDR records data only if a
non-trivial accident situation occurs. EDR does
not record any data during normal driving condi-
tions. The system also never registers data on
who is driving the vehicle or the geographical
location of the accident or near-accident. How-
ever, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of per-
sonally identifiable information that is routinely
acquired during an accident investigation. Special
equipment and access to either the vehicle or the
EDR is required to read this recorded data.
In addition to the EDR, the vehicle is equipped
with a number of computers that continuously
control and monitor the vehicle's performance.
These computers may record data during normal
driving conditions, particularly if they detect a
fault relating to the vehicle's operation and func-
tionality or upon activation of the vehicle's active
driver support functions (e.g. City Safety or the
auto-brake function).
Some of this recorded data is required by techni-
cians performing service and maintenance in
order to diagnose and rectify any faults that may
have occurred in the vehicle. The recorded infor-
mation is also needed to enable Volvo to fulfill
legal and other regulatory requirements. Informa-
tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com-
puters until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the recorded information
may be used in aggregated form for research and
product development purposes in order to contin-
uously improve the safety and quality of Volvo
vehicles.
Volvo will not provide this information to any third
parties without the vehicle owner's consent. How-
ever, national legislation and regulations may
require Volvo to disclose this type of information
to law enforcement or other authorities that can
claim a legal right to the information. Special
technical equipment, which Volvo and workshops
that have entered agreements with Volvo have
access to, is required to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible for ensuring
that information provided to Volvo in conjunction
with service and maintenance is stored and han-
dled securely and in compliance with applicable
legal requirements. For more information, please
contact a Volvo retailer.
Related information
•
Contacting Volvo (p. 26)
•
Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 39)
YOUR VOLVO
}}
35
Terms & Conditions for Services
Volvo offers services to help make driving your
Volvo as safe and comfortable as possible.
These services comprise everything from assis-
tance in emergencies to navigation and various
maintenance services.
Before using the services, it is important to read
the Terms and Conditions for the services at
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Customer Privacy Policy (p. 35)
Customer Privacy Policy
Volvo respects and safeguards the personal pri-
vacy of everyone who visits our websites.
This policy refers to the handling of customer
data and personal information. The purpose is to
give current, past and potential customers a gen-
eral understanding of:
•
The circumstances in which we collect and
process your personal data.
•
The types of personal data we collect.
•
Why we collect your personal data.
•
How we process your personal data.
The policy can be read in its entirety at
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Terms of use and data sharing (p. 526)
•
Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 35)
•
Data recording (p. 33)
Important information on
accessories and extra equipment
Incorrectly connected or installed accessories or
extra equipment may have an adverse effect on
the vehicle's electronics.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners use
only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and
that accessory installations be performed only by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Certain accessories only work when the associ-
ated software is installed in the vehicle's com-
puter system.
The equipment described in the Owner's Manual
is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may be
equipped differently depending on market
requirements and national or local laws and regu-
lations.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be
available in all countries or markets. Please note
that some vehicles may be equipped differently,
depending on special legal requirements. For
more information on which equipment is standard
and which is an option or accessory, please con-
tact your Volvo retailer.
||
YOUR VOLVO
36
NOTE
Do not export your Volvo to another country
before investigating that country's applicable
safety and exhaust emission requirements. In
some cases it may be difficult or impossible
to comply with these requirements. Modifica-
tions to the emission control system(s) may
render your Volvo not certifiable for legal
operation in the U.S., Canada and other coun-
tries.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit
chemicals known to the state of California to
cause cancer, and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause can-
cer, and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as air
bag modules, seat belt tensioners, adaptive
steering columns, and button cell batteries
may contain Perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle end
of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner and for comply-
ing with current statutes and regulations.
It is also essential to maintain and service the
vehicle according to Volvo's recommendations
as stated in the owner's information and the
service and warranty booklet.
If the on-board information differs from the
printed owner's manual, the printed informa-
tion always takes precedence.
Related information
•
Accessory installation (p. 36)
•
Connecting equipment to the vehicle's data
link connector (p. 37)
•
Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)
Accessory installation
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners use
only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and
that accessory installations be performed only by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Certain accessories only work when the associ-
ated software is installed in the vehicle's com-
puter system.
•
Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance,
safety, and emission systems in your vehicle.
Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician knows where accessories
may and may not be safely installed in your
Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician before
installing any accessory in or on your vehicle.
•
Accessories that have not been approved by
Volvo may or may not be specifically tested
for compatibility with your vehicle.
•
Any of your vehicle's performance and safety
systems could be adversely affected if you
install accessories that Volvo has not tested,
or if you allow accessories to be installed by
someone unfamiliar with your vehicle.
•
Damage caused by unapproved or improperly
installed accessories may not be covered by
your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet for
more warranty information. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or expenses
YOUR VOLVO
}}
37
that may result from the installation of non-
genuine accessories.
Related information
•
Important information on accessories and
extra equipment (p. 35)
Connecting equipment to the
vehicle's data link connector
Incorrectly connected or installed software or
diagnostic tools may have an adverse effect on
the vehicle's electronics.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners use
only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and
that accessory installations be performed only by
a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Certain accessories only work when the associ-
ated software is installed in the vehicle's com-
puter system.
On-board Diagnostic (OBDII) socket under the dash-
board on the driver's side.
NOTE
Volvo Cars takes no responsibility for the con-
sequences of connecting non-authorized
equipment to the On-board Diagnostic
(OBDII) socket. This socket should only be
used by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Type approval
USA
FCC ID: 2AGKKACUII-06
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
||
YOUR VOLVO
38
Canada
IC: 20839-ACUII06
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Related information
•
Important information on accessories and
extra equipment (p. 35)
Technician certification
In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-
ports certification by the National Institute for
Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.).
Certified technicians have demonstrated a high
degree of competence in specific areas. Besides
passing exams, each technician must also have
worked in the field for two or more years before a
certificate is issued. These professional techni-
cians are best able to analyze vehicle problems
and perform the necessary maintenance proce-
dures to keep your Volvo at peak operating con-
dition.
Viewing the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
When contacting a Volvo retailer, about e.g. your
Volvo On Call subscription, your Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN
3
) may be needed.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Proceed to
System System Information
Vehicle Identification Number.
> The vehicle identification number will be
displayed.
3
Vehicle Identification Number
YOUR VOLVO
}}
39
Volvo Structural Parts Statement
Volvo is one of the leading companies for car
safety.
Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles
designed to help protect vehicle occupants in the
event of a collision.
Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a
collision. This energy absorption system including,
but not limited to, structural components such as
bumper reinforcement bars, bumper energy
absorbers, frames, rails, fender aprons, A-pillars,
B-pillars and body panels must work together to
maintain cabin integrity and protect the vehicle
occupants.
The supplemental restraint system including but
not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags, and
deployment sensors work together with the
above components to provide proper timing for
air bag deployment.
Due to the above, Volvo Car USA does not sup-
port the use of aftermarket, alternative or any-
thing other than original Volvo parts for collision
repair.
Volvo Car USA also recommends using Volvo-
approved replacement glass. The use of after-
market glass, particularly a windshield, can have
an adverse effect on collision avoidance and
advanced lighting systems.
In addition Volvo does not support the use or re-
use of structural components from an existing
vehicle that has been previously damaged.
Although these parts may appear equivalent, it is
difficult to tell if the parts have been previously
replaced with non-OE parts or if the part has
been damaged as a result of a prior collision. The
quality of these used parts may also have been
affected due to environmental exposure.
Related information
•
Data recording (p. 33)
Driver distraction
A driver has a responsibility to do everything
possible to ensure his or her own safety and the
safety of passengers in the vehicle and others
sharing the roadway. Part of this responsibility is
avoiding distractions, including performing activi-
ties that are not directly related to controlling the
vehicle in the driving environment.
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with fea-
ture-rich entertainment and communication sys-
tems. These include hands-free cellular tele-
phones, navigation systems, and multipurpose
audio systems. You may also own other portable
electronic devices for your own convenience.
When used properly and safely, they enrich the
driving experience. Improperly used, any of these
could cause a distraction.
For all of these systems, we want to provide the
following warning that reflects the strong Volvo
concern for your safety. Never use these devices
or any feature of your vehicle in a way that dis-
tracts you from the task of driving safely. Distrac-
tion can lead to a serious accident. In addition to
this general warning, we offer the following guid-
ance regarding specific new features that may be
found in your vehicle:
||
YOUR VOLVO
40
WARNING
•
Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit
cellular telephone use by a driver while
the vehicle is moving.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-
tion system, set and make changes to
your travel itinerary only with the vehicle
parked.
•
Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-
sets with the vehicle parked, and use your
programmed presets to make radio use
quicker and simpler.
•
Never use portable computers or per-
sonal digital assistants while the vehicle
is moving.
Related information
•
Audio, media and Internet (p. 474)
SAFETY
SAFETY
42
Safety
The vehicle is equipped with a number of safety
systems that work together to help protect the
vehicle's driver and passengers in the event of
an accident.
The vehicle is equipped with a number of sensors
that may react in the event of an accident and
activate different safety systems, such as the air-
bag system and seat belt tensioners. Depending
on the specific conditions of the accident, e.g.
collisions at certain angles, overturning or swerv-
ing, the systems react differently to help provide
the best protection.
There are also mechanical safety systems such
as the Whiplash Protection System. The vehicle
is also built so that a large part of the force of a
collision is distributed to the vehicle's members,
pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body.
After an accident, the vehicle's safety mode may
be activated if any important function in the vehi-
cle has been damaged.
Warning symbol in the instrument panel
The warning symbol in the instrument
panel illuminates when the vehicle's
electrical system is in ignition mode II.
The symbol will go out after approx. 6
seconds if no faults are detected in the vehicle's
safety systems.
WARNING
If the warning symbol remains illuminated or
switches on while driving and the message
SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to
workshop is displayed in the instrument
panel, this indicates that something in the
safety system is not functioning properly.
Volvo recommends contacting an authorized
Volvo workshop for repairs as soon as possi-
ble.
WARNING
Never attempt to alter or repair any of the
vehicle's safety systems yourself. Incorrectly
performed repairs to any system could impair
function and lead to serious injury. Volvo rec-
ommends contacting an authorized Volvo
workshop.
If this dedicated warning symbol is not
functioning, the general warning sym-
bol will illuminate instead and the same
message will be displayed in the instru-
ment panel.
Related information
•
Safety during pregnancy (p. 43)
•
Occupant safety (p. 43)
•
Reporting safety defects (p. 44)
•
Recall information (p. 45)
•
Seat belts (p. 47)
•
Airbags (p. 52)
•
Whiplash Protection System (p. 46)
•
Safety mode (p. 61)
•
Child safety (p. 63)
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
43
Safety during pregnancy
It is important that seat belts are worn correctly
during pregnancy and that pregnant drivers
adjust their seating position accordingly.
Seat belt
The seat belt should fit closely against the shoul-
der, with the diagonal section between the
breasts and to the side of the stomach.
The lap section of the seat belt should lie flat
over the thighs and as far as possible under the
stomach. Never let it ride upward. Remove
unnecessary slack and make sure the seat belt
fits as close as possible to the body. Make sure
there are no twists in the seat belt.
Seating position
As pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust the seat and steering wheel to a
position that allows them to retain full control of
the vehicle (which means they should be able to
easily reach the steering wheel and foot pedals).
Try to maintain as much distance as possible
between the stomach and the steering wheel.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 42)
•
Seat belts (p. 47)
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
Occupant safety
Safety is Volvo's cornerstone.
Volvo's concern for safety
Our concern for safety dates back to 1927 when
the first Volvo rolled off the production line.
Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention), safety
cages, and energy-absorbing impact zones were
designed into Volvo vehicles long before it was
fashionable or required by government regulation.
We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety fea-
tures and to refine those already in our vehicles.
You can help. We would appreciate hearing your
suggestions about improving automobile safety.
We also want to know if you ever have a safety
concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at:
1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
1-800-663-8255.
||
SAFETY
44
Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old
you are but rather on:
•
How well you see.
•
Your ability to concentrate.
•
How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
The following suggestions are intended to help
you cope with the ever changing traffic environ-
ment.
•
Never drink and drive.
•
If you are taking any medication, consult your
physician about its potential effects on your
driving abilities.
•
Take a driver-retraining course.
•
Have your eyes checked regularly.
•
Keep your windshield and headlights clean.
•
Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
•
Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with regard to
stopping distance.
•
Never send text messages while driving.
•
Refrain from using or minimize the use of a
cell phone while driving.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 42)
•
Reporting safety defects (p. 44)
•
Recall information (p. 45)
Reporting safety defects
The following information will help you report any
perceived safety-related defects in your vehicle.
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Volvo
Car USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives simi-
lar complaints, it may open an investi-
gation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer, or Volvo Car
USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may
either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-
free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transpor-
tation, Washington D.C. 20590.
SAFETY
}}
45
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov, where you can also
enter your vehicle's VIN (Vehicle Identi-
fication Number) to see if it has any
open recalls.
Volvo strongly recommends that if your
vehicle is covered under a service cam-
paign, safety or emission recall or simi-
lar action, it should be completed as
soon as possible. Please check with
your local retailer or Volvo Car USA,
LLC if your vehicle is covered under
these conditions.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Transport Canada in
addition to notifying Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Transport Canada can be contacted at:
1-800-333-0510
Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500
Fax: 1-819-994-3372
Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road
Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1
Related information
•
Safety (p. 42)
•
Occupant safety (p. 43)
•
Recall information (p. 45)
•
Viewing the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) (p. 38)
Recall information
On our website, select the "Own" tab on the
upper left side of the screen and click the head-
ing "Recall Information" on the right side of the
screen. Enter your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) for your vehicle (found at the base of the
windshield). If your vehicle has any open Recalls,
they will be displayed on this page.
You can also enter the Vehicle Identification
Number in the search field on the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration's (NHTSA)
website at: www.nhtsa.gov.
Volvo customers in Canada
For any questions regarding open recalls for your
vehicle, please contact your authorized Volvo
retailer. If your retailer is unable to answer your
questions, please contact Volvo Customer Rela-
tions at 800-663-8255, Monday through Friday,
8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. EST or volvocars.com/ca.
You may also write us at:
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
www.tc.gc.ca
||
SAFETY
46
Related information
•
Safety (p. 42)
•
Reporting safety defects (p. 44)
•
Occupant safety (p. 43)
Whiplash Protection System
The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) is
designed to help reduce the risk of whiplash-
type injuries. The system consists of energy
absorbing backrests and seat cushions as well
as specially designed head restraints in the front
seats.
WHIPS is activated in the event of a rear-end
collision and adapted to the angle and speed of
the collision and to the characteristics of the col-
liding vehicle.
When WHIPS is activated, the front seat back-
rests move rearward and the seat cushions move
downward to change the seating positions of the
driver and front seat passenger. This movement
helps absorb some of the forces that could result
in whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seat belt.
Always wear your seat belt.
WARNING
Do not attempt to alter or repair the seat or
WHIPS on your own. Volvo recommends con-
tacting an authorized Volvo workshop.
If the front seats have been subjected to
severe stress, e.g. in a collision, the seats
must be replaced. Even if the seats appear
undamaged, some of their protective proper-
ties may have been lost.
Do not place any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or on the rear seat that could prevent
WHIPS from functioning correctly.
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
47
WARNING
Do not squeeze box-like cargo between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat backrest.
If the rear seat backrests are folded down,
cargo must be secured to prevent it from slid-
ing forward against the front seat backrests in
the event of a collision.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down or if a
rear-facing child restraint is being used in the
rear seat, the seat in front must be moved for-
ward so that it does not come into contact
with the backrest or child restraint.
Seating position
For WHIPS to provide optimal protection, the
driver and passenger must be seated correctly
and the system's function must not be impeded
in any way.
Set the front seat to the correct seating position
before starting to drive.
The driver and the front seat passenger should
sit in the center of the seat with their heads as
close as possible to the head restraints.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 42)
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 352)
Seat belts
Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-
pants in your vehicle. Children should be prop-
erly restrained using an infant seat, adjustable
child seat or booster cushion as determined by
age, weight and height.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory for
occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.
Seat belt maintenance
Check periodically that the seat belts are in good
condition. Use water and a mild detergent for
cleaning. Check the seat belt mechanism's func-
tion as follows: attach the seat belt and pull rap-
idly on the strap.
||
SAFETY
48
WARNING
•
Never repair the belt yourself. Repairs
should only be performed by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
•
Any device used to induce slack into the
shoulder belt portion of the three-point
belt system will have a detrimental effect
on the amount of protection available in
the event of a collision.
•
The seat back should not be tilted too far
back. The shoulder belt must be taut in
order to function properly.
•
Do not use any type of child restraint in
the front passenger seat. We recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 42)
•
Seat belt tensioners (p. 50)
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 48)
•
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 51)
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts
Make sure that all passengers have buckled
their seat belts before starting to drive.
Buckling seat belts
1. Pull out the belt slowly and make sure it is
not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
Each seat belt is equipped with a retractor
that will lock up in the following situations:
•
if the belt is pulled out rapidly
•
during braking and acceleration
•
if the vehicle is leaning excessively
•
when driving in turns
•
if the automatic locking retractor/emer-
gency locking retractor (ALR/ELR) is acti-
vated. Each seat belt (except for the driv-
er's) is equipped with an ALR function,
which is designed to keep the seat belt
taut when installing a child restraint. ALR
is activated when the seat belt is pulled
out as far as possible. If this is done, a
sound from the seat belt retractor will be
audible, which is normal. The seat belt can
now only be fed into the retractor, not
pulled out. This function is automatically
disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled
and fully retracted.
2. Buckle the seat belt by pushing the latch
plate into the receptacle.
> A distinct "click" indicates that the belt is
locked into place.
WARNING
Always insert the seat belt latch plate into the
belt buckle on the correct side. Failure to do
so could cause the seat belts and belt buck-
les to malfunction in a collision. There is a risk
of serious injury.
SAFETY
}}
49
3. The height of the seat belts in the front seats
can be adjusted.
Press the button on the seat belt holder and
move the belt up or down.
Position the belt as high as possible without
it chafing against the neck.
The belt should be positioned closely over the shoulder
(against the collarbone, not down over the arm).
4. Tighten the lap section of the seat belt over
the hips by pulling the diagonal section
upward toward the shoulder.
The lap section of the seat belt should be positioned low
on the hips (not against the abdomen).
WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion of
the belt under the arm, behind the back or
otherwise out of position. Such use could
cause injury in the event of an accident. As
seat belts lose much of their strength when
exposed to violent stretching, they should be
replaced after any collision, even if they
appear to be undamaged.
WARNING
Do not use clips or fasten the belts around
hooks or other parts of the interior. This will
prevent the seat belt from fitting properly.
WARNING
Never damage the seat belts and never insert
any foreign objects into the belt buckle. This
may cause the seat belts and belt buckles to
malfunction in a collision. There is a risk of
serious injury.
Unbuckling seat belts
1. Press the red button on the seat belt recep-
tacle and make sure the seat belt retracts
fully into the retractor slot.
2. If it does not fully retract, guide the belt man-
ually into the slot and make sure it does not
hang loose.
||
SAFETY
50
Related information
•
Seat belts (p. 47)
•
Seat belt tensioners (p. 50)
•
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 51)
Seat belt tensioners
The vehicle is equipped with standard and elec-
tric seat belt tensioners that can help tension the
seat belt in a critical situation or collision.
Standard seat belt tensioners
All seat belts are equipped with a standard seat
belt tensioner.
In a collision of sufficiently violent force, the seat
belt tensioners will tension the seat belts in order
to more effectively restrain the occupants.
Electric seat belt tensioners
The driver's and front passenger's seat belts are
equipped with electric seat belt tensioners.
The seat belt tensioners interact and can be acti-
vated in conjunction with the City Safety and
Rear Collision Warning driver support systems. In
critical situations, such as if the vehicle brakes
suddenly, begins to skid or runs off the road (e.g
if the vehicle rolls into a ditch, lifts off the ground
or hits an obstacle in the road), or if there is a risk
of collision, the seat belts can be pulled taut by
the seat belt tensioner's electric motor.
The electric seat belt tensioner helps to position
the occupant more effectively in the seat, which
reduces the risk of the occupant striking the inte-
rior of the passenger compartment and improves
the effect of other safety systems such as the
airbags.
When a critical situation has passed, the seat belt
and the electric seat belt tensioner are reset
automatically. However, they can also be reset
manually.
WARNING
Never attempt to alter or repair the seat belt
on your own. Volvo recommends contacting
an authorized Volvo workshop.
If the seat belt has been exposed to extreme
forces, e.g. in conjunction with a collision, the
entire seat belt must be replaced. Even if the
seat belt appears undamaged, some of its
protective properties may have been lost. Also
replace the seat belt if it is worn or damaged.
The new seat belt must be type approved and
intended for the same seating position as the
replaced seat belt.
Related information
•
Seat belts (p. 47)
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 48)
•
Resetting the electric seat belt tensioners
(p. 51)
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 352)
SAFETY
}}
51
Resetting the electric seat belt
tensioners
The electric seat belt tensioners are designed to
be reset automatically, but if the seat belt
remains taut it can be reset manually.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
2. Unbuckle the seat belt and then rebuckle it.
> The seat belt and the electric seat belt
tensioner will be reset.
WARNING
Never attempt to alter or repair the seat belt
on your own. Volvo recommends contacting
an authorized Volvo workshop.
If the seat belt has been exposed to extreme
forces, e.g. in conjunction with a collision, the
entire seat belt must be replaced. Even if the
seat belt appears undamaged, some of its
protective properties may have been lost. Also
replace the seat belt if it is worn or damaged.
The new seat belt must be type approved and
intended for the same seating position as the
replaced seat belt.
Related information
•
Seat belt tensioners (p. 50)
•
Seat belts (p. 47)
Door and seat belt reminders
This system is intended to remind occupants to
buckle their seat belts and to alert the driver if a
door, hood or other opening (trunk, sunroof,
etc.) is open.
Graphics in the instrument panel
Graphics in the instrument panel with various types of
warnings. The warning colors for the doors/tailgate vary
depending on the vehicle's speed.
The instrument panel graphic shows the seats
where seat belts are buckled and not buckled.
The same graphic also indicates if the hood, tail-
gate or any door is open.
Confirm the graphic by briefly pressing the O
button on the right-side steering wheel keypad.
Seat belt reminder
Reminder light in ceiling console.
The seat belt reminder consists of an audible sig-
nal and a symbol in the instrument panel.
The reminder light varies depending on the vehi-
cle's speed, driving time and distance driven.
A seat belt status graphic in the instrument panel
indicates when the driver's or a passenger's seat
belt is buckled or unbuckled.
Child seats are not included in the seat belt
reminder system.
Front seats
An audible signal and an indicator light remind
unbuckled occupants to fasten their seat belts.
||
SAFETY
52
Rear seat
The rear seat belt reminder has two functions:
•
To indicate which seat belts are buckled in
the rear seats. This will also be displayed in
an instrument panel graphic.
•
To provide audio and visual reminders if any
seat belt in the rear seat is removed while
the vehicle is in motion. The reminder will
stop when the seat belt has been rebuckled.
Door/hood/tailgate and fuel filler door
reminder
If the hood, tailgate, fuel filler door or any door is
not properly closed, this will be indicated by a
graphic in the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle
safely and close the open door, hood, etc.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the
information symbol will illuminate in the
instrument panel.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
above approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the
warning symbol will illuminate in the
instrument panel.
Related information
•
Seat belts (p. 47)
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 48)
Airbags
The vehicle is equipped with airbags and inflat-
able curtains for the driver and passengers.
WARNING
•
If the airbag warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
•
Never attempt to alter or repair any of the
vehicle's safety systems yourself. Incor-
rectly performed repairs to any system
could impair function and lead to serious
injury. All work on these systems should
be performed by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
WARNING
If your vehicle has become water-damaged in
any way (e.g., soaked floor mats/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle), do not
attempt to start the engine. This may cause
airbag deployment, which could result in seri-
ous injury. Volvo recommends towing the
vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo work-
shop.
Before attempting to tow the vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition for at least 10
minutes and disconnect the battery.
2. Follow the instructions for manually over-
riding the shiftlock system.
Deployed airbags
WARNING
If any of the airbags have deployed:
•
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle. Have
it towed to an authorized workshop.
•
If necessary, seek medical attention.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 42)
•
Driver/passenger-side airbags (p. 53)
•
Side airbags (p. 59)
•
Inflatable curtain (p. 60)
SAFETY
}}
53
Driver/passenger-side airbags
As a supplement to the seat belts, the vehicle is
equipped with driver and passenger side front
airbags.
Driver/passenger side front airbags.
In a frontal collision, the airbags help protect the
driver's and passenger's head, face and chest
and the driver's knees and legs.
A collision of a sufficiently violent force will trig-
ger the sensors and one or more airbags will
inflate. The airbag helps cushion the initial impact
of the collision for the passenger. The airbag
deflates when compressed by the collision. A
small amount of powder will also be released
from the airbag. This may appear to be smoke
and is normal. The entire process, from inflation
to deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of
a second.
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on
the circumstances of the accident and
whether or not the seat belt is used. Does not
apply to all belt positions.
In some accident situations, only one (or
none) of the airbags will be deployed. The
sensors monitor the impact of the collision
and react accordingly to deploy one, several
or no airbags.
WARNING
The seat belt and the airbag work together. If
the seat belt is not used or is used incorrectly,
the airbag may not provide the intended pro-
tection in a collision.
To help prevent injury in the event the airbag
is deployed, passengers should sit as upright
as possible, with their feet on the floor and
their backs against the seat backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an authorized
Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly per-
formed repairs to the airbag system could
impair function and lead to serious injury.
The front airbag system
The front airbag system includes gas generators
surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sen-
sors that activate the gas generators, causing the
airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas.
As the movement of the seats' occupants com-
presses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled
at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning.
The belt tensioners minimize slack in the seat
belts and are activated for occupants wearing
their seat belts. The entire process, from inflation
to deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of
a second.
The location of the front airbags is indicated by
SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel
pad and above the glove compartment, and by
decals on both sun visors and on the front and
far right side of the dash.
The driver's side front airbag is folded and
located in the steering wheel hub.
The knee airbag is folded on the underside of
the dashboard on the driver's side. The text
AIRBAG is embossed on the panel.
The passenger's side front airbag is folded
behind a panel located above the glove compart-
ment.
||
SAFETY
54
WARNING
•
The airbags in the vehicle are designed to
be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a replacement
for-the three-point seat belts. For maxi-
mum protection, wear seat belts at all
times. Be aware that no system can pre-
vent all possible injuries that may occur in
an accident.
•
Never drive with your hands on the steer-
ing wheel pad/airbag housing.
•
The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment occurs
very quickly and with considerable force.
During normal deployment and depend-
ing on variables such as seating position,
one may experience abrasions, bruises,
swellings, or other injuries as a result of
deployment of one or both of the airbags.
•
When installing any accessory equipment,
make sure that the front airbag system is
not damaged. Any interference in the sys-
tem could cause malfunction.
Front airbag deployment
•
The front airbags are designed to deploy dur-
ing certain frontal or front-angular collisions,
impacts, or decelerations, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and object
impacted. The airbags may also deploy in
certain non-frontal collisions where rapid
deceleration occurs.
•
The airbag system's sensors, which trigger
the front airbags, are designed to determine
if the collision is powerful enough to activate
the belt tensioners and/or the airbags.
However, not all frontal collisions activate the
front airbags.
•
If the collision involves a nonrigid object (e.g.,
a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed object
at a low speed, the front airbags will not nec-
essarily deploy.
•
Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the
rear or in a rollover situation.
•
The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags
should have deployed or not.
NOTE
•
Deployment of front airbags occurs only
one time during an accident. In a collision
where deployment occurs, the airbags
and seat belt tensioners activate. Some
noise occurs and a small amount of pow-
der is released. The release of the pow-
der may appear as smoke-like matter.
This is a normal characteristic and does
not indicate fire.
•
Volvo's front airbags use special sensors
that are integrated with the front seat
buckles. The point at which the airbag
deploys is determined by whether or not
the seat belt is being used, as well as the
severity of the collision.
•
Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less
severe, but severe enough to present a
clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered
at partial capacity. If the impact is more
severe, the airbags are triggered at full
capacity.
SAFETY
}}
55
WARNING
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that occupants under 140 cm (4 feet
7 inches) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened. See also the Occu-
pant Weight Sensor information.
•
Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair the
steering of your vehicle. Other safety sys-
tems can also be damaged.
•
The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin and
eye irritation in the event of prolonged
exposure.
Should you have questions about any component
in the SRS system, please contact a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo cus-
tomer support:
In the United States
Volvo Car USA, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.com/ca
Airbag decals
Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors
Passenger's side airbag decal
WARNING
•
Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat.
•
Occupants in the front passenger's seat
must never sit on the edge of the seat, sit
leaning toward the instrument panel or
otherwise sit out of position.
•
The occupant's back must be as upright
as comfort allows and be against the seat
back with the seat belt properly fastened.
•
Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the
dash, seat or out of the window.
||
SAFETY
56
WARNING
•
No objects or accessory equipment, e.g.
dashboard covers, may be placed on,
attached to, or installed near the air bag
cover (the area above the glove compart-
ment) or the area affected by airbag
deployment.
•
There should be no loose articles, such
as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dash-
board area.
•
Never try to open the airbag cover on the
steering wheel or the passenger's side
dashboard. This should only be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
•
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle's occupants.
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 52)
•
Occupant weight sensor (p. 56)
Occupant weight sensor
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
designed to meet the regulatory requirements of
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
208 and is designed to disable (will not inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag under certain
conditions.
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light
Disabling the passenger's side front
airbag
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults
and children) shorter than 140 cm (4 feet
7 inches) be seated in the back seat of any vehi-
cle with a front passenger side airbag and be
properly restrained for their size and weight.
The OWS works with sensors that are part of the
front passenger's seat and seat belt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly
seated occupant and determine if the passeng-
er's side front airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or disabled (will not inflate).
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-
senger's side front airbag when:
•
the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, or
has small/medium objects in the front seat,
•
the system determines that an infant is pres-
ent in a rear-facing infant seat that is instal-
led according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions,
•
the system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint
that is installed according to the manufactur-
er's instructions,
•
the system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat,
•
a front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time,
•
a child or a small person occupies the front
passenger's seat.
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to
remind you that the passenger's side front airbag
is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is located in the overhead console,
near the base of the rearview mirror.
SAFETY
}}
57
NOTE
When the ignition is switched on, the OWS
indicator light will illuminate for several sec-
onds while the system performs a self-diag-
nostic test.
However, if a fault is detected in the system:
•
The OWS indicator light will stay on
•
The SRS warning light will come on and stay
on and a text message will be displayed.
WARNING
If a fault in the system is detected and indi-
cated as described, be aware that the pas-
senger's side front airbag will not deploy in
the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS
system and Occupant Weight Sensor should
be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
WARNING
•
Never try to open, remove or repair any
components in the OWS system. This
could cause the system to malfunction.
Maintenance or repairs should only be
carried out by an a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
•
The front passenger's seat should not be
modified in any way. This could reduce
pressure on the seat cushion, which
might interfere with the OWS system's
function.
Passenger's
seat occu-
pancy status
OWS indi-
cator light
status
Passenger's
side front air-
bag status
Seat unoccu-
pied
OWS indi-
cator light
lights up
Passenger's
side front air-
bag disabled
Seat occu-
pied by low
weight occu-
pant/object
A
OWS indi-
cator light
lights up
Passenger's
side front air-
bag disabled
Seat occu-
pied by heavy
occupant/
object
OWS indi-
cator light is
not lit
Passenger's
side front air-
bag enabled
A
Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained
in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume
that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the
child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the
status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child
restraint to the rear seat.
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) the
passenger's side front airbag in the event of a
collision anytime the system senses that a per-
son of adult size is sitting properly in the front
passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front pas-
senger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that the
||
SAFETY
58
person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this
happens:
•
Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the backrest in an upright position.
•
Have the person sit upright in the seat, cen-
tered on the seat cushion, with the person's
legs comfortably extended.
•
Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that per-
son and enable the passenger's frontal air-
bag.
•
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains on even after this, the person
should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
This indicates limitations in OWS classification
capability. It does not indicate OWS malfunction.
Modifications
If you are considering modifying your vehicle in
any way to accommodate a disability, for example
by altering or adapting the driver's or front pas-
senger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please
contact Volvo at:
In the United States
Volvo Car USA, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
In Canada
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
WARNING
•
No objects that add to the total weight on
the seat should be placed on the front
passenger's seat. If a child is seated in
the front passenger's seat with any addi-
tional weight, this extra weight could
cause the OWS system to enable the air-
bag, which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.
•
The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passeng-
er's seat. This could interfere with the
OWS system's function.
•
The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts more
pressure on the passenger than normal.
This could increase the pressure exerted
on the weight sensor by a child, and
could result in the airbag being enabled,
which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.
SAFETY
}}
59
WARNING
•
Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to
follow these instructions could adversely
affect the system's function and result in
serious injury to the occupant of the front
passenger's seat:
•
The full weight of the front seat passen-
ger should always be on the seat cushion.
The passenger should never lift him/
herself off the seat cushion using the
armrest in the door or the center console,
by pressing the feet on the floor, by sit-
ting on the edge of the seat cushion, or
by pressing against the backrest in a way
that reduces pressure on the seat cush-
ion. This could cause OWS to disable the
front, passenger's side airbag.
WARNING
•
Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way that
jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs
between the object and the front seat,
other than as a direct result of the correct
use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)
seat belt.
•
No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could inter-
fere with the OWS system's function.
Related information
•
Driver/passenger-side airbags (p. 53)
Side airbags
The side airbags, on the driver's and passenger
sides, protect the chest and hip in a collision.
The side airbags are located in the front seats'
outer backrest frames and help protect the driver
and front seat passenger.
A collision of a sufficiently violent force will trig-
ger the sensors and one or more side airbags will
inflate. The side airbags inflate between the seat
occupant and the door panel to help cushion the
initial impact of the collision. The airbag deflates
when compressed by the collision. The side air-
bags are normally only deployed on the side of
the vehicle impacted by the collision.
||
SAFETY
60
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an authorized
Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly per-
formed repairs to the side airbag system
could impair function and lead to serious
injury.
WARNING
Do not place any objects in the area between
the outer edges of the seats and the door
panels, as this could impair the function of the
side airbags.
Volvo recommends only using seat covers
approved by Volvo. Other seat covers could
prevent the side airbags from functioning
properly.
WARNING
The side airbag is a supplement to the seat
belt. Always wear your seat belt.
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 52)
Inflatable curtain
The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
helps to prevent the driver and passengers from
striking their heads on the inside of the vehicle
during a collision.
The inflatable curtains are installed along both
sides of the inside of the roof and help protect
occupants in the vehicle's outer seats. IC
AIRBAG is embossed on the panels.
A collision of a sufficiently violent force will trig-
ger the sensors and the inflatable curtain will
inflate.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an authorized
Volvo workshop for repair. Incorrectly per-
formed repairs to the inflatable curtain system
could impair function and lead to serious
injury.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy objects in the
handle in the ceiling. The hooks are only
intended for lightweight garments (not for
hard objects such as umbrellas).
Never screw or mount anything to the vehi-
cle's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could impair the intended protective
properties. Volvo recommends only using
Volvo original parts that are approved for
placement in these areas.
WARNING
If objects are loaded higher than the upper
edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm (4
in.) space between the objects and the win-
dow. Objects placed closer to this could
impede the function of the inflatable curtain
concealed inside the headlining.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seat belt. Always wear your seat belt.
SAFETY
61
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 52)
Safety mode
Safety mode is a feature that is triggered after a
collision if there is potential damage to an impor-
tant function in the vehicle, such as the fuel
lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, the
brake system, etc.
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the
text
Safety mode See Owner's manual may
appear in the instrument panel along with the
warning symbol if the panel is undamaged and
the vehicle's electrical system is intact. The mes-
sage indicates that one or more of the vehicle's
functions may be reduced.
WARNING
Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you
smell fuel fumes when the message
Safety
mode See Owner's manual is displayed in
the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle imme-
diately.
If safety mode has been set, it may be possible to
reset the system in order to start and move the
vehicle a short distance, for example, if it is block-
ing traffic.
WARNING
Never attempt to perform repairs or reset
electrical components on your own after the
vehicle has been in safety mode. This could
result in injury or prevent the vehicle from
functioning properly. Volvo recommends hav-
ing the vehicle inspected and reset to normal
operating status by an authorized Volvo work-
shop after
Safety mode See Owner's
manual has been displayed.
WARNING
When the vehicle is in safety mode, it should
not be towed behind another vehicle. It should
be towed from the site on a tow truck. Volvo
recommends towing the vehicle directly to an
authorized Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 42)
•
Starting and moving the vehicle when it is in
safety mode (p. 62)
•
Recovery (p. 466)
SAFETY
62
Starting and moving the vehicle
when it is in safety mode
If safety mode has been set, it may be possible
to reset the system in order to start and move
the vehicle a short distance, for example, if it is
blocking traffic.
Starting the vehicle when it is in safety
mode
1. Check the vehicle for damage, particularly for
fuel leakage. Make sure you do not detect
any gasoline fumes.
If the damage to the vehicle is minor and
there is no fuel leakage/fumes, you may
attempt to start the engine.
WARNING
Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you
smell fuel fumes when the message
Safety
mode See Owner's manual is displayed in
the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle imme-
diately.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Then try to start the vehicle.
> The vehicle's electrical system will per-
form a system check and then attempt to
reset to normal operating mode.
CAUTION
If the message Safety mode See Owner's
manual is still displayed, the vehicle should
not be driven or towed behind another vehi-
cle. If the vehicle needs to be moved, it must
be towed on a tow truck. Even if no damage
is apparent, there may be hidden damage that
could make the vehicle impossible to control.
Moving the vehicle when it is in safety
mode
1.
If the message
Normal mode The vehicle
is now in normal mode is displayed after
attempting to start the engine, the vehicle
may be moved carefully from its present
position if, for example, it is blocking traffic.
2. Do not move the vehicle farther than abso-
lutely necessary.
WARNING
When the vehicle is in safety mode, it should
not be towed behind another vehicle. It should
be towed from the site on a tow truck. Volvo
recommends towing the vehicle directly to an
authorized Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Safety mode (p. 61)
•
Starting the vehicle (p. 414)
•
Recovery (p. 466)
SAFETY
}}
63
Child safety
Children should always be seated safely when
traveling in the vehicle.
General information
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint
systems for all occupants including children.
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
child should always be properly restrained in a
vehicle.
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/
LATCH attachments, which make it more conven-
ient to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are designed
to be secured in the vehicle by lap belts or the
lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child
restraint systems can help protect children in
vehicles in the event of an accident only if they
are used properly. However, children could be
endangered in a crash if the child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to fol-
low the installation instructions for your child
restraint can result in your child striking the vehi-
cle's interior in a sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
substitute for a child restraint system. In an acci-
dent, a child held in a person's arms can be
crushed between the vehicle's interior and an
unrestrained person. The child could also be
injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected
from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or
impact. The same can also happen if the infant or
child rides unrestrained on the seat. Other occu-
pants should also be properly restrained to help
reduce the chance of injuring or increasing the
injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation govern-
ing how and where children should be carried in
a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your
state or province. Recent accident statistics have
shown that children are safer in rear seating
positions than front seating positions when prop-
erly restrained. A child restraint system can help
protect a child in a vehicle. Here's what to look
for when selecting a child restraint system:
It should have a label certifying that it meets
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-
ards (FMVSS 213) - or in Canada, CMVSS 213.
Make sure the child restraint system is approved
for the child's height, weight and development -
the label required by the standard or regulation,
or instructions for infant restraints, typically pro-
vide this information.
In using any child restraint system, we urge you
to carefully look over the instructions that are
provided with the restraint. Be sure you under-
stand them and can use the device properly and
safely in this vehicle. A misused child restraint
system can result in increased injuries for both
the infant or child and other occupants in the
vehicle.
When a child has outgrown the child safety seat,
you should use the rear seat with the standard
seat belt fastened. The best way to help protect
the child here is to place the child on a cushion
so that the seat belt is properly located on the
hips. Legislation in your state or province may
mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in
combination with the seat belt, depending on the
child's age and/or size. Please check local regu-
lations.
A specially designed and tested booster cushion
and backrest can be obtained from your Volvo
retailer. See also the article "Integrated booster
cushion."
||
SAFETY
64
WARNING
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children under 140 cm (4 feet
7 inches) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened.
•
On hot days, the temperature in the vehi-
cle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure
to these high temperatures for even a
short period of time can cause heat-rela-
ted injury or death. Small children are par-
ticularly at risk. Never leave children unat-
tended in a vehicle.
Child seats should always be registered.
Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit in
the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite simple really.
A front airbag is a very powerful device designed,
by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
of inflation, a child should never be placed in the
front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or
strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo has been
an innovator in the field of safety since it was
founded. And we have no intention of resting on
our laurels. But we need your help. Please
remember to put your children in the back seat,
and buckle them up.
WARNING
A child restraint should never be reused if:
•
The vehicle has been involved in a colli-
sion, no matter how minor
•
Its history is unknown
•
It is older than the manufacturer's expira-
tion date
Volvo has some very specific
recommendations
•
Always wear your seat belt.
•
Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a three-point
seat belt can help reduce serious injuries
during certain types of accidents. Volvo rec-
ommends that you do not disconnect the air-
bag system in your vehicle.
•
Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in
the vehicle be properly restrained.
•
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 140 cm
(4 feet 7 inches) be seated in the rear seat
of any vehicle with a front passenger side air-
bag.
•
Drive safely!
Related information
•
Safety (p. 42)
•
Child restraints (p. 65)
•
Activating and deactivating child safety locks
(p. 262)
SAFETY
}}
65
Child restraints
Suitable child restraints should always be used
when children travel in the vehicle.
Child restraint systems
Infant seat
There are three main types of child restraint sys-
tems: infant seats, convertible seats and booster
cushions. They are classified according to the
child's age and size.
The child restraint should be secured using a
three-point seat belt, ISOFIX/LATCH anchors or
top tether anchors.
Convertible seat
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front
passenger seat of any vehicle with a front
passenger airbag - not even if the "Passenger
airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is
illuminated. If the severity of an accident were
to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead
to serious injury or death to a child seated in
this position.
Booster cushion
WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufactur-
er's instructions for detailed information on
securing the restraint.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
66
WARNING
•
When not in use, keep the child restraint
system secured or remove it from the
passenger compartment to help prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
•
A small child's head represents a consid-
erable part of its total weight and its neck
is still very weak. Volvo recommends that
children up to age 4 travel, properly
restrained, facing rearward. In addition,
Volvo recommends that children should
ride rearward facing, properly restrained,
as long as possible.
Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
ELR)
To make child seat installation easier, each seat
belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with
a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt
taut.
When attaching the seat belt to a child seat:
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat accord-
ing to the child seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle
(lock) in the usual way.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around
the child seat.
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be audi-
ble at this time and is normal. The belt will now
be locked in place. This function is automatically
disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the
belt is fully retracted.
WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child booster
cushions/backrests in the front passenger's
seat. We also recommend that children who
have outgrown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt properly fastened.
Child restraint registration and recalls
Child restraints could be recalled for safety rea-
sons. You must register your child restraint to be
reached in a recall. To stay informed about child
safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return
the registration card that comes with new child
restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily availa-
ble in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall infor-
mation in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's
Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393 or go to
http://www-odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/
recalls/register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada,
visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/
menu.htm.
Related information
•
Child safety (p. 63)
•
Infant seats (p. 67)
•
Convertible seats (p. 69)
•
Booster cushions (p. 71)
•
Integrated booster cushion* (p. 75)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 72)
•
Lower child seat attachment points (p. 73)
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 74)
SAFETY
}}
67
Infant seats
Suitable child restraints should always be used
when children (depending on their age/size) are
seated in the vehicle.
Securing an infant seat with a seat belt
Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's
seat
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the child restraint manufactur-
er's instructions.
Route the seat belt through the infant seat.
WARNING
•
An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
•
The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front
passenger seat of any vehicle with a front
passenger airbag - not even if the "Passenger
airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is
illuminated. If the severity of an accident were
to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead
to serious injury or death to a child seated in
this position.
3.
Fasten the seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
||
SAFETY
68
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out
as far as possible to activate the belt's auto-
matic locking function.
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the
seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from
the seat belt retractor's automatic locking
function will be audible at this time and is
normal. The seat belt should now be locked
in place.
Check that the infant seat is properly secured.
6. Press and pull the infant seat along the
direction of the seat belt to check that it is
properly held in place by the seat belt.
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any direc-
tion along the seat belt path.
The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling
the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
Related information
•
Child restraints (p. 65)
•
Convertible seats (p. 69)
•
Booster cushions (p. 71)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 72)
•
Lower child seat attachment points (p. 73)
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 74)
SAFETY
}}
69
Convertible seats
Suitable child restraints should always be used
when children (depending on their age/size) are
seated in the vehicle.
Securing a convertible seat with a seat
belt
Do not place the convertible seat in the front passeng-
er's seat.
Convertible seats can be used in either a forward
or rearward-facing position, depending on the
age and size of the child.
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat.
WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suitable
for the child's age and size. See the converti-
ble seat manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
WARNING
•
A small child's head represents a consider-
able part of its total weight and its neck is
still very weak. Volvo recommends that
children up to age 4 travel, properly
restrained, facing rearward. In addition,
Volvo recommends that children should
ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as
long as possible.
•
Convertible child seats should be installed
in the rear seat only.
•
A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat
unless there is adequate space for safe
installation.
2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat
according to the child restraint manufactur-
er's instructions.
||
SAFETY
70
Fasten the seat belt.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out
as far as possible to activate the belt's auto-
matic locking function.
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, let
the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound
from the seat belt retractor's automatic lock-
ing function will be audible at this time and is
normal. The seat belt should now be locked
in place.
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt.
6. Push and pull the convertible seat along the
seat belt path to ensure that it is held
securely in place by the seat belt.
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any direc-
tion along the seat belt path.
The convertible seat can be removed by unbuck-
ling the seat belt and letting it retract completely.
Ensure that the convertible seat is securely in place.
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the front
passenger seat of any vehicle with a front
passenger airbag - not even if the "Passenger
airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is
illuminated. If the severity of an accident were
to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead
to serious injury or death to a child seated in
this position.
SAFETY
}}
71
Related information
•
Child restraints (p. 65)
•
Infant seats (p. 67)
•
Booster cushions (p. 71)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 72)
•
Lower child seat attachment points (p. 73)
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 74)
Booster cushions
Suitable child restraints should always be used
when children (depending on their age/size) are
seated in the vehicle.
Securing a booster cushion
Position the child correctly on the booster cushion.
Booster cushions are recommended for children
who have outgrown convertible seats.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
2. With the child properly seated on the booster
cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the
cushion according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
Positioning the seat belt.
4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
fits snugly around the child.
WARNING
•
The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.
•
The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across the
chest and shoulder.
•
The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the arm.
||
SAFETY
72
Related information
•
Child restraints (p. 65)
•
Convertible seats (p. 69)
•
Infant seats (p. 67)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 72)
•
Lower child seat attachment points (p. 73)
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 74)
Top tether anchors
Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top
tether anchorages for all three seating positions
in the rear seat. They are located on the rear
side of the backrests.
Child restraint anchorages
Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of the
rear seat backrests. There is no symbol for the center
anchor position.
Securing a child seat
1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
2. Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and attach it to the anchor.
3. Attach the strap for the lower tether anchors
in the lower ISOFIX/LATCH attachment
points. If the child restraint is not equipped
with straps for the lower tether anchors, or if
the child restraint is used on the center seat-
ing position, follow the instructions for
attaching a child restraint using the auto-
matic locking seat belt.
4. Firmly tension all straps.
Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions for information on securing the child
seat.
NOTE
If the vehicle is equipped with a cargo com-
partment cover, this must be removed before
a child seat can be attached in the tether
anchors.
WARNING
•
Always refer to the recommendations
made by the child restraint manufacturer.
•
Volvo recommends that the top tether
anchors be used when installing a for-
ward-facing child restraint.
•
Never route a top tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. The strap
should be routed beneath the head
restraint.
SAFETY
73
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses. The ancho-
rages are not able to withstand excessive
forces on them in the event of collision if
full harness seat belts or adult seat belts
are installed to them. An adult who uses a
belt anchored in a child restraint anchor-
age runs a great risk of suffering severe
injuries should a collision occur.
•
Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors or
interfere with the proper use of the top
tether strap.
Related information
•
Child restraints (p. 65)
•
Lower child seat attachment points (p. 73)
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 74)
Lower child seat attachment points
The rear seats are equipped with lower child
seat attachment points.
The lower child seat attachment points are
intended for use with certain rear-facing child
restraints.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when attaching a child seat to the
lower child seat attachment points.
Location of child seat attachment
points
Location of child seat attachment points in the rear seat.
The child seat attachment points in the rear seat
are located on the rear section of the front seat
floor rails.
Related information
•
Child restraints (p. 65)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 72)
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 74)
SAFETY
74
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped
child seats are located in the rear, outboard
seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.
Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
seat anchors
Location of the ISOFIX/LATCH anchors
Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the
ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To
access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion
and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow your
child seat manufacturer's installation instructions,
and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and
top tethers whenever possible.
To access the anchors
1. Put the child restraint in position.
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down
the seat cushion and locate the anchors by
feel.
3. Fasten the attachment on the child
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/LATCH
lower anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to
FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to
the child restraint system's manual for weight
and size ratings.
NOTE
•
The rear center seat is not equipped with
ISOFIX/LATCH lower tether anchors. If a
child restraint is used in this seat, attach
the restraint's upper anchor strap (if
equipped with these) to the top tether
anchor point for this strap and secure the
child restraint with the vehicle's center
seat belt.
•
Always follow your child seat manufactur-
er's installation instructions, and use both
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and top
tethers whenever possible.
Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/LATCH
lower anchors.
WARNING
•
Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-
rectly to the anchor (see the illustration).
If the attachment is not correctly fas-
tened, the child restraint may not be
properly secured in the event of a colli-
sion.
•
The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint
anchors are only intended for use with
child seats positioned in the outboard
seating positions. These anchors are not
certified for use with any child restraint
that is positioned in the center seating
position. When securing a child restraint
in the center seating position, use only
the vehicle's center seat belt.
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
75
Related information
•
Child restraints (p. 65)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 72)
•
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 74)
Integrated booster cushion*
1
The integrated booster cushions in the rear
seat's outboard seating positions help ensure
that children can sit comfortably and safely.
The integrated booster cushion has been spe-
cially designed to help safeguard children in the
rear seat when used with the vehicle's seat belts.
The integrated booster cushion in the rear seat
can be folded up to two positions, depending on
the child's height.
If using a booster cushion does not result in
proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then the
child should be placed in a properly secured child
restraint. The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the arm.
Correct seating position: the seat belt is positioned
across the collarbone.
Before driving, make sure that:
•
the booster cushion is raised to the correct
position for the child's weight
•
the booster cushion is locked into position
•
the seat belt is taut, in contact with the
child's body and not twisted
•
the seat belt is not positioned across the
child's throat or below the shoulder
•
the lap section of the seat belt is placed low
over the child's hips to provide the best pro-
tection.
US models
Stage 1 Stage 2
Weight 50 - 80 lbs
22 - 36 kg
33 - 55 lbs
15 - 25 kg
Length 45 - 55 in.
115 - 140 cm
37 - 47 in.
95 - 120 cm
1
Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
76
Canadian models
Stage 1 Stage 2
Weight 22 - 36 kg
50 - 80 lbs
18 - 25 kg
40 - 55 lbs
Length 115 - 140 cm
45 - 55 in.
102 - 120 cm
40 - 47 in.
18 kg (40 lbs) is the minimum weight require-
ment for a child using booster seats according to
the Canadian regulation CMVSS 213.4.
WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can
occur
•
Follow all instructions on this
child restraint and in the vehicle's
owner's manual.
•
Make sure the booster cushion is
securely locked before the child
is seated.
•
Use this booster cushion only with chil-
dren whose height and weight are within
the permitted limits shown in the table.
•
Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder
belt system when restraining the child in
this booster cushion.
•
In the event of a collision while the inte-
grated booster cushion was occupied, the
entire booster cushion and seat belt must
be replaced. The booster cushion should
also be replaced if it is badly worn or
damaged in any way. This work should be
performed by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.
Related information
•
Child restraints (p. 65)
•
Folding up the integrated booster cushion*
(p. 77)
•
Folding down the integrated booster cush-
ion* (p. 78)
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
77
Folding up the integrated booster
cushion*
When the integrated booster cushion is used, it
must be folded up.
Lower position:
Pull the handle forward and upward to
release the booster cushion.
Press the booster cushion rearward to lock it
into position.
Upper position (from the lower position):
Press the button to release the booster
cushion.
Lift the front edge of the booster cushion
and press it rearward toward the backrest to
lock it into position.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
78
WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can
occur
•
Follow all instructions on this
child restraint and in the vehicle's
owner's manual.
•
Make sure the booster cushion is
securely locked before the child
is seated.
•
Use this booster cushion only with chil-
dren whose height and weight are within
the permitted limits shown in the table.
•
Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder
belt system when restraining the child in
this booster cushion.
•
In the event of a collision while the inte-
grated booster cushion was occupied, the
entire booster cushion and seat belt must
be replaced. The booster cushion should
also be replaced if it is badly worn or
damaged in any way. This work should be
performed by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.
NOTE
The integrated booster cushion cannot be
moved directly from the upper position to the
lower position. From the upper position, the
booster cushion must first be folded down
completely into the rear seat and then raised
to the lower position.
Related information
•
Integrated booster cushion* (p. 75)
•
Folding down the integrated booster cush-
ion* (p. 78)
Folding down the integrated
booster cushion*
When the integrated booster cushion in the rear
seat is not in use, it should be stowed (folded
down).
NOTE
The integrated booster cushion cannot be
moved directly from the upper position to the
lower position. From the upper position, the
booster cushion must first be folded down
completely into the rear seat and then raised
to the lower position.
Pull the handle forward to release the
booster cushion.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
79
Press down on the center of the booster
cushion to lock it into position.
CAUTION
Make sure that there are no objects (e.g. toys)
on the seat under the integrated booster
cushion before folding it down.
NOTE
The integrated booster cushion must be
stowed (folded down) before folding down
the seat backrest.
WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can
occur
•
Follow all instructions on this
child restraint and in the vehicle's
owner's manual.
•
Make sure the booster cushion is
securely locked before the child
is seated.
•
Use this booster cushion only with chil-
dren whose height and weight are within
the permitted limits shown in the table.
•
Use only the vehicle's lap and shoulder
belt system when restraining the child in
this booster cushion.
•
In the event of a collision while the inte-
grated booster cushion was occupied, the
entire booster cushion and seat belt must
be replaced. The booster cushion should
also be replaced if it is badly worn or
damaged in any way. This work should be
performed by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.
Related information
•
Integrated booster cushion* (p. 75)
•
Folding up the integrated booster cushion*
(p. 77)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
82
Instruments and controls in left-
hand drive vehicles
The overviews show the location of the vehicle's
displays and controls.
Steering wheel and dashboard
Parking lights, daytime running lights, low
beams, high beams, turn signals, front fog
lights/cornering illumination*, rear fog light,
trip computer reset
Steering wheel paddles for manual shifting*
Head-up display*
Instrument panel
Wipers and washers, rain sensor*
Right-side steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel adjustment
Horn
Left-side steering wheel keypad
Hood open
Display lighting, tailgate unlock/open*/
close*, halogen headlight height adjustment
Ceiling console
Front reading lights and courtesy lighting
Panoramic roof*
Ceiling console display ON CALL button
HomeLink
®
*
Center and tunnel console
Center display
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media
Gear selector
Start knob
Drive modes*
Parking brake
Auto-hold brakes
Driver's door
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
83
Memory for power front seat settings*, door
mirrors and head-up display*
Central locking
Power windows, door mirrors, electric child
safety locks*
Controls for front seat
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 201)
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
•
Starting the vehicle (p. 414)
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
•
Transmission (p. 427)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
84
Instrument panel
The instrument panel displays information rela-
ted to the vehicle and driving.
The instrument panel contains gauges, indicators
and monitoring and warning symbols. What is
shown in the instrument panel varies depending
on the equipment, settings and functions cur-
rently active.
The instrument panel is activated as soon as a
door is opened, i.e. in ignition mode 0. The panel
will power down after a short period of time if it is
not used. To reactivate it, do one of the following:
•
Depress the brake pedal.
•
Activate ignition mode I.
•
Open one of the doors.
The instrument panel is available in two versions:
12"* and 8".
WARNING
If the instrument panel turns off, does not
activate when the ignition is switched on, or
part/all of the panel cannot be read, do not
drive the vehicle. Consult a workshop immedi-
ately. Volvo recommends an authorized Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
If the instrument panel is not functioning
properly, information about brakes, airbags or
other safety-related systems may not be dis-
played. The driver will then not be able to
check the status of the vehicle systems or
receive relevant warnings and information.
Instrument panel 12"*
Location in the instrument panel:
Left side In the center Right side
Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer/ECO gauge
A
Trip odometer Ambient temperature sensor Gear indicator
Odometer
B
Clock Drive Mode
Cruise control/speed limiter information Message (also graphics in some cases) Fuel gauge
Road sign information*
Door and seat belt status Start/Stop function's status
– Media player Distance to empty tank
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
85
Left side In the center Right side
– Navigation system map Current fuel consumption
– Phone App menu (activated using steering wheel keypad)
– Voice Control –
–
Compass
A
–
A
Depends on selected drive mode.
B
Total distance.
Instrument panel 8"
Location in the instrument panel:
Left side In the center Right side
Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player
Drive Mode
Road sign information*
Phone
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
86
Left side In the center Right side
Gear indicator Cruise control/speed limiter information Navigation information
Tachometer/ECO gauge
A
Door and seat belt status Clock
Distance to empty tank Start/Stopp function's status App menu (activated using steering wheel keypad)
Ambient temperature sensor – Current fuel consumption
Indicator and warning symbols –
Odometer
B
– – Trip odometer
– – Indicator and warning symbols
– – Voice Control
– – Engine temperature gauge
– – Message (also graphics in some cases)
– –
Compass
A
A
Depends on selected drive mode.
B
Total distance.
Dynamic symbol
Dynamic symbol in basic mode.
In the center of the instrument panel is a dynamic
symbol that changes appearance according to
the type of message displayed. The severity of
the control or warning symbol is indicated by an
amber or red marking around the symbol. An ani-
mation may be used to change the symbol into a
larger image in order to graphically depict the
location of a problem or to clarify information.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
87
Example with indicator symbol.
Related information
•
Instrument panel settings (p. 88)
•
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 97)
•
Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 95)
•
Trip computer (p. 89)
•
Messages in the instrument panel (p. 106)
•
Handling the App menu in the instrument
panel (p. 105)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
88
Instrument panel settings
Display settings for the instrument panel can be
set via the instrument panel's app menu and via
the center display's Settings menu.
Settings via instrument panel's app
menu
The illustration is generic – layout may vary.
The app menu will open and can be controlled
using the right-side steering wheel keypad.
The app menu can be used to set what informa-
tion will be displayed in the instrument panel:
•
trip computer
•
media player
•
phone
•
navigation system.
Settings via center display
Selecting type of information
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
My Car Displays Driver Display
Information
.
3. Select a background:
•
Show no information in the
background
•
Show information for current playing
media
•
Show navigation even if no route is
set
1
.
Select theme
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
My Car Displays Display
Themes
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the instru-
ment panel:
•
Glass
•
Minimalistic
•
Performance
•
Chrome Rings.
Select language
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
System System Languages and
Units
System Language to select lan-
guage.
> A change made here will affect the lan-
guage in all displays.
The settings are personal and saved automati-
cally in the active driver profile.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
•
Handling the App menu in the instrument
panel (p. 105)
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
1
The map is only shown with the 12" instrument panel*. With the 8" instrument panel, only guidance is shown.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
89
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge in the instrument panel shows
the fuel level in the tank.
Fuel gauge in 12" instrument panel:
The beige area in the fuel gauge indicates the
amount of fuel left in the tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is time to refuel,
the fuel pump symbol will illuminate with an
amber-colored light. The trip computer also indi-
cates the approximate distance driven on the fuel
remaining in the tank.
Fuel gauge in 8" instrument panel:
The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the amount of
fuel left in the tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is time to refuel,
the fuel pump symbol will illuminate with an
amber-colored light. The trip computer also indi-
cates the approximate distance driven on the fuel
remaining in the tank. When the fuel level is criti-
cally low, only an amber bar will be displayed.
Refuel as soon as possible.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
•
Refueling (p. 450)
•
Fuel tank volume (p. 658)
Trip computer
The vehicle's trip computer registers data while
driving such as mileage, fuel consumption and
average speed.
To help promote fuel-efficient driving, data is
recorded on both current and average fuel con-
sumption. Data from the trip computer can be
displayed in the instrument panel.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
90
12" instrument panel*.
8-inch instrument panel.
The trip computer includes the following gauges:
•
Trip odometer
•
Odometer
•
Current fuel consumption
•
Distance to empty tank
•
Tourist - alternative speedometer
Unit standards for distance, speed, etc. can be
changed via system settings in the center display.
Trip odometer
There are two trip odometers: TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto-
matically if the vehicle is not used for four hours.
During a drive, the trip odometer registers data
on:
•
Mileage
•
Driving time
•
Average speed
•
Average fuel consumption
The readings since the trip odometer's last reset
are displayed.
Odometer
The odometer records the vehicle's total mileage.
This reading cannot be reset.
Current fuel consumption
This gauge shows the vehicle's fuel consumption
at that moment. The reading is updated about
once a second.
Distance to empty tank
The trip computer calculates the distance that
can be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank.
This calculation is based on average fuel con-
sumption during the last 30 km (20 miles) and
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the gauge displays "----", there is not
enough fuel remaining to calculate the remaining
mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
This may vary if your driving style changes.
An economical driving style will generally
increase how far you can drive on a certain
amount of fuel.
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas-
ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs
are shown in a different measurement unit than
the one shown in the vehicle's gauges.
When used, the digital speed is displayed in the
opposite unit to that shown in the analog speed-
ometer. If mph is used in the analog speedome-
ter, the equivalent speed in km/h will be shown
in the digital speedometer.
Related information
•
Displaying trip data in the instrument panel
(p. 91)
•
Resetting the trip odometer (p. 92)
•
Displaying trip statistics in the center display
(p. 92)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
91
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
•
Changing system units of measurement
(p. 134)
Displaying trip data in the
instrument panel
Data recorded and calculated by the trip com-
puter can be displayed on the instrument panel.
This data is stored in a trip computer app. You
can choose which information the instrument
panel will display in the app menu.
Open and navigate in the app menu
2
using the right-
hand steering wheel keypad.
App menu
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
1. Open the app menu in the instrument panel
by pressing (1).
(The App menu cannot be opened while
there is an unacknowledged message in the
instrument panel. The message must be con-
firmed before the App menu can be opened.)
2. Navigate to the trip computer app by moving
left or right using (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured
values for trip odometer TM. The next four
menu rows show measured values for trip
odometer TA. Scroll up or down in the list
using (3).
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to choose
which information to show in the instrument
panel:
•
Distance to empty tank
•
Odometer
•
Mileage for trip odometer TM, TA or no
display of mileage
•
Current fuel consumption, average fuel
consumption for TM or TA, or no display
of fuel consumption
•
Tourist (alternative speedometer).
Select or clear a selection using the O but-
ton (4). The change will apply immediately.
2
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
92
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 89)
•
Resetting the trip odometer (p. 92)
Resetting the trip odometer
Resetting the trip odometer using the left-side
steering wheel lever.
–
Reset all information in trip odometer TM (i.e.
mileage, average fuel consumption, average
speed and driving time) by pressing and
holding the RESET button on the left-hand
steering wheel lever.
Tapping the RESET button only resets the
distance driven.
The TA trip odometer can not be manually reset.
It resets automatically if the vehicle is not used
for four hours or more.
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 89)
Displaying trip statistics in the
center display
Trip computer statistics can be displayed graphi-
cally in the center display, providing an overview
that facilitates more fuel-efficient driving.
Open the Driver performance
app in the App view to display
trip statistics.
Each bar in the graph repre-
sents a driving distance of 1
kilometers, 10 kilometers or
100 kilometers (or miles). The bars are added
from the right as you drive. The bar at the far right
shows the data for the current trip.
Average fuel consumption and total driving time
are calculated from the most recent reset of the
trip statistics.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
93
Trip computer statistics
3
.
Related information
•
Trip statistics settings (p. 93)
•
Trip computer (p. 89)
Trip statistics settings
Trip statistics settings can be reset or adjusted.
1.
Open the
Driver performance app in the
App view to display trip statistics.
2.
Tap
Preferences to
•
change the graph scale. Select 1, 10 or
100 km/miles for the bar.
•
reset data after each trip. Performed when
the vehicle remains stationary for more
than 4 hours.
•
reset data for current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consump-
tion, and total driving time are always reset
simultaneously.
Unit standards for distance, speed, etc. can be
changed via system settings in the center display.
Related information
•
Displaying trip statistics in the center display
(p. 92)
•
Trip computer (p. 89)
•
Resetting the trip odometer (p. 92)
3
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
94
Date and time
The clock is displayed in both the instrument
panel and the center display.
Location of clock
Location of clock in 12" and 8" instrument panels.
In the center display, the clock is located at the
top right of the status bar.
Certain messages and other information may
obscure the clock in the instrument panel.
Time and date settings
–
Select Settings System Date and
Time
in the center display's Top view to
change settings for time and date format.
Adjust the time and date by tapping the up or
down arrows on the touchscreen.
Automatic time for vehicles with GPS
When the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system,
Auto Time is also available. The time
zone will then be automatically set to the vehi-
cle's location. In some navigation systems, the
current location must also be set to determine
the correct time zone. If Auto Time is not
selected, the time and date can be adjusted
using the up and down arrows on the
touchscreen.
Daylight savings time
In some countries, an automatic change to day-
light savings time can be selected by activating
Auto. For other countries, daylight savings time
can be changed by selecting On or Off.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
Ambient temperature sensor
The ambient temperature is shown in the instru-
ment panel.
The sensor detects the temperature outside the
vehicle.
Location of the ambient temperature sensor in 12" and
8" instrument panels.
If the vehicle has been stationary, the sensor
reading may be higher than the actual tempera-
ture.
When the ambient temperature is
between –5 °C and +2 °C (23 °F and
36 °F), a snowflake symbol will be dis-
played in the instrument panel as a
warning for possible slippery conditions.
The snowflake symbol is also temporarily lit in the
head-up display if the vehicle is equipped with
one.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
95
Change the measurement standard for the tem-
perature sensor etc. via system settings in the
center display's Top view.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
•
Changing system units of measurement
(p. 134)
Indicator symbols in the instrument
panel
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func-
tion has been activated, that a system is running,
or that a fault or error may have occurred.
Symbol Meaning
Information, see the message in
the display
The information symbol illuminates
and a message is displayed in the
instrument panel if one of the vehi-
cle's systems requires the driver's
attention. The information symbol
may also illuminate in combination
with other symbols.
A
B
Fault in brake system
This symbol illuminates if there is a
problem with the parking brake.
Symbol Meaning
A
B
Fault in ABS system
If this symbol is illuminated, the
ABS system is malfunctioning. The
vehicle's regular brakes will still
work, but without the ABS function.
A
B
Auto-brake on
This symbol illuminates when the
function is activated and the brakes
or parking brakes are being used.
The brakes hold the vehicle at a
standstill after it has stopped.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
96
Symbol Meaning
Tire pressure system
This symbol illuminates to indicate
low tire pressure. If there is a fault
in the tire pressure system, the
symbol will first flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute and then glow
steadily. This may occur if the sys-
tem cannot detect or alert the
driver of low tire pressure as
intended.
Emission control system
If this symbol illuminates after star-
ting the engine, it could indicate a
fault in the vehicle's emission con-
trol system. Have the vehicle
checked by a workshop. Volvo rec-
ommends contacting an authorized
Volvo workshop.
Left/right turn signals
The symbol will flash when the turn
signals are in use.
Symbol Meaning
Parking lights
This symbol illuminates when the
parking lights are on.
Fault in headlight system
This symbol illuminates if a fault
has been detected in the ABL
(Active Bending Lights) function or
another fault in the headlight sys-
tem.
Active high beams on
This symbol lights up in blue when
the active high beams are on.
Active high beams off
This symbol lights up in white when
the active high beams are off.
High beams on
This symbol illuminates when the
high beams are on or flashed.
Active high beams on
This symbol lights up in blue when
the active high beams are on. Park-
ing lights are on.
Symbol Meaning
Active high beams off
This symbol lights up in white when
the active high beams are off.
Parking lights are on.
High beams on
This symbol illuminates when the
high beams and parking lights are
on.
Front fog lights on
This symbol illuminates when the
front fog lights are on.
Rear fog light on
This symbol illuminates when the
rear fog light is on.
Rain sensor on
This symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.
Preconditioning on
This symbol illuminates when the
engine block/passenger compart-
ment heater or air conditioning are
preconditioning the vehicle.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
97
Symbol Meaning
Stability system
This symbol flashes when the sta-
bility system is actively working to
stabilize the vehicle. If the symbol
glows steadily, there is a fault in
the system.
Stability system, Sport mode
This symbol illuminates when Sport
mode is activated. Sport mode
offers a more active driving experi-
ence. If the system detects that
accelerator pedal, steering wheel
and cornering movements are
more active than in normal driving,
it allows a certain level of con-
trolled lateral movement of the rear
wheels before intervening and sta-
bilizing the vehicle.
Symbol Meaning
Lane Keeping Aid
White symbol: Lane Keeping Aid is
on and lane marker lines are
detected.
Gray symbol: Lane Keeping Aid is
on but no lane marker lines are
detected.
Amber symbol: Lane Keeping Aid
is alerting/intervening.
Lane Keeping Aid and rain sen-
sor
White symbol: Lane Keeping Aid is
on and lane marker lines are
detected. The rain sensor is on.
Gray symbol: Lane Keeping Aid is
on but no lane marker lines are
detected. The rain sensor is on.
A
Canadian models.
B
US models.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
•
Warning symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 97)
Warning symbols in the instrument
panel
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a serious
fault or error has occurred.
Symbol Meaning
WARNING
The red warning symbol illuminates
to indicate that a fault has been
detected that could affect safety
and/or driveability. An explanatory
message will be simultaneously
displayed in the instrument panel.
The warning symbol may also illu-
minate in combination with other
symbols.
Seat belt reminder
This symbol will glow steadily or
flash if the driver or front seat pas-
senger has not fastened their seat
belt or if anyone in the rear seat
has removed their seat belt.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
98
Symbol Meaning
Airbags
If this symbol remains illuminated
or comes on while driving, a fault
has been detected in one of the
vehicle's safety systems. Read the
message in the instrument panel.
Volvo recommends contacting an
authorized Volvo workshop.
A
B
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low. Contact
your nearest authorized workshop
to have the brake fluid level
checked and adjusted.
A
B
Parking brake on
This symbol glows steadily when
the parking brake is applied.
A flashing symbol indicates that a
fault has occurred. Read the mes-
sage in the instrument panel.
Symbol Meaning
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates while driv-
ing, the engine oil level is too low.
Stop the engine immediately and
check the engine oil level. Add oil if
necessary. If the symbol illuminates
and the oil level is normal, contact
a workshop. Volvo recommends
contacting an authorized Volvo
workshop.
Generator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driv-
ing if a fault is detected in the elec-
trical system. Contact a workshop.
Volvo recommends contacting an
authorized Volvo workshop.
Collision risk
City Safety warns the driver if there
is a risk of a collision with another
vehicle, pedestrian, cyclist or large
animal.
A
Canadian models.
B
US models.
Related information
•
Indicator symbols in the instrument panel
(p. 95)
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
Instrument panel licenses
A license is an agreement on the right to con-
duct a certain activity or the right to use some-
one else's right according to terms and condi-
tions specified in the agreement. The following
text is Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer
or developer.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
99
Boost Software License 1.0
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person or organization obtaining a copy of
the software and accompanying documentation
covered by this license (the "Software") to use,
reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and
transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative
works of the Software, and to permit third-parties
to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all
subject to the following: The copyright notices in
the Software and this entire statement, including
the above license grant, this restriction and the
following disclaimer, must be included in all
copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all
derivative works of the Software, unless such
copies or derivative works are solely in the form
of machine-executable object code generated by
a source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features
or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
100
BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derive from this
software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the
software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as
representing official policies, either expressed or
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
101
FreeType Project License
1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction The FreeType Project is
distributed in several archive packages; some
of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine, various tools and
contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project. This license applies to all
files found in such packages, and which do
not fall under their own explicit license. The
license affects thus the FreeType font
engine, the test programs, documentation
and makefiles, at the very least. This license
was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which
all encourage inclusion and use of free
software in commercial and freeware
products alike. As a consequence, its main
points are that: o We don't promise that this
software works. However, we are be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
distribution) o You can use this software for
whatever you want, in parts or full form,
without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote
this software. If you use it, or only parts of it,
in a program, you must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that
you've used the FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this software, with or without
modifications, in commercial products,
provided that all warranty or liability claims
are assumed by the product vendor. Legal
Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license,
the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they
named as alpha, beta or final release. `You'
refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where `using' is a generic term
including compiling the project's source code
as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'. This program is referred to as `a
program using the FreeType engine'. This
license applies to all files distributed in the
original FreeType archive, including all source
code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
particular file is covered by this license, you
must contact us to verify this. The FreeType
project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below. 1. No Warranty THE
FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF
THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not
signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType project
is copyrighted material, only this license, or
another one contracted with the authors,
grants you the right to use, distribute, and
modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or
modifying the FreeType project, you indicate
that you understand and accept all the terms
of this license.
2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: o Redistribution
of source code must retain this license file
(`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices of the
unaltered, original files must be preserved in
all copies of source files. o Redistribution in
binary form must provide a disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of
the work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
apply to any software derived from or based
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
102
on the FreeType code, not just the
unmodified files. If you use our work, you
must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
be paid to us.
3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
and contributors may not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written
permission. We suggest, but do not require,
that you use one or more of the following
phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials:
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related
to FreeType: o [email protected]
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted
additions to the library and distribution. If you
are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation. o [email protected]
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,
design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current
FreeType web page, which will allow you to
download our latest development version and
read online documentation. You can also
contact us individually at: David Turner
<[email protected]> Robert Wilhelm
<[email protected]> Werner
Lemberg
<
>
Libpng License
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy
between this copy and the notices in the file
png.h that is included in the libpng distribution,
the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
notices immediately following this sentence.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c)
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts
or the library will fulfill any of your particular
purposes or needs. This library is provided with all
faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998,
1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96,
May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the
following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy
Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
103
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors" is defined as the following
set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of fitness for any purpose.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary, or consequential damages,
which may result from the use of the PNG
Reference Library, even if advised of the
possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as
such and must not be misrepresented as
being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or
altered from any source or altered source
distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
the use of this source code as a component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this source code in a product,
acknowledgment is not required but would be
appreciated.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software.
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark
of the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected]
April 15, 2002
MIT License
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
104
zlib License
The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
<copyright holders>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0.
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0,
Sept. 18, 2008)
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright notice
including the dates of first publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
App menu in instrument panel
The application menu (App menu) in the instru-
ment panel provides quick access to commonly
used functions for certain apps.
The App menu in the instrument panel can be used
instead of the center display. The illustration is generic –
layout may vary.
The App menu is displayed in the instrument
panel and is controlled using the right-side steer-
ing wheel keypad. The app menu makes it easier
to switch between different apps or functions
within the apps without having to let go of the
steering wheel.
App menu functions
Different apps provide access to different types
of functions. The following apps and their func-
tions can be controlled from the App menu:
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
105
App Functions
Trip com-
puter
Select a trip odometer, change
instrument panel display set-
tings, etc.
Media player Select active source for media
player.
Phone Call a contact from the call list.
Navigation Guide to destination, etc.
Related information
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
•
Handling the App menu in the instrument
panel (p. 105)
Handling the App menu in the
instrument panel
The App (application) menu in the instrument
panel is controlled using the right-side steering
wheel keypad.
App menu and right-side steering wheel keypad.
Open/close
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
Opening and closing the app menu
–
Tap open/close (1).
(The App menu cannot be opened while
there is an unacknowledged message in the
instrument panel. The message must be con-
firmed before the App menu can be opened.)
> The App men opens/closes.
The App menu turns off automatically after a
period of inactivity or after certain selections are
made.
Navigating and making selections in the
App menu
1. Navigate among the apps available by press-
ing the left/right arrow keys (2).
> Functions for the previous/next app will
be shown in the App menu.
2. Scroll through the functions for the selected
app using the up or down arrows (3).
3. Confirm or make a selection for the function
by pressing confirm (4).
> The function will be activated and, for
some selections, the App menu will then
close.
The next time the App menu is opened, the func-
tions for the most recently selected app will be
displayed automatically.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
106
Related information
•
App menu in instrument panel (p. 104)
•
Messages in the instrument panel (p. 106)
Messages in the instrument panel
The instrument panel shows messages in certain
circumstances to inform or assist the driver.
Message in the instrument panel
4
.
Message in the instrument panel
5
.
High-priority messages for the driver are dis-
played in the instrument panel.
The messages may appear in different parts of
the instrument panel depending on what other
information is currently being displayed. The mes-
sage will disappear from the instrument panel
after a short period of time or after it has been
acknowledged or any required action has been
taken. Messages that need to be saved are
stored in the
Car Status app, which can be
opened from the App view in the center display.
The message may be shown along with graphics,
symbols or buttons to e.g. acknowledge the mes-
sage or accept a request.
4
With 8" instrument panel.
5
With 12" instrument panel.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
107
Service messages
The following table lists a selection of important
service messages and what they mean.
Message Meaning
Stop safely
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - contact a work-
shop
B
.
Turn off
engine
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - contact a work-
shop
B
.
Service urgent
Drive to work-
shop
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
have the vehicle inspected
immediately.
Service
required
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
have the vehicle inspected
as soon as possible.
Regular main-
tenance
Book time for
maintenance
Time for service - contact
a workshop
B
. Shown
before the next service
date.
Regular main-
tenance
Time for main-
tenance
Time for service - contact
a workshop
B
. Shown on
the next service date.
Message Meaning
Regular main-
tenance
Maintenance
overdue
Time for service - contact
a workshop
B
. Shown when
the date for service has
passed.
Temporarily
off
A
A function has been tem-
porarily deactivated and
will be reactivated auto-
matically while driving or
after the engine is restar-
ted.
A
Part of message, shown along with information on the location
of the problem.
B
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Handling messages in the instrument panel
(p. 107)
•
Handling messages saved from the instru-
ment panel (p. 109)
•
Messages in the center display (p. 142)
Handling messages in the
instrument panel
Messages in the instrument panel are controlled
using the right-side steering wheel keypad.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
108
Messages in the instrument panel
6
and the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
Messages in the instrument panel
7
and the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
Left/right
Confirm
Some messages in the instrument panel contain
one or more buttons for e.g. confirming the mes-
sage or accepting a request.
Handling new messages
For messages with buttons:
1. Navigate among the buttons available by
pressing the left/right arrow keys (1).
2. Confirm your selection by pressing confirm
(2).
> The message will disappear from the
instrument panel.
For messages without buttons:
–
Close the message by pressing confirm (2)
or let the message automatically time-out
after a short period.
> The message will disappear from the
instrument panel.
Messages that need to be saved are stored in
the
Car Status app, which can be opened from
the App view in the center display. The message
Vehicle message stored in Car Status app
will simultaneously appear in the center display.
Related information
•
Messages in the instrument panel (p. 106)
•
Handling messages saved from the instru-
ment panel (p. 109)
•
Messages in the center display (p. 142)
6
With 8" instrument panel.
7
With 12" instrument panel.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
109
Handling messages saved from the
instrument panel
Messages saved from the instrument panel and
center displays are handled in the center display.
Saved messages can be viewed in the Car Status app.
The messages displayed in the
instrument panel that need to
be saved are stored in the
Car
Status app in the center dis-
play. The message Vehicle
message stored in Car
Status app will simultaneously
appear in the center display.
Reading saved messages
To read a saved message immediately:
–
Tap the button to the right of the message
Vehicle message stored in Car Status
app in the center display.
> The saved message will be displayed in
the
Car Status app.
To read saved messages at a later time:
1.
Open the
Car Status app from App view in
the center display.
> The app will open in the bottom tile of
Home view.
2.
Select the
Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages will be displayed.
3. Tap a message to expand/minimize it.
> More information about the message will
appear in the list and the image to the left
of the app will display information about
the message in graphic form.
Handling saved messages
In expanded form, some messages have two but-
tons available for booking service or reading the
Owner's Manual.
Booking service for saved messages:
–
With the message in expanded form, tap
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment
8
for assistance booking serv-
ice.
>
With
Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab will open in the app
and create a request for a service/repair
appointment.
With
Call to make Appointment: The
phone app will open and call a service
center to make an appointment for service
or repairs.
Reading the Owner's Manual for saved mes-
sages:
–
With the message in expanded form, tap
Owner's manual to read relevant informa-
tion about the message in the Owner's Man-
ual.
> The Owner's Manual will open in the cen-
ter display and provide information related
to the message.
Saved messages in the app are automatically
deleted each time the engine is started.
8
Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
111
Center display overview
Many of the vehicle's functions can be con-
trolled from the center display. The center dis-
play and its possibilities are presented below.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
112
Three of the center display's basic views. Swipe to the right/left to access Function or App view
9
.
Function view ‒ vehicle functions that can be
activated or deactivated with one tap. Certain
functions, called "trigger functions", open
windows with settings options. One example
is the
Camera. Settings for the head-up dis-
play* are also started from Function view, but
9
In right-hand drive vehicles, these views are mirror images of the ones shown here.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
113
adjusted using the right-side steering wheel
keypad.
Home view ‒ the initial view displayed when
the screen is turned on.
App view ‒ shows downloaded apps (third-
party apps) as well as apps for integrated
functions, such as
FM radio. Tap an app icon
to open that app.
Status bar ‒ current vehicle activities are
shown at the top of the screen. Network and
connection information is shown to the left of
the status bar. Media-related information, the
clock and information about background
activities are shown to the right.
Top view ‒ pull the tab down to open Top
view. From here, you can access
Settings,
Owner's manual, Profile and messages
stored in the vehicle. In certain cases, con-
textual setting (e.g.
Navigation Settings)
and the contextual Owner's Manual (e.g.
Navigation Manual) can also be accessed
in Top view.
Navigation ‒ takes you to map navigation
with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap the tile to
expand it.
Media ‒ most recently used media-related
apps. Tap the tile to expand it.
Phone ‒ used to access phone-related func-
tions. Tap the tile to expand it.
Fourth tile ‒ most recently used apps or
vehicle functions not associated with the
other tiles. Tap the tile to expand it.
Climate row - information and direct interac-
tion to set temperature and seat heating for
example*. Tap the symbol in the center of the
climate bar to open Climate view and addi-
tional setting options.
Related information
•
Handling the center display (p. 114)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
•
Function view in the center display (p. 124)
•
Apps (p. 476)
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 126)
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
•
Opening contextual setting in the center dis-
play (p. 135)
•
Owner's Manual in the center display (p. 17)
•
Media player (p. 496)
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
•
Turning off and adjusting the volume of the
center display system sounds (p. 133)
•
Changing the appearance of the center dis-
play (p. 133)
•
Changing system language (p. 134)
•
Changing system units of measurement
(p. 134)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 629)
•
Messages in the center display (p. 142)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
114
Handling the center display
Many of the vehicle's functions and features can
be controlled and adjusted from the center dis-
play. The center display is a touchscreen that
reacts to taps and other gestures.
Using the center display's touchscreen
The touchscreen reacts differently depending on
whether the user taps, drags or swipes the
screen. It is possible to e.g. move between differ-
ent views, mark objects, scroll in a list and move
apps by touching the screen in various ways.
An infrared light curtain just above the surface of
the screen enables the screen to detect when a
finger is directly in front of the screen. This tech-
nology makes it possible to use the screen even
while wearing gloves.
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g. to adjust climate system settings
for both the driver and passenger sides.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
this could cause scratches.
The following table presents the various proce-
dures for using the screen:
Procedure Gesture Result
Tap once. Marks an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Double-tap. Zooms in on a digital object, such as a map.
Press and hold. Grabs hold of an object so it can be moved. Can be used to move apps or points on a map. Press and hold your
finger on the screen and drag the object to the desired position.
Tap once with two
fingers.
Zooms out from a digital object, such as a map.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
115
Procedure Gesture Result
Drag Moves between screen views or scrolls in a list, text or a view. Press and hold to drag apps or points on a map.
Drag horizontally or vertically over the screen.
Swipe Moves between screen views or scrolls in a list, text or a view. Drag horizontally or vertically over the screen.
Note that touching the upper part of the screen could cause Top view to open.
Stretch Zooms in.
Pinch Zooms out.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
116
Returning to Home view from another
view
1. Briefly press the home button below the cen-
ter display.
> The most recent Home view mode will be
displayed.
2. Press briefly again.
> All of the Home view's tiles will return to
standard mode.
NOTE
In Home view's standard mode – short press
on the Home button. An animation describing
access to the various views is shown on the
screen.
Scrolling in lists, articles or views
A scroll indicator is displayed on the screen when
it is possible to scroll up or down in the view.
Swipe down/up anywhere in the view.
The scroll indicator will be shown in the center display
when it is possible to scroll in the view.
Using the center display controls
Temperature control.
Digital controls are available for many of the vehi-
cle's functions. For example, to set the tempera-
ture:
•
drag the control to the desired temperature,
•
tap
+ or − to raise or lower the temperature
by degrees, or
•
tap the desired temperature on the control.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the center display
(p. 117)
•
Moving apps and buttons in the center dis-
play (p. 126)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 128)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
117
Activating and deactivating the
center display
The center display can be dimmed and reactiva-
ted using the home button under the screen.
Center display's home button.
When the home button is used, the screen will go
dark and the touchscreen no longer reacts to
touch. The climate bar will remain visible. All func-
tions connected to the screen continue to oper-
ate, such as climate, audio, guiding* and apps.
The center display screen can be cleaned when
the display is dimmed. The dimming function can
also be used to darken the screen so it is not a
distraction while driving.
1. Press and hold the button beneath the
screen.
> The screen will go dark (the climate bar
will remain visible). All functions con-
nected to the screen continue to operate.
2. To reactivate the screen, briefly press the
Home button.
> The view that was displayed before the
screen was turned off will be displayed
again.
NOTE
The screen cannot be turned off when a
prompt to perform an action is being dis-
played on the screen.
NOTE
The center display is turned off automatically
when the engine is off and the driver's door is
opened.
Related information
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 629)
•
Changing the appearance of the center dis-
play (p. 133)
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
Navigating in the center display's
views
There are five different basic views in the center
display: Home view, Top view, Climate view, App
view and Function view. The screen is automati-
cally activated when the driver's door is opened.
Home view
Home view is the view displayed when the screen
is activated. It consists of four tiles:
Navigation,
Media, Phone and a fourth tile.
An app or vehicle function selected from the App
or Function views will start in the respective tile in
Home view. For example,
FM radio will start in
the Media tile.
The fourth tile contains the most recently used
app or vehicle function that is not related to the
other three tiles.
The tiles display brief information about the
respective apps.
NOTE
When the vehicle is started, information on
the current status of apps will be displayed in
the respective tile in Home view.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
118
NOTE
In Home view's standard mode – short press
on the Home button. An animation describing
access to the various views is shown on the
screen.
NOTE
When the vehicle is moving:
•
Certain functions (e.g. using the center
display's keyboard) may be deactivated.
•
Certain texts (e.g. those generated by
apps) will be shortened to three rows.
Tap the
Read out button to have the
entire message read aloud.
•
The message will be shortened to one
row. Tap the
Read out button to have
the entire message read aloud.
Status bar
Current vehicle activities are shown at the top of
the screen in the status bar. Network and con-
nection information is shown to the left of the
status bar. Media-related information, the clock
and information about background activities are
shown to the right.
Top view
Top view when expanded.
There is a tab in the center of the status bar at
the top of the screen. Open Top view by tapping
the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top of
the screen downward.
Top view always provides access to:
•
Settings
•
Owner's manual
•
Profile
•
The vehicle's stored messages.
In certain cases, Top view provides access to:
•
Contextual setting (e.g.
Navigation
Settings
). Change settings directly in Top
view when an app (e.g. navigation) is being
used.
•
Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g.
Navigation
Manual). Access articles in the digital
Owner's Manual related to the content
shown on the screen, directly in Top view.
To exit Top view, tap the screen outside Top view,
press the Home button or tap the screen at the
bottom of Top view and swipe upward. The views
behind will become visible again and can be
used.
NOTE
The top view is not available at start-up/shut-
down or when a message is being shown on
the screen. Similarly, it is not available when
the climate view is shown.
Climate view
The climate bar is always visible at the bottom of
the screen. The most common climate settings
can be made directly there, such as setting tem-
perature and seat heating*.
Tap the symbol in the center of the cli-
mate bar to open Climate view and
access additional climate system set-
tings.
Tap the symbol to close Climate view
and return to a previous view.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
119
App view
App view showing the vehicle's apps.
Swipe the screen from right to left
10
to access
App view from Home view. This view displays
downloaded apps (third-party apps) as well as
apps for integrated functions, such as
FM radio.
Brief information will be displayed directly in App
view for certain apps, such as unread text mes-
sages for
Messages.
Tap an app to open it. It will then be opened in its
associated tile, e.g.
Media.
Depending on the number of apps, it is possible
to scroll down in the App view. This is done by
sweeping/dragging from the bottom upwards.
To return to Home view, swipe the screen from
left to right
10
or press the Home button.
Function view
Function view with buttons for various vehicle functions.
Swipe the screen from left to right
10
to access
Function view from Home view. From Function
view, you can activate or deactivate various vehi-
cle functions such as
BLIS*, Lane Keeping Aid*
and
Park Assist*.
10
Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
120
If there are many functions, you can also scroll
downward through the view. This is done by
sweeping/dragging from the bottom upwards.
Unlike in App view, where you tap an app to open
it, in Function view, tapping a function activates or
deactivates it. Certain functions (trigger func-
tions) open in their own window when tapped.
To return to Home view, swipe the screen from
right to left
10
or press the Home button.
Related information
•
Handling tiles in the center display (p. 121)
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 126)
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
•
Opening contextual setting in the center dis-
play (p. 135)
•
Owner's Manual in the center display (p. 17)
•
Driver profiles (p. 138)
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
•
Apps (p. 476)
•
Function view in the center display (p. 124)
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
10
Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
121
Handling tiles in the center display
Home view consists of four tiles:
Navigation,
Media, Phone and a fourth tile. These views
can be expanded.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
122
Expanding a tile from standard mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a tile in the center display.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
123
Expanding a tile:
–
For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone:
Tap the screen anywhere in the tile. When a
tile is expanded, the extra tile in Home view
will be temporarily hidden. The other two tiles
will be minimized and only show certain infor-
mation. When the extra tile is tapped, the
other three tiles are minimized and only cer-
tain information is displayed.
Expanded view provides access to the basic
functions of the respective apps.
Closing an expanded tile:
–
The tile can be closed in three different
ways:
•
Tap the top section of the expanded tile.
•
Tap another tile (it will then be opened in
expanded mode instead).
•
Press briefly on the Home button under
the center display.
Opening or closing a tile in full-screen
mode
The fourth tile
11
and tile for Navigation can be
opened in full-screen mode to show additional
information and possible settings.
When a tile is opened in full-screen mode, no
information from the other tiles is displayed.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full-screen mode. Tap
the symbol.
To return to expanded mode,
tap the symbol or press the
Home button under the screen.
Center display's home button.
You can always press the Home button to return
to Home view. To return to Home view's standard
view from full-screen mode, press the Home but-
ton twice.
Related information
•
Handling the center display (p. 114)
•
Activating and deactivating the center display
(p. 117)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
11
Does not apply to all apps or vehicle functions opened via the fourth tile.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
124
Function view in the center display
Function view, which is one of the center dis-
play's basic views, contains all of the vehicle's
function buttons. From the Home view, navigate
to Function view by swiping from left to right
over the screen
12
.
Different types of buttons
There are three different types of buttons for
vehicle functions; see below:
Type of button Functions Vehicle function affected
Function buttons Have On/Off modes.
When a function is active, an LED indicator light will illuminate to the left of the button's icon.
Press the button to turn the function on or off.
Most buttons in Function view are func-
tion buttons.
Trigger buttons Do not have On/Off modes.
Pressing a trigger button opens a window for the function. This can be, for example, a win-
dow to change seat position.
•
Camera
•
Headrest Fold
•
Head-up Display Adjustments
Parking buttons Have On/Off and scanning modes.
Similar to function buttons, but have an extra mode for parking scanning.
•
Park In
•
Park Out
12
Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
125
Button modes
When a function or parking button's LED indica-
tor is green, the function is activated (on). For
some functions, an additional text explaining the
function will be shown when the function is ini-
tially activated. The text will be displayed for a few
seconds and then the button will be displayed
with the LED indicator illuminated.
For
Lane Keeping Aid, for example, the text
Works only at certain speeds will be displayed
when the button is pressed.
Press the button once briefly to activate or deac-
tivate the function.
The function is deactivated when the LED indica-
tor light is switched off.
A warning triangle in the right-hand section of
the button indicates that something is not work-
ing correctly.
Related information
•
Handling the center display (p. 114)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
126
Moving apps and buttons in the
center display
The apps and buttons for vehicle functions can
be moved and organized in the App and Func-
tion views.
1. Swipe from right to left
13
to access App view
or swipe from left to right
13
to access Func-
tion view.
2. Press and hold an app or button.
> The app or button will change size and
become slightly transparent. It can then
be moved.
3. Drag the app or button to an available posi-
tion in the view.
A maximum of 48 rows can be used to position
apps or buttons. To move an app or button out-
side the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the
view. New rows will be added and the app or but-
ton can be placed in one of these.
Apps or buttons placed below the view's normal
display will not be visible on the screen.
Swipe the screen to scroll up or down in the view
to display information outside the view.
NOTE
Hide the apps that are rarely or never used by
moving them far down, outside of the visible
view. This makes it easier to find the apps
used more frequently.
NOTE
Apps and vehicle function buttons cannot be
situated at spots already in use.
Related information
•
Function view in the center display (p. 124)
•
Apps (p. 476)
•
Handling the center display (p. 114)
Symbols in the center display status
bar
Overview of symbols displayed in the center dis-
play status bar.
The status bar shows current vehicle activities
and in certain cases, also their status. Due to the
limited space in the status bar, not all symbols
will be displayed at all times.
Symbol Meaning
Connected to the Internet.
Could not connect to Internet.
Roaming activated.
Cell phone network signal strength.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no device
connected.
Information sent to and from GPS.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
13
Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
127
Symbol Meaning
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot).
This means that the vehicle shares
an available Internet connection.
Vehicle modem activated.
USB sharing active.
Action in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
A
Audio source being played.
Audio source paused.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News broadcasts from current radio
station.
B
Traffic information being received.
B
Clock.
A
Only hybrid models.
B
Not available in all markets.
Related information
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
•
Messages in the center display (p. 142)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 503)
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Date and time (p. 94)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
128
Using the center display keyboard
You can use the keyboard in the center display
to enter characters or to switch to handwriting
mode to "write" letters and characters on the
screen.
The keyboard can be used to enter characters
(letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) to e.g. send text
messages from the vehicle, enter passwords or
search for information in the digital Owner's Man-
ual.
The keyboard will only appear when it is possible
to enter text on the screen.
NOTE
The keyboard cannot be used while the vehi-
cle is moving.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
129
The illustration shows an overview of some of the buttons that may be shown on the keyboard. The appearance may vary depending on language settings and the context in which
the keyboard is used.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
130
Row showing suggestions for words or char-
acters
14
. The suggested words change as
new letters are entered. Scroll through the
list of suggested words by tapping the right
or left arrows. Tap a suggestion to select it.
Please note that this function is not available
in all languages. When unavailable, this row
will not be shown on the keyboard.
Available characters are adapted to the lan-
guage selected for the keyboard (see num-
ber 7 below). Tap a character to enter it.
Different buttons are displayed here depend-
ing on the context in which the keyboard is
used, e.g. @ to enter an email address or the
return key to start a new line.
This button hides the keyboard. In cases
where this is not possible, the button will not
be displayed.
Used to enter uppercase letters. Tap once to
enter one uppercase letter and then con-
tinue with lowercase letters. Tap twice for
caps lock (all text will be entered in upper-
case letters). Tap again to return the key-
board to lowercase letters. In this mode, the
first letter after a period, exclamation point or
question mark will be automatically entered
in uppercase form. The first letter entered in
text fields will also be uppercase. In text
fields intended for names or addresses, each
word will be automatically started with an
uppercase letter. In text fields intended for
passwords, website addresses or email
addresses, all letters will automatically be
lowercase unless uppercase is selected.
Used to enter numbers. The number key-
board (2) will then be displayed. Tap
,
which is shown instead of
in number
mode, to return to the keyboard with letters,
or
to display the keyboard with special
characters.
Used to change the keyboard language, e.g.
EN. The available characters and word sug-
gestions (1) vary depending on the selected
language. In order to toggle between key-
board languages, the languages must first be
added under Settings.
Space bar.
Delete. Tap to delete characters one at a
time. Press and hold to delete multiple char-
acters quickly.
Used to change to handwriting mode.
Tap the confirm button over the keyboard (not
shown in illustration) once to confirm the text that
has been entered. The button's appearance dif-
fers depending on the context.
Variants of letters or characters
Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can
be entered by pressing and holding the letter or
character. A box containing possible variants of
the letter or character will appear. Tap the
desired variant. If no variant is selected, the origi-
nal letter/character will be used.
Related information
•
Changing keyboard language in the center
display (p. 131)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 131)
•
Handling the center display (p. 114)
•
Handling text messages (p. 516)
14
For Asian languages.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
131
Changing keyboard language in the
center display
In order to toggle between keyboard languages,
the languages must first be added under
Settings.
Adding or deleting languages in
Settings
The keyboard is automatically set to the same
language as the system language. The keyboard
language can be manually changed without
affecting the system language.
1.
Tap
Settings in Top view.
2. Tap
System System Languages and
Units
Keyboard Layouts.
3. Select one or more languages in the list.
> It is now possible to toggle between the
selected languages using the keyboard.
If no language has been selected under
Settings, the keyboard will remain in the same
language as the vehicle's system language.
Toggling between keyboard languages
If more than one language has
been selected in
Settings, the
button in the keyboard can be
used to switch between the dif-
ferent languages.
To toggle between keyboard languages from the
list:
1. Press and hold the button.
> A list will appear.
2. Select the desired language. If more than
four languages have been selected under
Settings, you can scroll through the list
shown on the keyboard.
> The keyboard and word suggestions will
be adapted to the selected language.
To change keyboard language without displaying
the list:
–
Tap the button.
> The keyboard layout will change to the
next language in the list without display-
ing the list.
Related information
•
Changing system language (p. 134)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 128)
Entering characters, letters and
words by hand in the center display
Characters, letters and words can be entered in
the center display by handwriting them on the
touchscreen.
Tap the button on the center
display's keyboard to switch
from the keyboard to handwrit-
ing mode.
Space for entering characters/letters/
words/parts of words.
Text field displaying suggested characters or
words
15
as they are written on the screen
(1).
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
132
Suggestions for characters/letters/words/
parts of words. You can scroll through the
list.
Space bar. Blank spaces can be created by
writing a dash (‒) in the field for handwritten
letters (1). See "Writing blank spaces in free-
text fields" below.
Delete. Tap once to erase one character/
letter at a time. Wait a moment before tap-
ping again to erase the next character, letter
etc.
Return to the standard keyboard layout.
Switch off/on screen tap sounds.
Hide the keyboard. In cases where this is not
possible, the button will not be displayed.
Change language for text input.
Handwriting characters/letters/words
1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of
a word in the field for handwritten letters (1).
Write the word or part of the word vertically
or horizontally.
> A number of suggestions for characters,
letters or words will be displayed (3). The
most likely will be shown at the top of the
list.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
this could cause scratches.
2. The character/letter/word will be entered
automatically after a short pause if no other
action is taken.
> The character/letter/word at the top of
the list will be used. Tap one of the other
characters/letters/words in the list to use
it instead.
Erasing/changing handwritten characters/
letters
Erase text in the text field (2) by swiping over the hand-
writing field (1).
–
Characters/letters can be erased or changed
in several ways:
•
Tap the desired letter or word in the list
(3).
•
Tap the delete button (5) to erase the let-
ter and start again.
•
Swipe horizontally from right to left
16
over
the handwriting field (1). Erase several let-
ters at once by swiping over the area sev-
eral times.
•
Tap the X box in the text field (2) to erase
all written text.
15
Certain system languages only.
16
For Arabic keyboards, swipe in the other direction. Swiping from right to left will create a blank space.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
133
New lines in free-text fields in handwriting
mode
Create a new line by drawing above the characters in
the handwriting field as shown in the illustration
17
.
Writing blank spaces in free-text fields
Make a blank space by drawing a line from left to right
18
.
Related information
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 128)
Changing the appearance of the
center display
The appearance of the center display can be
changed by selecting a different theme.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap My Car Displays Display
Themes
.
3.
Select a theme, e.g.
Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
In addition to these themes, you can also choose
between
Normal and Bright. In Normal, the
background of the screen is dark and the text is
light. This option is the default setting for all
themes. If the bright version is selected, the
background will be light and the text will be dark.
This option can, for example, make the screen
easier to see in bright daylight conditions.
These alternatives are always available for selec-
tion and are not affected by the ambient lighting.
Related information
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
•
Activating and deactivating the center display
(p. 117)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 629)
Turning off and adjusting the
volume of the center display system
sounds
The volume of the center display system sounds
can be adjusted or turned off completely.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
Sound System Volumes.
3.
Pull the control under
Touch Sounds to
adjust the volume or turn off screen tap
sounds. Pull the control to the desired sound
level.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
•
Sound settings (p. 474)
17
For Arabic keyboards, draw the same character, but in mirror image.
18
For Arabic keyboards, draw the line from right to left.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
134
Changing system units of
measurement
Unit settings are adjusted in the
Settings menu
in the center display.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Proceed to
System System Languages
and Units
Units of Measurement.
3. Choose a measurement standard:
•
Metric - kilometers, liters and degrees
Celsius.
•
Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
Celsius.
•
US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren-
heit.
> The units in the instrument panel, center
display and head-up display are changed.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
•
Changing system language (p. 134)
Changing system language
Language settings are adjusted in the
Settings
menu in the center display.
NOTE
Changing languages in the center display
could mean that certain owner's information
will not comply with national or local laws and
regulations. Do not change to a language that
you do not fully understand, as this could
make it difficult to navigate back through the
menu.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Proceed to
System System Languages
and Units
.
3.
Select
System Language. A voice control
symbol indicates that the language can be
used for voice commands.
> Languages in the instrument panel, center
display and head-up display are changed.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
•
Changing system units of measurement
(p. 134)
Changing settings in the center
display's Top view
You can change settings and information for
many of the vehicle's functions via the center
display.
1. Open Top view by tapping the tab at the top
of the screen or by dragging/swiping from
the top of the screen downward.
2.
Tap
Settings to open the Settings menu.
Top view with Settings button.
3. Tap one of the categories and sub-catego-
ries to navigate to the desired setting.
4. Change the setting(s). Different types of set-
tings are changed in different ways.
> Changes are saved immediately.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
135
A sub-category in the Settings menu with various possi-
ble settings; has a multi-selection button and radio but-
tons.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 136)
•
Table of settings in the center display
(p. 137)
Opening contextual setting in the
center display
Most of the settings for the vehicle's basic apps
can be changed directly in Top view in the cen-
ter display via contextual settings.
Top view with button for contextual settings.
Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing
specific settings related to the active function
displayed on the screen. Apps that are factory-
installed in your vehicle, e.g.
FM radio and USB,
are part of Sensus and are used to control the
vehicle's integrated functions. The settings for
these apps can be changed directly via contex-
tual setting in Top view.
When contextual setting is available:
1. Pull down Top view when an app is in expan-
ded form, e.g.
Navigation.
2.
Tap
Navigation Settings.
> The navigation settings page will open.
3. Change the desired settings and confirm.
Tap
Close or press the Home button under the
center display to close Settings view.
Most of the vehicle's basic apps have this contex-
tual setting option, but not all.
Third-party apps
Third-party apps are apps that are not factory-
installed in the vehicle's system, but can be
downloaded, e.g.
Volvo ID. Settings for these
apps are changed in the apps themselves, not in
Top view.
Related information
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 136)
•
Download apps (p. 477)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
136
Resetting user data when the
vehicle changes owners
If the vehicle changes owners, all user data and
system settings should be reset to factory
defaults.
Vehicle settings can be reset at different levels.
Reset all user data and system settings to their
original factory defaults when the vehicle
changes owner. It is also important to change the
owner of the Volvo On Call service.
Related information
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 136)
•
Resetting driver profile settings (p. 141)
Resetting center display settings
All settings made in the center display's Settings
menu can be reset to default values.
Two types of reset
There are two ways to reset the settings in the
Settings menu:
•
Factory Reset- erases all data and files and
resets all settings to factory default.
•
Reset Personal Settings- erases personal
data and resets personalized settings to fac-
tory default.
Resetting settings
Follow these instructions to reset the settings.
NOTE
Factory Reset is only possible when the
vehicle is stationary.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Proceed to
System Factory Reset.
3. Select the type of reset you would like to do.
> A pop-up window will appear.
4.
Tap
OK to confirm the reset.
For Reset Personal Settings, confirm the
reset by tapping Reset for the active
profile or Reset for all profiles.
> The selected settings will be reset.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
•
Table of settings in the center display
(p. 137)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
137
Table of settings in the center
display
The center display's Settings menu has a num-
ber of main categories and sub-categories that
contain settings and information for many of the
vehicle's features and functions.
There are seven main categories: My Car,
Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication,
Climate and System.
Each category, in turn, contains a number of sub-
categories and possible settings. The table below
shows the first level of sub-categories. The possi-
ble settings for a function or an area are descri-
bed in more detail in their respective sections of
the Owner's Manual.
Some settings are personal, which means that
they can be saved to a
Driver Profiles. Others
are global, which means that they are not linked
to a driver profile.
My Car
Sub-categories
Displays
IntelliSafe
Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode*
Lights and Lighting
Mirrors and Convenience
Sub-categories
Locking
Parking Brake and Suspension
Wipers
Sound
Sub-categories
Tone
Balance
System Volumes
Navigation
Sub-categories
Map
Route and Guidance
Traffic
Media
Sub-categories
AM/FM Radio
SiriusXM
SiriusXM Travel Link
Sub-categories
Gracenote®
Video
Communication
Sub-categories
Phone
Text Messages
Android Auto
*
Apple CarPlay*
Bluetooth Devices
Wi-Fi
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Vehicle Modem Internet
Volvo On Call
Volvo Service Networks
Climate
The Climate main category does not have any
sub-categories.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
138
System
Sub-categories
Driver Profile
Date and Time
System Languages and Units
Privacy and Data
Keyboard Layouts
Voice Control
*
Factory Reset
System Information
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 111)
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 136)
Driver profiles
Many of the vehicle's settings can be custom-
ized to the driver's personal preferences and
saved in one or more driver profiles.
These personal settings are automatically saved
in the active driver profile. Each key can be linked
to one driver profile. When the linked key is used,
the vehicle is customized to the specific settings
of that driver profile.
Which settings are saved in driver
profiles?
Many of the settings made in the vehicle will be
automatically stored in the active driver profile if
the profile is not protected. The vehicle has set-
tings that can be made either personal or global.
The personal settings are saved in driver profiles.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, among other things, screens, mirrors,
front seats, navigation*, audio and media system,
language and voice control.
Some settings are global settings. These settings
can be changed but are not saved to a specific
driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all
profiles.
Global settings
Global settings and parameters do not change
when driver profiles are changed. They remain
the same regardless of which driver profile is cur-
rently active.
Keyboard layout is an example of a global setting.
If driver profile X is used to add additional key-
board languages, these languages will also be
available for driver profile Y. The settings for key-
board layout are not saved to a specific driver
profile - the settings are global.
Personal settings
If driver profile X has been used to e.g., set the
brightness for the center display, driver profile Y
will not be affected by this setting. It will only be
saved to driver profile X because brightness set-
ting is a personal setting.
Related information
•
Selecting a driver profile (p. 139)
•
Changing a driver profile's name (p. 139)
•
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
(p. 140)
•
Protecting a driver profile (p. 140)
•
Resetting driver profile settings (p. 141)
•
Table of settings in the center display
(p. 137)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
139
Selecting a driver profile
When the center display starts up, the selected
driver profile will be shown at the top of the
screen. The most recently used driver profile will
be active the next time the vehicle is unlocked. A
different driver profile can be selected once the
vehicle has been unlocked. However, if the
remote key has been linked to a driver profile,
this profile will be used instead.
There are two options for switching between
driver profiles.
Option 1:
1. Tap the name of the driver profile shown at
the top of the center display when the dis-
play starts up.
> A list will appear, showing driver profiles
that can be selected.
2. Select desired driver profile.
3.
Tap
Confirm.
> The driver profile has now been selected
and the system will load the settings
stored in that profile.
Option 2:
1. Pull down Top view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Profile.
> The same list as in option 1 will be dis-
played.
3. Select desired driver profile.
4.
Tap
Confirm.
> The driver profile has now been selected
and the system will load the settings
stored in that profile.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 138)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
•
Changing a driver profile's name (p. 139)
•
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
(p. 140)
Changing a driver profile's name
It is possible to change the names of the differ-
ent driver profiles used in the vehicle.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
System Driver Profiles.
3.
Select
Edit Profile.
> A menu will open in which the driver pro-
file can be changed.
4.
Tap the
Profile Name box.
> A keyboard will be displayed and can be
used to change the name. Tap
to
close the keyboard.
5.
Save the name change by pressing
Back or
Close.
> The name has now been changed.
NOTE
Profile names may not begin with a space. If a
space is entered first, the profile name will not
be saved.
Related information
•
Selecting a driver profile (p. 139)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 128)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
140
Protecting a driver profile
It may not always be desirable to store settings
made in the vehicle to the active driver profile. In
these instances, the driver profile can be protec-
ted.
NOTE
Protecting a driver profile is only possible
when the vehicle is stationary.
To protect a driver profile:
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
System Driver Profiles.
3.
Select
Edit Profile.
> A menu will open in which the driver pro-
file can be changed.
4.
Tap
Protect Profile to protect the profile.
5. Confirm your selection to protect the profile
by tapping
Back/Close.
> When the profile is protected, settings
made in the vehicle will not be automati-
cally stored to the profile. The changes
must instead be saved manually by tap-
ping
Save current settings to the
profile. If the profile is not protected, the
settings will be automatically stored to the
profile.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 138)
Linking a remote key to a driver
profile
A remote key can be linked to a driver profile.
This driver profile and all of its settings will then
automatically be selected every time the vehicle
is used with that particular remote key.
The first time the remote key is used, it is not
linked to any specific driver profile. The
Guest
profile is automatically activated when the ignition
is switched on.
A driver profile can also be selected manually
without linking it to any key. When the vehicle is
unlocked, the last active driver profile will be acti-
vated. If the key has ever been linked to a driver
profile, it is not necessary to manually select a
driver profile when using that particular key.
Linking a remote key to a specific driver
profile
NOTE
A remote key can only be connected to a
driver profile when the vehicle is stationary.
First select the profile you would like to link to
the key (if that profile is not already active). The
active profile can then be linked to the key.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
141
2. Tap System Driver Profiles.
3. Mark the desired profile. The display will
return to Home view. The
Guest profile can-
not be linked to a remote key.
4.
Pull down Top view again and tap
Settings
System Driver Profiles Edit
Profile
.
5.
Select
Connect key to link the profile with
the key. A driver profile can only be linked to
the key currently being used in the vehicle. If
there are any other keys in the vehicle, More
than one key is found, put the key you
want to connect on backup reader will be
displayed.
Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console.
>
When
Profile connected to key is dis-
played, the key and driver profile have
been linked.
6.
Tap
OK.
> The key used is now linked to the driver
profile and will remain so as long as the
Connect key box is not deselected.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 138)
•
Changing a driver profile's name (p. 139)
•
Remote key (p. 241)
Resetting driver profile settings
Settings that have been saved for one or more
driver profiles can be reset when the vehicle is
stationary.
NOTE
Factory Reset is only possible when the
vehicle is stationary.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap
System Factory Reset Reset
Personal Settings
.
3.
Select option
Reset for the active profile,
Reset for all profiles or Cancel.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 138)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 136)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
142
Messages in the center display
The center display shows messages in certain
circumstances to inform or assist the driver.
Messages in the center display's Top view.
Messages with lower priority for the driver are
shown in the center display.
Most of the messages are shown in the center
display's status bar. The message will disappear
from the status bar after a short period of time or
after the required action has been taken. Mes-
sages that need to be saved are stored in Top
view in the center display.
The message may be shown along with graphics,
symbols or a button to e.g. activate/deactivate a
function connected to the message.
Pop-up messages
Messages are sometimes shown as pop-up win-
dows. Pop-up messages have a higher priority
than messages shown in the status bar and
require acknowledgment/action before they dis-
appear. Messages that need to be saved are
stored in Top view in the center display.
Related information
•
Handling messages in the center display
(p. 142)
•
Handling messages saved from the center
display (p. 143)
•
Messages in the instrument panel (p. 106)
Handling messages in the center
display
Messages in the center display are handled in
the center display's views.
Messages in the center display's Top view.
Some messages in the center display have a but-
ton (or several buttons in a pop-up message) to
e.g. activate/deactivate a function related to the
message.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
143
Handling new messages
For messages with buttons:
–
Tap the button to perform the action or let
the message automatically time-out after a
short period.
> The message will disappear from the sta-
tus bar.
For messages without buttons:
–
Close the message by tapping it or let the
message automatically time-out after a short
period.
> The message will disappear from the sta-
tus bar.
Messages that need to be saved are stored in
Top view in the center display.
Related information
•
Messages in the center display (p. 142)
•
Handling messages saved from the center
display (p. 143)
•
Messages in the instrument panel (p. 106)
Handling messages saved from the
center display
Messages saved from the instrument panel and
center displays are handled in the center display.
Saved messages and possible selections in Top view.
Messages that have been shown in the center
display and that need to be saved are stored in
the center display's Top view.
Reading saved messages
1. Open Top view in the center display.
> A list of saved messages will be displayed.
Messages with an arrow to the right can
be expanded.
2. Tap a message to expand/minimize it.
> More information about the message will
appear in the list and the image to the left
of the app will display information about
the message in graphic form.
Handling saved messages
Some messages have a button to e.g. activate/
deactivate a function related to the message.
–
Tap the button to perform the action.
Saved messages in Top view are automatically
deleted when the ignition is switched off.
Related information
•
Messages in the center display (p. 142)
•
Handling messages in the center display
(p. 142)
•
Messages in the instrument panel (p. 106)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
144
Head-up display*
The head-up display is a complement to the
instrument panel and projects information from
the instrument panel onto the windshield. The
projected images can only be seen from the driv-
er's seat.
Incoming phone calls.
The head-up display projects warnings and infor-
mation related to speed, cruise control functions,
navigation, etc. onto the windshield in the driver's
field of vision. Traffic information and incoming
phone calls can also be shown on the head-up
display.
NOTE
The driver's ability to see information in the
head-up display may be impeded by:
•
the use of polarizing sunglasses
•
a driving posture in which the driver is not
centered in the seat
•
objects on the display unit's glass cover
•
unfavorable lighting conditions.
CAUTION
The information is projected from a display
unit located in the dashboard. To help prevent
damage to the display unit's glass cover, do
not place any objects on the glass and pre-
vent objects from falling onto it.
Examples of what might be shown on the display.
Speed
Cruise control
Navigation
Road signs
A number of symbols may be projected temporar-
ily onto the head-up display, including:
If the warning symbol appears, read the
warning message in the instrument
panel.
If the information symbol appears, read
the warning message in the instrument
panel.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
145
The snowflake symbol will illuminate if
there is a risk of slippery conditions.
NOTE
People with certain types of vision problems
may experience headaches or eye strain
when using the head-up display.
City Safety in head-up-display
If a collision warning is given, the information in
the head-up display will be replaced by a City
Safety graphic. This graphic will illuminate even if
the head-up display is turned off.
A City Safety graphic flashes to attract the driver's atten-
tion.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-
play* (p. 145)
•
Cleaning the head-up display* (p. 630)
•
Replacing a windshield with head-up display*
(p. 599)
Activating and deactivating the
head-up display*
The head-up display can be activated and deac-
tivated when the vehicle has been started.
Press the Head-up Display
button in the center display's
Function view. An indicator light
in the button will illuminate
when the function is activated.
Related information
•
Head-up display settings* (p. 146)
•
Head-up display* (p. 144)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
146
Head-up display settings*
Adjusting settings for the head-up display.
Settings can be adjusted when the vehicle is
started and a projected image is displayed on the
windshield.
Selecting display options
Select the functions to be shown in the head-up
display.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
.
3. Select one or more functions:
•
Show Navigation
•
Show Road Sign Information
•
Show Driver Support
•
Show Phone.
This setting is stored as a personal setting in the
driver profile.
Adjusting brightness and height
position
1.
Press the
Head-up Display Adjustments
button in the center display's Function view.
2. Adjust the brightness of the projected image
and the height position in the driver's field of
vision using the right-side steering wheel
lever.
Decreasing brightness
Increasing brightness
Raising position
Lowering position
Confirm
The brightness of the graphic is automatically
adapted to the light conditions in its background.
Brightness is also affected by adjustments to the
brightness of the other displays in the vehicle.
The height position can be stored in the front
power seat's* memory function using the keypad
in the driver's door.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
147
Calibrating the horizontal position
If the windshield or display unit has been
replaced, the head-up display's horizontal posi-
tion may need to be calibrated. Calibration means
that the projected image is rotated clockwise or
counterclockwise.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Select
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
Head-Up Display
Calibration
.
3. Calibrate the horizontal position of the image
using the right-side steering wheel keypad.
Rotate counterclockwise
Rotate clockwise
Confirm
Related information
•
Head-up display* (p. 144)
•
Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-
play* (p. 145)
•
Driver profiles (p. 138)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
Voice control
19
The driver can use voice commands to control
certain functions in the media player, a
Bluetooth-connected phone, the climate system
and the Volvo navigation system*.
Voice commands offer extra convenience and
help minimize distractions so drivers can concen-
trate on driving and keep their attention on the
road and traffic situation.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the vehicle is operated in a safe manner
and that all applicable traffic regulations are
followed.
Voice control microphone
Voice control is carried out as a dialog, with spo-
ken commands from the user and verbal respon-
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
148
ses from the system. The voice control system
uses the same microphone as devices connected
with Bluetooth, and the voice control system
responds through the vehicle's loudspeakers. In
certain cases, text messages will also be dis-
played in the instrument panel. The functions are
controlled using the right-side steering wheel
keypad and settings are made in the center dis-
play.
System updates
The voice control system is continuously
improved. For optimal functionality, always down-
load the latest update at support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Using voice commands (p. 148)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
•
Climate control system voice commands
(p. 206)
•
Voice control settings (p. 150)
Using voice commands
20
Press the button for voice con-
trol
on the right-side
steering wheel keypad to acti-
vate the system and initiate a
voice command dialog.
These may include:
•
Wait until after the tone, and then speak in
your normal voice at a normal speed.
•
Do not speak while the system is responding
(the system is unable to process commands
during this time).
•
Avoid background noises in the passenger
compartment by keeping doors, windows and
the panoramic roof* closed.
Voice control can be canceled by:
•
saying "
Cancel".
•
pressing and holding the steering wheel key-
pad's voice command button
.
To speed up the voice command dialog and skip
system responses, press the voice command but-
ton
while the system is responding and give
your next command.
Voice command examples
Press , say "Call [First name] [Last name]
[number category]" - calls the selected contact
from the phone book. If the contact has several
phone numbers (e.g. home, cell, work), the right
category must also be given.
Press
and say "Call Robyn Smith
cellular".
Commands/phrases
The following commands can always be used:
•
"
Repeat" - repeats the most recent voice
command in the current dialog.
•
"
Cancel" - cancels the dialog.
•
"
Help" - initiates a help dialog. The system
responds with commands that can be used
in the current situation, an instruction or an
example.
Commands for specific functions, such as phone
and audio, are described in the sections related
to that function.
19
Certain markets only.
20
Certain markets only.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
149
Numbers
Number commands can be given in different
ways depending on the function to be controlled:
•
Phone numbers and zip codes should be
given by stating each number individually, e.g.
zero three one two two four four three
(03122443).
•
Addresses can be given by stating each
number individually or in a group, e.g. two two
or twenty-two (22). For English and Dutch
language settings, groups of numbers can
also be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two
twenty-two (22 22). For English, double or
triple digits can also be used, e.g. double
zero (00). Numbers in the range 0-2300 can
be used.
•
Frequencies can be given as ninety-eight
point eight (98.8), one hundred four point
two, or hundred four point two (104.2).
Related information
•
Voice control (p. 147)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
•
Climate control system voice commands
(p. 206)
•
Voice control settings (p. 150)
Voice control for cellular phones
21
Call a contact in the phone book, have a text
message read aloud or dictate short messages
using voice commands to a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone.
To access a contact in the phone book, the voice
command must contain the contact information
entered in the phone book. If a contact, e.g.
Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers listed
in the phone book, a number category such as
home or cellular can also be specified, i.e. "Call
Robyn Smith cellular".
Tap and say one of the following commands:
•
"
Call [contact]" - call the selected contact
from the phone book.
•
"
Call [phone number]" - call a phone num-
ber.
•
"
Recent calls" - display the list of recent
calls.
•
"
Read message" - read a text message
aloud. If there are several messages, select
the message to read aloud.
•
"
Message to [contact]" - the user is
prompted to dictate a short message. The
message will then be read aloud and the
user can choose to send
22
or re-dictate the
message. The vehicle must be connected to
the Internet to access this function.
Related information
•
Voice control (p. 147)
•
Using voice commands (p. 148)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
•
Climate control system voice commands
(p. 206)
•
Voice control settings (p. 150)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
21
Certain markets only.
22
Only certain phones can send messages via the vehicle. For additional information on compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
150
Voice control for radio and media
23
Voice commands for the radio and media play-
ers are shown below.
Tap and say one of the following commands:
•
"
Media" - initiates a dialog for media and
radio and displays examples of commands.
•
"
Play [artist]" - plays music by the selected
artist.
•
"
Play [song title]" - plays the selected
song.
•
"
Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
the selected song from the selected album.
•
"
Play [radio station]" - starts the selected
radio station.
•
"
Tune to [frequency]" - tunes to the
selected radio frequency in the currently
active waveband. If no radio source is active,
the FM band will be started as default.
•
"
Tune to [frequency] [waveband]" - tunes
to the selected radio frequency on the
selected waveband.
•
"
Radio" - starts FM radio.
•
"
Radio FM" - starts FM radio.
•
"
Radio AM" - starts AM radio.
•
"
SiriusXM" - starts SiriusXM radio*
•
"
CD" - starts playback from CD*.
•
"
USB" - starts playback from USB.
•
"
iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
•
"
Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue-
tooth-connected media source.
•
"
Similar music" - plays music from a USB-
connected device with music similar to that
currently playing.
Related information
•
Voice control (p. 147)
•
Using voice commands (p. 148)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149)
•
Climate control system voice commands
(p. 206)
•
Voice control settings (p. 150)
Voice control settings
24
Settings for the voice control system are made
here.
Settings System Voice Control
Settings can be personalized in the following
areas:
•
Repeat Voice Command
•
Gender
•
Speech Rate
Sound settings
Select sound settings under:
Settings Sound System Volumes
Voice Control
Language settings
The voice control system is not available for all
languages. The languages available for voice
commands are indicated by the
icon in the
list of languages.
Changing the language here will also change the
language in the menus, messages and help texts.
Settings System System Languages
and Units
System Language
23
Certain markets only.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
151
Related information
•
Voice control (p. 147)
•
Using voice commands (p. 148)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149)
•
Climate control system voice commands
(p. 206)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
•
Sound settings (p. 474)
•
Changing system language (p. 134)
24
Certain markets only.
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
154
Lighting panel and controls
The lighting panel and controls can be used to
adjust both exterior and interior lighting. The
lighting ring on the left-side steering wheel lever
can be used to activate and adjust the exterior
lighting. The brightness of the interior lighting
can be adjusted using the thumb wheel on the
dashboard.
Exterior lighting
Lighting ring position.
When the vehicle's ignition is in mode II, the
lighting ring positions have the following func-
tions:
Position Meaning
US: Daytime running lights and
parking lights are off.
Canada: Daytime running lights and
parking lights are on.
High beam flash can be used.
Parking lights when the vehicle is
parked.
US: Daytime running lights are off.
Canada: Daytime running lights are
on.
High beam flash can be used.
Low beams and parking lights.
High beams can be activated.
High beam flash can be used.
Position Meaning
Daytime running lights and parking
lights in daylight conditions.
A
Low beams and parking lights in
weak daylight or dark conditions or
when the front fog lights* and/or
rear fog light are activated.
Active high beam can be activated.
High beams can be activated when
low beams are on.
High beam flash can be used.
Active high beams on/off.
A
US models only: Daytime running lights and parking lights can
be deactivated in the center display.
NOTE
Volvo recommends use of Daytime Running
Lights in the US. Its use is mandatory in Can-
ada.
Volvo recommends using position when
the vehicle is in motion.
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
155
WARNING
The vehicle lighting system cannot in all situa-
tions determine when the daylight is too weak
or not strong enough, e.g. when there is fog
or rain.
The driver is always responsible for driving the
vehicle with lighting that is safe for the traffic
conditions and as specified by applicable traf-
fic regulations.
Thumbwheel in instrument panel
Thumb wheel (to the left) for adjusting interior bright-
ness.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the center dis-
play (p. 155)
•
Interior Lighting (p. 164)
•
Parking lights (p. 156)
•
Using turn signals (p. 160)
•
Using high beam (p. 158)
•
Low beams (p. 157)
•
Front fog lights/cornering illumination*
(p. 161)
•
Rear fog light (p. 162)
•
Active Bending Lights* (p. 161)
•
Brake lights (p. 163)
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 163)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 163)
Adjusting light functions via the
center display
A number of light functions can be adjusted and
activated via the center display. These include
active high beams, home safe lighting and
approach lighting.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Select
Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting
and then the function that you would like to
adjust.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
•
Active high beam (p. 159)
•
Using home safe lighting (p. 164)
•
Welcome Light (p. 164)
•
Using turn signals (p. 160)
•
Changing settings in the center display's Top
view (p. 134)
•
Function view in the center display (p. 124)
LIGHTING
156
Parking lights
The parking lights can be used to help other
road users see the vehicle if it is stopped or
parked. Use the lighting ring on the steering
wheel lever to turn on the parking lights.
Lighting ring in the parking light position.
Turn the lighting ring to the position to
turn on the parking lights (the license plate light-
ing will also illuminate).
Canadian models: If the ignition is in the II posi-
tion, the daytime running lights will illuminate
instead of the front parking lights. With the light-
ing ring in this position, the parking lights will
remain on regardless of what position the ignition
is in.
US models: When
mode is selected, the
daytime running lights can be deactivated in the
center display. The parking lights will also be
deactivated. In weak daylight or dark conditions,
the parking lights and low beams will be illumi-
nated.
In dark conditions, the rear parking lights also
illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert fol-
lowing traffic. This happens regardless of what
position the lighting ring or ignition is in.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Replacing daytime running lights/front park-
ing light bulbs (p. 608)
Daytime running lights
The vehicle has sensors that detect ambient
lighting conditions. With the lighting ring in the
position, the daytime running lights will
always be activated when the ignition is in mode
II. In weak daylight or dark conditions, the head-
lights automatically switch to low beams.
Lighting ring in AUTO position.
LIGHTING
}}
* Option/accessory.
157
With the steering wheel lever's lighting ring in the
position, the daytime running lights (DRL
1
)
will illuminate when the vehicle is driven in day-
light conditions. The headlights will switch auto-
matically from daytime running lights to low
beams in weak daylight or dark conditions. The
headlights will also switch to low beams if the
front fog lights* and/or rear fog light are acti-
vated.
US models: When
mode is selected, the
daytime running lights can be deactivated in the
center display. The parking lights will also be
deactivated. In weak daylight or dark conditions,
the parking lights and low beams will be illumi-
nated.
US models: With the lighting ring in the
or position, the daytime running lights will
be off.
Canadian models: With the lighting ring in the
or position, the daytime running
lights will be on.
NOTE
Volvo recommends use of Daytime Running
Lights in the US. Its use is mandatory in Can-
ada.
WARNING
The system is an energy saving aid – it cannot
in all situations determine when the daylight is
too weak or not strong enough, e.g. when
there is fog or rain.
The driver is always responsible for driving the
vehicle with lighting that is safe for the traffic
conditions and as specified by applicable traf-
fic regulations.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Low beams (p. 157)
•
Replacing daytime running lights/front park-
ing light bulbs (p. 608)
Low beams
When driving with the lighting ring in the
position, low beam will be automatically acti-
vated in weak daylight or dark conditions, when
the ignition is in the II position.
Lighting ring in AUTO position.
With the lighting ring in the position, the
low beams will be automatically activated if:
•
the front fog lights* are activated
•
the rear fog light is activated
•
the rear and front fog lights are activated.
With the lighting ring in the
position, low
beams will always be on when the ignition is in
the II position.
1
Daytime Running Lights
||
LIGHTING
158
Tunnel detection
The vehicle will detect if it enters a tunnel and
shift from daytime running lights to low beams.
Note that the left-hand steering wheel lever must
be in
position for tunnel detection to work.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Daytime running lights (p. 156)
•
Replacing the low beam headlight bulbs
(p. 607)
Using high beam
High beam is operated via the left-hand steering
wheel lever. High beam is the vehicle's strongest
lighting and should be used when driving in dark
conditions, provided it does not blind other road
users, to improve visibility.
Steering wheel lever with lighting ring.
High beam flash
Move the steering wheel lever slightly back-
ward to the high beam flash mode. The high
beams will illuminate until the lever is
released.
High beams
The high beams can be activated when the
lighting ring is in mode
2
or .
Activate high beams by moving the steering
wheel lever forward. Deactivate by moving
the steering wheel lever backward.
When the high beams are activated, the
symbol will be illuminated in the instrument panel.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
•
Active high beam (p. 159)
•
Replacing the high beam headlight bulbs
(p. 607)
2
When the low beams are on.
LIGHTING
}}
* Option/accessory.
159
Active high beam
Active high beams is a function that uses cam-
era sensors in the upper edge of the windshield
to detect the headlights of approaching vehicles
or the taillights of the vehicle directly ahead.
When either of these is detected, the vehicle's
headlights will automatically switch from high
beams to low beams.
Active high beam is enabled by moving the lighting ring
on the steering wheel lever to
.
The function can also detect street lighting.
When the camera sensor no longer detects an
approaching vehicle or a vehicle ahead, the head-
lights will return to high beams.
This function can be used in dark conditions
when the vehicle's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(approx. 12 mph) or higher.
If active high beams are deactivated when the
high beams are on, the headlights will automati-
cally switch to low beams.
When active high beams are activated, a white
symbol will be displayed in the instrument
panel.
When high beams are on, the symbol will be blue.
For LED headlights, this applies even if the high
beams are partially dimmed, i.e. if the headlights
are illuminated with slightly more than low beams.
Vehicles with halogen headlights
When the camera sensor no longer detects the
headlights of approaching vehicles or the tail-
lights of a vehicle ahead, the headlights will
return to high beams after a second or so.
Vehicles with LED
3
headlights*
If the active high beams are equipped with the
auto on/off function
4
, the headlights will return to
high beams a second or so after the camera sen-
sor no longer detects the headlights of approach-
ing vehicles or the taillights of a vehicle ahead.
Limitations for active high beams
The camera sensor on which the function is
based has limitations.
If this symbol and the message Active
High Beam Temporarily
unavailable is displayed in the instru-
ment panel, switching between high
and low beams must be done manually. The light-
ing ring on the steering wheel lever can remain in
the
position. The symbol will go out
when the message is displayed.
The same applies if this symbol along
with the message
Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual is displayed.
Active high beams may be temporarily unavailable
in certain situations, e.g. heavy fog or rain. When
active high beams become available again, or the
windshield sensors are no longer blocked, the
message will disappear and the
symbol will
be displayed.
WARNING
Automatic high beam is an aid in using the
best possible light based on prevailing condi-
tions.
The driver is always responsible for manually
switching between high and low beam when
traffic situations or weather conditions require
this.
3
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
4
Depends on the vehicle's equipment level.
||
LIGHTING
160
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
•
Using high beam (p. 158)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
Using turn signals
The vehicle's turn signals are controlled using
the left-side steering wheel lever. The turn sig-
nals flash three times or continuously, depend-
ing on how far up or down the lever is moved.
Turn signals.
Triple flash indicator
Move the steering wheel lever up or down to
the first position and release. The turn sig-
nals will flash three times. If the function is
deactivated via the center display, the signals
will flash once.
NOTE
•
This automatic flashing sequence can be
interrupted by immediately moving the
lever in the opposite direction.
•
If the turn signal indicator flashes more
quickly than normal, refer to the message
in the instrument panel.
Continuous flashing sequence
Move the lever up or down as far as possible.
The lever will stop in its end position and can be
moved back manually or automatically by moving
the steering wheel.
Related information
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 163)
•
Adjusting light functions via the center dis-
play (p. 155)
•
Replacing front turn signal bulbs (p. 609)
LIGHTING
}}
* Option/accessory.
161
Active Bending Lights*
Active Bending Lights (ABL) are designed to
help provide maximum illumination in curves and
intersections. Depending on equipment level,
vehicles with LED
5
headlights* may be equipped
with Active Bending Lights.
Headlight pattern with function deactivated (left) and
activated (right).
Active Bending Lights follow the movement of
the steering wheel to help provide maximum illu-
mination in curves and intersections, helping to
improve visibility for the driver.
The function is automatically activated when the
engine is started. If a fault is detected in the sys-
tem, the
symbol will illuminate in the
instrument panel and a message will be dis-
played.
The function is only active in weak daylight or
dark conditions and only when the vehicle is mov-
ing and the low beams are on.
Deactivating/activating the function
The function is activated as the default factory
setting and can be activated and deactivated in
the center display's Function view:
Tap the Active Bending
Lights button.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the center dis-
play (p. 155)
•
Front fog lights/cornering illumination*
(p. 161)
Front fog lights/cornering
illumination*
The front fog lights have a stronger beam than
low beam, making them particularly effective in
fog.
Front fog lights button.
The front fog lights can be turned on when the
ignition is in mode II and the lighting ring is in
position
, or .
Tap the button to activate or deactivate the func-
tion. The
symbol in the instrument panel
comes on when the front fog lights are on.
The front fog lights turn off automatically when
the ignition is switched off or when the lighting
ring is in position
.
5
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
||
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
162
NOTE
Regulations concerning fog light use vary
from country to country.
Cornering illumination*
The front fog lamps can include the cornering
lights function, which temporarily illuminates the
area diagonally in front of the car in the direction
the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or
in the direction shown by the direction indicators.
The function is activated in weak daylight or dark
conditions when the lighting ring is in
or
mode and the vehicle speed is less than
about 30 km/h (about 20 mph).
Both cornering illumination are also illuminated
as a complement to the taillights when reversing.
The function is activated as the default factory
setting and can be activated and deactivated
using the center display.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Rear fog light (p. 162)
•
Active Bending Lights* (p. 161)
•
Adjusting light functions via the center dis-
play (p. 155)
Rear fog light
The rear fog light is considerably brighter than
ordinary taillights and should only be used to
help other road users see the vehicle when visi-
bility is reduced by conditions such as fog,
snow, smoke or dust.
Rear fog light button.
The rear fog light consists of a light on the rear
of the vehicle on the driver's side.
The rear fog light can only be used when:
•
ignition mode II is active and the lighting ring
is in position
or
•
the lighting ring is in the
position and
the front fog lights are on.
Press the button for On/Off. The
symbol in
the instrument panel illuminates when the rear
fog light is on.
The rear fog light turns off automatically when:
•
the ignition is off or the lighting ring is in the
position.
•
the lighting ring is in the
position and
the front fog lights are turned off.
NOTE
Regulations concerning rear fog light use vary
from country to country.
Related information
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
•
Front fog lights/cornering illumination*
(p. 161)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Replacing the rear fog light bulb (p. 610)
LIGHTING
163
Brake lights
The brake lights are automatically illuminated
when braking.
The brake lights illuminate when the brake pedal
is depressed. They also illuminate when the
brakes are automatically applied by one of the
driver support systems.
Related information
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 163)
•
Brake functions (p. 418)
Emergency brake lights
The emergency brake lights are activated to
warn following vehicles of hard braking.
This function causes an additional taillight on
each side of the vehicle to illuminate.
The emergency brake lights are activated in the
event of hard braking or if the ABS system is
activated and the vehicle is traveling at a high
speed.
After the driver decelerates to a low speed and
then releases the brake, the brake lights resume
their normal brightness.
Related information
•
Brake lights (p. 163)
•
Brakes (p. 418)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 163)
Hazard warning flashers
Hazard warning flashers warn other road users
by all of the vehicle's turn signals being activated
at the same time. The function can be used to
warn about a traffic hazard.
Hazard warning flashers button.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers.
NOTE
Regulations concerning the use of hazard
warning flashers may vary from country to
country.
Related information
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 163)
•
Using turn signals (p. 160)
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
164
Using home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lights remain on to illumi-
nate the area around the vehicle. This is called
home safe lighting.
To activate home safe lighting:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Push the left-side steering wheel lever
toward the dashboard and release.
3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
When the function is activated, a symbol will be
shown in the instrument panel and the parking
lights, outer door handle lights* and the license
plate lights will be illuminated.
The length of time home safe lighting remains
illuminated can be set in the center display.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the center dis-
play (p. 155)
•
Welcome Light (p. 164)
Welcome Light
Approach lighting is activated when the vehicle
is unlocked and can be used to provide light as
you walk toward the vehicle.
The function is activated when the remote key is
used for unlocking. The parking lights, outer door
handle lights*, license plate lights, interior ceiling
lights, footwell lighting and trunk/cargo compart-
ment lighting will be illuminated. If a door is
opened while the function is activated, the light-
ing in the outer door handle* and the interior
lighting will remain illuminated for a longer period
of time.
This function can be activated and deactivated in
the center display.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the center dis-
play (p. 155)
•
Using home safe lighting (p. 164)
•
Remote key (p. 241)
Interior Lighting
The interior is equipped with several different
types of lighting to improve the experience. This
includes reading lamps, glove box lighting and
ground lighting.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
turned on and off manually within 5 minutes
after:
•
the engine has been switched off and the
ignition is in mode 0.
•
the vehicle is unlocked but the engine has
not been started.
Front ceiling lighting
The controls in the ceiling console for the front reading
lights and courtesy lighting.
Reading light left side
Passenger compartment lighting
LIGHTING
}}
* Option/accessory.
165
Courtesy lighting auto switch
Reading light right side
Reading lights
The reading lights on the right and left sides are
switched on and off by briefly pressing the but-
tons in the ceiling console. To adjust the bright-
ness, press and hold the button.
Passenger compartment lighting
Briefly press the button in the ceiling console to
switch on or off the footwell lighting and ceiling
lighting.
Courtesy lighting auto switch
Activate the auto switch by briefly pressing the
AUTO button in the ceiling console. With Auto
activated, the indicator light in the button and the
courtesy lighting come on and are turned off as
follows.
The courtesy lighting:
•
comes on when the vehicle is unlocked and
when the ignition is switched off
•
goes off when the engine is started and
when the vehicle is locked
•
comes on or goes off when a side door is
opened or closed
•
remains on for 2 minutes if any of the side
doors are open.
Rear roof lighting
Reading lights are located in the rear section of
the vehicle and can also be used as passenger
compartment lighting.
Reading lights over the rear seat.
In vehicles with panoramic roofs*, there are two lamp
units, one on each side of the ceiling.
Briefly press the button on the light to turn on or
off the reading lights. To adjust the brightness,
press and hold the button.
Glove compartment lighting
The glove compartment lighting comes on or
goes off when the glove compartment is opened
or closed.
Vanity mirror lighting*
The vanity mirror lighting comes on or goes off
when the cover over the mirror is opened or
closed.
Ground lighting*
The ground lighting comes on or goes off when a
door is opened or closed.
||
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
166
Doorsill lighting
The doorsill lighting comes on or goes off when a
door is opened or closed.
Cargo compartment lighting
The cargo compartment lighting comes on or
goes off when the cargo compartment is opened
or closed.
The lighting in the tailgate can be manually
switched on and off using a button adjacent to
the lamp*. Note that the lamp is off when the tail-
gate is opened, if it was off when the tailgate was
closed.
6
There is also a flashlight* recessed in the right-
hand side panel in the cargo compartment.
6
Ambient Lighting
The ambient lighting comes on when the doors
are opened and goes out when the vehicle is
locked. Ambient lighting brightness can be
adjusted in the center display and also fine-tuned
using the thumb wheel in the dashboard.
Mood lighting*
The vehicle is equipped with LEDs that provide
faint lighting in various colors. This lighting is on
when the engine is running. Mood lighting can be
adjusted in the center display and also fine-tuned
using the thumb wheel in the dashboard.
Lighting in the door storage
compartments
Lighting in the door storage compartments
comes on when the doors are opened and goes
out when the vehicle is locked. The brightness
can be adjusted using the thumb wheel in the
dashboard.
Lighting in the tunnel console's front
cup holder
The lighting in front console cup holders
switches on when the vehicle is unlocked and off
when the vehicle is locked. The brightness can
be adjusted using the thumb wheel in the dash-
board.
Related information
•
Adjusting interior lighting (p. 166)
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 570)
Adjusting interior lighting
Illumination in the vehicle varies depending on
ignition mode. The interior lighting can be
adjusted with a thumb wheel in the dashboard
and certain light functions can also be adjusted
via the center display.
The thumb wheel on the dash-
board to the left of the steering
wheel can be used to adjust
the brightness of the display
lighting, instrument lights,
ambient lighting and mood
lighting*.
Adjust ambient decor lighting
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting.
3. Choose from among the following settings:
•
Under
Ambient Light Intensity, select
Off, Low or High.
•
Under
Ambient Light Level, select
Reduced or Full.
Adjusting mood lighting*
The vehicle is equipped with several LEDs that
provide faint lighting in various colors. This light-
ing is on when the engine is running.
6
Only applies to Volvo Ocean Race.
LIGHTING
167
Changing the brightness
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Under
Interior Mood Light Intensity, select
Off, Low or High.
Changing the color of the light
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Choose
By Temperature or By Color to
change the color of the light.
If
By Temperature is selected, the light will
change according to the temperature set for
the passenger compartment.
If
By Color is selected, the subcategory
Theme Colors can be used to make further
adjustments.
Related information
•
Interior Lighting (p. 164)
•
Adjusting light functions via the center dis-
play (p. 155)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
170
Windows, glass and mirrors
The vehicle is equipped with controls for win-
dows, glass and mirrors. Some of the windows
in the car are laminated.
Laminated glass
The windshield has laminated glass. Laminated
glass is also available as on option for some
other glass surfaces. Laminated glass is rein-
forced, which provides better protection against
break-ins and improved soundproofing in the
passenger compartment.
The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass.
The symbol shows the windows containing laminated
glass
1
Related information
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)
•
Panoramic roof* (p. 176)
•
Power windows (p. 171)
•
Rearview/door mirrors (p. 173)
•
Using sun curtains* (p. 173)
•
Head-up display* (p. 144)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated wind-
shield* (p. 225)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 226)
Pinch protection for windows and
sun curtains
All power windows and sun curtains* have a
pinch protection function that is triggered if any-
thing blocks them while they are opening or
closing.
If pinch protection is activated, movement will
stop and then retract automatically to approx.
50 mm (2 inches) from the point at which it was
blocked (or to full ventilation position).
It is still possible to override pinch protection
when closing is interrupted (e.g. due to ice) by
pressing and holding down the control in the
same direction.
If there is any problem with the pinch protection,
a rest procedure can be tested.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the func-
tion for automatic opening and closing must
be reset to function correctly. A reset is
required in order for the pinch protection to
work.
Related information
•
Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 171)
•
Operating the power windows (p. 172)
1
Does not apply to windshield and panoramic roof*, which are always laminated and therefore do not have this symbol.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
171
•
Using sun curtains* (p. 173)
•
Panoramic roof* (p. 176)
Reset procedure for pinch
protection
If you experience any problems with the electri-
cal functions for the power windows, you can try
to perform a reset.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the func-
tion for automatic opening and closing must
be reset to function correctly. A reset is
required in order for the pinch protection to
work.
If the problem persists or if it affects the panor-
amic roof or sunroof, contact a workshop
2
.
Resetting a power window
1. Start with the window in the closed position.
2. Then operate the window in manual mode
three times upward toward the closed posi-
tion.
> The system will be automatically initiated.
Related information
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)
•
Operating the power windows (p. 172)
•
Using sun curtains* (p. 173)
Power windows
The power windows are operated using the con-
trol panels found in the doors. The driver's door
has controls for operating all windows and for
activating the child safety locks.
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the
controls in the rear doors to prevent the
doors or windows from being opened from
the inside.
Rear window controls.
Front window controls.
The power windows have pinch protection. If
there is any problem with the pinch protection, a
rest procedure can be tested.
2
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
172
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects can be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
operating controls.
•
Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
•
Remember to always cut the current to
the power windows by setting the vehi-
cle's electrical system to ignition mode 0
and then taking the remote key with you
when leaving the vehicle.
•
Never stick objects or body parts out
through the windows, even if the vehicle
electrical system is completely turned off.
Related information
•
Operating the power windows (p. 172)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)
•
Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 171)
Operating the power windows
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. The control
panels in the other doors can be used to oper-
ate that particular door.
The power windows have pinch protection. If
there is any problem with the pinch protection, a
rest procedure can be tested.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects can be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
operating controls.
•
Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
•
Remember to always cut the current to
the power windows by setting the vehi-
cle's electrical system to ignition mode 0
and then taking the remote key with you
when leaving the vehicle.
•
Never stick objects or body parts out
through the windows, even if the vehicle
electrical system is completely turned off.
Operating the power windows.
Operating manually. Move one of the controls
slightly up or down. The power windows go
up or down while the control is held in posi-
tion.
Operating with automatic controls. Move one
of the controls up or down to its end position
and release it. The window moves automati-
cally to its fully closed/open position.
To use the power windows, the ignition must be
in at least mode I or II. After the ignition has
been switched off, the power windows can be
operated for several minutes or until a door is
opened. Only one control panel can be operated
at a time.
It can also be operated using keyless opening*
with the door handle.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
173
WARNING
Make sure that no child or other passenger
comes into contact with the windows as they
are closing with keyless closing*.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
heard when the rear windows are open is to
also open the front windows slightly.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
over approx. 180 km/h (ca112 mph), but they
can be closed.
The driver is always responsible for following
applicable traffic regulations.
Related information
•
Power windows (p. 171)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)
•
Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 171)
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 257)
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote key
(p. 244)
Using sun curtains*
There are integrated sun curtains in each rear
door.
Rear door – manually operated
The illustration is generic – the design may vary.
Hook with locking mechanism
–
Pull up the sun curtain and hook it to the
upper section of the door frame.
The window can be opened and closed when the
sun curtain is being used.
Related information
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)
•
Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 171)
•
Power windows (p. 171)
Rearview/door mirrors
The rearview mirror and door mirrors can be
used to improve the driver's visibility behind the
vehicle.
Rearview mirror
The rearview mirror can be easily adjusted man-
ually. The rearview mirror can be equipped with
HomeLink*, auto-dim* and compass*.
Door mirrors
WARNING
The door mirror on the passenger side is
curved to improve visibility. Objects in the mir-
ror may appear farther away than they actually
are.
The joystick in the drivers' door control panel is
used to adjust the position of the door mirrors.
There are also several automatic settings that
can also be connected to the memory function
buttons for the power seat*.
Related information
•
HomeLink
®
* (p. 467)
•
Compass* (p. 470)
•
Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming func-
tion (p. 174)
•
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 175)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
174
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 226)
Adjusting the rearview mirror
dimming function
Bright light entering the vehicle from behind, e.g.
from the headlights of following vehicles, could
reflect in the rearview mirror and door mirrors
and cause a glare. Use the dimming function
when light from behind is distracting.
Auto-dim
If bright light enters the vehicle from behind, the
door mirrors will automatically dim. Auto-dim is
always active when the engine is running, except
when reverse gear is engaged.
NOTE
Adjustments to the sensitivity level will not be
noticeable immediately but will instead take
effect after a short period of time.
The sensitivity level for dimming will affect both
the rearview mirror and door mirrors.
To change the dimming sensitivity level:
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3.
Under
Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
The rearview mirror instead has two sensors -
one pointing forward and one pointing rearward -
which work together to identify and eliminate
glare. The forward-pointing sensor monitors
ambient light, while the rearward-pointing sensor
monitors light from the headlights of following
vehicles.
For the door mirrors to be equipped with auto-
dim, the rearview mirror must also be equipped
with auto-dim.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g. a parking
permit, transponder, sunshade or objects on
the seats or in the cargo compartment in a
way that prevents light from reaching the sen-
sors, the auto-dim function in the door and
rearview mirrors will be reduced.
Related information
•
Rearview/door mirrors (p. 173)
•
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 175)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
175
Adjusting the door mirrors
To improve visibility to the rear, the door mirrors
need to be adjusted to the driver's height and
seating position. There are several automatic
settings that can also be connected to the mem-
ory function buttons for the power seat*.
Controls used for door mirrors
Door mirror controls.
The joystick in the drivers' door control panel is
used to adjust the position of the door mirrors.
The ignition must be in at least mode I.
1.
Press the L button for the left door mirror or
R for the right door mirror. The button will
light up.
2. Adjust the position using the joystick located
between the buttons.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light in
the button will go out.
Automatically folding door mirrors*
The door mirrors can be automatically folded
when driving or parking in tight spaces.
1.
Press the L and R buttons at the same time.
2. Release the buttons after about 1 second.
The mirrors will automatically stop when they
are completely folded in.
Open the mirrors by pressing L and R at the
same time. The mirrors will automatically stop
when they are completely open.
Resetting the mirrors' position
A mirror that has been moved out of position
manually (e.g. hit or bumped into) must be electri-
cally returned to its normal position for automatic
folding* to function properly.
1.
Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and R
buttons at the same time.
2.
Open them again by pressing the L and R
buttons at the same time.
3. Repeat the above procedure as needed.
The mirrors are now reset to their original posi-
tions.
Tilting when parking
3
The door mirrors can be tilted down to help give
the driver a better view along the sides of the
vehicle, e.g. of the curb when parking.
–
Select reverse gear and press the L or R mir-
ror button.
Please note that the button may need to be
pressed twice depending on settings. When the
door mirror is tilted down, the light in the button
will flash. When reverse gear is engaged, the
door mirrors will automatically start to move after
3 seconds and will reach their original position
after about 8 seconds.
Automatically tilting when parking
3
With this setting, the door mirrors will automati-
cally tilt down when reverse gear is engaged. The
folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted.
To immediately return the door mirrors to their
original position, press the L or R button twice.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3.
Under
Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which mir-
ror to tilt.
3
Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat with memory buttons*.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
176
Automatic folding when the vehicle is
locked*
The door mirrors can automatically fold in when
the vehicle is locked and open when the vehicle
is unlocked using the remote key.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3.
Select
Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate/deactivate.
Related information
•
Rearview/door mirrors (p. 173)
•
Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming func-
tion (p. 174)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 226)
Panoramic roof*
The panoramic roof is divided into two glass
sections. The front section can be opened verti-
cally at the rear edge (ventilation position) or hor-
izontally (open position). The rear section cannot
be moved.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and
sun curtain made of perforated fabric (located
beneath the glass sections) for extra protection
in e.g. bright sunlight.
The panoramic roof and sun curtain are operated
using the controls in the ceiling.
It can also be operated using keyless opening*
with the door handle.
To operate the panoramic roof and sun curtain,
the ignition must be in mode I or II.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects can be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
operating controls.
•
Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
•
Remember to always cut the current to
the power windows by setting the vehi-
cle's electrical system to ignition mode 0
and then taking the remote key with you
when leaving the vehicle.
•
Never stick objects or body parts out
through the windows, even if the vehicle
electrical system is completely turned off.
CAUTION
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are installed.
•
Never place heavy objects on the panor-
amic roof.
CAUTION
•
Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof. Be careful not to scratch
any surfaces or damage the trim.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it is
frozen in place.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
177
Wind blocker
The panoramic roof is equipped with a wind
blocker that folds up when the roof is open.
Related information
•
Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 177)
•
Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun curtain
(p. 179)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 257)
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote key
(p. 244)
Operating the panoramic roof*
The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper-
ated using a control in the ceiling panel, and
both are equipped with pinch protection.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects can be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
operating controls.
•
Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
•
Remember to always cut the current to
the power windows by setting the vehi-
cle's electrical system to ignition mode 0
and then taking the remote key with you
when leaving the vehicle.
•
Never stick objects or body parts out
through the windows, even if the vehicle
electrical system is completely turned off.
CAUTION
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are installed.
•
Never place heavy objects on the panor-
amic roof.
CAUTION
•
Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof. Be careful not to scratch
any surfaces or damage the trim.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it is
frozen in place.
To operate the panoramic roof and sun curtain,
the ignition must be in mode I or II.
It can also be operated using keyless opening*
with the door handle.
WARNING
Make sure that no child or other passenger
comes into contact with the windows as they
are closing with keyless closing*.
CAUTION
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
closed when closing.
The movement of the roof will stop if the control
is released during manual operation or when the
glass has reached the comfort
4
or fully open/
closed position. The movement of both the pan-
oramic roof and the sun curtain is also stopped if
the control in the ceiling is operated again in the
4
The comfort position is a position which helps keep wind and resonance sounds to a comfortably low level.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
178
direction opposite that of the current direction of
movement.
The panoramic roof and sun curtain are also
equipped with pinch protection. If there is any
problem with the pinch protection, a rest proce-
dure can be tested.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun curtain must be
completely open before the panoramic roof
can be opened. For the reverse procedure,
the panoramic roof must be completely
closed before the sun curtain can be com-
pletely closed.
Opening and closing ventilation
position
Ventilation position, rear edge raised.
Open by pushing the control upward once.
Close by pushing the control downward
once.
When ventilation mode is selected, the rear edge
of the front section of the roof is raised. If the sun
curtain is fully closed when ventilation position is
selected, it will automatically open approx. 50 mm
(approx. 2 inches).
If the panoramic roof is closed from the ventila-
tion position, the sun curtain will also automati-
cally close.
Fully opening and closing the
panoramic roof with the control in the
ceiling
Operation, manual mode
Operation, automatic mode
Manual operation
1. To open the sun curtain, pull the control
backward to the manual open mode.
2. To open the panoramic roof to the comfort
position, pull the control backward a second
time to the manual opening position.
3. To open the panoramic roof fully, pull the
control backward a third time to the manual
opening position.
Close by repeating the above procedure in
reverse - push the control forward/down to the
manual closing position.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
179
Auto operation
1. To open the sun curtain to the fully open
position, pull the control backward to the
auto open mode and release.
2. To open the panoramic roof to the comfort
position, pull the control backward a second
time to the automatic opening position and
release.
3. To open the panoramic roof fully, pull the
control backward a third time to the auto-
matic opening position and release.
Close by repeating the above procedure in
reverse - push the control forward/down to the
auto close position.
Automatic operation - rapid opening or
closing
The panoramic roof and sun curtain can be
opened or closed simultaneously:
–
Open - press the control backward twice to
the automatic operation position and release.
–
Close - press the control forward/down twice
to the automatic operation position and
release.
Related information
•
Panoramic roof* (p. 176)
•
Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun curtain
(p. 179)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 257)
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote key
(p. 244)
Auto closing the panoramic roof*
sun curtain
With this function, the sun curtain closes auto-
matically 15 minutes after the car has been
locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is done
to lower the passenger compartment tempera-
ture and protect the upholstery against being
bleached by the sun.
The function is deactivated as the default factory
setting and can be activated or deactivated using
the center display.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
My Car Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
NOTE
The sun curtain also closes when all windows
are closed with keyless closing*.
Related information
•
Panoramic roof* (p. 176)
•
Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 177)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 170)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
180
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 257)
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote key
(p. 244)
Wiper blades and washer fluid
The wipers and the washer fluid are used to
improve visibility and the headlight pattern.
The washer nozzles are heated* automatically in
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from
freezing.
When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of
washer fluid remaining, a message to refill will
appear in the instrument panel.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping when
backing up (p. 185)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 182)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 645)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
Using the windshield wipers
The windshield wipers clean the windshield. The
right-side steering wheel lever is used to adjust
windshield wiper settings.
Right-hand steering wheel lever.
Thumb wheel, used to set rain sensor sensi-
tivity and interval wiper speed.
Single sweep
Move the lever down and release for a
single sweep.
Wipers off
Move the lever to position 0 to turn off
the windshield wipers.
Interval wipers
Set the number of sweeps per time unit
with the thumb wheel when interval wip-
ers are selected.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
181
Continuous wipers
Move the lever upward for the wipers to
operate at normal speed.
Move the lever upward again for the wip-
ers to operate at high speed.
CAUTION
Before activating the wipers, make sure that
the wiper blades are not frozen in place and
that any snow or ice on the windshield and
rear window has been scraped away.
CAUTION
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
clean the windshield. The windshield must be
wet when the windshield wipers are working.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping when
backing up (p. 185)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 182)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 645)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
Using the rain sensor
The rain sensor monitors the amount of water on
the windshield and automatically starts the wind-
shield wipers. Rain sensor sensitivity can be
adjusted using the thumb wheel on the right-
hand steering wheel lever.
Right-hand steering wheel lever.
Rain sensor button
Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper speed
When the rain sensor is activated, the
rain
sensor symbol will be displayed in the instrument
panel.
Activating the rain sensor
When the rain sensor is activated, the engine
must be running or the ignition must be in mode I
or II. The windshield wiper lever must also be in
position 0 or in the single sweep position.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
182
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-
sor button
.
If the lever is pressed down, the wipers will make
additional sweeps across the windshield.
Turn the thumb wheel upward for increased sen-
sitivity and downward for decreased sensitivity.
The wipers will make one extra sweep when the
thumb wheel is turned upward.
Deactivate the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
rain sensor button or moving the lever upward to
another wiper mode.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated in
ignition mode 0 or when the engine is switched
off.
The rain sensor is also automatically deactivated
when the wiper blades are put in the service
position. The rain sensor will reactivate when
service mode is switched off.
CAUTION
The windshield wipers may start inadvertently
and be damaged in automatic car washes.
Deactivate the rain sensor when the engine is
running or when the ignition is in mode I or II.
The symbol in the instrument panel will go
out.
Related information
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping when
backing up (p. 185)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 182)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 645)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
Using the rain sensor's memory
function
The rain sensor monitors the amount of water on
the windshield and automatically starts the wind-
shield wipers.
Activating/deactivating memory
function
The rain sensor's memory function can be set to
activate so that the rain sensor button does not
need to be pressed each time the engine is
started:
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select
Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping when
backing up (p. 185)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
183
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 645)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
Using the windshield and headlight
washers
The windshield and headlight washers clean the
windshield and headlights. Use the right-side
steering wheel lever to start the windshield and
headlight washers.
Starting the windshield and headlight
washers
Washing function, right-hand steering wheel lever.
–
Move the right-hand steering wheel lever
toward the steering wheel to start the wind-
shield and headlight washers.
> After the lever is released, the wipers
make several extra sweeps.
CAUTION
Avoid activating the washer system when it is
frozen or the fluid reservoir is empty. Other-
wise, there is a risk of damaging the pump.
Headlight washer*
To save washer fluid, the headlights are washed
automatically according to a defined interval
when the headlights are on.
Reduced washing
When there is about 1 liter (1 qt) of washer fluid
left in the reservoir and the
Washer fluid Level
low, refill
message is displayed in the instrument
panel together with the
symbol, the washer
fluid supply to the headlights is cut off. This is to
prioritize windshield cleaning and visibility
through it. The headlights are only washed if high
or low beam is on.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping when
backing up (p. 185)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 182)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
184
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 645)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
Using the rear window wiper/
washer
The rear window wiper/washer cleans the rear
window. Use the right-side steering wheel lever
to start and control the wiper/washer.
Activating the rear window wiper/
washer
NOTE
The rear window wiper motor is equipped with
overheating protection that switches off the
motor if it becomes overheated. The rear win-
dow wiper can be operated again after a cool-
ing-down period.
Select for interval rear window wiper.
Select for continuous rear window
wiper.
–
Move the right-side steering wheel lever for-
ward to wash/wipe the rear window.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping when
backing up (p. 185)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 182)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 645)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
185
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up
If reverse gear is engaged while the windshield
wipers are on, the rear window wipers will start.
This function is deactivated when a different
gear is selected.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select
Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti-
vate automatic rear window wiping when
backing up.
If the rear window wipers are already in continu-
ous wiper mode, no change will be made.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 182)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 645)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
188
Manual front seats
The power front seats can be adjusted in a num-
ber of different ways for optimal comfort and
ergonomics.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush-
ion* by moving the control up/down.
1
Change the length of the seat cushion* by
pulling up the lever and moving the cushion
forward/backward.
Move the seat forward/backing by lifting the
handle and moving the seat to a suitable dis-
tance from the steering wheel and pedals.
Check to make sure the seat is securely
locked into place after its setting has been
changed.
Adjust lumbar support* by pressing the but-
ton up/down/forward/rearward
2
.
Raise/lower the seat by moving the control
up/down.
Change the backrest tilt by turning the knob
on the backrest.
WARNING
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the brake
pedal can be depressed fully. In addition,
position the seat as far rearward as com-
fort and control allow.
•
Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.
Related information
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 191)
•
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 193)
•
Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
•
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 194)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 195)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 196)
1
Only applies to the driver's seat.
2
Applies for four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forward/rearward.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
189
Power* front seats
The power front seats can be adjusted in a num-
ber of different ways for optimal comfort and
ergonomics. The power seat can be moved for-
ward/backward and up/down. The height and
length* of the seat cushion and the tilt of the
backrest can be adjusted. Lumbar support* can
be adjusted up, down, forward and backward
3
.
The power seats can be adjusted for a certain
period of time after the door is unlocked without
the engine running. The seats can always be
adjusted while the engine is running. They can
also be adjusted for a short period after the
engine is turned off.
CAUTION
The power seats have an overload protector
that is triggered if a seat is blocked by any
object. If this occurs, remove the object and
attempt to adjust the seat again.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 191)
•
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 193)
•
Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
•
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 194)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 195)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 196)
Adjusting the power* front seats
Set the desired seating position using the con-
trols on the front seat cushion. To set the con-
venience functions, turn the multifunction con-
trol
4
upward/downward.
The illustration shows the controls in a vehicle with four-
way lumbar support*. Vehicles with two-way lumbar sup-
port* do not have the rotary multifunction control.
In vehicles with four-way lumbar support*,
turn the multifunction control
4
up/down to
set the convenience functions. In vehicles
with two-way lumbar support*, use the round
button to adjust the lumbar support forward/
rearward.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush-
ion by moving the control up/down.
3
Applies for four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forward/rearward.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
190
Raise/lower the seat by moving the control
up/down.
Move the seat forward/rearward by moving
the control forward/rearward.
Change the backrest tilt by moving the con-
trol forward/backward.
Only one movement (forward/rearward/up/
down) can be performed at a time.
The front seat backrests cannot be folded down
completely.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 191)
•
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 193)
•
Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
•
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 194)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 195)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 196)
Storing positions for seats, mirrors
and head-up display*
Adjustment settings for the power* seat, door
mirrors and head-up display* can be stored in
the memory buttons.
Two different positions for the power* seat, door
mirrors and head-up display* can be stored using
the memory buttons. The buttons are located on
the inside of either one or both* front doors.
Button M for storing a setting
Memory button
Memory button
Storing positions
1. Adjust the seat, door mirrors and head-up
display to the desired position.
2.
Press and hold the M button. The indicator
light in the button will illuminate.
3.
Within three seconds, press and hold the 1
or 2 button.
> When the position has been stored in the
memory button, an audio signal will sound
and the indicator light in the M button will
go out.
If none of the memory buttons are pressed within
three seconds, the M button will go out and no
position will be stored.
The seats, door mirrors or head-up display must
be readjusted before a new memory position can
be set.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 191)
•
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 193)
4
Not available in vehicles with two-way lumbar support*.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
191
•
Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
•
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 194)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 195)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 196)
•
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 175)
•
Head-up display settings* (p. 146)
Using stored positions for seats,
mirrors and head-up display*
If the positions for the power* seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* have been stored, they can
be easily activated using the memory buttons.
Using a stored position
A stored position can be used with the front door
open or closed:
Front door open
–
Briefly press one of the memory buttons 1
(
) or 2 ( ). The power seats, door mirrors
and head-up display will move and stop at
the positions stored in that button.
Front door closed
–
Press and hold one of the memory buttons 1
(
) or 2 ( ) until the seat, door mirrors
and head-up display stop in the positions
stored in that memory button.
If the memory button is released, the seat, door
mirrors and head-up display will stop moving.
WARNING
•
This list point needs to be translated
exactly to: "Because the driver's seat can
be adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on the
power seat control panel.
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
•
The seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rearward
as comfort and control allow.
•
The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is in
motion.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
192
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 193)
•
Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
•
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 194)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 195)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 196)
•
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 175)
•
Head-up display settings* (p. 146)
Front seat massage* settings
The settings for the multifunctional seats can be
adjusted using either the mutifunction control on
the seat or the center display. The adjustment
settings are shown in the center display.
Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat
cushion.
Massage settings
The following massage settings are available:
•
On/Off: Select On/Off to turn on/off the
massage function.
•
Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage
programs. Select Swell, Tread, Advanced,
Lumbar or Shoulder.
•
Intensity: Select Low, Normal or High.
•
Speed: Select Slow, Normal or Fast.
Restarting the massage function
The massage function turns off automatically
after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated
manually.
–
Tap Restart, which is displayed in the center
display, to restart the selected massage pro-
gram.
> The massage program will restart. If no
selection is made, the message will be
stored in Top view.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 191)
•
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 193)
•
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 194)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 195)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 196)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
193
Adjusting front seat massage
settings*
The settings for the multifunctional seats can be
adjusted using either the mutifunction control on
the seat or the center display. The adjustment
settings are shown in the center display.
Adjusting front seat massage settings
The front seat backrests have a massage func-
tion. Air-filled cushions provide the massaging
action and a number of settings are available.
The massage function can only be activated
when the engine is running.
1. Activate the multifunction control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat
settings view will appear in the center dis-
play.
2.
Select
Massage in the seat settings view.
3. Select massage settings by tapping the cen-
ter display or by moving the cursor up/down
using the multifunction control's upper
/
lower
buttons. Change a setting in the
selected function by tapping the arrows on
the center display or by using the multifunc-
tion control's front
/rear buttons.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 191)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 193)
•
Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
•
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 194)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 195)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 196)
Adjusting* front seat cushion length
Depending on the selected equipment level, the
length of the seat cushion can either be
adjusted using the multifunction control* on the
side of the seat cushion, or manually adjusted
using the control on the front of the seat cush-
ion.
Adjusting seat cushion length using the
multifunction control
The multifunction control, located on the side of the seat
cushion.
1. Activate the multifunction control by turning
the control
upward/downward. The seat
settings view will appear in the center dis-
play.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
194
2.
Select
Cushion extension in the seat set-
tings view.
•
Push in the front part of the four-way but-
ton
to extend the seat cushion.
•
Press the rear part of the four-way button
to shorten the seat cushion.
Manually adjusting seat cushion length
Control for adjusting seat cushion.
1.
Grasp the handle on the front of the seat
and pull upward.
2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion.
3. Release the handle and make sure the seat
cushion locks into position.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 191)
•
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
•
Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
•
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 194)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 195)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 196)
Adjusting front seat side bolster
settings*
Enhance comfort in the front seat by adjusting
the sides of the backrest.
Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat
cushion.
The side bolsters in the front seat backrests can
be inflated/deflated to adjust the amount of sup-
port provided. The settings for the multifunctional
seats can be adjusted using either the mutifunc-
tion control on the seat or the center display. The
adjustment settings are shown in the center dis-
play.
To adjust the side bolsters:
1. Activate the multifunction control by turning
it upward/downward . The seat settings
view will appear in the center display.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
195
2.
Select
Side bolsters in the seat settings
view.
•
Press the front part of the four-way button
to increase side bolster support
.
•
Press the rear part of the four-way button
to decrease side bolster support
.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 191)
•
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 193)
•
Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 195)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 196)
Adjusting front seat lumbar
support*
Use the control on the side of the seat cushion
to adjust the lumbar support.
Multifunction control, in vehicles with four-way lumbar
support*.
Control in vehicles with two-way lumbar support*.
Lumbar support is adjusted using the multifunc-
tion control in vehicles with four-way lumbar sup-
port*, or the round button in vehicles with two-
way lumbar support*. The control is located on
the side of the seat cushion. Depending on the
selected equipment level, the lumbar support can
be adjusted forward/rearward and up/down
(four-way lumbar support) or forward/backward
(two-way lumbar support).
Adjusting lumbar support in vehicles
with four-way lumbar support
1. Activate the multifunction control by turning
the control
upward/downward. The seat
settings view will appear in the center dis-
play.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
196
2.
Select
Lumbar in the seat settings view.
•
Press the round button up
/down
to move the lumbar support upward/
downward.
•
Press the front part
of the button to
increase lumbar support.
•
Press the rear part
of the button to
decrease lumbar support.
Adjusting lumbar support in vehicles
with two-way lumbar support
1.
Press the front part of the round button
to increase lumbar support.
2.
Press the rear part
of the round button to
decrease lumbar support.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 191)
•
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 193)
•
Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
•
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 194)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 196)
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
The front passenger seat can be adjusted from
the driver's seat.
Activating the function
The function is activated via the function view in
the center display:
Tap the Adjust Passenger
Seat button to activate.
Adjust passenger seat
The driver must adjust the passenger seat within
10 seconds of activating the function. If no
adjustment is made within this time, the function
will be deactivated.
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the
controls on the driver's seat:
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
197
Move the passenger seat forward/rearward
by moving the control forward/rearward.
Change the backrest tilt of the passenger
seat by moving the control forward/back-
ward.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 188)
•
Power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
•
Storing positions for seats, mirrors and head-
up display* (p. 190)
•
Using stored positions for seats, mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 191)
•
Adjusting front seat massage settings*
(p. 193)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 193)
•
Front seat massage* settings (p. 192)
•
Adjusting front seat side bolster settings*
(p. 194)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 195)
Folding down the rear seat
backrests
The rear seat backrest is split into two sections.
The two sections can be folded forward individu-
ally.
WARNING
•
Adjust the seat and ensure it locks into
position before driving. Use caution when
adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or care-
less adjustments could lead to injury.
•
Long objects must always be securely
tied down to help prevent injury or dam-
age in the event of sudden braking.
•
Always turn off the engine and apply the
parking brake when loading or unloading
the vehicle.
•
Put the gear selector in P to help prevent
the gear selector from being inadvertently
moved.
CAUTION
When the backrest is folded down, make sure
there are no objects in the rear seat, and the
seat belts are not buckled. Otherwise there is
a risk of damage to the upholstery.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
198
CAUTION
The seat cushion of the integrated child
restraint* must be in the stowed position
before the rear seat backrest can be folded
down.
The armrest* in the center seat must be
raised before the seat backrest is folded
down.
The ski hatch must be closed before the seat
backrest is folded down.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
ward and/or the backrest adjusted so that the
rear seat backrests can be fully lowered.
Folding down backrests with the
electric backrest folding function*
If the vehicle is equipped with the electric rear
seat backrest fold-down function, the buttons in
the cargo compartment can be used to fold down
the backrests. It is also possible to fold down the
rear seat using the handle on the top of the seat.
WARNING
Before using the electric fold-down function,
be sure that no one is sitting in or is near the
rear seat, that there are no objects on the rear
seat and that the backrest is not obstructed in
any way.
Folding backrests with the buttons in the
cargo compartment
The vehicle must be stationary and the tailgate
must be open before a backrest can be folded
down. Make sure that the rear seat is unoccupied
and that there are no objects on the seat.
1. Fold down the center seat's head restraint
manually.
2. Press and hold one of the electric fold-down
buttons. The buttons are marked L (left back-
rest section) and R (right backrest section).
3. The backrests will release from the locks.
The head restraint will fold down first and
then the backrest will automatically fold
down to the horizontal position.
Folding the backrest with the handle in the
rear seat
Make sure that the rear seat is unoccupied and
that there are no objects on the seat.
Fold down the center seat's head restraint
manually.
Pull the handle in the vehicle's left or right
rear seat backrest forward to fold down the
left or right section of the rear seat.
> The backrests will release from the locks.
The head restraint will fold down first and
then the backrest will automatically fold
down to the horizontal position.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
199
Folding the backrests manually
If the vehicle only has the manual backrest fold-
down function, fold down the right or left section
of the seat using the handle in the rear seat.
Make sure that the rear seat is unoccupied and
that there are no objects on the seat.
Fold down the center seat's head restraint
manually.
Pull the handle in the vehicle's left or right
rear seat backrest forward to fold down the
left or right section of the rear seat.
3. The backrest lock will release and the back-
rest will automatically fold down to the hori-
zontal position.
Folding up the backrest
To fold up the backrest to the upright position
manually:
1. Move the backrest upward/rearward.
2. Press the backrest until it locks into position.
3. Fold up the head restraints manually.
4. Adjust the center head restraint if necessary.
WARNING
When the backrest is restored to an upright
position, the red indicator should no longer be
visible. If it is still visible, the backrest is not
locked in place.
WARNING
Make sure that the rear seat backrest and
head restraint are locked securely in place
after the seat is folded up.
The head restraints at the outer seats must
always be raised when there is a passenger in
one of these spots of the rear seat.
Related information
•
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
(p. 199)
•
Private Locking (p. 269)
•
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 269)
Adjusting the rear seat head
restraints
Adjust the center head restraint in the rear seat
to the seat occupant's height. Fold down the
outboard head restraints* to improve rear visibil-
ity.
Adjusting the center seat head restraint
The center head restraint should be adjusted to
suit the passenger's height. The entire back of
the head should be covered if possible. Manually
move the restraint up or down as needed.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
200
To lower the restraint, push and hold the button
(see illustration) while carefully lowering the head
restraint.
WARNING
The center seat head restraint must be in its
lowest position when the seat is not occupied.
When the center seat is occupied, the head
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
passenger's height, covering the entire back
of the head if possible.
Folding the rear seat outboard head
restraints using the center display*
The outer head restraints can be folded via the
center display's function view. The head restraint
can be folded down when the vehicle is in igni-
tion mode 0.
Tap the Headrest Fold button
to activate/deactivate folding.
Manually push the head restraint until it clicks
into position.
WARNING
Do not lower the head restraint if there are
passengers in any of the rear seats.
WARNING
The head restraint must be locked in the
upright position after it has been folded up.
Folding the rear seat outboard head
restraints using the handle
For vehicles with the electric folding function*,
the outboard head restraints can be folded using
the handle on the top of the seat (see illustration
.) On models without electrically folding back-
rests, the head restraints cannot be moved.
Related information
•
Folding down the rear seat backrests
(p. 197)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
201
Steering wheel controls and horn
The steering wheel has a horn and controls for
e.g. driver support systems and voice control.
Steering wheel keypads and paddles*.
Driver support system controls
5
.
Paddle* for manually shifting gears (auto-
matic transmission).
Controls for voice commands, accessing
menus and messages, and handling phone
calls.
Horn
The horn is located in the center of the steering wheel.
Related information
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 201)
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to various
positions.
The steering wheel's reach and height can be adjusted.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and ensure it locks
into position before driving. Never adjust the
steering wheel while driving.
Steering wheel force can be adjusted with
speed-dependent power steering. Steering wheel
force is adjusted according to the vehicle's speed
to give the driver an enhanced sense of control
and stability.
5
Speed limiter, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Alert* and Pilot Assist.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
202
Steering wheel adjuster lever.
1. Move the lever forward to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
3. Pull the lever back to lock the steering wheel
into place. If the lever is difficult to move,
press the steering wheel lightly while pulling
the lever.
Related information
•
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 201)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 189)
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
204
Climate
The vehicle is equipped with electronic climate
control. The climate system cools, heats and
dehumidifies the air in the passenger compart-
ment.
All of the climate system functions are controlled
from the center display and the buttons on the
center console.
Certain rear seat functions can also be controlled
from the climate controls* on the rear of the tun-
nel console.
Related information
•
Climate zones (p. 204)
•
Climate control sensors (p. 205)
•
Perceived temperature (p. 205)
•
Climate control system voice commands
(p. 206)
•
Parking climate* (p. 232)
•
Air quality (p. 207)
•
Air distribution (p. 210)
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
Climate zones
The vehicle is divided into climate zones to make
it possible to set different temperatures for dif-
ferent parts of the passenger compartment.
2-zone climate system
Climate zones with 2-zone climate system.
In 2-zone climate systems, the passenger com-
partment temperature can be set separately for
the left and right sides of the vehicle.
4-zone climate system*
Climate zones with 4-zone climate system.
In 4-zone climate systems, the passenger com-
partment temperature can be set separately for
the left and right sides of the vehicle, and for the
front and rear seats.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 204)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
205
Climate control sensors
The climate system has a number of sensors to
help regulate the climate settings in the vehicle.
Location of the sensors
Humidity sensor - in the rearview mirror con-
sole.
Ambient temperature sensor - in the right-
side door mirror.
Sunlight sensors - on the upper side of the
dashboard.
Passenger compartment temperature sensor
- near the buttons in the center console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.
On vehicles equipped with the Interior Air Quality
System*, there is also an air quality sensor in the
climate system's air intake.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 204)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)
Perceived temperature
The climate control system regulates the climate
in the passenger compartment based on per-
ceived temperature, not actual temperature.
The selected passenger compartment tempera-
ture is based on the physical perception of the
current ambient temperature, airflow speed,
humidity, sunlight in the passenger compartment,
etc.
The system has a sunlight sensor that detects
which side of the vehicle the sunlight is shining
on and adjusts the temperature accordingly. This
means that the temperature of the air coming out
of the vents may be different for the left and right
sides, even if the temperature setting is the same
for both sides.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 204)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
206
Climate control system voice
commands
1
Voice commands can be used for the climate
control system to e.g. change temperature, acti-
vate seat heating* or change blower speed.
Tap and say one of the following commands:
•
"
Climate" - starts a command dialog for cli-
mate controls and provides examples of
commands that can be used.
•
"
Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
desired temperature.
•
"
Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raises/lowers the set tem-
perature.
•
"
Sync temperature" - synchronizes the
temperature for all climate zones in the vehi-
cle with the temperature set for the driver's
side.
•
"
Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the
desired air vent.
•
"
Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes
the desired air vent.
•
"
Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes
blower speed to Max/Off.
•
"
Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" -
raises/lowers the set blower speed.
•
"
Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate
control.
•
"
Air condition on"/"Air condition off" -
activates/deactivates air conditioning.
•
"
Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" -
activates/deactivates air recirculation.
•
"
Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster"
- activates/deactivates window and door mir-
ror defrosting.
•
"
Turn on max defroster
"/"
Turn off max
defroster
" - activates/deactivates max
defroster.
•
"
Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster" - activates/deactivates
heated windshield*.
•
"
Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster" - Activates/deactivates heated
rear window and door mirrors.
•
"
Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac-
tivates heated steering wheel*.
•
"
Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
level of steering wheel heating*.
•
"
Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
- activates/deactivates seat heating*.
•
"
Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
raises/lowers the level of seat heating*.
•
"
Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat
ventilation" - activates/deactivates seat
ventilation*.
•
"
Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
ventilation" - raises/lowers the level of seat
ventilation*.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 204)
•
Voice control (p. 147)
•
Using voice commands (p. 148)
•
Voice control settings (p. 150)
1
Certain markets only.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
207
Air quality
The materials used in the passenger compart-
ment and air filtering system have been selected
to ensure a high level of air quality in the passen-
ger compartment.
Materials used in the passenger
compartment
The materials in the passenger compartment are
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
for people with asthma or allergies.
The materials have been developed and tested to
minimize dust in the passenger compartment and
make it easier to keep clean.
The mats in both the passenger compartment
and cargo compartment can be easily removed
for cleaning.
Use Volvo-recommended cleaning agents and
car care products to clean the interior.
Air filtering systems
In addition to the passenger compartment filter,
the Clean Zone Interior Package* and Interior Air
Quality System* also help maintain high air qual-
ity in the passenger compartment.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 204)
•
Clean Zone* (p. 207)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 208)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)
•
Passenger compartment air filter (p. 209)
Clean Zone*
The Clean Zone function monitors the condi-
tions affecting good air quality in the passenger
compartment and indicates whether they are ful-
filled or not.
The indicator is shown in the center display's
Climate view.
The indicator is shown in the climate bar
when Climate view is not open.
If the conditions are not met, the text
Clean
Zone will be shown in white. When all the condi-
tions are met, the text will change to blue.
Clean Zone monitors whether:
•
All doors and tailgate are closed.
•
All side windows and panoramic roof* are
closed.
•
The Interior Air Quality System* is activated.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
208
•
The blower is activated.
•
Air recirculation is deactivated.
NOTE
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
quality is good, but only that the conditions for
good air quality have been met.
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 207)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 208)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)
•
Passenger compartment air filter (p. 209)
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) is a series
of modifications that filters even more allergy and
asthma-inducing substances from the passenger
compartment.
CZIP includes the following:
•
An enhanced function that starts the blower
when the vehicle is unlocked using the
remote key. The blower will then fill the pas-
senger compartment with fresh air. The func-
tion starts when required and switches off
automatically after a period of time or when
one of the passenger compartment doors is
opened. The amount of time the blower runs
gradually decreases due to reduced need up
until the vehicle is 4 years old.
•
The fully automatic Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS).
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 207)
•
Clean Zone* (p. 207)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)
•
Passenger compartment air filter (p. 209)
Interior Air Quality System*
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto-
matic air quality system that removes gases and
particles to reduce odors and contaminants in
the passenger compartment.
IAQS is part of the Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP) and removes air contaminants such as
particles, hydrocarbons, nitric oxides and ground-
level ozone.
If the system's air quality sensors detect contami-
nants in the outside air, the air intake closes and
air recirculation is activated.
NOTE
To ensure optimal air quality in the passenger
compartment, the air quality sensor should
always be engaged.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to pre-
vent fogging.
In the event of fogging, use the defroster
functions for the windshield, side windows
and rear window.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 209)
•
Air quality (p. 207)
•
Clean Zone* (p. 207)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
209
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 208)
•
Passenger compartment air filter (p. 209)
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
The air quality sensor is part of the fully automa-
ted Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).
The air quality sensor can be switched on or off.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2.
Tap
Climate.
3.
Select
Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac-
tivate the air quality sensor.
Related information
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)
Passenger compartment air filter
All air entering the passenger compartment
through the climate control system intake is fil-
tered.
Replacing the passenger compartment
filter
To maintain the high performance of the climate
control system, the filter must be replaced regu-
larly. Follow Volvo's service schedule for recom-
mended replacement intervals. When driving in
areas with a lot of smog, dust, etc., the filter may
need to be changed more frequently.
NOTE
There are two types of passenger compart-
ment filters. Make sure that the correct filter
is installed.
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 207)
•
Clean Zone* (p. 207)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 208)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 208)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
210
Air distribution
The climate system distributes incoming air
through a number of vents in the passenger
compartment.
Automatic and manual air distribution
When the auto-climate feature is on, air distribu-
tion is regulated automatically. Air distribution can
also be controlled manually.
Adjustable air vents
Certain air vents in the vehicle are adjustable,
which means they can be opened/closed and the
direction of the air flow from the vent can be
adjusted.
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger com-
partment.
2-zone system - four vents on the dashboard
and one on each of the pillars between the
front and rear doors.
4-zone system* - two additional vents on the
rear side of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 204)
•
Adjusting air distribution (p. 210)
•
Opening, closing and directing air vents
(p. 211)
•
Air distribution options (p. 213)
Adjusting air distribution
Air distribution can be adjusted manually if nee-
ded.
Air distribution buttons in Climate view.
Air distribution - windshield defrost vents
Air distribution - dashboard and center con-
sole air vents
Air distribution - floor air vents
1.
Open Climate view in the center display.
2. Tap one or more air distribution buttons to
open/close the airflow for that vent.
> The air distribution changes and the but-
tons will light up or go out.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
211
Related information
•
Air distribution (p. 210)
•
Opening, closing and directing air vents
(p. 211)
•
Air distribution options (p. 213)
Opening, closing and directing air
vents
Some of the air vents in the passenger compart-
ment can be individually opened, closed and
directed.
Misting can be eliminated by directing the outer
air vents towards the door windows.
Direct the outer air vents into the passenger
compartment to maintain a comfortable tempera-
ture in warm weather.
Opening and closing the air vents
Front seat air vents:
Air vent knob
2
.
–
Turn the knob to open/close the airflow from
the vent.
When the mark on the knob is vertical, the
airflow is strongest.
2
The illustration is generic - air vent design varies depending on its location.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
212
Rear seat air vents:
Air vent thumb wheel
2
.
–
Turn the thumb wheel to open/close the air-
flow from the vent.
The more white lines that are visible, the
stronger the airflow.
Directing air flow
Airflow control
2
.
–
Move the control from side to side or up and
down to direct airflow from the vent.
Related information
•
Air distribution (p. 210)
•
Adjusting air distribution (p. 210)
•
Air distribution options (p. 213)
2
The illustration is generic - air vent design varies depending on its location.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
213
Air distribution options
Air distribution can be adjusted manually if nee-
ded. The following options are available.
Air distribution Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system will revert to automatic mode.
Main airflow from defroster vents. Some airflow from other vents. Helps remove ice and condensation in cold and humid weather
(blower speed should not be set too low).
Main airflow from dashboard vents. Some airflow from other vents. Provides effective cooling in warm weather.
Main airflow from floor vents. Some airflow from other vents. Provides heating or cooling in footwell areas.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
214
Air distribution Purpose
Main airflow from defroster and dashboard vents. Some airflow
from other vents.
Provides a comfortable climate in warm and dry weather.
Main airflow from defroster and floor vents. Some airflow from
other vents.
Provides a comfortable climate and effective defogging in cold and
humid weather.
Main airflow from dashboard and floor vents. Some airflow from
other vents.
Provides a comfortable climate in sunny, cool weather.
Main airflow from defroster, dashboard and floor vents. Provides balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
216
Climate system controls
The climate system functions are controlled from
physical buttons on the center console, the cen-
ter display, and the climate panel on the rear
side of the tunnel console*.
Physical buttons in the center console
Button for heated windshield* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door mir-
rors.
Climate bar in the center display
The most common climate system functions can
be controlled from the climate bar.
Temperature control for the driver and pas-
senger sides.
Control for heated* and ventilated* driver and
passenger seats, and heated steering
wheel*.
Button for opening Climate view. The graphic
in the button shows activated climate system
settings.
Climate view in the center display
Tap the center button on the climate bar to open
Climate view.
Depending on equipment level, Climate view may
be divided into several tabs. Toggle between the
tabs by swiping the screen to the left/right or by
tapping the desired heading.
Main climate
In addition to the functions in the climate bar,
other main climate system functions can be con-
trolled from the
Main climate tab.
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting
windows and door mirrors.
AC - Air conditioning controls.
Recirc - Air recirculation controls.
Air distribution controls.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
217
Blower control for the front seats (also for
the rear seats on vehicles with 2-zone sys-
tems).
AUTO - Automatic climate control.
Rear climate control*
All climate system functions for the rear seat can
be controlled from the
Rear climate tab.
2nd row climate - Rear seat climate func-
tion. Blower control for rear seats.
Rear seat temperature control.
Rear seat heating control*.
Parking climate*
Parking climate functions can be controlled from
the
Parking climate tab.
Climate controls on the rear side of the
tunnel console*
Rear seat heating control*.
Blower control for rear seats.
Rear seat temperature control.
Button for locking/unlocking climate panel.
If the vehicle has heated rear seats* but does not
have a climate panel on the rear side of the tun-
nel console, there will be buttons on the rear side
of the tunnel console for the heated seats.
The climate panel has a screen lock to help pre-
vent inadvertently changing blower speed and
temperature. When the screen is locked, only the
controls for seat adjustment* and the unlock but-
ton will be displayed.
After unlocking, blower speed and temperature
can also be changed from the climate panel and
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
218
all selected climate settings will be displayed. The
screen locks automatically after a period of inac-
tivity.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 204)
•
Activating and deactivating power front
seats* (p. 218)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
seats* (p. 219)
•
Activating and deactivating front seat ventila-
tion* (p. 220)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated steer-
ing wheel* (p. 221)
•
Activating auto climate control (p. 222)
•
Activating and deactivating recirculation
(p. 223)
•
Activating and deactivating max defroster
(p. 224)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated wind-
shield* (p. 225)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 226)
•
Setting the blower speed for the front seats
(p. 227)
•
Setting the blower speed for the rear seats*
(p. 228)
•
Synchronize temperature (p. 231)
•
Activating and deactivating air conditioning
(p. 231)
Activating and deactivating power
front seats*
The seats can be heated for added comfort for
the driver and passengers in cold weather.
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Tap the left- or right-side steering wheel and
seat button in the center display's climate
bar to open the controls for steering wheel
and seat heating.
If the vehicle is not equipped with ventilated
seats or heated steering wheel, the button
for seat heating is directly accessible in the
climate bar.
2. Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to
select one of the four levels:
Off, High,
Medium or Low.
> The level is changed and the set level is
displayed in the button.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
219
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated front
seat* (p. 219)
Activating and deactivating the
heated front seat*
The seats can be heated for added comfort for
the driver and passengers in cold weather.
Seat heating can be set to automatically activate
when the engine is started. When set to automat-
ically activate, heating will be turned on at low
ambient temperatures.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2.
Tap
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Driver Seat Heating Level
and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level
to activate/deactivate automatic start of
heated driver's and passenger seat.
4.
Select
Low, Medium or High to select level
after the function has been activated.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
•
Activating and deactivating power front
seats* (p. 218)
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear seats*
The seats can be heated for added comfort for
the driver and passengers in cold weather.
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seats from the front seats*
Seat heating buttons in the Rear climate group in Cli-
mate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display and
select the
Rear climate tab.
2. Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to
select one of the four levels:
Off, High,
Medium or Low.
> The level is changed and the set level is
displayed in the button.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
220
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seats from the rear seat
With 2-zone system:
Buttons for seat heating on the rear side of the tunnel
console.
–
Press repeatedly on the left or right seat
heating buttons on the rear side of the tun-
nel console to select one of four levels:
Off,
High, Medium or Low.
> The level is changed and the indicator
lights in the button display the level.
With 4-zone system*:
Seat heating controls and indicator lights on the rear
side of the tunnel console.
–
Press repeatedly on the left or right seat
heating buttons in the climate panel on the
tunnel console to select one of four levels:
Off, High, Medium or Low.
> The level will be changed and the climate
panel screen will show the new level.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
Activating and deactivating front
seat ventilation*
The seats can be ventilated to provide increased
comfort in warm weather.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrest that draw air through the seat
upholstery. The cooler the passenger compart-
ment is, the greater the cooling effect of the ven-
tilation. The system can be activated when the
engine is running.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
221
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Tap the left- or right-side steering wheel and
seat button in the center display's climate
bar to open the controls for steering wheel
and seat heating.
If the vehicle is not equipped with heated
seats or heated steering wheel, the button
for seat ventilation is directly accessible in
the climate bar.
2. Tap the seat ventilation button repeatedly to
select one of the four levels:
Off, High,
Medium or Low.
> The level is changed and the set level is
displayed in the button.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated for added
comfort in cold weather.
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Tap the driver's side steering wheel and seat
button in the climate bar in the center display
to open the controls for steering wheel and
seat heating.
If the vehicle is not equipped with heated or
ventilated seats, the button for steering
wheel heating is directly accessible in the cli-
mate bar.
2. Tap the steering wheel heating button
repeatedly to select one of the four levels:
Off, High, Medium or Low.
> The level is changed and the set level is
displayed in the button.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
•
Activating and deactivating automatic steer-
ing wheel heating* (p. 222)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
222
Activating and deactivating
automatic steering wheel heating*
The steering wheel can be heated for added
comfort in cold weather.
Steering wheel heating can be set to automati-
cally activate when the engine is started. When
set to automatically activate, heating will be
turned on at low ambient temperatures.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2.
Tap
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level to activate/deactivate automatic start
of heated steering wheel.
4.
Select
Low, Medium or High to select level
after the function has been activated.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the heated steer-
ing wheel* (p. 221)
Activating auto climate control
If auto climate control is activated, several cli-
mate system functions are controlled automati-
cally.
Auto climate button in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap or press and hold
AUTO.
•
Tap - air recirculation, air conditioning and
air distribution are controlled automati-
cally.
•
Press and hold - air recirculation, air con-
ditioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically. Temperature and blower
speed are changed to standard settings:
22 °C (72 °F) and speed
3 (speed 2 in
the rear seat
3
).
> Auto climate mode is activated and the
button lights up.
NOTE
It is possible to change the temperature and
blower speed without deactivating automatic
climate control. Automatic climate control is
deactivated when the air distribution is
changed manually or when the max defroster
is activated.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
3
For vehicles with 4-zone climate system*.
CLIMATE CONTROL
223
Activating and deactivating
recirculation
The climate system's recirculation function helps
shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes, etc. by
reusing the air in the passenger compartment.
Air recirculation button in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Recirc.
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated
and the button lights up/goes out.
CAUTION
If the air in the vehicle is recirculated too long,
there is a risk of fogging on the inside of the
windows.
NOTE
Recirculation cannot be activated when the
max defroster is on.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
•
Activating and deactivating the recirculation
timer setting (p. 223)
Activating and deactivating the
recirculation timer setting
The climate system's recirculation function helps
shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes, etc. by
reusing the air in the passenger compartment.
When the recirculation timer is activated, air recir-
culation will switch off automatically after 20
minutes.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2.
Tap
Climate.
3.
Tap
Recirculation Timer to activate/deacti-
vate the recirculation timer.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating recirculation
(p. 223)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
224
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
Max defroster is used to quickly remove conden-
sation and ice from windows.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from the center console
A button in the center console offers quick
access to the max defroster.
On vehicles with heated windshields*, the max
defroster can only be activated separately from
Climate view in the center display.
Button in center console.
Vehicles without a heated windshield:
–
Tap the button.
> The max defroster is activated/deacti-
vated and the button lights up/goes out.
Vehicles with a heated windshield:
–
Press the button repeatedly to switch
between the three levels:
•
Activated windshield heating
•
Activated windshield heating and max
defroster
•
Deactivated.
> The heated windshield and max defroster
are activated/deactivated and the button
lights up/goes out.
NOTE
The max defroster starts after a slight delay to
avoid a brief increase in blower speed if the
heated windshield function has been deacti-
vated by pressing the button twice in quick
succession.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from the center display
Max defroster in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Max.
> The max defroster is activated/deacti-
vated and the button lights up/goes out.
Max defroster deactivates automatic cli-
mate control and air recirculation, acti-
vates the air conditioning, and changes
blower speed to
5 and temperature to HI.
When max defroster is deactivated, the
climate system reverts to the previous set-
tings.
NOTE
The volume increases when the blower speed
is changed to
5.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
225
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
Activating and deactivating the
heated windshield*
Windshield heating is used to quickly remove
condensation and ice from the windshield.
Activating and deactivating windshield
heating from the center console
A button in the center console is used to quickly
access windshield heating.
Button in center console.
–
Press the button repeatedly to switch
between the three levels:
•
Activated windshield heating
•
Activated windshield heating and max
defroster
•
Deactivated.
> The heated windshield and max defroster
are activated/deactivated and the button
lights up/goes out.
Activating and deactivating windshield
heating from the center display
Windshield heating button in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Electric.
> Windshield heating is activated/deacti-
vated and the button lights up/goes out.
NOTE
Triangular areas at the far sides of the wind-
shield are not heated and will take slightly
longer to defrost/de-ice.
NOTE
The heated windshield may affect the per-
formance of transponders and other commu-
nication equipment.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
226
NOTE
If windshield heating is activated when the
Start/Stop function auto-stops the engine,
the engine will be restarted.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
•
Activating and deactivating automatic wind-
shield heating* (p. 226)
Activating and deactivating
automatic windshield heating*
Windshield heating is used to quickly remove
condensation and ice from the windshield.
Windshield heating can be set to automatically
activate when the engine is started. With auto-
matic start activated, heating will be activated
when there is a risk of ice or condensation on the
windows or mirrors. Heating is automatically
switched off when the window or door mirror is
sufficiently warm and the condensation or ice is
gone.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2.
Tap
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Front Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic windshield heating.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the heated wind-
shield* (p. 225)
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door
mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove condensation and ice
from the glass.
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors from the
center console
A button in the center console offers quick
access to the heated rear window and door mir-
rors functions.
Button in center console.
–
Tap the button.
> Heated windows and door mirrors are
activated and the button lights up/goes
out.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
227
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors from the
center display
Rear window/door mirror heating button in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
Rear.
> Heated windows and door mirrors are
activated and the button lights up/goes
out.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
•
Automatically activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door mirrors
(p. 227)
Automatically activating and
deactivating the heated rear window
and door mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove condensation and ice
from the glass.
It is possible to select whether rear window and
door mirror heating should be automatically acti-
vated or deactivated when the engine is started.
With automatic start activated, heating will be
activated when there is a risk of ice or condensa-
tion on the windows or mirrors. Heating is auto-
matically switched off when the window or door
mirror is sufficiently warm and the condensation
or ice is gone.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2.
Tap
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic rear window and door
heating.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 226)
Setting the blower speed for the
front seats
4
The blower can be set to several different auto-
matically controlled speeds for the front seat.
Blower control buttons in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap the desired blower speed:
Off, 1-5 or
Max.
> The blower speed will be changed and the
buttons for the set speed will light up.
CAUTION
The air conditioning will not engage if the
blower is turned off completely, which may
cause fogging on the inside of the windows.
4
The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
228
NOTE
The climate system automatically adapts air-
flow as needed within the set blower speed,
which means that airflow speed may vary
slightly within the same blower speed.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
Setting the blower speed for the
rear seats*
The blower can be set to several different auto-
matically controlled speeds for the rear seat.
Setting blower speed for the rear seats
from the front seats
Blower control buttons in the Rear climate tab in Cli-
mate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display and
select the
Rear climate tab.
2.
Tap the desired blower speed,
1-5.
The blower speed for the rear seats can be
switched off by tapping
2nd row climate.
> The blower speed will be changed and the
buttons for the set speed will light up.
Setting blower speed for the rear seats
from the rear seats
1. Tap the unlock button on the tunnel con-
sole's climate panel to access the controls.
Blower controls on the rear climate panel of the tunnel
console.
2.
Tap the desired blower speed,
1-5.
> The blower speed will be changed and the
buttons for the set speed will light up.
NOTE
The blower speed for the rear seat cannot be
set if the blower speed for the front seat is
Off.
The rear seat blower speed can only be
turned off from the climate view in the center
display.
CLIMATE CONTROL
229
NOTE
The climate system automatically adapts air-
flow as needed within the set blower speed,
which means that airflow speed may vary
slightly within the same blower speed.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
Setting the temperature for the
front seats
5
The temperature can be set to the desired num-
ber of degrees for the front seat climate zones.
Temperature buttons in the climate bar.
1. Tap the left- or right-side temperature but-
tons in the center display's climate bar to
open the control.
Temperature control.
2. Set the temperature by doing one of the fol-
lowing:
•
dragging the control to the desired tem-
perature, or
•
tapping
+− to raise/lower the tempera-
ture.
> The temperature will be set and the but-
ton will display the new temperature.
NOTE
Heating/cooling cannot be accelerated by
choosing a higher/lower temperature than
the desired temperature.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
5
The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
230
Setting the temperature for the rear
seats*
The temperature can be set to the desired num-
ber of degrees for the rear seat climate zones.
Setting the temperature for the rear
seats from the front seats
Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in Climate
view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display and
select the
Rear climate tab.
2. Tap the left- or right-side temperature button
to open the control.
Temperature control.
3. Set the temperature by:
•
dragging the control to the desired tem-
perature
•
tapping
+− to raise/lower the tempera-
ture.
> The temperature will be set and the but-
ton will display the new temperature.
Setting the temperature for the rear
seats from the rear seats
1. Tap the unlock button on the tunnel con-
sole's climate panel to access the controls.
Temperature controls on the rear climate panel of the
tunnel console.
2.
Tap the left or right side's
<> buttons to
lower/raise the temperature.
> The temperature will be changed and the
climate panel screen will show the new
temperature.
NOTE
Heating/cooling cannot be accelerated by
choosing a higher/lower temperature than
the desired temperature.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
231
Synchronize temperature
The temperature in the different climate zones of
the vehicle can be synchronized with the tem-
perature set for the driver's side.
Synchronization button on the driver's side temperature
control.
1. Tap the driver's side temperature button in
the center display's climate bar to open the
control.
2.
Tap
Synchronize temperature .
> The temperature for all of the vehicle's cli-
mate zones will be synchronized with the
one set for the driver's side and the syn-
chronization symbol will be displayed next
to the temperature button.
Synchronization is stopped with another press on
Synchronize temperature or by changing the
temperature setting for a climate zone other than
the driver's.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as needed.
Air conditioning button in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Tap
AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deacti-
vated and the button lights up/goes out.
When the air conditioning is activated, it
will be switched on and off automatically
by the climate system as needed.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
232
NOTE
For optimum function of the air conditioning,
close all side windows and the panoramic
roof*.
NOTE
The air conditioning cannot be activated when
the fan speed is set to
Off.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
Parking climate*
Parking climate is an umbrella term for various
functions that improve the passenger compart-
ment climate when the vehicle is parked, e.g.
preconditioning.
Parking climate functions are controlled from the
Parking climate tab in the center display's Climate view.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 204)
•
Preconditioning* (p. 233)
•
Climate comfort retaining function* (p. 236)
•
Parking climate symbols and messages*
(p. 238)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
233
Preconditioning*
Preconditioning the vehicle before driving can
help reduce wear and reduce energy consump-
tion during a trip.
Preconditioning can be started immediately or
started at a preset time using a timer.
In warm weather, the ventilation system cools the
passenger compartment by blowing air in from
outside. The function cannot heat the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the vehicle works to reach a
comfortable temperature and not the tem-
perature set in the climate system.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 232)
•
Starting and stopping preconditioning*
(p. 233)
•
Preconditioning timer* (p. 234)
Starting and stopping
preconditioning*
Preconditioning ventilates the passenger com-
partment before driving. Preconditioning can be
started in the center display or from a cellular
phone.
Starting and stopping from the vehicle
Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in
Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Tap
Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning starts/stops and the but-
ton lights up/goes out.
NOTE
The vehicle doors and windows should be
closed during preconditioning of the passen-
ger compartment.
Starting from app*
A device with the Volvo On Call* app can be used
to start preconditioning or check settings. Pre-
conditioning ventilates the passenger compart-
ment by blowing in air from outside.
The passenger compartment can also be precon-
ditioned using the Engine Remote Start (ERS)
6
function using the Volvo On Call* app.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 232)
•
Preconditioning* (p. 233)
•
Preconditioning timer* (p. 234)
6
Certain markets only.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
234
Preconditioning timer*
The timer can be set to finish preconditioning at
a predetermined time.
The timer can store up to 8 preset times for:
•
A time on a particular date
•
A time on one or more days of the week, with
or without the repeat function.
Related information
•
Preconditioning* (p. 233)
•
Adding and editing timer settings for precon-
ditioning* (p. 234)
•
Activating and deactivating preconditioning
timer* (p. 235)
•
Deleting preconditioning timer settings*
(p. 236)
Adding and editing timer settings
for preconditioning*
The preconditioning timer can store up to 8 pre-
set timer settings.
Adding a timer setting
Button for adding a timer setting in the Parking climate
tab in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Tap
Add timer.
> A pop-up window will appear.
NOTE
It is not possible to add a time setting if there
are already 8 settings for the timer. Delete a
time setting to be able to add a new one.
4.
Tap
Date to set a time for a specific date.
Tap Days to set a time for one or more days
of the week.
With
Days: Activate/deactivate the repeat
function by selecting/deselecting the
Repeat weekly checkbox.
5.
With
Date: Select a date for preconditioning
by scrolling in the date list using the arrows.
With
Days: Select days of the week for pre-
conditioning by tapping the buttons for the
days.
6. Set the time at which preconditioning should
be completed by scrolling using the arrows in
the clock.
7.
Tap
Confirm to add a timer setting.
> The timer setting will be added to the list
and activated.
Editing a timer setting
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Tap the timer setting you would like to
change.
> A pop-up window will appear.
4. To edit a timer setting, follow the procedures
described under the heading "Adding a timer
setting" above.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
235
Related information
•
Preconditioning* (p. 233)
•
Preconditioning timer* (p. 234)
•
Activating and deactivating preconditioning
timer* (p. 235)
•
Deleting preconditioning timer settings*
(p. 236)
Activating and deactivating
preconditioning timer*
Timer settings in the preconditioning timer can
be activated or deactivated as needed.
Timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in Climate
view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Activate/deactivate a timer setting by tap-
ping the timer button to the right of the set-
ting.
> The timer setting is activated/deactivated
and the button lights up/goes out.
Related information
•
Preconditioning* (p. 233)
•
Preconditioning timer* (p. 234)
•
Adding and editing timer settings for precon-
ditioning* (p. 234)
•
Deleting preconditioning timer settings*
(p. 236)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
236
Deleting preconditioning timer
settings*
A preconditioning timer setting that is no longer
needed can be deleted.
The button for editing a list/deleting a timer setting in
the Parking climate tab in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Tap
Edit list.
4. Tap the editing icon to the right in the list.
>
The icon will change to the text
Delete.
5.
Tap
Delete to confirm.
> The timer setting will be deleted from the
list.
Related information
•
Preconditioning* (p. 233)
•
Preconditioning timer* (p. 234)
•
Adding and editing timer settings for precon-
ditioning* (p. 234)
•
Activating and deactivating preconditioning
timer* (p. 235)
Climate comfort retaining function*
The climate in the passenger compartment can
be maintained when the vehicle is parked, e.g. if
the engine is turned off but the driver or passen-
gers remain in the vehicle.
This function can only be direct-started.
The function utilizes several of the vehicle's sys-
tems:
•
Residual heat from the engine is used to
help heat the passenger compartment to a
comfortable temperature.
•
In warm weather, the ventilation system cools
the passenger compartment by blowing air in
from outside.
NOTE
Climate comfort maintenance will be deacti-
vated if the vehicle is locked from the outside
in order to avoid using residual engine heat
unnecessarily. This function is intended to be
used to maintain climate comfort when the
driver or a passenger remains in the vehicle
after the engine is turned off.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 232)
•
Starting and switching off the climate retain-
ing function when parking* (p. 237)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
237
Starting and switching off the
climate retaining function when
parking*
The climate retaining function maintains the cli-
mate settings in the vehicle after the engine has
been switched off. The function can be activated
in the center display.
Button for retaining climate comfort in the Parking
climate tab in Climate view.
1. Open Climate view in the center display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Tap
Keep climate comfort.
> The climate comfort retaining function will
be activated/deactivated and the button
light will go on/off.
NOTE
Maintained climate comfort is not possible
when there is not sufficient residual engine
heat to maintain the climate settings in the
passenger compartment, or if the outside
temperature is above approximately 20 °C
(68 °F).
NOTE
Climate comfort maintenance will be deacti-
vated if the vehicle is locked from the outside
in order to avoid using residual engine heat
unnecessarily. This function is intended to be
used to maintain climate comfort when the
driver or a passenger remains in the vehicle
after the engine is turned off.
Related information
•
Climate comfort retaining function* (p. 236)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
238
Parking climate symbols and
messages*
A number of symbols and messages related to
parking climate may be displayed in the instru-
ment panel.
Messages related to parking climate can also be
displayed in a device that has the Volvo On Call*
app.
Symbol Message Meaning
Parking climate
Service required
Parking climate is not functioning properly. Contact a workshop
A
to have the system checked as soon as possible.
Parking climate
Temporarily unavailable
Parking climate is temporarily not functioning properly. If the problem persists, contact a workshop
A
to have the sys-
tem checked.
A
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 232)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
240
Lock indication
When the vehicle is locked or unlocked, the turn
signals will flash to indicate that the vehicle has
been locked or unlocked correctly.
Exterior confirmation
Locking
•
The turn signals will flash once and the door
mirrors will fold in
1
to confirm the vehicle is
locked.
Unlocking
•
The turn signals will flash twice and the door
mirrors will fold out
1
to confirm the vehicle is
unlocked.
All doors, tailgate and hood must be closed for
confirmation to be given. If only the driver's door
is closed when the vehicle is locked
2
, the vehicle
will be locked but the turn signals will only flash
to indicate locking when all doors and the hood
and tailgate have been closed.
Lock and alarm indicator
The locks and alarm indicator on the dashboard will dis-
play the status of the locking system.
A long flash indicates that the vehicle is locked.
When the vehicle is locked, this will be indicated
by short, pulsing flashes.
Other indicators
The home safe lighting and approach lighting
functions also indicate when the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
Lock button indicators
Front door
Lock buttons with indicator lights in front door.
Illuminated indicator lights in both front door lock
buttons indicate that all doors are locked. If any
door is opened, the lights in both doors will go
out.
1
Only vehicles with power folding mirrors.
2
Does not apply to vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
241
In rear door*
Lock button with indicator light in rear door.
Illuminated indicator lights in each door indicate
that that particular door is locked. If any door is
unlocked and opened, the indicator light in that
door will go out. The lights in the other doors will
remain illuminated.
Related information
•
Lock confirmation settings (p. 241)
•
Welcome Light (p. 164)
•
Using home safe lighting (p. 164)
Lock confirmation settings
Settings for how the vehicle confirms locking
and unlocking can be adjusted in the center dis-
play's Settings menu.
Locking response:
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
My Car Locking.
3.
Tap
Visible Locking Feedback to deacti-
vate the function or to select when the vehi-
cle should provide a visible response: during
Lock, Unlock or Both.
4. Select to receive an audible response when
locking the vehicle by marking
Audible
Locking Feedback.
Folding door mirrors* confirmation:
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3.
Select
Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate or deactivate the function.
Related information
•
Lock indication (p. 240)
Remote key
The remote key is used to lock and unlock
doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler door. The
remote key must be in the vehicle in order to
start the engine.
Remote control key
3
, on left, and button-less key ((Key
Tag)*), on right.
The remote key is not physically used to start the
ignition because the vehicle is standard-equipped
with keyless start (Passive Start).
To start the vehicle, the key must be in the front
section of the passenger compartment, e.g. in the
driver's pocket or in a cup holder in the tunnel
console.
3
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
242
The keyless system for locking/unlocking the
doors, tailgate (Passive Entry*) and fuel filler door
is available as an option. This system has a range
in a semicircle with a radius of approximately
1.5 meter (5 feet) out from the driver's door and
approx. 1 meter (3 feet) out from the tailgate.
With keyless start in combination with keyless
locking and unlocking, the remote key can be
located anywhere in the passenger compartment
or cargo compartment in order to start the
engine.
Each remote key supplied with the vehicle can be
linked to a driver profile with unique settings for
the vehicle. When a key with a specific profile is
used, the vehicle settings are adjusted according
to that profile.
Buttonless key, Key Tag
For vehicles equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking*, a smaller, lighter and button-less key
(Key Tag
4
) is also provided. It works the same
way as the regular remote key as regard keyless
start and keyless locking and unlocking. The key
is waterproof up to a depth of approx. 10 meters
(30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It does not have a
detachable key blade and its battery cannot be
replaced.
Remote key buttons
The remote key has four buttons, one on the left side
and three on the right
3
.
Locking - Press once to lock the doors,
tailgate and fuel filler door and arm the
alarm.
Press and hold to close all windows.
Unlocking - Press once to unlock the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler door and disarm
the alarm.
Press and hold to open all windows at the
same time. This total airing function can be
used to e.g. quickly air out the vehicle in hot
weather.
Tailgate - Unlock and disarm the tailgate
only. On vehicles equipped with the power
tailgate*, press and hold to automatically
open the tailgate. Press and hold to close an
open tailgate (an audible warning signal will
be given).
Panic alarm - Used to attract attention in
emergency situations. Press and hold the
button for at least 3 seconds or press twice
within 3 seconds to activate the turn signals
and horn. To deactivate, wait at least 5 sec-
onds and press the button again. If no action
is taken, the panic alarm will deactivate auto-
matically after 3 minutes.
WARNING
If anyone is left in the vehicle, make sure that
power to the power windows and panoramic
roof* is cut off by always taking the remote
key with you when you leave the vehicle.
4
Även kallad sportnyckel.
3
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
243
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
key in the vehicle.
•
If the remote key or Key Tag is left in the
vehicle, it will be deactivated when the
vehicle is locked and the alarm set using
another valid key. The deactivated key will
be reactivated when the vehicle is
unlocked.
•
If the remote key or Red Key is left in the
vehicle, it will be deactivated even if the
vehicle is locked using Volvo On Call, and
will be reactivated when the vehicle is
unlocked using Volvo On Call or by
pressing the unlock button on the key.
Interference
Electromagnetic fields or obstructing objects may
interfere with the remote key's functions for key-
less start and keyless locking and unlocking*.
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote control key near
metal objects or electronic devices, e.g. cell
phones, tablets, laptops or chargers – pref-
erably no closer than 10-15 cm (4-6 in.).
If you experience interference, use the remote
key's detachable blade to unlock the vehicle and
place the remote key in the backup key reader in
the tunnel console cup holder to disarm the
alarm.
NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the
cup holder, make sure that no other vehicle
keys, metal objects or electronic devices (e.g.
cell phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) are
found in the cup holder. Multiple vehicle keys
close to each other in the cup holder can dis-
rupt their functionality.
WARNING
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To mini-
mize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do
not idle the engine except as necessary, serv-
ice your vehicle in a well ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more infor-
mation go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/
passenger-vehicle.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote key
(p. 244)
•
Remote key range (p. 246)
•
Replacing the remote key's battery (p. 247)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 252)
•
Electronic immobilizer (p. 255)
•
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
(p. 140)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
244
Locking and unlocking using the
remote key
All doors, tailgate and fuel filler door can be
locked and unlocked simultaneously using the
buttons on the remote key.
Locking with remote key
Remote key
5
.
–
Press the button on the remote key to
lock.
To activate the locking sequence, the driver's
door must be closed
6
. If any of the other doors or
the tailgate are open, they will be locked and the
alarm will be armed once they are closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
key in the vehicle.
•
If the remote key or Key Tag is left in the
vehicle, it will be deactivated when the
vehicle is locked and the alarm set using
another valid key. The deactivated key will
be reactivated when the vehicle is
unlocked.
•
If the remote key or Red Key is left in the
vehicle, it will be deactivated even if the
vehicle is locked using Volvo On Call, and
will be reactivated when the vehicle is
unlocked using Volvo On Call or by
pressing the unlock button on the key.
Locking when the tailgate is open
NOTE
If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is still
open, make sure that the remote key is not
left in the cargo compartment when the tail-
gate is closed and the entire vehicle is
locked
7
.
Unlocking with remote key
–
Press the button on the remote key to
unlock.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or tailgate are opened within
two minutes after being unlocked, they will auto-
matically relock. This function reduces the risk of
inadvertently leaving the vehicle unlocked.
Remote key not working
NOTE
Move closer to the vehicle and try to unlock it
again.
If the remote key is not working to lock or unlock
the vehicle, its battery may be discharged. Use
the detachable key blade to lock/unlock the driv-
er's door instead.
Related information
•
Settings for remote and inside door unlock
(p. 245)
•
Unlocking the tailgate using the remote key
(p. 245)
•
Remote key (p. 241)
5
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
6
If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking, all side doors must be closed.
7
If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the vehicle, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
245
•
Replacing the remote key's battery (p. 247)
•
Locking and unlocking with detachable key
blade (p. 253)
Settings for remote and inside door
unlock
Several different sequences are available for
remote unlocking.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock
.
3. Select alternative:
•
All Doors
- unlocks all doors at the same time.
•
Single Door
- unlocks the driver's door. Press the remote
key unlock button twice to unlock all doors.
The settings made here also affect central lock-
ing using the inside door handle.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote key
(p. 244)
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the vehi-
cle (p. 260)
Unlocking the tailgate using the
remote key
The remote key can be used to unlock the tail-
gate while keeping the rest of the vehicle locked.
Use the button on the remote key to disarm and
unlock the tailgate.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
246
1.
Press the
button on the remote key.
> The lock and alarm indicator on the dash-
board will go out to indicate that the vehi-
cle is no longer fully armed.
The tailgate will be unlocked but remain
closed. However, the side doors will
remain locked and armed.
Press lightly on the rubberized pressure
plate under the tailgate handle to open
the tailgate.
If the tailgate is not opened within
2 minutes, it will be relocked and the
alarm armed.
2.
With the optional power tailgate* -
Hold and press (about 1.5 seconds) the
button on the remote key
> The tailgate will unlock and open. How-
ever, the side doors will remain locked and
armed.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote key
(p. 244)
•
Opening and closing the power tailgate*
(p. 264)
Remote key range
In order to function correctly, the remote key
must be within a certain distance from the vehi-
cle.
Manual use
The remote key's functions for e.g. locking and
unlocking, which are activated by pressing
or
, have a range of approx. 20 meters (65 feet)
from the vehicle.
If the vehicle's locks do not react, move closer
and try again.
Keyless use
8
The shaded areas around the vehicle illustrate the range
of the system's antennas.
For keyless use, a remote key or the Key Tag
must be within the shaded areas shown in the
illustration, i.e. a semicircle with a radius of
approx. 1.5 meter (5 feet) along the sides of the
vehicle or approx. 1 meter (3 feet) from the tail-
gate.
NOTE
The functions of the remote control key can
be disrupted by ambient radio waves, build-
ings, topographical conditions, etc. The vehi-
cle can always be locked/unlocked using the
key blade.
If the remote key is removed from the
vehicle
If the remote key is removed from the
vehicle while the engine is running, the
warning message
Vehicle key not
found Removed from vehicle will be
displayed in the instrument panel and an audible
signal will sound when the last door is closed.
The message will disappear when the key is
returned to the vehicle and the O button on the
right-side steering wheel keypad is pressed or
when the last door is closed again.
8
Models equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*) only.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
247
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 241)
•
Antenna locations for the start and lock sys-
tem (p. 260)
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 256)
Replacing the remote key's battery
The battery in the remote key must be replaced
when it is discharged.
NOTE
All batteries have a limited service life and
must eventually be replaced (does not apply
for Key Tag). The battery's service life varies
depending on how often the vehicle/key is
used.
The remote key battery should be replaced if:
the information symbol illuminates and
the message
Vehicle key bat. low
See Owner's manual is displayed in
the instrument panel
and/or
•
the locks do not react after several attempts
to lock or unlock the vehicle using the
remote key within approx. 20 meter (65 feet)
from the vehicle.
NOTE
Move closer to the vehicle and try to unlock it
again.
The battery in the smaller key without buttons
9
(the Key Tag) cannot be replaced. A new key can
be ordered from an authorized Volvo workshop.
CAUTION
An end-of-life Key Tag must be turned in to
an authorized Volvo workshop. The key must
be deleted from the vehicle because it can
still be used to start the vehicle via backup
start.
9
This key is provided with vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
248
Opening the key and replacing the
battery
Hold the remote key with the front side
(with the Volvo logo) facing up and move the
button on the key ring section to the right.
Slide the front cover slightly upward.
The cover will loosen and can be
removed from the key.
Turn the key over, move the button to the
side and slide the rear cover slightly upward.
The cover will loosen and can be
removed from the key.
Use a screwdriver or similar object to turn
the battery cover counterclockwise so the
markers point to OPEN.
Remove the cover carefully by pressing e.g. a
fingernail into the indentation.
Pry the cover up.
The battery's positive side (+) faces upward.
Carefully pry out the battery as shown in the
illustration.
CAUTION
Avoid touching new batteries and their con-
tact surfaces with your fingers as this will
impair their function.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
249
Insert a new battery with the positive side (+)
facing upward. Do not touch the contact sur-
faces of the remote key battery.
Place the edge of the battery downward
into the holder. Slide the battery forward until
it locks into place under the two plastic
catches.
Press the battery downward until it locks
into place under the upper black plastic
catch.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032,
3 V.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that batteries used in the
remote control key satisfy UN Manual of Test
and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3. The
factory installed batteries and batteries
replaced by an authorized Volvo workshop
satisfy the above criterion.
Replace the battery cover and turn it clock-
wise until it points to CLOSE.
Put the rear cover back into position and
press it down until it clicks into place.
Slide the cover back.
> A second click indicates that the cover is
correctly positioned and locked into place.
Turn the remote key over and press the
front cover down until it clicks into place.
Slide the cover back.
> An additional click indicates that the cover
is correctly in place.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
250
CAUTION
Be sure to dispose of end-of-life batteries in
a way that protects the environment.
WARNING
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To mini-
mize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do
not idle the engine except as necessary, serv-
ice your vehicle in a well ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more infor-
mation go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/
passenger-vehicle.
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 241)
Ordering additional remote keys
Two remote keys are provided with the vehicle.
One Key Tag is also included if the vehicle is
equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*. Addi-
tional keys can be ordered.
A total of 12 keys can be programmed and used
for the same vehicle. An additional driver profile
will be added for each new remote key. This also
applies to the key tag.
Loss of a remote key
If you lose your remote key, you can order a
replacement from a workshop - an authorized
Volvo workshop is recommended. Bring the other
remaining remote keys to the workshop. As an
anti-theft measure, the code of the lost remote
key must be erased from the system.
The current number of keys registered for the
vehicle can be checked via driver profiles in the
center display's Top view. Select
Settings
System Driver Profiles.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you order a new or
duplicate remote control key from an author-
ized Volvo workshop.
You can also obtain additional or duplicate
remote control keys from certain independent
repair facilities and locksmiths that are quali-
fied to make remote control keys. Each key
must be programmed to work with your vehi-
cle.
A list of independent repair facilities and/or
locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and
code replacement keys can be found:
•
on Volvo's website www.volvocars.com/us
•
by calling Volvo Customer Care
1-800-458-1552.
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 241)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
251
Red Key - restricted remote key*
A Red Key makes it possible for the vehicle
owner to set limitations for certain vehicle prop-
erties. The limitations are intended to promote
safe use of the vehicle, e.g. when it is loaned
out.
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the vehi-
cle's maximum speed, set speed reminders and
limit the audio system's volume. Several of the
driver support systems will also always be active.
Otherwise, the Red Key functions in the same
way as a standard remote key.
One or more Red Key can be ordered from a
Volvo retailer. A total of twelve keys can be pro-
grammed and used for the same vehicle. Up to
ten may be restricted keys, but at least two must
be standard remote keys.
These restrictions are intended to help reduce
the risk of accidents and help the driver feel more
secure when handing over the vehicle to e.g. a
young driver, parking attendant or workshop. The
settings for a Red Key cannot be changed by its
user; a regular remote key is needed to change
settings.
Related information
•
Red Key* settings (p. 251)
•
Remote key (p. 241)
Red Key* settings
The holder of a regular remote key can adjust
settings for a Red Key. Certain driver support
functions are always active.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
System Driver Profiles Red Key.
> The following settings can be made:
•
Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise
Control
•
Reduced Maximum Volume
•
Max Speed Limit
•
Speed Limit Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control*:
•
Default setting: Longest interval
Reduced maximum volume (On/Off):
•
Default setting: On
Speed Limiter (On/Off):
•
Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph)
•
The default setting is 120 km/h (75 mph)
•
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
The following symbol and message will
be shown in the instrument panel
Red key Speed limitation cannot
be exceeded.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
252
Speed reminder (On/Off):
•
Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
•
Default setting: 50, 70 and 90 km/h (30, 45
and 55 mph)
•
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
•
Maximum number of simultaneous remind-
ers: 6
Driver support functions
The following driver support functions will always
be active for a Red Key user:
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
•
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)*
•
Distance Alert*
•
City Safety
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
•
Road Sign Information*
Related information
•
Red Key - restricted remote key* (p. 251)
Detachable key blade
The remote key contains a detachable metal key
blade that can be used to activate a number of
functions and preform certain actions.
A Volvo workshop can provide you with the key
blade's unique code, which is recommended in
case you need to order a new key blade.
Using the detachable key blade
The detachable key blade can be used to:
•
manually open the left-side front door if cen-
tral locking cannot be activated with the
remote key.
•
emergency lock all doors.
•
activate/deactivate the rear door mechanical
child safety locks.
The button-less Key Tag
10
does not have a
detachable key blade. If needed, use the standard
remote key's detachable key blade.
Detaching the key blade
Hold the remote key with the front side
(with the Volvo logo) facing up and move the
button on the key ring section to the right.
Slide the front cover slightly upward.
The cover will loosen and can be
removed from the key.
Remove the key blade by pulling it up.
10
Supplied with vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
253
Put the key blade back into its designated
spot in the remote key after use.
Replace the cover by pressing it down
until it clicks into place.
Slide the cover back.
> An additional click indicates that the cover
is correctly in place.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with detachable key
blade (p. 253)
•
Remote key (p. 241)
Locking and unlocking with
detachable key blade
The detachable key blade can be used to unlock
the vehicle from the outside, e.g. if the battery in
the remote key is discharged.
Unlocking
Pull the front left-hand door handle to its end
position to access the lock cylinder.
Put the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn the key clockwise 45 degrees so that
the key blade is pointing straight rearward.
Turn the key blade back 45 degrees to its
original position. Remove the key from the
lock cylinder and release the handle so that it
returns to its original position against the
vehicle.
5. Pull the door handle.
> The door will open.
Lock the door in the same way, but turn the key
45 degrees counterclockwise in step (3).
Turning off the alarm
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the detach-
able key blade and then opened, the alarm
will be triggered.
Location of the backup key reader in the cup holder.
Turn off the alarm by:
1. Place the remote control key on the key sym-
bol in the backup reader in the bottom of the
cup holder in the tunnel console.
2. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
> The start knob will automatically return to
its original position - the alarm signal will
stop and the alarm will be turned off.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
254
Locking
The vehicle can also be locked using the remote
key's detachable key blade, e.g. if either the vehi-
cle's or remote key's batteries are discharged.
The left-hand front door can be locked by insert-
ing the detachable key into the door's lock cylin-
der.
This is the only door with a lock cylinder. The
other doors have lock mechanisms in the side of
the door that must be pushed in using the key
blade. The door will then be locked mechanically
and cannot be opened from the outside.
The doors can still be opened from inside.
Manual door lock. This is not the child lock.
–
Remove the detachable key blade from the
remote key. Insert the key blade into the
opening for the lock mechanism and push
the key in as far as possible, about 12 mm
(0.5 in).
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
The door cannot be opened from the outside.
To return to position A, open the door using
the inside door handle.
The doors can also be unlocked by pressing the
unlock button on the remote key or the central
lock button in the driver's door.
NOTE
•
The door's lock controls only lock that
specific door, not all doors simultane-
ously.
•
A manually locked rear door with an acti-
vated manual or electric child safety lock
cannot be opened from either the outside
or inside of the vehicle. A rear door
locked in this way can only be unlocked
using the remote key or the central
unlocking button.
Related information
•
Detachable key blade (p. 252)
•
Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 271)
•
Replacing the remote key's battery (p. 247)
•
Remote key (p. 241)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
255
Electronic immobilizer
The electronic immobilizer is a start inhibitor that
helps prevent the vehicle from being started by
an unauthorized person.
The vehicle can only be started with the right
remote key.
The following instrument panel error messages
are related to the electronic immobilizer:
Symbol Message Meaning
Vehicle key
not found
See
Owner's
manual
Remote key not
recognized during
start. Place the
remote key on the
key symbol in the
cup holder and try
to start the vehicle
again.
Remote immobilizer with tracking
system
11
The vehicle is equipped with a system that makes
it possible to track and locate the vehicle and to
remotely activate the immobilizer to prevent the
vehicle from being started. Contact your nearest
Volvo retailer for more information and assistance
activating the system.
The following instrument panel error messages
are related to the remote immobilizer with track-
ing system:
Symbol Message Meaning
Remotely
immobilised
Vehicle not
possible to
start
The remote
immobilizer with
tracking system is
activated. The
vehicle cannot be
started. Contact
Volvo On Call
Service Center.
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 241)
•
Ordering additional remote keys (p. 250)
Start and lock system type
designations
The following information contains type designa-
tions for the start and lock system.
Alarm system
USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following condi-
tions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
This device is subject to the following conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Remote keys (Passive entry/Passive
start*)
USA
Volvo Standard Key FCC ID: YGOHUF8423
Volvo Tag ID FCC ID: YGOHUF8432
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
11
Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
256
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Any changes or modification not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate this
equipment.
Canada
Volvo Standard Key IC: 4008C-HUF8423
Volvo Tag ID IC: 4008C-HUF8432
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Immobilizer and Passive entry/Passive
start* systems
USA-FCC ID: LTQVO3134
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Any changes or modification not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate this
equipment.
Canada-IC:3659A-VO3134
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Related information
•
Remote key (p. 241)
Keyless and touch-sensitive
surfaces*
If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking
and unlocking, it is only necessary to have the
remote key within range, e.g. in a pocket or bag,
which makes it easier to open the vehicle if your
hands are full.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
257
Pressure-sensitive surfaces
Door handle
There are indentations on the outside of the
outer door handles for locking, and pressure-sen-
sitive surfaces on the inside of the handles for
unlocking.
Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking
Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE
It is important that only one pressure-sensi-
tive surface is activated at a time. If the han-
dle is grasped at the same time as the lock
area is pressed, there is a risk that double
commands may be sent. This may cause the
requested action (locking/unlocking) to be
delayed or not performed at all.
Tailgate
The tailgate handle has a rubberized pressure
plate that can only be used for unlocking.
NOTE
Please be aware that the system could be
activated in a car wash if the remote key is
within range.
Related information
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 257)
•
Keyless tailgate unlock* (p. 259)
Keyless locking and unlocking*
The vehicle can be locked or unlocked from out-
side using the door or tailgate handles if the
vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlock-
ing (Passive Entry)*.
NOTE
One of the vehicle's remote keys must be
within range for locking and unlocking to be
possible.
Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking
Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
258
Rubberized pressure plate on the tailgate used only for
unlocking.
NOTE
Please be aware that the system could be
activated in a car wash if the remote key is
within range.
Keyless locking
All of the doors have to be closed before the
vehicle can be locked. However, the tailgate can
be open when a door handle is used for locking.
–
To lock, touch the marked area on the out-
side of one of the door handles after the
door is closed or press the button on the
lower edge of the tailgate
12
before it is
closed.
> The lock indicator light in the windshield
will flash to confirm that the vehicle is
locked.
To close all door windows at the same time -
place your finger on the pressure-sensitive
indentation on the outside of the door handle and
hold it there until the side windows have closed.
Locking when the tailgate is open
NOTE
If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is still
open, make sure that the remote key is not
left in the cargo compartment when the tail-
gate is closed and the entire vehicle is locked.
If the key is detected in the vehicle, the tail-
gate will not lock when it is closed.
Keyless unlocking
–
To unlock, grasp a door handle or press the
rubberized pressure plate on the underside
of the tailgate handle.
> The lock indicator light in the windshield
will go out to confirm that the vehicle is
unlocked. Open the doors or tailgate as
usual.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or tailgate are opened within
two minutes after being unlocked, they will auto-
matically relock. This function reduces the risk of
inadvertently leaving the vehicle unlocked.
Related information
•
Keyless unlock settings* (p. 259)
•
Keyless tailgate unlock* (p. 259)
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 256)
12
Applies to vehicles with power tailgate*.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
259
Keyless unlock settings*
Several different sequences are available for
keyless unlocking.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
My Car Locking Keyless Unlock
3. Select alternative:
•
All Doors
- unlocks all doors at the same time.
•
Single Door
- unlocks the selected door.
Related information
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 257)
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 256)
Keyless tailgate unlock*
The tailgate can be opened using the remote
key. The key only needs to be within range, e.g.
in a pocket or bag.
The tailgate is held closed by an electronic lock-
ing mechanism.
To open the tailgate:
1. Lightly press the rubberized pressure plate
on the underside of the tailgate handle.
> The lock will disengage.
NOTE
One of the vehicle's remote keys must be
within range behind the vehicle for unlocking
to be possible.
2. Lift the outer handle to fully open the tail-
gate.
CAUTION
•
Only light pressure on the rubberized pres-
sure plate is necessary to release the tail-
gate's locking mechanism.
•
Use the handle to lift the tailgate and do
not apply force to the rubberized pressure
plate. Too much force can damage the
pressure plate's electrical connections.
Hands-free unlocking of the tailgate is also pos-
sible using a foot movement under the rear
bumper; see the separate section.
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
exhaust fumes can be sucked into the vehicle
through the cargo compartment.
Related information
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 257)
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 256)
•
Remote key range (p. 246)
•
Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 268)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
260
Antenna locations for the start and
lock system
The vehicle is equipped with a keyless start and
lock system
13
that uses a number of integrated
antennas positioned throughout the vehicle.
Location of the antennas.
Under the cup holder in the front section of
the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-side rear
door
14
In the upper front section of the right-side
rear door
14
In the cargo compartment
14
WARNING
Individuals with an implanted pacemaker
should not allow the pacemaker to come
closer than 22 cm (9 in.) to the Keyless sys-
tem antennas. The aim of this is to prevent
disturbances between the pacemaker and the
Keyless system.
Related information
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 256)
•
Remote key range (p. 246)
Locking and unlocking from inside
the vehicle
The doors and tailgate can be locked and
unlocked from inside the vehicle using the cen-
tral lock buttons in the front doors. The lock but-
tons in the rear doors* can be used to lock/
unlock that particular door.
Central locking
Button with indicator light for locking and unlocking in
front door.
Unlocking using the front door buttons
–
Press the button to unlock all side doors
and the tailgate.
13
The keyless lock system only applies to vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*).
14
Only in vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*).
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
261
Alternative unlocking method
Alternative unlocking method using side door opening
handle
15
.
–
Pull either of the side door inside opening
handles and release.
> Depending on the remote key settings,
either all doors will be unlocked or just the
selected door will be unlocked and
opened.
To change this setting, tap
Settings
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock
in the Top view of the
center display.
Locking using the front door buttons
–
Press the button (both front doors must
be closed).
> All doors and the tailgate will lock.
Locking using the rear door button*
Button with indicator light for locking/unlocking in rear
door.
The lock buttons in the rear doors only lock/
unlock that particular door.
Unlocking the rear door
1. Pull the opening handle to unlock the rear
door.
2. Pull the opening handle again to open the
rear door
16
.
Related information
•
Settings for remote and inside door unlock
(p. 245)
•
Unlocking the tailgate from inside the vehicle
(p. 262)
•
Activating and deactivating child safety locks
(p. 262)
15
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
16
Provided the child safety lock is not activated.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
262
Unlocking the tailgate from inside
the vehicle
The tailgate can be locked from the inside using
a button on the dashboard.
1.
Press the button on the dashboard.
> The tailgate will unlock and can be
opened from the outside by pressing the
rubberized pressure plate on the handle.
2.
With the optional power tailgate* -
Press and hold the
button on the dash-
board.
> The tailgate will open.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the vehi-
cle (p. 260)
•
Opening and closing the power tailgate*
(p. 264)
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
Child safety locks help prevent children from
opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
There is an electric safety lock* and a manual
safety lock.
Activating and deactivating electric
child safety locks*
The electric child safety lock can be activated
and deactivated in any ignition mode higher than
0. The lock can be activated and deactivated up
to 2 minutes after the ignition is turned off if no
door has been opened.
Button for electric activation and deactivation.
1. Turn on the ignition and select any ignition
mode higher than 0.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
263
2. Press the button on the driver's door control
panel.
>
The message
Rear child lock Activated
will be shown in the instrument panel and
the indicator light will illuminate to show
that the child safety locks are activated.
When the electric child safety locks are activated:
•
the rear windows can only be opened using
the driver's door control panel
•
the rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
To deactivate the child safety locks:
–
Press the button on the driver's door control
panel.
>
The message
Rear child lock
Deactivated will be shown in the instru-
ment panel and the indicator light will go
out to show that the child safety locks are
deactivated.
When the ignition is switched off, the current set-
ting will be saved. If the child safety locks were
activated when the ignition was switched off, they
will remain activated the next time the ignition is
started.
Symbol Message Meaning
Rear child
lock Acti-
vated
The child safety
locks are acti-
vated.
Rear child
lock Deacti-
vated
The child safety
locks are deacti-
vated.
Activating and deactivating manual
child safety locks
Manual child safety lock (this is not the manual door
lock).
–
Use the detachable key blade in the remote
key to turn the control.
The door cannot be opened from the inside.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
NOTE
•
The door's knob control only locks that
specific door, not both rear doors simulta-
neously.
•
There are no manual child safety locks on
models equipped with electronic child
safety locks.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the vehi-
cle (p. 260)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 252)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
264
Automatic locking when driving
The doors and tailgate will automatically lock
when the vehicle begins to move.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the vehi-
cle (p. 260)
Opening and closing the power
tailgate*
The tailgate can be opened and closed automat-
ically with the optional power tailgate.
Opening
To open the power tailgate, do one of the follow-
ing:
–
Press and hold the button on the
remote key until the tailgate begins to open.
–
Press and hold the button on the dash-
board until the tailgate begins to open.
–
Press lightly on the tailgate's outside handle.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
265
– Move your foot in a kicking motion* under the
rear bumper.
Closing
To close
17
the power tailgate, do one of the fol-
lowing:
–
Press the button on the lower edge of
the tailgate to close.
> The tailgate will close automatically – the
tailgate will remain unlocked.
NOTE
•
The button remains active 24 hours after
the tailgate was opened. After this time,
the tailgate must be closed manually.
•
If the tailgate has been open for more than
30 minutes, it will automatically close
slowly.
–
Press and hold the button on the
remote key.
> The tailgate closes automatically and an
audible signal sounds – the tailgate will
remain unlocked.
–
Press and hold the button on the dash-
board.
> The tailgate closes automatically and an
audible signal sounds – the tailgate will
remain unlocked.
– Move your foot in a kicking motion* under
the rear bumper.
> The tailgate closes automatically and an
audible signal sounds – the tailgate will
remain unlocked.
17
Vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) have a button for closing and a button for closing and locking.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
266
Closing and locking
17
–
Press the button on the lower edge of
the tailgate to close and simultaneously lock
both the tailgate and doors (all doors must
be closed in order to lock).
> The tailgate closes automatically – the
tailgate and doors lock, and the alarm* is
armed.
NOTE
•
One of the vehicle's remote keys must be
within range for locking and unlocking to
be possible.
•
When the keyless locking or closing* func-
tions are used, three audible signals will
sound if the key is not detected close
enough to the tailgate.
CAUTION
When operating the tailgate manually, open
and close it slowly. If you encounter resis-
tance, do not use force. This could lead to
damage and loss of function.
Interrupting opening or closing
Interrupt opening or closing by doing one of the
following:
•
Press the button on the dashboard.
•
Press the button on the remote key.
•
Press the close button on the underside of
the tailgate.
•
Press the rubberized pressure plate on the
underside of the tailgate's outer handle.
•
Using a foot movement*.
Tailgate movement is interrupted and stops. The
tailgate can then be opened or closed manually.
If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it
will open the next time it is activated.
Pinch protection
If anything obstructs the tailgate with enough
force to prevent it from opening or closing, pinch
protection will be activated.
•
When opening - the tailgate will stop moving
and an audible signal will sound.
•
When closing - the tailgate will stop, a long
audible signal will sound and the tailgate will
return to the programmed maximum opening
position.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of serious injury when
operating the tailgate. Before opening/clos-
ing, make sure that no one is in the path of
the tailgate who could be injured by its move-
ment.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Preloaded springs
Preloaded springs for the power tailgate.
WARNING
Do not attempt to open or access the preloa-
ded springs in the power tailgate struts. They
are preloaded with high pressure and can
cause injury if opened.
17
Vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) have a button for closing and a button for closing and locking.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
267
Related information
•
Setting a maximum height for the power tail-
gate* (p. 267)
•
Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 268)
•
Remote key range (p. 246)
Setting a maximum height for the
power tailgate*
The tailgate can be set to stop opening at a cer-
tain height, for example if the tailgate needs to
be opened in a garage with a low ceiling.
Setting maximum opening height:
1. Open the tailgate to the desired opening
height.
NOTE
It is not possible to program an opening posi-
tion lower than half-open tailgate.
2.
Press the button on the lower edge of
the tailgate and hold for at least 3 seconds.
> Two brief audio signals will sound to indi-
cate that the position has been stored.
Resetting to maximum opening position:
–
Move the tailgate manually to its highest
possible position and press the
button
on the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two audio signals will sound to indicate
that the stored position has been erased.
The tailgate can then be opened to its
maximum position.
NOTE
•
If the system has been working continu-
ously for a prolonged period of time, it will
be switched off to avoid overload. It can
be used again after approximately
2 minutes.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the power tailgate*
(p. 264)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
268
Foot movement tailgate operation*
To make it easier to operate the tailgate when
your hands are full, it can be opened and closed
by moving your foot in a forward kicking motion
under the rear bumper.
The sensor is located to the left of center under the rear
bumper.
One of the vehicle's remote keys must be within
range behind the vehicle (approx. 1 meter (3
feet)) for opening and closing to be possible. This
applies even if the vehicle is unlocked in order to
prevent the trunk lid from inadvertently opening
e.g. at a car wash.
Foot movement operation
Kicking motion within the sensor's activation area.
–
Make one slow forward kicking motion with
your foot under the left section of the rear
bumper. Take a step back. Do not touch the
bumper.
> A brief audible signal will be heard when
opening or closing is activated - the tail-
gate will open/close.
If the tailgate is open, it will close
18
when
the foot motion sensor is activated.
If several opening attempts have been made
without the remote key in range behind the vehi-
cle, foot movement operation will not be available
for a short period of time.
Do not keep your foot under the vehicle in a kick-
ing motion. This may prevent activation.
Interrupting opening or closing with a foot
movement
–
Make one slow forward kicking motion while
the tailgate is opening or closing to stop its
movement.
The remote key does not need to be within range
of the vehicle to interrupt opening or closing.
If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it
will open the next time it is activated.
NOTE
There is a risk of reduced or lost function if
there are large amounts of snow, ice, dirt, etc.
on the rear bumper. Make sure to keep the
bumper clean.
NOTE
Please note that the system could be inadver-
tently activated in a car wash or similar if the
remote key is within range.
Related information
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 256)
•
Opening and closing the power tailgate*
(p. 264)
•
Remote key range (p. 246)
18
Applies to vehicles with power tailgate*.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
269
Private Locking
The tailgate can be locked using the private
locking function to prevent it from being opened,
e.g. when the vehicle is left at a workshop or
with a valet.
The function button for private
locking is located in the center
display's Function view.
Depending on the current sta-
tus of the lock,
Private
Locking Unlocked or Private
Locking Locked will be dis-
played.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 269)
Activating and deactivating private
locking
Private locking is activated using the function
button in the center display and a PIN code.
NOTE
For the valet lock function to be activated the
car must be in at least ignition mode I.
Entering security code before initial use
The first time the function is used, a security
code must be selected. This code can then be
used to deactivate private locking if the selected
PIN code has been lost or forgotten. The security
code functions as a PUK (security) code for all
PIN codes used for private locking.
Save the security code in a safe place.
To create a security code:
1. Tap the button for private locking in Function
view.
> A pop-up window will appear.
2. Enter your security code.
> The security code is saved. The private
locking function is now ready for activa-
tion.
If the system has been reset, the above proce-
dure will need to be repeated.
Activating private locking
1. Tap the button for private locking in Function
view.
> A pop-up window will appear.
2. Enter the code you would like to use to
unlock the tailgate and tap
Confirm.
> The tailgate will lock. A green indicator
light will illuminate next to the button in
Function view to confirm locked status.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
270
Deactivating private locking
1. Tap the button for private locking in Function
view.
> A pop-up window will appear.
2. Enter the code used for locking and tap
Confirm.
> The tailgate will unlock. The green indica-
tor light next to the button in Function
view will go out to confirm unlocked sta-
tus.
NOTE
If you have forgotten or lost your PIN code or
if the PIN code has been entered incorrectly
more than three times, the security code can
be used to deactivate private locking.
NOTE
If private locking is activated and the vehicle
is unlocked using Volvo On Call* or the Volvo
On Call* app, private locking will be deacti-
vated automatically.
Related information
•
Private Locking (p. 269)
Alarm
The alarm emits sound and light signals if any-
one without a valid remote key attempts to break
into the vehicle or interferes with the start battery
or alarm siren.
When armed, the alarm will be triggered if:
•
the hood, tailgate or any door is opened.
•
a battery cable is disconnected.
•
the alarm siren is disconnected.
Alarm signals
The following occurs if the alarm is triggered:
•
A siren will sound for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is turned off.
•
All turn signals will flash for 5 minutes or
until the alarm is turned off.
If the reason the alarm was triggered is not recti-
fied, the alarm cycle will repeat up to 10 times
19
.
19
Certain markets only.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
271
Alarm indicator
A red indicator light on the dashboard shows the
status of the alarm:
•
Indicator off - the alarm is disarmed.
•
Indicator flashes once every two seconds -
the alarm is armed.
•
The indicator flashes quickly after the alarm
has been disabled for up to 30 seconds or
until the ignition is put in I mode – the alarm
has been triggered.
In the event of alarm system failure
If a problem is detected in the alarm
system, a symbol and the message
Alarm system failure Service
required will appear in the instrument
panel. Contact a workshop - an authorized Volvo
workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter any of the
components in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempt could affect the terms and con-
ditions of your insurance policy.
Related information
•
Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 271)
Arming and disarming the alarm
The alarm is armed when the vehicle is locked.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
272
Arming the alarm
Lock and arm the vehicle by:
•
pressing the lock button on the remote key
.
•
touch the marked surface on the outside of
the door handle or the rubberized pressure
plate on the tailgate
20
.
If the vehicle is equipped with both keyless lock-
ing/unlocking* and power tailgate*, the button
on the lower edge of the tailgate can also
be used to lock and arm the vehicle.
A red LED light on the dashboard will flash every other
second when the vehicle is locked and the alarm is
armed.
Disarming the alarm
Unlock and disarm the vehicle alarm by:
•
pressing the unlock button on the remote
key
.
•
grip a door handle or press the tailgate's rub-
berized pressure plate
20
.
Disarming the alarm without a functioning
remote key
The vehicle can be unlocked and disarmed even
if the remote key is not functioning, e.g. if the
battery is discharged.
1. Open the driver's door using the detachable
key blade.
> This will trigger the alarm.
Location of the backup key reader in the cup holder.
2. Place the remote key on the key symbol in
the backup reader in the tunnel console's
cup holder.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
> The alarm will be disarmed.
Turning off a triggered alarm
–
Press the unlock button on the remote key
or put the ignition into mode I by turning the
start knob clockwise and then releasing it.
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is armed when
the vehicle is locked.
•
The alarm will be triggered if any of the
doors is opened from the inside.
Automatically arming and disarming the
alarm
Automatically arming the alarm helps prevent
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without alarm
protection.
If the vehicle is unlocked using the remote key
(and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or tailgate are opened within two minutes,
the alarm will be automatically rearmed. The vehi-
cle will also re-lock.
On some markets, the alarm will be automatically
armed following a slight delay after the driver's
door has been opened and closed without being
locked.
20
Only vehicles with keyless locking and unlocking* (Passive Entry).
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
276
Driver support systems
The vehicle is equipped with a number of driver
support systems that can provide the driver with
active or passive assistance in various situations.
The systems can, for example, help the driver:
•
maintain a set speed
•
maintain a set time interval to the vehicle
ahead
•
help prevent a collision by warning the driver
and applying the brakes
•
park the vehicle.
Some of the systems are standard and others are
options. This also varies from market to market.
Related information
•
Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance
(p. 276)
•
Electronic Stability Control (p. 277)
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 285)
•
Cruise control (p. 289)
•
Distance Alert* (p. 295)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
•
Radar sensor (p. 330)
•
Camera (p. 335)
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 352)
•
BLIS* (p. 353)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358)
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 362)
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 368)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 370)
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
•
Park Assist Camera* (p. 394)
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 404)
Speed-dependent steering wheel
resistance
Speed-dependent power steering increases the
steering wheel resistance in pace with the vehi-
cle's speed to give the driver an enhanced feel-
ing of control and stability.
Steering may feel stiffer on highways. When
parking and at low speeds, it will be easier to
move the steering wheel.
NOTE
In some situations, the power steering may
become too hot and require temporary cool-
ing – during such time the power steering will
work at reduced output and the steering
wheel may feel more difficult to move.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer-
ing assistance, the driver display shows a
message as well as a STEERING WHEEL
symbol.
WARNING
While the power steering is working at
reduced power, the driver support functions
and systems with steering assistance are not
available.
In such a situation, the driver display shows
the
Power steering failure message, com-
bined with a STEERING WHEEL symbol.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
277
Changing the level of steering wheel
resistance*
To change the level of steering wheel resistance,
see the description of the INDIVIDUAL option
under "Available drive modes" in the "Drive
modes" section.
On models not equipped with drive mode con-
trols and the INDIVIDUAL option, steering wheel
resistance can instead be set in the center dis-
play's Top view under:
Settings My Car Drive Modes
Steering Force
Steering wheel resistance settings cannot be
accessed when turning at speeds above
10 km/h (6 mph).
Related information
•
Drive modes* (p. 433)
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 370)
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 404)
Electronic Stability Control
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC
1
) function
helps the driver avoid skidding and improves the
vehicle's directional stability.
This symbol will be displayed in
the instrument panel when the
ESC system is intervening.
When the ESC has intervened
to apply the brakes, a pulsing
sound may be heard and the
vehicle may accelerate more slowly than expec-
ted when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
The ESC system consists of the following sub-
functions:
•
Stability control
2
•
Spin control and active yaw control
•
Engine drag control
•
Trailer Stability Assist
WARNING
•
The Electronic Stability Control system
ESC is supplementary driver support
intended to facilitate driving and make it
safer – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
ESC is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgment. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the vehi-
cle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Stability control
2
This function helps control the driving and brak-
ing force of each individual wheel in an attempt
to stabilize the vehicle.
Spin control and active yaw control
This function is active at low speeds and brakes
the wheels that are spinning to transfer additional
power from wheels that are not spinning.
This function also helps prevent the wheels from
spinning while the vehicle is accelerating.
1
Electronic Stability Control
2
Also called traction control.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
278
Engine drag control
Engine drag control (EDC
3
) helps prevent inad-
vertent wheel lock, e.g. after downshifting or
using engine braking when driving at low speeds
on a slippery surface.
Inadvertent wheel lock while driving could impair
the driver's ability to steer the vehicle.
Trailer Stability Assist*
4
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA
5
) is designed to help
stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer if the
vehicle and trailer have begun to sway. For more
information, see "Trailer Stability Assist".
NOTE
The TSA function is deactivated if ESC Sport
Mode is activated.
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control Sport mode
(p. 278)
•
Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Elec-
tronic Stability Control (p. 279)
•
Electronic Stability Control Sport mode limi-
tations (p. 279)
•
Electronic Stability Control symbols and mes-
sages (p. 280)
•
Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 461)
Electronic Stability Control Sport
mode
The ESC
6
system is always activated and can-
not be switched off. However, the driver can
select
ESC Sport Mode, which offers more
active driving characteristics.
With the ESC Sport Mode sub-function
selected, intervention from ESC is reduced and
more lateral movement is permitted, giving the
driver more control of the vehicle than usual.
When
ESC Sport Mode is selected, ESC may
seem to be disabled even though the function
continues to assist the driver.
NOTE
When the ESC Sport Mode function is
selected, the trailer stabilizer (TSA
7
) is
switched off.
ESC Sport Mode also helps provide maximum
traction if the vehicle gets stuck or is driving on a
loose surface such as deep snow or loose sand.
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control (p. 277)
3
Engine Drag Control
4
Trailer Stability Assist is included if the vehicle is equipped with a Volvo original towbar.
5
Trailer Stability Assist
DRIVER SUPPORT
279
Activating/deactivating Sport mode
in Electronic Stability Control
The ESC
8
system is always activated and can-
not be switched off. However, the driver can
select Sport mode, which offers more active
driving characteristics.
Sport mode can be activated/
deactivated in the center dis-
play's Function view.
–
Tap the ESC Sport Mode button in Func-
tion view.
> Sport mode is activated when the indica-
tor light is green, and deactivated when
the indicator light is gray.
When
ESC Sport Mode is activated,
this symbol will illuminate with a steady
glow in the instrument panel. It will
remain on until the driver deactivates
the function or until the engine is turned off. The
ESC system will return to normal mode the next
time the engine is started.
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control (p. 277)
Electronic Stability Control Sport
mode limitations
There are certain limitations associated with the
ESC
9
system's subfunction
ESC Sport Mode
being activated.
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
selected when any of the following functions are
activated:
•
Speed limiter
•
Cruise control
•
Adaptive Cruise Control
•
Pilot Assist.
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control (p. 277)
6
Electronic Stability Control
7
Trailer Stability Assist
8
Electronic Stability Control
9
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
280
Electronic Stability Control symbols
and messages
A number of symbols and messages related to
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) may be dis-
played in the instrument panel.
Some examples of symbols and messages are
shown in the table below.
Symbol Message Meaning
Steady glow for
approx. 2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light. The ESC is actively operating.
Steady glow. Sport mode is activated.
Note: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode, but has partially reduced functionality.
ESC
Temporarily off
The ESC system's functionality has been temporarily reduced due to high brake system temperatures. The
function will be automatically reactivated when the brakes have cooled.
See the message in the instrument panel.
ESC
Service required
The ESC system is not functioning properly.
•
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and then restart it.
•
Consult a workshop if the message persists ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the button in the center of the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control (p. 277)
DRIVER SUPPORT
281
Speed limiter
A Speed Limiter (SL
10
) could be described as a
reverse cruise control. The driver regulates the
vehicle's speed using the accelerator pedal, but
is prevented by the Speed Limiter from inadver-
tently exceeding a preset maximum speed.
Function buttons and symbols
11
.
: Activates the Speed Limiter from
standby mode and resumes the set maxi-
mum speed.
: Increases the set maximum speed
: From standby mode - activates the
Speed Limiter and sets the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/puts
the Speed Limiter in standby mode
: Reduces the set maximum speed
Marker for set maximum speed
The vehicle's current speed
The set maximum speed
WARNING
•
The Speed Limiter function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and help make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
The driver must always pay attention to
traffic conditions and take action if the
Speed Limiter is not maintaining a suita-
ble speed.
•
The Speed Limiter is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgment. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at
the appropriate speed, with an appropri-
ate distance to other vehicles, and in
accordance with current traffic rules and
regulations.
Related information
•
Cruise Control limitations (p. 285)
•
Activating and starting Speed Limiter
(p. 282)
•
Managing Speed Limiter speed (p. 282)
•
Deactivating and putting Speed Limiter in
standby mode (p. 283)
•
Reactivating Speed Limiter from standby
mode (p. 284)
•
Turning off Cruise Control (p. 284)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 285)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter limitations (p. 289)
•
Activating/deactivating Automatic Speed
Limiter (p. 287)
•
Changing Automatic Speed Limiter tolerance
(p. 288)
10
Speed Limiter
11
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
282
Activating and starting Speed
Limiter
The Speed Limiter (SL
12
) function must be
selected and activated in order to regulate
speed.
Putting Speed Limiter in standby mode
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
–
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) and scroll to the Speed
Limiter function
(4).
> The symbol (4) will appear, indicating that
the Speed Limiter is in standby mode.
Starting the Speed Limiter
The Speed Limiter can only be activated while
the engine is running. The lowest maximum
speed that can be set is 30 km/h (20 mph).
–
With the Speed Limiter in standby mode and
the
symbol displayed, press the
button (2) on the steering wheel key-
pad.
> The Speed Limiter will be started and the
vehicle's current speed will be set as the
maximum speed.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
Managing Speed Limiter speed
The Speed Limiter (SL
13
) can be set to various
speeds.
Setting/changing set speed
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
–
Change a set speed by pressing the (1)
or
(3) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:
•
Press briefly: Press briefly: each press
changes the speed in +/- 5 mph
(+/- 5 km/h) increments.
•
Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
•
The most recently set speed will be stored.
12
Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
283
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
Deactivating and putting Speed
Limiter in standby mode
The Speed Limiter (SL
14
) can be temporarily
deactivated and put in standby mode.
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
To deactivate the Speed Limiter and put it in
standby mode:
–
Press the button on the steering wheel
(2).
> The speed limit markings and symbols in
the instrument panel will change from
WHITE to GRAY. This indicates that the
Speed Limiter is temporarily deactivated
and the driver can exceed the set maxi-
mum speed.
Temporarily deactivating using the
accelerator pedal
The set maximum speed can be temporarily
deactivated and exceeded using the accelerator
pedal without first putting the Speed Limiter in
standby mode, e.g. when quick acceleration is
required.
To do so:
1. Depress the accelerator as far as possible
and then release it when the desired speed
has been reached.
> The Speed Limiter will remain activated
and the symbol in the instrument panel
will be WHITE.
2. Release the accelerator pedal fully when the
temporary acceleration is completed.
> The vehicle will use engine braking to
automatically slow down to a speed below
the most recently set maximum speed.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
13
Speed Limiter
14
Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
284
Reactivating Speed Limiter from
standby mode
Speed Limiter (SL
15
) can be reactivated after
having been temporarily deactivated and put in
standby mode.
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
To reactivate the Speed Limiter from standby
mode:
–
Press the button on the steering wheel
(1).
> The speed limit markings in the instru-
ment panel will change from GRAY to
WHITE. The vehicle's speed will once
again be limited to the most recently set
speed.
or
–
Press the button on the steering wheel
(2).
> The speed limit markings and symbols in
the instrument panel will change from
GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle's current
speed will be set as the maximum speed.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
Turning off Cruise Control
The Speed Limiter (SL
16
) can be turned off.
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
To turn off Cruise Control:
1.
Press the
button on the steering wheel
(2).
> The Speed Limiter will go into standby
mode.
2.
Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the
steering wheel to select another function.
> The Speed Limiter symbol and marking
(4) in the instrument panel will go out and
the set maximum speed will be erased.
15
Speed Limiter
16
Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
285
3.
Press the (2) button on the steering
wheel keypad again.
> Another function will be activated.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
Cruise Control limitations
On steep downgrades, the Speed limiter's brak-
ing capacity may not be sufficient and the set
maximum speed may be exceeded. If this hap-
pens,
Speed limit exceeded will be displayed in
the instrument panel to alert the driver.
NOTE
A text message on exceeded max. speed is
activated if the speed is exceeded by at least
3 km/h (ca 2 mph).
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
Automatic Speed Limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) function
helps the driver adapt the vehicle's maximum
speed to the posted speed limits.
The Speed Limiter (SL
17
) function can be
switched to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
The Automatic Speed Limiter function uses
speed information from the Road Sign Informa-
tion function (RSI) to automatically adapt the
vehicle's maximum speed.
17
Speed Limiter
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
286
WARNING
•
The ASL function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
help make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and road
conditions.
•
Even if the driver can clearly see the
speed limit sign, the speed information
from the Road Sign Information (RSI)
function to ASL may be incorrect. In such
cases, the driver must intervene and
accelerate or brake to an appropriate
speed.
•
ASL is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgment. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the vehi-
cle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
•
See also the heading "Road Sign Infor-
mation limitations".
Is SL or ASL active?
The symbols in the instrument panel indicate
which Speed Limiter function is active:
Symbol SL ASL
A
✓ ✓
Road sign symbol
B
after "70" = ASL is
activated.
✓
A
WHITE symbol: The function is active. GRAY symbol: Standby
mode.
B
See "ASL symbol" below for an explanation of the symbol's dif-
ferent colors.
ASL symbol
The road sign symbol (next to the
stored speed ("70" here) in the center
of the speedometer) can be displayed
in three different colors, which are
explained in the following table:
Road sign
symbol's color
Explanation
Greenish-yel-
low
ASL is active
Gray ASL is in standby mode
Amber/orange ASL is temporarily in
standby mode, e.g. because
a speed limit sign could not
be read.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
•
Activating/deactivating Automatic Speed
Limiter (p. 287)
•
Changing Automatic Speed Limiter tolerance
(p. 288)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter limitations (p. 289)
DRIVER SUPPORT
287
Activating/deactivating Automatic
Speed Limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) is a supple-
ment to the Speed Limiter (SL) and can be acti-
vated/deactivated.
Activating ASL
The Speed Sign Assist but-
ton is located in the center dis-
play's Function view.
To activate the Automatic Speed Limiter:
1.
Tap the
Speed Sign Assist button.
> ASL will go into standby mode and a
green indicator light will illuminate. A road
sign symbol will be displayed in the center
of the speedometer in the instrument
panel.
2.
Pressing the
button on the steering
wheel keypad.
> ASL will be activated and set to the vehi-
cle's current speed.
NOTE
•
If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is
activated, road sign information is shown
in the driver display even if RSI
18
is not
activated.
•
To remove road sign information from the
driver display, you must deactivate both
Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.
•
When the Automatic Speed Limiter func-
tion is activated but RSI is deactivated, no
warnings are given from RSI. RSI must
also be activated for warnings to be pos-
sible.
Deactivating ASL
To deactivate the Automatic Speed Limiter:
–
Tap the Speed Sign Assist button in Func-
tion view.
> ASL will be deactivated, the indicator light
in the button will be GRAY and SL will be
activated instead.
WARNING
The vehicle will no longer follow the posted
maximum speed after switching from ASL to
SL – it then only follows the maximum speed
stored in the memory.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 285)
•
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 363)
18
Road Sign Information (RSI)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
288
Changing Automatic Speed Limiter
tolerance
The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) can be set
to different tolerance levels.
It is also possible to allow the vehicle to drive
above or below the posted speed limit. For exam-
ple, if the vehicle is following a current posted
speed limit of 70 km/h (43 mph), the driver can
instead allow the vehicle to maintain a speed of
75 km/h (47 mph).
Function buttons and symbols
19
.
–
Tap the (1) button on the steering
wheel keypad until 70 km/h (43 mph) has
been changed to 75 km/h (47 mph) in the
center of the speedometer (4).
> The vehicle will then use the selected tol-
erance of 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as the
posted speed limit the vehicle passes is
70 km/h (43 mph).
This tolerance level will be followed until
the vehicle passes a sign with a lower or
higher speed. The vehicle will then adjust
to the new speed limit and the set toler-
ance will be deleted from the system's
memory.
If Road Sign Information*
20
is activated,
the posted speed limit will also be indi-
cated by a RED marking on the speedom-
eter.
The set tolerance can be adjusted in the same
way as for the Speed Limiter's speed.
NOTE
The highest possible selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 285)
•
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 363)
19
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
20
Road Sign Information (RSI)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
289
Automatic Speed Limiter limitations
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) utilizes the
speed limit information provided by the RSI
21
function, not from the speed limit signs that the
vehicle passes.
If RSI
21
is unable to interpret and provide ASL
with speed information, ASL will go into standby
mode and switch over to SL. The driver will then
have to actively brake to bring the vehicle down
to the appropriate speed.
ASL will be reactivated when RSI
21
is once again
able to interpret and provide speed information to
ASL.
See “Road Sign Information limitations” for more
information.
Related information
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 285)
•
Automatic Speed Limiter limitations (p. 289)
•
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 363)
Cruise control
Cruise Control (CC) helps the driver maintain an
even speed to provide a more relaxing driving
experience on highways and long, straight roads
with even traffic flows.
Overview
Function buttons and symbols
22
.
: Activates Cruise Control from standby
mode and resumes the set speed
: Increases the set speed
: From standby mode - activates Cruise
Control and sets the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/puts
Cruise Control in standby mode
: Reduces the set speed
Marker for set speed
The vehicle's current speed
Set speed
NOTE
In vehicles equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control*, it is possible to switch between
cruise control and Adaptive Cruise Control –
see the heading "Switching between CC and
ACC".
21
Road Sign Information (RSI)
22
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
290
WARNING
•
The cruise control function is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and help make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual about this function
to learn of its limitations, which the driver
must be aware of before using the func-
tion (see the link list at the end of this
article).
•
Cruise control is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgment. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the
vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
•
Activating and starting Cruise Control
(p. 290)
•
Managing Cruise Control speed (p. 291)
•
Deactivating and putting Cruise Control in
standby mode (p. 293)
•
Reactivating Cruise Control from standby
mode (p. 293)
•
Switching off Cruise Control (p. 294)
•
Switching between Cruise Control and Adap-
tive Cruise Control (p. 311)
Activating and starting Cruise
Control
The Cruise Control (CC
23
) function must be
selected and activated in order to regulate
speed.
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
Putting Cruise Control in standby mode
To put Cruise Control in standby mode:
–
Tap ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) and scroll to the
(4) function.
> A symbol will appear and Cruise Control
can then be activated.
Activating/starting Cruise Control
In order to start Cruise Control from standby
mode, the vehicle's current speed must be
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
291
30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed
that can be set is 30 km/h (20 mph).
To start Cruise Control:
–
With the function displayed, press
(2) on the steering wheel keypad.
> Cruise Control will be started and the
vehicle's current speed will be set.
NOTE
Cruise control can then not be connected at
speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph).
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 289)
Managing Cruise Control speed
Cruise Control (CC
24
) can be set to various
speeds.
Setting/changing set speed
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model and market.
For vehicles with only CC
–
Change a set speed by pressing the (1)
or
(3) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:
•
Press briefly: Press briefly: each press
changes the speed in +/- 1 mph
(+/- 1 km/h) increments.
•
Press and hold: release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
•
The most recently set speed will be stored.
If speed is increased by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal while pressing the
(1) button on
the steering wheel, the vehicle's speed when the
button is pressed will be stored as the set speed.
Temporarily increasing speed using the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. when passing another vehicle, will
not affect the setting. The vehicle will return to
the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
23
Cruise Control
24
Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
292
For vehicles with both CC and ACC
–
Change a set speed by pressing the (1)
or
(3) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:
•
Press briefly: Press briefly: each press
changes the speed in +/- 5 mph
(+/- 5 km/h) increments.
•
Press and hold: release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
•
The most recently set speed will be stored.
If speed is increased by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal while pressing the
(1) button on
the steering wheel, the vehicle's speed when the
button is pressed will be stored as the set speed.
Temporarily increasing speed using the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. when passing another vehicle, will
not affect the setting. The vehicle will return to
the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Using engine braking instead of
applying the brakes
Cruise Control regulates speed by lightly applying
the brakes. On downgrades, it can sometimes be
desirable to roll a bit faster and let speed be
reduced instead by engine braking alone. The
driver can temporarily disengage the Cruise Con-
trol braking function.
To disengage CC:
–
Press the accelerator pedal about halfway
down and then release it.
> Cruise Control will automatically disen-
gage the automatic brake function and
speed will only be reduced using the
engine braking function.
How drive mode affects cruise control
The way the cruise control maintains the vehicle's
speed can vary depending on the selected drive
mode
25
.
Cruise Control Eco Cruise with ECO drive
mode
In the ECO drive mode, cruise control's accelera-
tion and deceleration will be smoother than in
other drive modes to help provide optimal fuel
efficiency and reduced environmental impact.
Because of this, the vehicle's actual speed may
be slightly above or below the set speed.
For more information, see "ECO drive mode"
under "Eco Cruise".
Cruise Control Dynamic Cruise
With the Dynamic drive mode, cruise control's
acceleration and deceleration will be faster and
more immediate than in other drive modes.
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 289)
•
Drive modes* (p. 433)
•
ECO drive mode (p. 435)
25
For more information, see "Drive modes".
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
293
Deactivating and putting Cruise
Control in standby mode
Cruise Control (CC
26
) can be temporarily put
into standby mode and then reactivated.
Deactivating and putting Cruise Control
in standby mode
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
To put Cruise Control in standby mode:
–
Press the button on the steering wheel
(2).
> The Cruise Control markings and symbols
will change from WHITE to GRAY, indicat-
ing that Cruise Control is temporarily
deactivated and the driver needs to con-
trol the vehicle's speed.
Standby mode due to action by the driver
Cruise Control will be temporarily deactivated and
put in standby mode if:
•
the brakes are applied
•
the gear selector is moved to N
•
the vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute
The driver must then control the vehicle's speed.
Temporarily increasing speed using the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. when passing another vehicle, will
not affect the setting. The vehicle will return to
the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise Control will be temporarily deactivated and
put in standby mode if:
•
the wheels lose traction
•
the engine speed (rpm) is too low/high
•
the temperature in the brake system
becomes too high
•
the vehicle's speed goes below 30 km/h
(20 mph).
The driver must then control the vehicle's speed.
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 289)
Reactivating Cruise Control from
standby mode
Cruise Control (CC
27
) can be temporarily put
into standby mode and then reactivated.
Reactivating Cruise Control from
standby mode
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
To start Cruise Control from standby mode:
–
Press the button on the steering wheel
(1).
> The Cruise Control marking in the instru-
ment panel will change from GRAY to
WHITE and the vehicle will then return to
the most recently set speed.
26
Cruise Control
27
Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
294
or
To start Cruise Control from standby mode:
–
Press the button on the steering wheel
(2).
> The Cruise Control markings and symbols
in the instrument panel will change from
GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle's current
speed will be set.
WARNING
A noticeable increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 289)
Switching off Cruise Control
Cruise control (Cruise Control - CC) can be
turned off.
Function buttons and symbols
28
.
To turn off Cruise Control:
1.
Press the
button on the steering wheel
(2).
> Cruise Control will go into standby mode.
2.
Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the
steering wheel to select another function.
>
The Cruise Control symbol
(4) in
the instrument panel will go out and the
set speed will be erased.
3.
Press the (2) button on the steering
wheel keypad again.
> Another function will be activated.
NOTE
In vehicles equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control*, it is possible to switch between
cruise control and Adaptive Cruise Control –
see the heading "Switching between CC and
ACC".
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 289)
•
Switching between Cruise Control and Adap-
tive Cruise Control (p. 311)
28
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
295
Distance Alert*
29
The Distance Alert
30
function can help the driver
become aware if the time interval to the vehicle
in front is too short.
However, the vehicle must be equipped with a
head-up display in order to display the Distance
Alert, which will then be indicated by a symbol
on the windshield as long as the time interval to
the vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time
interval.
Distance Alert is active at speeds above 30 km/h
(20 mph) and only reacts for vehicles ahead mov-
ing in the same direction as your vehicle. No dis-
tance information is provided for oncoming, slow-
moving or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
•
Distance Alert is only available in vehicles
that can display information on the wind-
shield with a head-up display.
•
Distance Alert is deactivated while Adap-
tive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist is
active.
WARNING
Distance Alert only reacts of the time interval
to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset
value – vehicle speed is not affected.
Related information
•
Head-up display for Distance Alert (p. 295)
•
Activating/deactivating Distance Alert
(p. 296)
•
Setting a time interval for Distance Alert
(p. 296)
•
Distance Alert limitations (p. 297)
Head-up display for Distance Alert
31
In vehicles equipped with a head-up display*, a
symbol will be displayed on the windshield as
long as the time interval to the vehicle ahead is
shorter than the set time interval.
Distance Alert warning symbol on the windshield
32
.
For this to be possible, however, the Show
Driver Support function must be activated
under Settings in the center display's menus (see
"Head-up display" for instructions).
29
The Distance Alert function is only available in vehicles that can display information on the windshield with a head-up display.
30
Distance Alert
31
The Distance Alert function is only available in vehicles that can display information on the windshield with a head-up display.
32
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
296
NOTE
Visual warnings on the windshield may be dif-
ficult to notice in cases of strong sunlight,
reflections, extreme light contrasts, or if the
driver is wearing sunglasses or is not looking
straight ahead.
Related information
•
Distance Alert* (p. 295)
•
Head-up display* (p. 144)
Activating/deactivating Distance
Alert
33
Distance Alert can be turned off.
On/Off
Press the Distance Alert but-
ton in the center display's
Function view.
•
GREEN button indicator light - Distance Alert
is on.
•
GRAY button indicator light - Distance Alert
is off.
Distance Alert is automatically activated each
time the engine is started.
Related information
•
Distance Alert* (p. 295)
Setting a time interval for Distance
Alert
34
The Distance Alert function can be set to differ-
ent time intervals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle ahead can be selected
and are shown in the instru-
ment panel as 1–5 horizontal
bars. The more bars, the longer
the time interval. One bar rep-
resents an interval of
approx. 1 second to the vehicle ahead. 5 bars
represents approx. 3 seconds.
The same symbol appears when the Adaptive
Cruise Control function is activated.
33
The Distance Alert function is only available in vehicles that can display information on the windshield with a head-up display.
34
The Distance Alert function is only available in vehicles that can display information on the windshield with a head-up display.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
297
Controls for setting a time interval.
Reduce the time interval
Increase the time interval
Distance indicator
–
Press the (1) or (2) button to decrease or
increase the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
NOTE
•
The greater the vehicles' speed, the
greater the distance between them for a
set time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
•
The set time interval is also used by the
Adaptive Cruise Control and Pilot Assist
functions.
WARNING
•
Only use a time interval suitable for the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time intervals give them limited time to
react and act to any unforeseen traffic
situation.
Related information
•
Distance Alert* (p. 295)
Distance Alert limitations
35
Distance Alert functionality may be reduced in
certain situations.
35
The Distance Alert function is only available in vehicles that can display information on the windshield with a head-up display.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
298
WARNING
•
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. In some situations, it may detect a
vehicle later than expected or not detect
other vehicles at all.
•
The radar sensor cannot cover all driving
situations and traffic, weather and road
conditions.
•
The driver is responsible for maintaining a
safe distance and speed and must inter-
vene if the various driver support systems
do not maintain a suitable speed or suita-
ble distance to the vehicle ahead.
•
Maintenance of radar sensor components
may only be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo technician.
•
Strong sunlight, reflections from the road
surface, strong lighting contrasts or using
sunglasses may make the warning light in
the windshield difficult to see. Poor
weather or winding roads can affect the
radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
ahead.
•
A vehicle's size (e.g., a motorcycle) can
also affect the radar sensor's capacity to
detect another vehicle. This may result in
the warning light illuminating at a shorter
distance than the one that has been set
or not illuminating at all.
•
High speeds may also result in the warn-
ing light illuminating at a shorter distance
than the one that has been set due to
limitations in the radar sensor's range.
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's radar unit,
which has some general limitations – see the
section "Radar unit limitations".
Related information
•
Distance Alert* (p. 295)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
Adaptive Cruise Control*
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
36
) helps the
driver maintain a constant speed with a set time
interval to the vehicle ahead.
Adaptive Cruise Control helps provide a more
relaxed driving experience on long trips on high-
ways or long, straight roads with even traffic
flows.
The camera/radar sensor measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead
37
.
The driver sets a speed and a time interval to the
vehicle ahead. If the camera/radar sensor detects
a slower-moving vehicle ahead, your vehicle's
speed will be automatically adapted according to
the set time interval to that vehicle. When there
are no longer slower-moving vehicles ahead, the
vehicle will return to the set speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
299
WARNING
•
The Adaptive Cruise Control function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and help make it safer –
it cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual about this function
to learn of its limitations, which the driver
must be aware of before using the func-
tion (see the link list at the end of this
article).
•
Adaptive Cruise Control is not a substi-
tute for the driver's attention and judg-
ment. The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe
manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
NOTE
Depending on market, this function may be
either Standard or Optional.
Adaptive Cruise Control regulates speed by
accelerating and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a slight sound when they are
being used to adjust speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control always attempts to regu-
late speed smoothly. The driver must apply the
brakes in situations requiring immediate braking.
For example, when there are great differences in
speed between vehicles or if the vehicle ahead
brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the radar
sensor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at
all.
Adaptive Cruise Control is designed to follow a
vehicle ahead in the same lane and maintain a
time interval to that vehicle set by the driver. If the
radar sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead, it
will instead maintain the speed set by the driver.
This will also happen if the speed of the vehicle
ahead exceeds the set speed for your vehicle.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control can follow another
vehicle at speeds from a standstill up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
WARNING
•
Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver is always
responsible and must intervene if the sys-
tem fails to detect a vehicle ahead.
•
Adaptive Cruise Control does not brake
for people or animals and does not brake
for small vehicles, such as bikes and
motorcycles. Similarly, it does not brake
for low trailers, oncoming, slow-moving or
stationary vehicles and objects.
•
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
demanding situations, such as in city traf-
fic, at intersections, on slippery surfaces,
with a lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads, or on on/off ramps.
CAUTION
Maintenance of Adaptive Cruise Control com-
ponents may only be performed by a work-
shop – an authorized Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
36
Adaptive Cruise Control
37
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
300
Overview
Controls
Function buttons and symbols
37
.
: Activates Adaptive Cruise Control from
standby mode and resumes the set speed
: Increases the set speed
: From standby mode - activates the
Adaptive Cruise Control and stores the cur-
rent speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
switches the Adaptive Cruise Control to
standby mode
: Reduces the set speed
Increases the time interval to the vehicle
ahead
Reduces the time interval to the vehicle
ahead
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle using the set
time interval
Symbol for time interval to the vehicle ahead
NOTE
In vehicles equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control*, it is possible to switch between
cruise control and Adaptive Cruise Control –
see the heading "Switching between CC and
ACC".
Instrument panel
Speed indicators
37
.
Set speed
Speed of the vehicle ahead.
The current speed of your vehicle.
See "Adaptive Cruise Control symbols and mes-
sages" for examples of different combinations of
symbols depending on the traffic situation.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control and collision warning
(p. 301)
•
Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise Control
with collision warning (p. 302)
•
Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (p. 302)
37
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
301
•
Managing Adaptive Cruise Control speed
(p. 303)
•
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control time inter-
vals (p. 304)
•
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 305)
•
Passing assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 307)
•
Starting passing assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control (p. 308)
•
Limitations of passing assistance with Adap-
tive Cruise Control (p. 308)
•
Switching target vehicles with Adaptive
Cruise Control (p. 308)
•
Automatic braking with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (p. 309)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control limitations (p. 310)
•
Switching between Cruise Control and Adap-
tive Cruise Control (p. 311)
•
Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 312)
Adaptive Cruise Control and
collision warning
Adaptive Cruise Control can alert the driver if the
distance to the vehicle ahead suddenly decrea-
ses to an unsafe distance.
Collision warning audible signal and symbol
38
.
Acoustic collision warning signal
Collision warning symbol
Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring
Adaptive Cruise Control utilizes approx. 40% of
the vehicle's braking capacity. If a situation
requires more braking force than the Adaptive
Cruise Control can provide, and if the driver does
not apply the brakes, a warning light and audible
warning signal will be activated to alert the driver
that immediate action is required.
WARNING
Adaptive Cruise Control only issues a warning
for vehicles detected by its radar unit – thus, a
warning may come after a delay or not at all.
•
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when necessary.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
38
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
302
Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise
Control with collision warning
In vehicles equipped with a head-up display*, a
flashing warning symbol will be displayed on the
windshield.
Collision warning symbol on the windshield
39
.
NOTE
Visual warnings on the windshield may be dif-
ficult to notice in cases of strong sunlight,
reflections, extreme light contrasts, or if the
driver is wearing sunglasses or is not looking
straight ahead.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
•
Head-up display* (p. 144)
Activating and starting Adaptive
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
40
) must first be
activated and then started before it can regulate
speed and distance.
Putting Adaptive Cruise Control in
standby mode
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode each
time the engine is started. To put ACC in standby
mode from active mode:
–
Press ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) on the steering wheel
keypad and scroll to the
(4) function.
> The symbol will appear and Adaptive
Cruise Control will go into standby mode.
Starting/activating Adaptive Cruise
Control
To start ACC:
•
The driver's seat belt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle ahead (target vehi-
cle) within a reasonable distance or your
vehicle's current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
–
With the (4) function displayed, press
(1) on the steering wheel keypad.
> Adaptive Cruise Control will start and the
current speed will be stored, which will be
shown by numbers in the center of the
speedometer.
39
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
303
ACC will only regulate the time
interval to the vehicle ahead
when the distance symbol
shows two vehicles.
A speed interval will be marked
at the same time.
The higher speed is the set
speed for your vehicle and the
lower speed is the speed of the
vehicle ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
Managing Adaptive Cruise Control
speed
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
41
) can be set to
various speeds.
Setting/changing set speed
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model and market.
: Increases the set speed.
: Reduces the set speed.
Set speed.
–
Change a set speed by pressing the (1)
or
(2) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:
•
Press briefly: Press briefly: each press
changes the speed in +/- 5 mph
(+/- 5 km/h) increments.
•
Press and hold: release the button when
the set speed indicator (3) has moved to
the desired speed.
•
The most recently set speed will be stored.
If speed is increased by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal while pressing the
(1) button on
the steering wheel, the vehicle's speed when the
button is pressed will be stored as the set speed.
Temporarily increasing speed using the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. when passing another vehicle, will
not affect the setting. The vehicle will return to
the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
40
Adaptive Cruise Control
41
Adaptive Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
304
Automatic transmission
Adaptive Cruise Control can follow another vehi-
cle at speeds from a standstill up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
The lowest speed that can be set for Adaptive
Cruise Control is 30 km/h (20 mph). When fol-
lowing another vehicle, ACC can monitor that
vehicle's speed and slow your own vehicle down
to a standstill, but it is not possible to set speeds
lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).
The highest possible speed that can be set is
200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control
time intervals
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
42
) can be set to
various time intervals to the vehicle ahead.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle ahead can be selected
and are shown in the instru-
ment panel as 1–5 horizontal
bars. The more bars, the longer
the time interval. One bar rep-
resents an interval of
approx. 1 second to the vehicle ahead. 5 bars
represents approx. 3 seconds.
The same symbol appears when the Distance
Alert function is activated.
NOTE
When the symbol in the instrument panel
shows two vehicles, ACC is following the vehi-
cle ahead at a preset time interval.
When only one vehicle is shown, there is no
vehicle ahead within a reasonable distance.
Controls for setting a time interval
43
.
Reduce the time interval
Increase the time interval
Distance indicator
–
Press the (1) or (2) button to decrease or
increase the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
In order to help your vehicle follow the vehicle
ahead as smoothly and comfortably as possible,
Adaptive Cruise Control allows the time interval
to vary noticeably in certain situations. At low
speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead
is short, Adaptive Cruise Control increases the
time interval slightly.
42
Adaptive Cruise Control
43
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
305
NOTE
•
The greater the vehicles' speed, the
greater the distance between them for a
set time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
•
If the Adaptive Cruise Control does not
seem to respond with a speed increase
when activated, it may be because the
time interval to the vehicle ahead is
shorter than the set time interval.
WARNING
•
Only use a time interval suitable for the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time intervals give them limited time to
react and act to any unforeseen traffic
situation.
Setting how ACC should maintain
distance* to the vehicle ahead
A number of different settings can be made for
how Adaptive Cruise Control should maintain a
time interval to the vehicle ahead. Settings are
made using the DRIVE MODE controls.
Select one of the following:
•
Eco - ACC will focus on providing optimal
fuel economy, which will increase the time
interval to the vehicle ahead.
•
Comfort - ACC will focus on following the
set time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
•
Dynamic - ACC will focus on following the
set time interval to the vehicle ahead more
exactly, which could mean faster acceleration
and heavier braking.
For more information, see "Drive modes".
Additional information is provided in the sections
"Managing Cruise Control speed" and "ECO
drive mode".
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
•
Drive modes* (p. 433)
•
Managing Cruise Control speed (p. 291)
•
ECO drive mode (p. 435)
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
44
) can be tempo-
rarily put into standby mode and then reactiva-
ted.
Deactivating and putting Adaptive
Cruise Control in standby mode
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
44
Adaptive Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
306
To temporarily deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control
and put it in standby mode:
–
Press the button on the steering wheel
(2).
>
The
symbol in the instrument panel
changes color from WHITE to GRAY and
the set speed in the center of the speed-
ometer will change from BEIGE to GRAY.
WARNING
•
If Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby
mode, the driver must intervene and regu-
late both speed and distance to the vehicle
ahead.
•
If the vehicle comes too close to a vehicle
ahead when Adaptive Cruise Control is in
standby mode, the driver is instead warned
of the short distance by the Distance Alert
function.
Standby mode due to action by the driver
Adaptive Cruise Control will be temporarily deac-
tivated and put in standby mode if:
•
the brakes are applied
•
the gear selector is moved to N
•
the vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute
Temporarily increasing speed using the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. when passing another vehicle, will
not affect the setting. The vehicle will return to
the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Automatic standby mode
Adaptive Cruise Control is dependent on other
systems, such as Electronic Stability Control
(ESC
45
). If any of these other systems stops
working, Adaptive Cruise Control will automati-
cally switch off.
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned by an acoustic signal and a message
on the instrument panel.
•
The driver must then regulate vehicle
speed, apply the brakes if necessary, and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Adaptive Cruise Control may go into standby
mode if:
•
your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
(3 mph) and ACC cannot determine if the
vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is another
object, e.g. a speed bump.
•
your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h
(3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so that
ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow.
•
the driver opens the door.
•
the driver unbuckles the seat belt.
•
the engine speed (rpm) is too low/high.
•
one or more of the wheels lose traction.
•
the brake temperature is high.
•
the parking brake is applied.
•
the camera/radar sensor is covered by snow
or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar waves
are blocked)
Reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control
from standby mode
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
45
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
307
To reactivate ACC from standby mode:
–
Press the button on the steering wheel
(1).
> Speed will be set to the most recently
stored speed.
WARNING
A noticeable increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
Passing assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
46
) can assist the
driver when passing other vehicles.
How passing assistance works
When ACC is following another vehicle and you
indicate that you intend to pass that vehicle by
using the turn signal
47
, Adaptive Cruise Control
will begin accelerating toward the vehicle ahead
before your vehicle has moved into the passing
lane.
The function will then delay a speed reduction to
avoid early braking as your vehicle approaches a
slower-moving vehicle.
The function remains active until your vehicle has
passed the other vehicle.
WARNING
Please note that this function can be acti-
vated in more situations than just passing
another vehicle, such as when a direction indi-
cator is used to indicate a lane change or
before exiting to another road – the vehicle
will then briefly accelerate.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
•
Starting passing assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control (p. 308)
•
Limitations of passing assistance with Adap-
tive Cruise Control (p. 308)
46
Adaptive Cruise Control
47
Only the left-hand turn signal for left-hand drive vehicles, or right-hand turn signal for right-hand drive vehicles.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
308
Starting passing assistance with
Adaptive Cruise Control
Several conditions must be met for passing
assistance to be possible.
Requirements for passing assistance
In order to activate passing assistance:
•
your vehicle must be following a vehicle
ahead (target vehicle)
•
your vehicle's current speed must be
at least 70 km/h (43 mph)
•
the set speed for ACC must be high
enough to safely pass another vehicle.
Starting parking assistance
To start passing assistance:
–
Turn on the left turn signal.
> Passing assistance will start.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
•
Passing assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 307)
Limitations of passing assistance
with Adaptive Cruise Control
Passing assistance functionality may be reduced
in certain situations.
WARNING
The driver should be aware that if conditions
suddenly change when using Parking Assis-
tance, the function may implement an unde-
sired acceleration in certain conditions.
Some situations should be avoided, e.g. if:
•
the vehicle is approaching an exit in the
same direction as passing would normally
occur
•
the vehicle ahead slows before your vehi-
cle has had time to switch to the passing
lane
•
traffic in the passing lane slows down
•
a vehicle for right-hand traffic is driven in
a country with left-hand traffic (or vice
versa).
Situations of this type can be avoided by tempo-
rarily putting ACC
48
in standby mode.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
•
Passing assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 307)
Switching target vehicles with
Adaptive Cruise Control
At certain speeds, models with automatic trans-
missions and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
49
)
can switch target vehicles.
Switching target vehicles
If the target vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be
stationary traffic ahead.
When Adaptive Cruise Control is actively follow-
ing another vehicle at speeds under 30 km/h
(20 mph) and switches targets from a moving
vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Adaptive Cruise
Control will brake for the stationary vehicle.
48
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
309
WARNING
When Adaptive Cruise Control follows another
vehicle at speeds over approx. 30 km/h
(20 mph) and changes target vehicle – from a
moving vehicle to a stationary one – Adaptive
Cruise Control will ignore the stationary vehi-
cle and instead accelerate to the stored
speed.
•
The driver must then intervene and apply
the brakes.
Automatic standby mode when switching
targets
Adaptive Cruise Control will be disabled and go
into standby mode:
•
if your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
(3 mph) and Adaptive Cruise Control cannot
determine if the target object is a stationary
vehicle or another object, e.g. a speed bump.
•
if your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h
(3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so that
Adaptive Cruise Control no longer has a vehi-
cle to follow.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
Automatic braking with Adaptive
Cruise Control
The Adaptive cruise control (ACC
50
) has a spe-
cial brake function in slow traffic and while sta-
tionary.
Braking function in slow traffic and at a
standstill
In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stop-
ped at a traffic light, driving will resume automati-
cally if the vehicle is stopped for less than
approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than 3 sec-
onds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving again,
Adaptive Cruise Control will go into standby
mode and the Auto-hold brake function will acti-
vate.
–
Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivated in
one of the following ways:
•
Pressing the
button on the steering
wheel keypad.
•
Pressing the accelerator pedal.
> Adaptive Cruise Control will resume fol-
lowing the vehicle ahead if it begins to
move within approx. 6 seconds.
NOTE
ACC can keep the vehicle stationary for no
more than 5 minutes – after that time the
parking brake is applied and Adaptive Cruise
Control is deactivated.
The parking brake must be released before
Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivated.
Deactivation of the Auto-hold brake function
In certain situations, Auto-hold will be deactivated
when the vehicle is at a standstill and Adaptive
Cruise Control will go into standby mode. This
means that the brakes will be released and the
vehicle could begin to roll. The driver must
actively apply the brakes to keep the vehicle sta-
tionary.
This can occur if:
•
the driver depresses the brake pedal
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the gear selector is moved to the
P
,
N
or
R
positions
•
the driver puts Adaptive Cruise Control in
standby mode.
Auto Activate Parking Brake
In certain situations, the parking brake will be
applied to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
49
Adaptive Cruise Control
50
Adaptive Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
310
This occurs if Adaptive Cruise Control is keeping
the vehicle stationary using the brakes and:
•
the driver opens the door or unbuckles
his/her seat belt
•
ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for
more than approx. 5 minutes
•
the brakes overheat
•
the driver switches off the engine manually.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
Adaptive Cruise Control limitations
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
51
) may have lim-
ited functionality in certain situations.
Steep roads and/or heavy loads
Adaptive Cruise Control is primarily intended to
be driven on flat roads. The function may not be
able to maintain the correct time interval to the
vehicle ahead when driving down steep hills. The
driver should be extra attentive and prepared to
apply the brakes.
•
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control if the
vehicle is carrying a heavy load or towing a
trailer.
Other limitations
•
The
Off Road drive mode cannot be
selected if Adaptive Cruise Control is acti-
vated.
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's combined
camera and radar unit, which has certain gen-
eral limitations; see sections "Camera limita-
tions" and "Radar sensor limitations".
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
51
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
311
Switching between Cruise Control
and Adaptive Cruise Control
In vehicles equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC), the driver can switch between Cruise
Control (CC) and ACC.
A symbol in the instrument panel indicates which
cruise control system is active
CC ACC
A A
Cruise control Adaptive Cruise Control
A
WHITE symbol: The function is active. GRAY symbol: Standby
mode
Switching from ACC to CC
To do so:
1.
Press the
button on the steering wheel
keypad to put Adaptive Cruise Control in
standby mode.
2.
Tap the
Cruise Control button in the center
display's Function view. The button's indica-
tor will change from GRAY to GREEN.
> The symbol in the instrument panel will
change from
ACC to
CC, indicating that Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol is off and Cruise Control is in standby
mode.
3.
Pressing the
button on the steering
wheel keypad.
> Cruise Control will start and the vehicle's
current speed will be set.
WARNING
Switching from ACC to CC means that the
vehicle:
•
will no longer maintain a preset time
interval to the vehicle ahead.
•
will only follow the stored speed and the
driver must therefore apply the brakes
when necessary.
If CC is active when the engine is turned off, ACC
will be automatically activated the next time the
engine is started.
Switching from CC to ACC
To do so:
1.
Press the
button on the steering wheel
keypad to put Cruise Control in standby
mode.
2.
Tap the
Cruise Control button in Function
view. The button's indicator will change from
GREEN to GRAY.
> The symbols in the instrument panel will
switch from
CC to ACC
to indicate that Adaptive Cruise Control is
in standby mode.
3.
Pressing the
button on the steering
wheel keypad.
> Adaptive Cruise Control will go into active
mode and set the vehicle's current speed
and the selected time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
•
Cruise control (p. 289)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
312
Symbols and messages for
Adaptive Cruise Control
A number of symbols and messages relating to
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
52
) may be dis-
played in the instrument panel and/or the head-
up display*.
Several examples
53
are provided below.
The previous illustration
54
shows that Adaptive
Cruise Control is set to maintain a speed of
110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no target
vehicle ahead to follow.
The previous illustration
54
shows that Adaptive
Cruise Control is set to maintain a speed of
110 km/h (68 mph) and is following a target
vehicle ahead, which is traveling at the same
speed.
52
Adaptive Cruise Control
53
In the following illustration, Road Sign Information (RSI) indicates that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
54
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
313
Symbol Message Meaning
The symbol is WHITE. The vehicle is maintaining the set speed.
Adaptive Cruise Contr.
Unavailable
The symbol is GRAY.
Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode.
Adaptive Cruise Contr.
Service required
The symbol is GRAY.
The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Clean the windshield in front of the camera and radar sensors.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the
button in the center of the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 298)
DRIVER SUPPORT
314
Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist helps the driver keep the vehicle in
the current traffic lane by providing steering
assistance and maintaining an even speed and a
set time interval to the vehicle ahead.
How Pilot Assist works
The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended for
use on highways and other major roads where it
can help provide a more comfortable and relaxing
driving experience.
The camera/radar sensor monitors the distance to the
vehicle ahead and detects lane markings
55
.
Camera and radar sensor
Distance monitor
Lane marker line monitors
The driver sets the desired speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist monitors the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead and the traffic lane's
side markers using the camera and radar sensor.
The system maintains the set time interval to the
vehicle ahead by automatically adjusting your
vehicle's speed and keeps your vehicle in its lane
by providing steering assistance.
Pilot Assist's steering assistance is based on
monitoring the direction of the vehicle ahead and
the traffic lane's side marker lines. The driver can
override Pilot Assist's steering recommendations
at any time and steer in another direction, e.g. to
change lanes or avoid obstacles on the road.
If the camera/radar sensor cannot detect the
lane's side marker lines or if Pilot Assist is unable
for some other reason to clearly interpret the
lane, Pilot Assist will temporarily deactivate steer-
ing assistance until it can once again interpret
the lane markings. However, the speed and dis-
tance warnings will remain active.
WARNING
Pilot Assist is deactivated automatically and
resumes working without prior notice.
The color of the steering wheel
symbol indicates the current
status of steering assistance:
• GREEN indicates that steer-
ing assistance is active
• GRAY (as shown in illustra-
tion) indicates that steering assistance is deacti-
vated.
55
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
315
WARNING
•
The Pilot Assist function is supplementary
driver support intended to facilitate driv-
ing and help make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual about this function
to learn of its limitations, which the driver
must be aware of before using the func-
tion (see the link list at the end of this
article).
•
Pilot Assist should only be used if there
are clear lane lines painted on each side
of the lane. All other use will increase the
risk of contact with nearby obstacles that
cannot be detected by the functions.
•
Pilot Assist is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgment. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the vehi-
cle is driven in a safe manner, at the
proper position within the lane, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
NOTE
Depending on market, this function may be
either Standard or Optional.
Pilot Assist regulates speed by accelerating and
braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a slight
sound when they are being used to adjust speed.
Pilot Assist attempts to smoothly regulate speed.
The driver must apply the brakes in situations
requiring immediate braking. For example, when
there are great differences in speed between
vehicles or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.
Due to limitations in the camera and radar sen-
sor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at all.
Pilot Assist is designed to follow a vehicle ahead
in the same lane and maintain a time interval to
that vehicle set by the driver. If the radar sensor
does not detect a vehicle ahead, it will instead
maintain the speed set by the driver. This will also
happen if the speed of the vehicle ahead
exceeds the set speed for your vehicle.
•
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from a standstill up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
•
Pilot Assist can provide steering assistance
from near-stationary speeds up to 140 km/h
(87 mph).
WARNING
•
Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance
system. The driver must intervene if the
system fails to detect a vehicle ahead.
•
Pilot Assist does not brake for people,
animals, objects, small vehicles (e.g.
cycles and motorcycles), low trailers as
well as oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
cles.
•
Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding sit-
uations, such as in city traffic, at intersec-
tions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of
water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads,
on highway on- or off-ramps, or with a
trailer connected to the vehicle.
CAUTION
Maintenance of the integrated components in
Pilot Assist may only be performed by a work-
shop – an authorized Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
In curves and forks in the road
Pilot Assist is designed to interact with the driver.
The driver should never wait for steering assis-
tance from Pilot Assist, but instead should always
be ready to increase his or her own steering
efforts, particularly in curves.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
316
•
When the vehicle is approaching an off-ramp
or a fork in the road, the driver should steer
toward the desired lane to indicate to Pilot
Assist the desired direction of travel.
Pilot Assist strives to keep the vehicle
in the center of the lane
When Pilot Assist provides steering assistance, it
strives to position the vehicle in the center of the
lane between the lane markings. For the smooth-
est driving experience possible, the driver should
permit the vehicle to find the optimal positioning.
The driver should check that the vehicle is posi-
tioned safely in the lane and can always adjust
the vehicle's position by applying more force to
the steering wheel.
•
If Pilot Assist does not position the vehicle
appropriately in the lane, the driver should
turn off Pilot Assist or switch to Adaptive
Cruise Control.
Overview
Controls
Function buttons and symbols
55
.
: Activates Pilot Assist from standby
mode and resumes the set speed and time
interval
: Increases the set speed
: From standby mode - activates Pilot
Assist and sets the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/puts
Pilot Assist in standby mode
◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to Adaptive
Cruise Control
: Reduces the set speed
Increases the time interval to the vehicle
ahead
▶: Switches from Adaptive Cruise Control to
Pilot Assist
Reduces the time interval to the vehicle
ahead
Function symbol
Symbols for target vehicle and distance to
the vehicle ahead
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
assistance
55
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
317
Instrument panel
Speed indicators
55
.
Set speed
Speed of the vehicle ahead
The current speed of your vehicle
See "Pilot Assist symbols and messages" for
examples of different combinations of symbols
depending on the traffic situation.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist and collision warning (p. 317)
•
Head-up display for Pilot Assist during colli-
sion risks (p. 318)
•
Activating and starting Pilot Assist (p. 318)
•
Managing Pilot Assist speed (p. 320)
•
Setting a time interval for Pilot Assist
(p. 321)
•
Deactivating/reactivating Pilot Assist
(p. 322)
•
Passing assistance with Pilot Assist (p. 324)
•
Starting passing assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 325)
•
Passing assistance with Pilot Assist limita-
tions (p. 325)
•
Switching target vehicles with Pilot Assist
(p. 325)
•
Auto-hold braking with Pilot Assist (p. 326)
•
Pilot Assist limitations (p. 327)
•
Pilot Assist* symbols and messages (p. 328)
Pilot Assist and collision warning
Pilot Assist can alert the driver if the distance to
the vehicle ahead suddenly decreases to an
unsafe distance.
Collision warning audible signal and symbol
56
.
Acoustic collision warning signal
Collision warning symbol
Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring
Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the vehicle's
braking capacity. If a situation requires more
braking force than Pilot Assist can provide, and if
the driver does not apply the brakes, a warning
light and audible warning signal will be activated
55
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
56
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
318
to alert the driver that immediate action is
required.
WARNING
Pilot Assist only issues a warning for vehicles
detected by its camera and radar unit – thus,
a warning may come after a delay or not at all.
•
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when necessary!
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
Head-up display for Pilot Assist
during collision risks
In vehicles equipped with a head-up display*, a
flashing warning symbol will be displayed on the
windshield.
Collision warning symbol on the windshield
57
.
NOTE
Visual warnings on the windshield may be dif-
ficult to notice in cases of strong sunlight,
reflections, extreme light contrasts, or if the
driver is wearing sunglasses or is not looking
straight ahead.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
•
Head-up display* (p. 144)
Activating and starting Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist must first be activated and then
started before it can help regulate speed and
distance and provide steering assistance.
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
To start Pilot Assist:
•
The driver's seat belt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle ahead (target vehi-
cle) within a reasonable distance or your
vehicle's current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
57
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
319
With Adaptive Cruise Control in standby mode:
1.
Press the ▶ button on the steering wheel (6).
>
The
symbol will change to Pilot
Assist in standby mode (8).
2.
Press the
button on the steering wheel
(2).
> Pilot Assist will start and the current
speed will be stored, which will be shown
by numbers in the center of the speedom-
eter.
...or...
With Adaptive Cruise Control started:
–
Press the ▶ button on the steering wheel (6).
> Pilot Assist will start.
Pilot Assist's steering assis-
tance is only active when the
steering wheel symbol (2)
changes from GRAY to
GREEN.
Pilot Assist will only regulate
the time interval to the vehicle ahead when the
distance symbol shows a vehicle (1) over the
steering wheel symbol.
A speed interval will be marked
at the same time.
The higher speed is the set
speed for your vehicle and the
lower speed is the speed of the
vehicle ahead (target vehicle).
Hands on the steering wheel
Pilot Assist only functions if the driver's hands
are on the steering wheel.
If Pilot Assist detects that the
driver's hands are not on the
steering wheel, a symbol and
text message will appear to
instruct the driver to actively
steer the vehicle.
If the driver's hands are still detected on the
steering wheel after a few seconds have passed,
the instructions to actively steer the vehicle will
be repeated, accompanied by an audible signal.
If Pilot Assist still does not detect the driver's
hands on the steering wheel after a few more
seconds have passed, the audible signal will
become intense and the steering function will
switch off. Pilot Assist must then be reactivated
by pressing the
button on the steering
wheel.
NOTE
Note that the Pilot Assist function only works
when the driver's hands are on the steering
wheel.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
DRIVER SUPPORT
320
Managing Pilot Assist speed
Pilot Assist can be set to various speeds.
Setting/changing set speed
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model and market.
: Increases the set speed
: Reduces the set speed
Set speed
–
Change a set speed by pressing the (1)
or
(2) buttons briefly or by pressing and
holding them:
•
Press briefly: Press briefly: each press
changes the speed in +/- 5 mph
(+/- 5 km/h) increments.
•
Press and hold: release the button when
the set speed indicator (3) has moved to
the desired speed.
•
The most recently set speed will be stored.
If speed is increased by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal while pressing the
(1) button on
the steering wheel, the vehicle's speed when the
button is pressed will be stored as the set speed.
Temporarily increasing speed using the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. when passing another vehicle, will
not affect the setting. The vehicle will return to
the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
Automatic transmission
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from a standstill up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
The lowest speed that can be set for Pilot Assist
is 30 km/h (20 mph). When following another
vehicle, ACC can monitor that vehicle's speed
and slow your own vehicle down to a standstill,
but it is not possible to set speeds lower than
30 km/h (20 mph).
The highest possible speed that can be set is
200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
321
Setting a time interval for Pilot
Assist
Pilot Assist can be set to different time intervals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle ahead can be selected
and are shown in the instru-
ment panel as 1–5 horizontal
bars. The more bars, the longer
the time interval. One bar rep-
resents an interval of
approx. 1 second to the vehicle ahead. 5 bars
represents approx. 3 seconds.
NOTE
When the symbol in the instrument panel
shows a vehicle and a steering wheel, Pilot
Assist follows a vehicle ahead at a preset
time interval.
When only a steering wheel is shown, there is
no vehicle ahead within a reasonable dis-
tance.
Controls for setting a time interval
58
.
Reduce the time interval
Increase the time interval
Distance indicator
–
Press the (1) or (2) button to decrease or
increase the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly
as possible, Pilot Assist allows the time interval to
vary considerably in certain situations. For exam-
ple, at low speeds and short distances to the
vehicle ahead, Pilot Assist increases the time
interval slightly.
NOTE
•
The greater the vehicles' speed, the
greater the distance between them for a
set time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
•
If Pilot Assist does not seem to respond
with a speed increase when activated, it
may be because the time interval to the
vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time
interval.
WARNING
•
Only use a time interval suitable for the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time intervals give them limited time to
react and act to any unforeseen traffic
situation.
Setting how Pilot Assist should
maintain distance* to the vehicle ahead
The driver can choose different drive modes to
determine how Pilot Assist should maintain a
time interval to the vehicle ahead. Settings are
made using the DRIVE MODE controls.
58
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
322
Select one of the following:
•
Eco - Pilot Assist will focus on providing
optimal fuel economy, which will increase the
time interval to the vehicle ahead.
•
Comfort - Pilot Assist will focus on following
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
•
Dynamic - Pilot Assist will focus on follow-
ing the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
more exactly, which could mean faster accel-
eration and heavier braking.
For more information, see "Drive modes".
Additional information is provided in the sections
"Managing Cruise Control speed" and "ECO
drive mode".
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
•
Drive modes* (p. 433)
•
ECO drive mode (p. 435)
•
Managing Cruise Control speed (p. 291)
Deactivating/reactivating Pilot
Assist
Pilot Assist can be temporarily put into standby
mode and then reactivated.
Deactivating and putting Pilot Assist in
standby mode
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
To temporarily deactivate Pilot Assist and put it in
standby mode:
–
Press the button on the steering wheel
(2).
> Pilot Assist goes into standby mode - the
symbol (8) in the instrument panel
changes color from WHITE to GRAY and
the set speed in the center of the speed-
ometer will change from BEIGE to GRAY.
...or...
–
Press the ◀ button on the steering wheel (3).
> Pilot Assist is turned off and Adaptive
Cruise Control will go into active mode.
WARNING
•
With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer and regu-
late both speed and distance to the vehi-
cle ahead.
•
If the vehicle comes too close to a vehicle
ahead when Pilot Assist is in standby
mode, the driver is instead warned of the
short distance by the Distance Alert func-
tion.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
323
Standby mode due to action by the driver
Pilot Assist will be temporarily deactivated and
put in standby mode if:
•
the brakes are applied.
•
the gear selector is moved to N
•
a turn signal is used for more than 1 minute.
•
the vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute
Temporarily increasing speed using the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. when passing another vehicle, will
not affect the setting. The vehicle will return to
the set speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
When the turn signals are used, Pilot Assist's
steering assistance will be temporarily deacti-
vated. When the turn signal is switched off, steer-
ing assistance will be automatically reactivated if
the traffic lane's side markings can still be
detected.
Automatic standby mode
Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, such
as Electronic Stability Control (ESC
59
). If any of
these other systems stops working, Pilot Assist
will automatically switch off.
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned by an acoustic signal and a message
on the instrument panel.
•
The driver must then regulate vehicle
speed, apply the brakes if necessary, and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Adaptive Cruise Control may go into standby
mode if, e.g.:
•
the driver opens the door.
•
the brake temperature is high.
•
the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel.
•
the parking brake is applied.
•
the engine speed (rpm) is too low/high.
•
the driver unbuckles the seat belt.
•
one or more of the wheels lose traction.
•
the camera/radar sensor is covered by snow
or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar waves
are blocked)
•
your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
(3 mph) and Pilot Assist cannot determine if
the vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is
another object, e.g. a speed bump.
•
your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h
(3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so that
Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Reactivating Pilot Assist from standby
mode
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
To reactivate Pilot Assist:
–
Press the button on the steering wheel
(1).
> Speed will be set to the most recently
stored speed.
59
Electronic Stability Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
324
WARNING
A noticeable increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
Passing assistance with Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist can assist the driver when passing
other vehicles.
How passing assistance works
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
and you indicate that you intend to pass that
vehicle by using the turn signal
60
, Pilot Assist will
begin accelerating toward the vehicle ahead
before your vehicle has moved into the passing
lane.
The function will then delay a speed reduction to
avoid early braking as your vehicle approaches a
slower-moving vehicle.
The function remains active until your vehicle has
passed the other vehicle.
WARNING
Please note that this function can be acti-
vated in more situations than just passing
another vehicle, such as when a direction indi-
cator is used to indicate a lane change or
before exiting to another road – the vehicle
will then briefly accelerate.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
•
Starting passing assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 325)
•
Passing assistance with Pilot Assist limita-
tions (p. 325)
60
Only the left-hand turn signal for left-hand drive vehicles, or right-hand turn signal for right-hand drive vehicles.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
325
Starting passing assistance with
Pilot Assist
Several conditions must be met for passing
assistance to be possible.
In order to activate passing assistance:
•
your vehicle must be following a vehicle
ahead (target vehicle)
•
your vehicle's current speed must be
at least 70 km/h (43 mph)
•
the set speed for Pilot Assist must be high
enough to safely pass another vehicle.
Starting parking assistance
To start passing assistance:
–
Turn on the left turn signal.
> Passing assistance will start.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
•
Passing assistance with Pilot Assist (p. 324)
Passing assistance with Pilot Assist
limitations
Passing assistance functionality may be reduced
in certain situations.
WARNING
The driver should be aware that if conditions
suddenly change when using Parking Assis-
tance, the function may implement an unde-
sired acceleration in certain conditions.
Some situations should be avoided, e.g. if:
•
the vehicle is approaching an exit in the
same direction as passing would normally
occur
•
the vehicle ahead slows before your vehi-
cle has had time to switch to the passing
lane
•
traffic in the passing lane slows down
•
a vehicle for right-hand traffic is driven in
a country with left-hand traffic (or vice
versa).
Situations of this type can be avoided by tempo-
rarily putting Pilot Assist in standby mode.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
•
Passing assistance with Pilot Assist (p. 324)
Switching target vehicles with Pilot
Assist
At certain speeds, models with automatic trans-
missions and Pilot Assist can switch target vehi-
cles.
Switching target vehicles
If the target vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be
stationary traffic ahead.
When Pilot Assist is actively following another
vehicle at speeds under 30 km/h (20 mph) and
switches targets from a moving vehicle to a sta-
tionary vehicle, Pilot Assist will brake for the sta-
tionary vehicle.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
326
WARNING
When Pilot Assist follows another vehicle at
speeds over approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and
changes target vehicle – from a moving vehi-
cle to a stationary one – Pilot Assist will
ignore the stationary vehicle and instead
accelerate to the stored speed.
•
The driver must then intervene and apply
the brakes.
Automatic standby mode when switching
targets
Pilot Assist disengages and goes into standby
mode if:
•
your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
(3 mph) and Pilot Assist cannot determine if
the target object is a stationary vehicle or
another object, e.g. a speed bump.
•
your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h
(3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so that
Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
Auto-hold braking with Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist has a special braking function in
slow traffic and at a standstill.
Braking function in slow traffic and at a
standstill
In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stop-
ped at a traffic light, driving will resume automati-
cally if the vehicle is stopped for less than
approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than 3 sec-
onds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving again,
Pilot Assist will go into standby mode and the
Auto-hold brake function will activate.
–
Pilot Assist can be reactivated by:
•
Pressing the
button on the steering
wheel keypad.
•
Pressing the accelerator pedal.
> Pilot Assist will resume following the vehi-
cle ahead if it begins to move within
approx. 6 seconds.
NOTE
Pilot Assist can keep the vehicle stationary
for no more than 5 minutes – after that time
the parking brake is applied and the function
is deactivated.
The parking brake must be released before
Pilot Assist can be reactivated.
Deactivation of the Auto-hold brake function
In certain situations, Auto-hold will be deactivated
when the vehicle is at a standstill and Pilot Assist
will go into standby mode. This means that the
brakes will be released and the vehicle could
begin to roll. The driver must actively apply the
brakes to keep the vehicle stationary.
This can occur if:
•
the driver depresses the brake pedal
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the gear selector is moved to the P, N or R
positions
•
the driver puts Pilot Assist in standby mode.
Auto Activate Parking Brake
In certain situations, the parking brake will be
applied to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
This occurs if Pilot Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary using the brakes and:
•
the driver opens the door or unbuckles
his/her seat belt
•
Pilot Assist has kept the vehicle at a stand-
still for more than approx. 5 minutes
•
the brakes overheat
•
the driver switches off the engine manually.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
327
Pilot Assist limitations
Pilot Assist functionality may be reduced in cer-
tain situations.
Pilot Assist is a driver support function designed
to simplify driving and assist the driver in many
situations. However, the driver is always responsi-
ble for maintaining a suitable distance to vehicles
or objects around it and ensuring that the vehicle
is correctly positioned in the traffic lane.
WARNING
In some situations, Pilot Assist may have trou-
ble helping the driver properly or may be
deactivated automatically – we advise against
using Pilot Assist in such cases. Examples of
such situations include:
•
the lane markings are worn, missing or
cross each other.
•
lane division is unclear, for example, when
the lanes divide or merge or at exits or
when there are multiple sets of markings.
•
edges or other lines than lane markings
are present on or near the road, e.g.
curbs, joints or repairs to the road sur-
face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or
strong shadows.
•
the lane is narrow or winding.
•
the lane contains ridges or holes.
•
weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,
snow or fog or slush or reduced visibility
with poor light conditions, backlighting,
wet road surface, etc.
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
has the following limitations:
•
High curbs, roadside barriers, temporary
obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers,
etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they
may be detected incorrectly as lane mark-
ings, with a subsequent risk of contact
between the vehicle and such obstacles.
The driver is responsible for ensuring that
the vehicle maintains a suitable distance
from such obstacles.
•
The camera and radar sensors do not
have the capacity to detect all oncoming
objects and obstacles in traffic environ-
ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles
or objects that completely or partially
block the route.
•
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
•
The recommended steering input is lim-
ited in force, which means that it cannot
always help the driver to steer and keep
the vehicle within the lane.
•
In vehicles equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, the function is able to use
information from map data, which could
cause variations in performance.
•
Pilot Assist is switched off if the power
steering is working with reduced power -
e.g. during cooling due to overheating
(see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
The driver can always correct or adjust steering
assistance provided by Pilot Assist by turning the
steering wheel to the desired position.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
328
Steep roads and/or heavy loads
Pilot Assist is primarily intended to be driven on
flat roads. The function may not be able to main-
tain the correct time interval to the vehicle ahead
when driving down steep hills. The driver should
be extra attentive and prepared to apply the
brakes.
•
Do not use Pilot Assist if the vehicle is carry-
ing a heavy load or towing a trailer.
NOTE
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
bike carrier or similar is connected to the
vehicle electrical system.
Other limitations
•
The
Off Road drive mode cannot be
selected when Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's combined
camera and radar unit, which has certain gen-
eral limitations; see sections "Camera limita-
tions" and "Radar sensor limitations".
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
•
Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance
(p. 276)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
Pilot Assist* symbols and messages
A number of symbols and messages relating to
Pilot Assist may be displayed in the instrument
panel and/or the head-up display*.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
329
Several examples
61
are provided below.
The previous illustration
62
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph)
and that there is no target vehicle ahead to fol-
low.
Pilot Assist will not provide any steering assis-
tance because it cannot detect the lane's side
marking lines.
The previous illustration
62
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph)
and is following a target vehicle ahead that is
traveling at the same speed.
Pilot Assist will not provide any steering assis-
tance because it cannot detect the lane's side
marking lines.
The previous illustration
62
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph)
and is following a target vehicle ahead that is
traveling at the same speed.
In this example, Pilot Assist will also provide
steering assistance because it can detect the
lane's side marking lines.
61
In the following illustration, Road Sign Information (RSI) indicates that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
62
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
330
The previous illustration
62
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph)
and that there is no target vehicle ahead to fol-
low.
Pilot Assist will provide steering assistance
because it can detect the lane's side marking
lines.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is used by several driver sup-
port systems to detect other vehicles.
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
The radar sensor is used by the following func-
tions:
•
Distance Alert*
•
Adaptive Cruise Control*
•
Lane Keeping Aid
•
Pilot Assist*
•
City Safety
Any modifications to the radar sensor may make
its use illegal.
Related information
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
•
Recommended maintenance for the radar
sensor (p. 334)
•
Radar sensor type approval (p. 334)
62
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
331
Radar sensor limitations
The radar sensor used by several of the driver
support functions has certain limitations, which
also affect the functions using the radar sensor.
Obstructed camera
The area marked in the illustration must be kept free of
decals, objects, solar film, etc.
63
The radar sensor is located on the upper interior
section of the windshield along with the camera.
CAUTION
Do not place, affix or mount anything on the
inside or outside of the windshield, or in front
of or around the camera and radar unit – this
could disrupt camera and radar-based func-
tions.
It could cause functions to be reduced, deac-
tivated completely or produce an incorrect
function response.
If this symbol and the message
"
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual" is
displayed in the instrument panel, it
means that the camera and radar sensor are
unable to detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedes-
trians and large animals in front of the vehicle
and that the vehicle's camera and radar-based
functions may be obstructed, reduced, completely
disabled or providing inaccurate responses.
The following table shows some of the situations that can cause the message to be displayed, and suggested actions:
Cause Action
The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is dirty or
covered by ice or snow.
Clean the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor and remove dirt, ice
and snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain or snow is blocking the radar signals or the camera's
range of visibility.
No action. Heavy precipitation may sometimes prevent the camera/radar sensor
from functioning.
63
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
332
Cause Action
Water or snow is spraying/swirling up and blocking the radar signals or
the camera's range of visibility.
No action. Very wet or snow-covered roads may sometimes prevent the cam-
era/radar sensor from functioning.
There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera/radar
sensor.
Consult a workshop to have the area of the windshield on the inside of the cam-
era's casing cleaned. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Keep the windshield in front of the camera
and radar unit clean.
Vehicle speed
The radar sensor's ability to detect a vehicle
ahead is significantly reduced if:
•
the speed of the vehicle ahead differs greatly
from your vehicle's speed
Limited field of vision
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations, it may detect a vehicle later than
expected or not at all.
The radar sensor's field of vision.
The radar sensor's detection of vehicles very
close to your vehicle may be delayed in cer-
tain situations, e.g. if a vehicle pulls in
between your vehicle and the vehicle directly
ahead.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi-
cles that are not driving in the center of the
lane may remain undetected.
In curves, the radar may detect the wrong
vehicle or lose sight of a target vehicle.
Low trailers
Low trailer in the radar shadow.
Low trailers may also be difficult or even impossi-
ble for the radar to detect. The driver should be
extra alert when driving behind vehicles towing
low trailers when Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot
Assist is activated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
333
High temperatures
If the temperature in the passenger compartment
is very high, the camera/radar sensor will switch
off temporarily for approx. 15 minutes after the
engine is started to protect its electronic compo-
nents. When the temperature has cooled suffi-
ciently, the camera/radar sensor will automati-
cally restart.
Damaged windshield
CAUTION
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips
on the windshield in front of any of the cam-
era and radar unit "windows" and this covers
an area of about 0.5 × 3.0 mm
(0.02 × 0.12 in.) or more, contact a workshop
to have the windshield replaced – an author-
ized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Failure to take action could result in reduced
performance for the driver support systems
that use the camera and radar unit.
It could cause functions to be reduced, deac-
tivated completely or produce an incorrect
function response.
To avoid the risk of loss of function, malfunc-
tion or reduced function of the driver support
systems that use the radar unit, the following
also apply:
•
Volvo advises against repairing cracks,
scratches or stone chips in the area in
front of the camera and radar unit – the
entire windshield should instead be
replaced.
•
Before replacing the windshield, contact
an authorized Volvo workshop to verify
that the right windshield has been
ordered and installed.
•
The same type of windshield wipers or
wipers approved by Volvo should be used
for replacement.
CAUTION
If the windshield is replaced, the camera and
radar unit must be recalibrated by a workshop
to help ensure proper functioning of all of the
vehicle's camera and radar-based systems –
an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
•
Radar sensor (p. 330)
DRIVER SUPPORT
334
Recommended maintenance for the
radar sensor
In order for the camera/radar sensor to function
properly, the area of the windshield in front of the
unit must be kept free of dirt, ice, snow, etc. and
should be washed regularly with water and car
washing detergent.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit reduce their function and can make
measurement impossible.
It could cause functions to be reduced, deac-
tivated completely or produce an incorrect
function response.
Related information
•
Radar sensor (p. 330)
Radar sensor type approval
The type approval for the vehicle radar sensor in
the ACC
64
, PA
65
and BLIS
66
functions can be
read here.
ACC, PA and BLIS
USA & Canada:
FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR
FCC ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie
Canada a applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée à
condition que l'appareil ne produise pas de
brouillage préjudiciable et qu'il accepte tout
brouillage, même celui susceptible d'en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio
certification number only signifies that Industry
Canada technical specifications were met.
Note: This equipment complies with radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
Related information
•
Radar sensor (p. 330)
64
Adaptive Cruise Control
65
Pilot Assist
66
Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
335
Camera
The camera is used by several driver support
systems to e.g. detect lane marker lines or road
signs.
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary
depending on model.
The camera is used by the following functions:
•
Adaptive Cruise Control*
•
Pilot Assist*
•
Lane Keeping Aid*
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
•
City Safety
•
Driver Alert Control*
•
Road Sign Information*
•
Active high beams*
Related information
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
•
Recommended maintenance for the camera/
radar sensor (p. 339)
DRIVER SUPPORT
336
Camera limitations
The camera used by several of the driver support
functions has certain limitations, which also
affect the functions using the camera.
Reduced visibility
The camera has the same limitations as the
human eye. In other words, its “vision" is impaired
by adverse weather conditions such as heavy
snowfall/rain, dense fog, swirling dust/snow, etc.
These conditions may reduce the function of sys-
tems that depend on the camera or cause these
systems to temporarily stop functioning.
Strong sunlight, reflections from the road surface,
ice or snow covering the road, a dirty road sur-
face, or unclear lane marker lines may drastically
reduce the camera’s ability to detect the side of a
lane, a pedestrian, a cyclist, a large animal or
another vehicle.
Obstructed camera
The area marked in the illustration must be kept free of
decals, objects, solar film, etc.
67
The camera is located on the upper interior sec-
tion of the windshield along with the radar sen-
sor.
CAUTION
Do not place, affix or mount anything on the
inside or outside of the windshield, or in front
of or around the camera and radar unit – this
could disrupt camera and radar-based func-
tions.
It could cause functions to be reduced, deac-
tivated completely or produce an incorrect
function response.
If this symbol and the message
“
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual” is
displayed in the instrument panel, it
means that the camera and radar sensor are
unable to detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedes-
trians and large animals in front of the vehicle
and that the vehicle's camera and radar-based
functions may be obstructed, reduced, completely
disabled or providing inaccurate responses.
The following table shows some of the situations
that can cause the message to be displayed, and
suggested actions:
67
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}}}
337
Cause Action
The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is
dirty or covered by ice or snow.
Clean the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor and remove dirt, ice and
snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain or snow is blocking the radar signals or the
camera's range of visibility.
No action. Heavy precipitation may sometimes prevent the camera/radar sensor from
functioning.
Water or snow is spraying/swirling up and blocking the radar signals
or the camera's range of visibility.
No action. Very wet or snow-covered roads may sometimes prevent the camera/
radar sensor from functioning.
There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera/
radar sensor.
Consult a workshop to have the area of the windshield on the inside of the camera's
casing cleaned. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Bright sunlight. No action. The camera/radar sensor will reset automatically when lighting conditions
improve.
NOTE
Keep the windshield in front of the camera
and radar unit clean.
High temperatures
If the temperature in the passenger compartment
is very high, the camera/radar sensor will switch
off temporarily for approx. 15 minutes after the
engine is started to protect its electronic compo-
nents. When the temperature has cooled suffi-
ciently, the camera/radar sensor will automati-
cally restart.
Damaged windshield
CAUTION
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips
on the windshield in front of any of the cam-
era and radar unit "windows" and this covers
an area of about 0.5 × 3.0 mm
(0.02 × 0.12 in.) or more, contact a workshop
to have the windshield replaced – an author-
ized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Failure to take action could result in reduced
performance for the driver support systems
that use the camera and radar unit.
It could cause functions to be reduced, deac-
tivated completely or produce an incorrect
function response.
To avoid the risk of loss of function, malfunc-
tion or reduced function of the driver support
systems that use the radar unit, the following
also apply:
•
Volvo advises against repairing cracks,
scratches or stone chips in the area in
front of the camera and radar unit – the
entire windshield should instead be
replaced.
•
Before replacing the windshield, contact
an authorized Volvo workshop to verify
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
338
that the right windshield has been
ordered and installed.
•
The same type of windshield wipers or
wipers approved by Volvo should be used
for replacement.
CAUTION
If the windshield is replaced, the camera and
radar unit must be recalibrated by a workshop
to help ensure proper functioning of all of the
vehicle's camera and radar-based systems –
an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
•
Camera (p. 335)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
339
Recommended maintenance for the
camera/radar sensor
In order for the camera/radar sensor to function
properly, the area of the windshield in front of
the unit must be kept free of dirt, ice, snow, etc.
and should be washed regularly with water and
car washing detergent.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit reduce their function and can make
measurement impossible.
It could cause functions to be reduced, deac-
tivated completely or produce an incorrect
function response.
Related information
•
Camera (p. 335)
City Safety™
City Safety can alert the driver with light, sound
and pulsations in the brake pedal to help the
driver detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals
and vehicles that appear suddenly – the vehicle
will then attempt to automatically brake if the
driver does not act within a reasonable amount
of time.
Location of the camera and radar sensor
68
.
City Safety can help prevent a collision or lower
the vehicle's speed at the point of impact.
City Safety is an aid intended to assist the driver
if a collision with a pedestrian, large animal,
cyclist or vehicle is imminent.
City Safety can help the driver avoid a collision
when e.g. driving in stop-and-go traffic, when
changes in the traffic ahead and driver distraction
could lead to an incident.
The function assists the driver by automatically
applying the brakes if there is an imminent risk of
a collision and the driver does not react in time by
braking and/or steering away.
City Safety activates a brief, forceful braking in an
attempt to stop your vehicle immediately behind
the vehicle or object ahead.
City Safety is activated in situations in which the
driver should have applied the brakes much ear-
lier, which means that the system will not be able
to assist the driver in all situations.
City Safety is designed to be activated as late as
possible to help avoid unnecessary intervention.
Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not be
aware of City Safety except when the system
intervenes when a collision is imminent.
68
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
340
WARNING
•
The City Safety function is supplementary
driver support intended to help improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
•
The City Safety auto-brake function can
prevent a collision or reduce collision
speed, but to ensure full brake perform-
ance the driver should always depress the
brake pedal – even when the car auto-
brakes.
•
The warning and steering assistance are
only activated if there is a high risk of col-
lision – you must therefore never wait for
the collision warning or City Safety to
intervene.
•
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are disengaged
at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h
(50 mph).
•
City Safety does not activate auto-braking
intervention during heavy acceleration.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgment. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the vehi-
cle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to City
Safety to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links for all subsections).
Related information
•
City Safety parameters and sub-functions
(p. 340)
•
Setting a warning distance for City Safety
(p. 342)
•
Detecting obstacles with City Safety (p. 343)
•
City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 345)
•
Limitations of City Safety in crossing traffic
(p. 346)
•
City Safety and delayed evasive maneuvers
(p. 347)
•
City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles
(p. 348)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 349)
•
City Safety messages (p. 351)
City Safety parameters and sub-
functions
City Safety can help avoid a collision with a vehi-
cle, cyclist or large animal ahead by reducing the
vehicle's speed using its automatic braking func-
tion.
If the difference in speed is greater than the
speeds specified below, the City Safety auto-
brake function cannot prevent a collision, but it
can help mitigate its effects.
Vehicles
City Safety can help prevent a collision with a
vehicle ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed
by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
Cyclists
City Safety can help prevent a collision with a
cyclist ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed by
up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
Pedestrians
City Safety can help prevent a collision with a
pedestrian ahead by reducing your vehicle's
speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
341
Large animals
If there is a risk of colliding with a large animal,
City Safety can help reduce your vehicle's speed
by up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
The braking function for large animals is primarily
intended to mitigate the force of a collision at
higher speeds. Braking is most effective at
speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) and less effec-
tive at lower speeds.
City Safety sub-functions
Function overview
69
.
Acoustic collision warning signal
Collision warning symbol
Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring
City Safety carries out three steps in the follow-
ing order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake assistance
3. Auto-brake
Descriptions of what happens in these three
steps are provided below.
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first alerted to the risk of an immi-
nent collision.
In vehicles equipped with a head-up display*, a
flashing warning symbol will be displayed on the
windshield.
Collision warning symbol on the windshield
70
.
NOTE
Visual warnings on the windshield may be dif-
ficult to notice in cases of strong sunlight,
reflections, extreme light contrasts, or if the
driver is wearing sunglasses or is not looking
straight ahead.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary, are moving in the
same direction as your vehicle and are ahead of
your vehicle. City Safety can also detect pedes-
trians, cyclists or large animals that are crossing
the road in front of your vehicle.
If there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian,
large animal, cyclist or another vehicle, or with a
vehicle described in the section "City Safety in
crossing traffic", the driver will be alerted with
light, sound and pulsations in the brake pedal. At
lower speeds, during hard braking or if the accel-
erator pedal is pressed, the brake pedal pulsation
warning will not be given. The intensity of the
brake pedal pulsations varies according to the
vehicle's speed.
69
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
70
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
342
2 - Brake assistance
If the risk of a collision increases after the colli-
sion warning, brake support will be activated.
If the system determines that the pressure the
driver is exerting on the brake pedal is insufficient
to prevent the collision, brake support will
increase pressure.
3 - Auto-brake
The automatic braking function is activated at the
last moment.
If the driver has not taken evasive action by this
stage and a collision is imminent, the automatic
braking function will be triggered. This occurs
whether or not the driver is pressing the brake
pedal. Full braking force will be applied to reduce
the speed at impact or reduced braking effect will
be applied if this is sufficient to avoid the colli-
sion.
The seat belt tensioners may be activated along
with the automatic braking function. See "Seat
belt tensioners" for more information.
In certain situations, auto-braking may begin with
a limited braking force before applying full brak-
ing force.
If City Safety has prevented a collision, the vehi-
cle will be kept at a standstill until the driver
takes action. If the vehicle has slowed to avoid
colliding with a slower-moving vehicle ahead, your
speed will be reduced to that vehicle's speed.
Auto-braking can always be cancelled if the
driver presses hard on the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
When City Safety activates the brakes, the
brake lights come on.
When City Safety applies the brakes, a text mes-
sage will appear in the instrument panel to notify
the driver that the function is/was activated.
WARNING
City Safety may not be used to change how
the driver operates the vehicle. The driver
must not only rely on City Safety to brake the
vehicle.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
Setting a warning distance for City
Safety
City Safety is always active, but the function's
warning distance can be adjusted.
NOTE
The City Safety function cannot be deacti-
vated. It is activated automatically each time
the engine/electric motor is started.
The alert distance determines the sensitivity of
the system and regulates the distance at which
the light, sound and brake pulsations will be acti-
vated.
To select warning distance:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the center display's Top view.
2.
Under
City Safety Warning, tap Late,
Normal or Early to set the desired warning
distance.
If the driver feels that the
Early setting is giving
too many warnings or finds them irritating, the
Normal or Late warning distance settings can
be selected instead.
If the driver feels that the warnings are too fre-
quent and distracting, the warning distance can
be reduced. This will reduce the total number of
warnings, but it will also result in City Safety pro-
viding warnings at a later stage.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
343
The Late warning distance setting should there-
fore only be used in exceptional cases, such as
when a more dynamic driving style is preferred.
WARNING
•
No automatic system can guarantee
100% correct function in all situations.
You should therefore never test use of
City Safety in the direction of people, ani-
mals or vehicles – this could lead to
severe damage, serious personal injury or
even death.
•
City Safety warns the driver if there is a
risk of collision, but the function cannot
reduce the driver's reaction time.
•
Even if the warning distance has been set
to
Early, warnings may be perceived as
late in certain situations – e.g. when there
are large speed differences or if the vehi-
cle ahead suddenly brakes heavily.
•
With the warning distance set to
Early,
warnings come further in advance. This
may cause the warnings to come more
frequently than with warning distance
Normal, but is recommended since it can
make City Safety more effective.
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the colli-
sion warning distance in the City Safety func-
tion is set to the lowest level "
Late".
The seat belt tensioning and braking func-
tions remain active.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
Detecting obstacles with City Safety
City Safety can help detect vehicles, cyclists,
large animals and pedestrians.
Vehicles
City Safety detects most types of vehicles that
are either stationary, moving in the same direc-
tion as your vehicle or those described in “City
Safety in crossing traffic” and City Safety braking
for oncoming vehicles”.
For City Safety to be able to detect a vehicle in
the dark, its headlights and taillights must be on
and clearly visible.
Cyclists
Optimal examples of what City Safety would interpret to
be a cyclist: clear body and bicycle shapes.
For optimal performance, the system's function
for cyclist detection needs the clearest possible
information about the contours of the bicycle and
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
344
of the cyclist's head, arm, shoulders, legs, torso
and lower body in combination with normal
human movements.
If large portions of the cyclist's body or the bicy-
cle itself are not visible to the function's camera,
it will not be able to detect a cyclist.
The system can only detect adult cyclists riding
on bicycles intended for adults.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations
and, for example, cannot see:
•
partially obscured cyclists.
•
cyclists if the background contrast of the
cyclist is poor - warning and brake inter-
ventions may then be late or not occur at
all.
•
cyclists in clothing that hides their body
contour.
•
bikes loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a
safety distance suitable for the speed.
Pedestrians
Optimal examples of what the system considers to be a
pedestrian: clear body contours.
For optimal performance, the system's function
for pedestrian detection needs the clearest pos-
sible information about body and bicycle con-
tours. This entails being able to detect the con-
tours of the pedestrian's head, arm, shoulders,
legs, torso and lower body in combination with
normal human movements.
In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be a
contrast to the background, which could depend
on clothing, weather conditions, etc. If there is lit-
tle contrast, the person may be detected late or
not at all, which may result in a delayed reaction
from the system or no reaction at all.
City Safety can detect pedestrians even in dark
conditions if they are illuminated by the vehicle's
headlights.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all sit-
uations and, for example, cannot see:
•
partially obscured pedestrians, people in
clothing that hides their body contour or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.).
•
pedestrians if the background contrast of
the pedestrians is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
•
pedestrians who are carrying large
objects.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a
safety distance suitable for the speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
345
Large animals
Optimal examples of what City Safety would interpret as
a large animal: stationary or moving slowly and with clear
body contours.
For optimal performance, the system's function
for detecting large animals (e.g. moose, horses,
etc.) needs the clearest possible information
about body contours. This entails being able to
detect the animal straight from the side in combi-
nation with normal movements for that animal.
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the
function's camera, the system will not be able to
detect the animal.
City Safety can detect large animals even in dark
conditions if they are illuminated by the vehicle's
headlights.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all large animals in all sit-
uations and, for example, cannot see:
•
partially obscured larger animals.
•
larger animals seen from the front or from
behind.
•
running or fast moving larger animals.
•
larger animals if the contrast of the ani-
mal's background is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then occur late
or not at all.
•
smaller animals such as cats and dogs.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a
safety distance suitable for the speed.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
•
City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 345)
•
City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles
(p. 348)
City Safety in crossing traffic
City Safety can assist the driver when turning in
the path of an oncoming vehicle in an intersec-
tion.
: Sector in which City Safety can detect an oncoming
vehicle in crossing traffic.
In order for City Safety to detect an oncoming
vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a col-
lision, that vehicle must be within the sector in
which City Safety can analyze the situation.
The following criteria must also be met:
•
your vehicle's speed must be at least 4 km/h
(3 mph)
•
your vehicle must be making a left turn
•
the oncoming vehicle's headlights must be
on
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
346
WARNING
•
The "City Safety in crossing traffic" func-
tion is supplementary driver support
intended to improve driving safety – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Warnings and brake interventions due to
a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle
often come very late.
•
Never wait for a collision warning or for
City Safety to intervene.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgment. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the vehi-
cle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
Limitations of City Safety in
crossing traffic
In certain situations, it may be difficult for City
Safety to help the driver avoid a collision with
crossing traffic.
For example:
•
on slippery roads when Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is actively operating
•
if an approaching vehicle is detected at a late
stage
•
if the oncoming vehicle is partially obstructed
by another vehicle or object
•
if the oncoming vehicle's headlights are off
•
if the oncoming vehicle is moving erratically
and e.g. suddenly changes lanes at a late
stage.
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's combined
camera and radar unit, which has certain gen-
eral limitations; see sections "Camera limita-
tions" and "Radar sensor limitations".
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 349)
•
City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 345)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
DRIVER SUPPORT
347
City Safety and delayed evasive
maneuvers
City Safety can assist the driver by automatically
braking the vehicle when it is not possible to
avoid a collision by steering alone.
City Safety assists the driver by periodically
attempting to predict possible "escape routes" to
the sides of the vehicle in the event a slow-mov-
ing or stationary vehicle were to be detected at a
late stage.
Your vehicle (1) cannot detect any potential escape
routes for veering away from the vehicle ahead (2) and
may therefore apply the brakes at an earlier stage.
Own vehicle
Slow-moving/stationary vehicles
City Safety will not intervene to automatically
apply the brakes if it is possible for the driver to
avoid a collision by steering the vehicle.
However, if City Safety determines that an eva-
sive maneuver would not be possible due to traf-
fic in the adjacent lane(s), the function can assist
the driver by automatically starting to apply the
brakes at an earlier stage.
WARNING
•
The possibility of City Safety predicting a
certain situation is supplementary driver
support intended to improve driving safety
– it cannot handle all situations in all traf-
fic, weather and road conditions.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgment. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the vehi-
cle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Limitations of City Safety during evasive
maneuvers
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's combined
camera and radar unit, which has certain gen-
eral limitations; see sections "Camera limita-
tions" and "Radar sensor limitations".
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
DRIVER SUPPORT
348
City Safety braking for oncoming
vehicles
City Safety can help you apply the brakes for an
oncoming vehicle in your lane.
If an oncoming vehicle veers into your lane and a
collision is unavoidable, City Safety can help
reduce your vehicle's speed to attempt to miti-
gate the force of the collision.
Own vehicle
Oncoming vehicles
The following criteria must be met for the func-
tion to work:
•
your vehicle's speed must be above 4 km/h
(3 mph)
•
the road must be straight
•
your lane must have clear side lane markings
•
your vehicle must be positioned straight in
your lane
•
the oncoming vehicle must be positioned
within your vehicle's lane markings
•
the oncoming vehicle's headlights must be
on
•
the function can only handle “front-to-front”
collisions
•
the function can only detect vehicles with
four wheels
•
the function requires functioning Electric
Seat Belt Tensioners (see section “Seat
belt tensioners”).
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's combined
camera and radar unit, which has certain gen-
eral limitations; see sections "Camera limita-
tions" and "Radar sensor limitations".
WARNING
•
The "City Safety braking for oncoming
vehicles" function is supplementary driver
support intended to help improve driving
safety – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
Warnings and brake interventions due to
an imminent collision with an oncoming
vehicle always come very late.
•
Never wait for a collision warning or for
City Safety to intervene. If you notice any
hazard or other potentially dangerous sit-
uation, always fully apply the brakes.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgment. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the vehi-
cle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
•
City Safety limitations (p. 349)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
•
Seat belt tensioners (p. 50)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
349
City Safety limitations
City Safety functionality may be reduced in cer-
tain situations.
Surroundings
Low objects
Hanging objects, such as flags for overhanging
loads or accessories such as auxiliary lights or
front protective grids that extend beyond the
height of the hood, may limit City Safety function-
ality.
Slippery road conditions
The extended braking distance on slippery roads
may reduce City Safety's capacity to help avoid a
collision. In these types of situations, the Anti-
lock Braking System and Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC
71
) will help provide optimal braking
power with maintained stability.
Backlighting
The visual warning signal in the windshield may
be difficult to detect in bright sunlight, if there are
reflections, or if the driver is wearing sunglasses
or not looking straight ahead.
Heat
If the temperature in the passenger compartment
is high due to e.g. bright sunlight, the visual warn-
ing signal in the windshield may be temporarily
disabled.
Camera and radar sensor's field of vision
The camera's field of vision is limited and in cer-
tain situations, it may be unable to detect pedes-
trians, large animals, cyclists or vehicles, or it may
detect them later than expected.
Vehicles that are dirty may be detected later than
clean vehicles, and in dark conditions, motorcy-
cles may be detected late or not at all.
If a text message displayed in the instrument
panel indicates that the camera/radar sensor is
obstructed, it may be difficult for City Safety to
detect pedestrians, large animals, cyclists, vehi-
cles or lane markings in front of the vehicle. City
Safety functionality may therefore be reduced.
Text messages may not be displayed for all situa-
tions in which the windshield sensors are
blocked. The driver must therefore always keep
the windshield in front of the camera/radar sen-
sor clean.
CAUTION
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety
components may only be performed by a
workshop – an authorized Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Driver intervention
Backing up
City Safety is temporarily deactivated when the
vehicle is backing up.
Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds
under 4 km/h (3 mph). The system will therefore
not intervene in situations in which your vehicle is
approaching another vehicle very slowly, such as
when parking.
Active driver
Action by the driver always has priority. City
Safety will therefore not react or will react at a
later stage with a warning or intervention in situa-
tions in which the driver is clearly steering and
operating the accelerator pedal, even if a collision
is unavoidable.
An active and aware driving style may therefore
delay collision warnings and intervention in order
to minimize unnecessary warnings.
71
Electronic Stability Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
350
Other limitations
WARNING
•
Warnings and brake interventions can be
triggered late or not at all if the traffic sit-
uation or external influences prevent the
camera and radar unit from properly
detecting pedestrians, cyclists, large ani-
mals or vehicles ahead of the vehicle.
•
To be able to detect vehicles at night, its
front and rear lights must work and illumi-
nate clearly.
•
The camera and radar unit have a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists – the
system can provide effective warnings
and brake interventions if the relative
speed is lower than 50 km/h (30 mph).
For stationary or slow-moving vehicles,
warnings and brake interventions are
effective at vehicle speeds of up to
70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for
large animals is less than 15 km/h
(9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle
speeds over 70 km/h (43 mph). At lower
speeds, the warning and brake interven-
tion for large animals is less effective.
•
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles and large animals can be disen-
gaged due to darkness or poor visibility.
•
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are disengaged
at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h
(50 mph).
•
Do not place, affix or mount anything on
the inside or outside of the windshield, or
in front of or around the camera and
radar unit – this could disrupt camera-
based functions.
•
Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera sensor can reduce the func-
tion, disengage it completely or give an
improper function response.
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's combined
camera and radar unit, which has certain gen-
eral limitations; see sections "Camera limita-
tions" and "Radar sensor limitations".
Market limitations
City Safety is not available in all countries. If City
Safety is not shown in the center display's
Settings
menu, your vehicle is not equipped with
this function.
In the center display's Top view, tap:
•
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
DRIVER SUPPORT
351
City Safety messages
A number of messages related to City Safety
may be displayed in the instrument panel.
Some examples of symbols and messages are shown in the table below.
Message Meaning
City Safety
Automatic intervention
When City Safety is braking or has activated the automatic braking function, one or more symbols may illuminate in
the instrument panel and a text message may be displayed.
City Safety
Reduced functionality Service
required
The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the
button in the center of the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
DRIVER SUPPORT
352
Rear Collision Warning
The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can
help the driver avoid rear-end collisions from
vehicles approaching from behind.
RCW is automatically activated each time the
engine is started.
RCW can warn the driver of a potential collision
with vehicles approaching from behind by rapidly
flashing the turn signals.
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the RCW
function detects that the car is in danger of being
hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners may ten-
sion the front seatbelts and activate the Whiplash
Protection System safety system.
Immediately before a collision from behind, RCW
may also activate the foot brake in order to
reduce the forward acceleration of the car during
the collision. However, the brakes will only be
applied if your vehicle is stationary. The brakes
will be immediately released if the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
Related information
•
Rear Collision Warning limitations (p. 352)
•
Whiplash Protection System (p. 46)
Rear Collision Warning limitations
In some situations, it may be difficult for RCW to
warn the driver of a collision risk.
This may be the case if:
•
the vehicle approaching from the rear is
detected at a late stage
•
the vehicle approaching from the rear
changes lanes at a late stage
•
the vehicle approaching from the rear is mov-
ing at a speed above 80 km/h (50 mph)
•
a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is con-
nected to the vehicle's electrical system - the
RCW function will then be automatically
deactivated.
NOTE
In certain markets RCW does not warn with
the direction indicators due to local traffic
regulations – in such cases, that part of the
function is deactivated.
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the colli-
sion warning distance in the City Safety func-
tion is set to the lowest level "
Late".
The seat belt tensioning and braking func-
tions remain active.
Related information
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 352)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
353
BLIS*
The BLIS
72
function is designed to help provide
assistance in heavy traffic with several lanes
moving in the same direction by helping the
driver to detect the presence of vehicles in the
"blind spot" area behind and to the side of the
vehicle.
BLIS is a driver support system designed to alert
the driver of:
•
vehicles in your "blind spot"
•
vehicles approaching rapidly in adjacent
lanes.
Location of BLIS indicator light.
73
Indicator light
The BLIS button in the center display's Func-
tion view is used to activate/deactivate the
function.
BLIS overview
Blind spot zone
Rapidly approaching vehicle zone.
The BLIS function is active at speeds
above 10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is designed to react to:
•
vehicles passing your vehicle
•
vehicles that are rapidly approaching your
vehicle from behind.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a rap-
idly approaching vehicle in zone 2, an indicator
light will illuminate in the relevant rearview mirror
and glow steadily. If the driver then uses the turn
signal on the side in which the warning has been
72
Blind Spot Information Systems
73
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
354
given, the indicator light will become brighter and
begin flashing.
NOTE
The light illuminates on the side of the vehicle
where the system has detected the vehicle. If
the vehicle is passed on both sides simulta-
neously, both lights come on.
WARNING
•
The BLIS function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
help make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and road
conditions.
•
The responsibility for changing lanes
safely and using good judgment always
rests with the driver.
•
BLIS is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgment. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the vehi-
cle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating BLIS (p. 354)
•
BLIS limitations (p. 355)
•
Recommended maintenance for BLIS
(p. 356)
•
BLIS messages (p. 357)
Activating/deactivating BLIS
The BLIS
74
function can be activated/deacti-
vated.
Location of BLIS indicator light.
75
Indicator light
The BLIS button in the center display's Func-
tion view is used to activate/deactivate the
function.
–
Tap the BLIS button in Function view.
> The BLIS indicator light shows the status
of the function: GREEN (on) or GRAY
(off).
If BLIS is activated when the engine is started,
the indicator lights in the rearview mirrors will
flash once.
If BLIS is deactivated when the engine is turned
off, it will remain off the next time the engine is
started and the indicator lights will not illuminate.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
355
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 353)
BLIS limitations
BLIS
76
functionality may be reduced in certain
situations.
Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and right
sides of the vehicle)
77
.
Examples of limitations:
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce functionality and prevent the system
from providing warnings.
•
The BLIS function is automatically deacti-
vated if a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is
connected to the vehicle's electrical system.
•
For BLIS to function optimally, bicycle hold-
ers, luggage racks or similar should not be
mounted on the vehicle's towbar.
WARNING
•
BLIS does not work in sharp curves.
•
BLIS does not work when the vehicle is
being reversed.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 353)
74
Blind Spot Information
75
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
76
Blind Spot Information
77
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
356
Recommended maintenance for
BLIS
•
For optimal performance, it is important to
keep the areas in front of the sensors clean.
•
Do not attach any objects, tape or decals to
the surface of the sensors.
Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and right
sides of the vehicle)
78
.
The BLIS sensors are located on the inside of
each of the rear fenders/bumpers and are also
used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) and Rear
Collision Warning functions.
CAUTION
Repair of BLIS and CTA components or
repainting of the bumper may only be per-
formed by a workshop – an authorized Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 353)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358)
•
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert
(p. 359)
•
Cross Traffic Alert limitations (p. 359)
•
Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 360)
•
Cross Traffic Alert messages (p. 361)
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 352)
78
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
357
BLIS messages
A number of messages related to BLIS
79
may
be displayed in the instrument panel.
Some examples of symbols and messages are shown in the table below.
Message Meaning
Blind spot sensor
Service required
The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Blind spot system off
Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehicle's electrical system.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the
button in the center of the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 353)
79
Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
358
Cross Traffic Alert*
CTA
80
is a supplementary driver support system
to BLIS
81
that is intended to help the driver
detect vehicles crossing behind the vehicle
while backing up.
CTA overview.
CTA supplements BLIS by detecting traffic cross-
ing from the side, e.g. when backing out of a
parking space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles, but
in certain cases can also detect pedestrians or
smaller objects such as bicycles.
CTA is only active when the vehicle is moving
backward or if reverse gear is engaged.
If CTA detects that something is approaching
your vehicle from the side:
•
an audible signal will sound from either the
left or right speaker, depending on which
side of your vehicle the object is approaching
from.
•
an icon will illuminate in the PAS
82
graphic
on the screen.
•
an icon will appear in the Park Assist Cam-
era's Top view.
Illuminated CTA icon in the PAS graphic
83
on the
screen.
WARNING
•
The Cross Traffic Alert function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The responsibility for reversing the vehicle
safely and using good judgment always
rests with the driver.
•
Cross Traffic Alert is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgment. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at
the appropriate speed, with an appropri-
ate distance to other vehicles, and in
accordance with current traffic rules and
regulations.
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert
(p. 359)
•
Cross Traffic Alert limitations (p. 359)
•
Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 360)
•
Cross Traffic Alert messages (p. 361)
80
Cross Traffic Alert
81
Blind Spot Information
82
Park Assist System: Parking assistance with reversing sensors
83
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
359
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert
The driver can choose to deactivate the CTA
84
function as follows:
Press the Cross Traffic Alert
button in the center display's
Function view.
•
GRAY button indicator light - CTA is deacti-
vated.
•
GREEN button indicator light - CTA is acti-
vated.
CTA is automatically activated each time the
engine is started.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358)
Cross Traffic Alert limitations
CTA
85
functionality may be reduced in certain
situations.
CTA does not function optimally in all situations
and has certain limitations. The CTA sensors, for
example, cannot "see" through other parked
vehicles or objects blocking the vehicle.
Below are a few examples of situations in which
CTA's field of vision may be initially limited and
approaching vehicles may therefore not be
detected until they are very close to your vehicle:
The vehicle is parked very far into a parking space.
In a diagonal parking space, CTA may be completely
"blind" on one side of your vehicle.
CTA's blind zone.
CTA's field of vision.
However, as you back your vehicle slowly out of a
parking space, CTA's field of vision changes in
relation to the obstructing vehicle/object and its
blind zone is reduced.
84
Cross Traffic Alert
85
Cross Traffic Alert
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
360
Examples of further limitations
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce functionality and prevent the system
from providing warnings. For additional infor-
mation, see the section "Recommended
maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert".
•
CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer,
bicycle holder or similar is connected to the
vehicle's electrical system.
•
For CTA to function optimally, bicycle hold-
ers, luggage racks or similar should not be
mounted on the vehicle's towbar.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358)
•
Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 360)
Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert
•
For optimal performance, it is important to
keep the areas in front of the sensors clean.
•
Do not attach any objects, tape or decals to
the surface of the sensors.
Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and right
sides of the vehicle)
86
.
The CTA sensors are located on the inside of
each of the rear fenders/bumpers and are also
used by the BLIS
87
and Rear Collision Warning
functions.
CAUTION
Repair of BLIS and CTA components or
repainting of the bumper may only be per-
formed by a workshop – an authorized Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358)
•
BLIS* (p. 353)
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 352)
86
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
87
Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
361
Cross Traffic Alert messages
A number of messages related to CTA
88
may be
displayed in the instrument panel.
Some examples of symbols and messages are shown in the table below.
Message Meaning
Blind spot sensor
Service required
The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Blind spot system off
Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehicle's electrical system.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the
button in the center of the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358)
88
Cross Traffic Alert
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
362
Road Sign Information*
The Road Sign Information (RSI
89
) function can
help the driver observe speed-related road
signs.
Examples of signs that can be detected
90
.
Example
90
of registered speed information.
If the vehicle passes a speed limit sign, it will be
displayed in the instrument panel and the head-
up display*.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information
function (RSI) is only available in combination
with Sensus Navigation*.
WARNING
•
The Road Sign Information function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and help make it safer –
it cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Road Sign Information is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgment.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe
manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 363)
•
Road Sign Information and sign displays
(p. 364)
•
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation (p. 364)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 365)
•
Activating/deactivating Speed Warning in
Road Sign Information (p. 366)
89
Road Sign Information
90
Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just some examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
363
•
Road Sign Information with speed camera
information (p. 366)
•
Road Sign Information limitations (p. 367)
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
The Road Sign Information function can be
switched On or Off.
Press the
Road Sign
Information button in the cen-
ter display's Function view.
•
GREEN button indicator light - RSI is acti-
vated.
•
GRAY button indicator light - RSI is deacti-
vated.
NOTE
•
If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is
activated, road sign information is shown
in the driver display even if RSI
91
is not
activated.
•
To remove road sign information from the
driver display, you must deactivate both
Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.
•
When the Automatic Speed Limiter func-
tion is activated but RSI is deactivated, no
warnings are given from RSI. RSI must
also be activated for warnings to be pos-
sible.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 362)
91
Road Sign Information (RSI)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
364
Road Sign Information and sign
displays
Road Sign Information (RSI
92
) displays road
signs in different ways depending on the sign
and situation.
Example
93
of registered speed information.
When RSI has registered a speed limit sign, the
sign will be displayed as a symbol in the instru-
ment panel and a colored marking will be shown
in the speedometer's speed scale.
If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, speed-related information will also
be retrieved from map data, which means that the
instrument panel can display or change informa-
tion about speed limits even if the vehicle has not
passed a speed-related sign.
Signs for "School" and "Children
playing"
If the warning sign
93
"School"
or "Children playing" is
included in the satellite naviga-
tor's map data
94
, a symbol of
this type will be displayed in the
instrument panel.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 362)
•
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 363)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 365)
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation
If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus Navigation,
speed-related information will be provided in the
following situations:
•
In cases where the speed limit is given indi-
rectly, e.g. signs for highways or other major
roads.
•
If a previously detected speed sign is
deemed to be no longer valid and no new
sign has been passed.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information
function (RSI) is only available in combination
with Sensus Navigation*.
NOTE
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation, there is no support for speed-rela-
ted information.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 362)
92
Road Sign Information
93
Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just examples.
94
Only vehicles with Sensus Navigation*.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
365
Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings
The
Speed Limit Warning sub-function for
RSI
95
can be switched On or Off.
Speed Limit Warning warns the driver if the
vehicle's speed has exceeded the applicable
speed limit or the preset Speed Limiter speed.
The warning will be repeated once after
about 1 minute in that speed limit area if the
driver does not slow down.
A new warning and message indicating that the
speed limit has been exceeded will be provided
only when the vehicle has entered a new/differ-
ent speed limit area.
When Speed Warning is acti-
vated, the symbol for the cur-
rent speed limit in the instru-
ment panel
96
will flash tempo-
rarily if that speed is exceeded.
The driver can be alerted if the
vehicle is exceeding a detected
speed limit and is approaching
a speed camera.
Settings
Adjusting the Speed Warning limit
The driver can adjust the settings to be alerted at
a higher speed than the posted speed limit.
To adjust the Speed Warning limit:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the center
display's Top view.
2.
Mark
Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector is displayed.
3. Tap the up/down arrows on the screen to
adjust the speed at which the Speed Warn-
ing will be given.
Please note that the set warn-
ing limit will not be used when
a speed camera symbol is dis-
played in the instrument panel.
Audible alert On/Off
An audible alert can also be given along with the
Speed Warning.
To adjust the audible alert settings:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the center
display's Top view.
2.
Select/deselect
Road Sign Audio Warning
to activate/deactivate the audible alert.
When Road Sign Audio Warning is activated,
the driver will also be alerted if the vehicle is
approaching a one-way/"no-entry" road or
entrance.
Speed camera warning On/Off
If the vehicle is equipped with
Sensus Navigation* and map
data contains information on
speed cameras, the driver can
choose to receive an audible
alert if the vehicle is approach-
ing a speed camera.
To adjust the audible alert settings:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the center
display's Top view.
2.
Select/deselect
Speed Camera Audio
Warning to activate/deactivate the speed
camera audible alert.
95
Road Sign Information
96
Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustration shown here is just an example.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
366
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 362)
•
Road Sign Information with speed camera
information (p. 366)
Activating/deactivating Speed
Warning in Road Sign Information
To activate the Speed Limit Warning sub-func-
tion:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the center
display's Top view.
2.
Mark
Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector is displayed.
(See description for “Adjusting the Speed
Warning limit” in section “Road Sign Infor-
mation with Speed Warning and Set-
tings.”)
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 362)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 365)
Road Sign Information with speed
camera information
Vehicles equipped with RSI
97
and Sensus
Navigation* can provide information on upcom-
ing speed cameras in the instrument panel.
Speed camera information in the instrument panel
98
.
If the vehicle exceeds a
detected speed limit with the
Speed Limit Warning func-
tion activated, the driver is
given a speed warning when
the vehicle is approaching a
speed camera if the navigation
map for the vehicle's current location contains
information on speed cameras.
97
Road Sign Information
98
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model and market/region.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
367
For more information on Speed Warnings in con-
junction with speed cameras, also see “Road
Sign Information with Speed Warning and Set-
tings” and “Road Sign Information limitations”.
NOTE
•
For an audible alert to be provided if the
speed is exceeded, the
Speed Limit
Warning function must be activated and
the Road Sign Audio Warning sub-
function must be On. Audible alerts are
provided if the vehicle's speed exceeds
the speed displayed by RSI in the instru-
ment panel.
•
It is possible to receive an audible alert
for speed cameras regardless of the vehi-
cle's speed, whether or not the speed
limit is exceeded, and even if the
Road
Sign Audio Warning function is deacti-
vated: See heading "Speed camera
warning On/Off" in section "Road Sign
Information with Speed Warning and set-
tings" and select Speed Camera Audio
Warning there.
•
Information about speed cameras on the
navigation map is not available for all
markets/areas.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 362)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 365)
•
Road Sign Information limitations (p. 367)
Road Sign Information limitations
Road Sign Information (RSI
99
) functionality may
be reduced in certain situations.
RSI could have reduced functionality due to e.g.:
•
faded road signs
•
signs located in a curve in the road
•
twisted or damaged signs
•
signs positioned high above the road
•
fully/partially obstructed or poorly positioned
signs
•
signs partially or fully covered by frost, snow
and/or dirt
•
digital road maps
100
that are outdated, incor-
rect or do not contain speed information
101
.
NOTE
Certain types of bike carriers that are con-
nected to the trailer socket may be interpre-
ted as a connected trailer by the RSI function.
In such cases, the instrument panel may indi-
cate incorrect speed information.
99
Road Sign Information
100
Vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation*.
101
Map data and speed information is not available for all areas.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
368
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's camera unit,
which has some general limitations – see the
section "Camera unit limitations".
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 362)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is
designed to help capture the driver become
aware of erratic behavior, e.g. if the driver is dis-
tracted or showing signs of fatigue.
The objective of DAC is to detect slowly deterio-
rating driving behavior and is primarily intended to
be used on major roads. The function is not
intended for use in city traffic.
DAC is activated when the vehicle's speed
exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active
as long as speeds are above 60 km/h (37 mph).
DAC detects the vehicle's position in the traffic lane.
A camera monitors the traffic lane's marker lines
and compares the direction of the road with the
driver's movements of the steering wheel.
The vehicle is moving erratically in the lane.
If driving behavior becomes
considerably erratic, the driver
will be alerted by this symbol in
the instrument panel, an audi-
ble signal and the message
Time for a break.
If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus
Navigation* and the
Rest Stop Guidance func-
tion is activated, a suitable place to take a break
will also be suggested (see section “Selecting
guidance to a rest stop if a Driver Alert Control
warning has been given”).
The warning will be repeated after a short time if
driving behavior does not improve.
DRIVER SUPPORT
369
WARNING
•
The Driver Alert Control function is sup-
plementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and help make it safer –
it cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Driver Alert Control must not be used to
extend a period of driving. The driver
should plan in breaks at regular intervals
and make sure they are well rested.
•
Driver Alert Control is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgment. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at
the appropriate speed, with an appropri-
ate distance to other vehicles, and in
accordance with current traffic rules and
regulations.
WARNING
An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be
taken very seriously since a sleepy driver is
often not aware of their own condition.
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
•
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble and rest.
Studies have shown that it is just as danger-
ous to drive while tired as it is to drive under
the influence of alcohol or other stimulants.
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating Driver Alert Control
(p. 369)
•
Selecting guidance to a rest area if the
Driver Alert Control warning has been given
(p. 370)
•
Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 370)
Activating/deactivating Driver Alert
Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be
activated/deactivated.
On/Off
To change DAC settings:
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Select
My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
.
3.
Select/deselect
Alertness Warning to acti-
vate/deactivate DAC.
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 368)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
370
Selecting guidance to a rest area if
the Driver Alert Control warning has
been given
The
Rest Stop Guidance function can be
switched on or off.
In vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the
driver can activate a guide that can automatically
suggest a suitable rest stop if the DAC warning
is given.
To select
Rest Stop Guidance:
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Select
My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
.
3.
Select/deselect
Rest Stop Guidance to
activate/deactivate the function.
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 368)
Driver Alert Control limitations
Driver Alert Control (DAC) functionality may be
reduced in certain situations.
In certain situations, the system may provide a
warning even if it has not detected a change in
driving behavior, e.g.:
•
in strong crosswinds
•
on grooved road surfaces.
WARNING
In certain cases, driving behavior might not be
affected despite the driver's fatigue – when
using the Pilot Assist function – resulting in
the driver not getting a warning from DAC.
It is therefore very important to always stop
and take a break at the slightest sign of fati-
gue, regardless of whether the DAC function
has issued a warning or not.
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's camera unit,
which has some general limitations – see the
section "Camera unit limitations".
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 368)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
Lane Keeping Aid
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA
102
) is designed to
actively steer the vehicle on freeways, highways
and other major roads to help the driver reduce
the risk of the vehicle unintentionally veering out
of the lane.
Lake Keeping Assistance steers the vehicle back
into the lane and/or alerts the driver using vibra-
tions in the steering wheel.
Lane Keeping Aid is active at speeds between
65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
clearly visible traffic lane marker lines.
On narrow roads, the function may be unavailable
and go into standby mode. The function will
become available again when the road becomes
sufficiently wide.
A camera monitors the road/traffic lane's marker lines.
102
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
371
Lane Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into its lane.
Lane Keeping Aid alerts the driver using vibrations in the
steering wheel
103
.
Depending on the settings used, Lane Keeping
Aid functions in different ways:
•
With
Assist
104
activated: When the vehicle
approaches a lane marker line, LKA will
actively steer the vehicle back into the lane
using light pressure on the steering wheel.
•
With
Warning
104
activated: If the vehicle is
about to move over a lane marker line, the
driver will be alerted by vibrations in the
steering wheel.
NOTE
When the direction indicator is activated, the
Lane Keeping Aid does not provide any warn-
ing or intervene with steering.
WARNING
•
The Lane Keeping Aid function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to help
improve driving safety – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgment. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the
vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
103
The steering wheel vibrations vary. The more time the vehicle is over the lane marker line, the longer the vibrations.
104
See "LKA assistance options" under "Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid".
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
372
Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene
Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene in sharp inside
curves.
In certain cases, such as when a turn signal is
used or when "straightening out" an inside curve,
Lane Keeping Aid will not provide steering assis-
tance or alerts.
Related information
•
Steering assistance with Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 372)
•
Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 374)
•
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 373)
•
Selecting type of assistance for Lane Keep-
ing Aid (p. 373)
•
Lane Keeping Aid symbols and messages
(p. 375)
•
Lane Keeping Aid symbols in the instrument
panel (p. 377)
Steering assistance with Lane
Keeping Aid
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA
105
) only functions if the
driver's hands are on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the instrument
panel indicates that LKA is
activated and continuously
monitoring that the driver's
hands are on the steering
wheel.
1. If the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel, an audible signal will be given and a
message will instruct the driver to actively
steer the vehicle:
Lane Keeping Aid – Apply steering
2. If LKA detects that the driver is not actively
steering the vehicle, the message will be
repeated along with a longer audible signal.
3. If the driver still does not begin actively steer-
ing the vehicle, a short audible signal will be
given in a different tone, LKA will be deacti-
105
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
373
vated, another symbol will illuminate and the
following message will be displayed:
– Lane Keeping Aid – Apply
steering
LKA will then be deactivated until the driver
begins actively steering the vehicle again.
The audible signal will stop and the information
symbol and message will disappear when LKA
detects that the driver is actively steering the
vehicle again.
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 370)
Activating/deactivating Lane
Keeping Aid
The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA
106
) function can be
switched On or Off.
On/Off
Press the Lane Keeping Aid
button in the center display's
Function view.
•
GREEN button indicator light - LKA is acti-
vated.
•
GRAY button indicator light - LKA is deacti-
vated.
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 370)
Selecting type of assistance for
Lane Keeping Aid
The driver can determine what types of assis-
tance LKA
107
should provide if the vehicle veers
from its lane.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the center display's Top view.
2.
Under
Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select
what assistance LKA should provide:
•
Assist the driver will receive steering
assistance but no warning.
•
Both - the driver will receive both steering
assistance and a warning.
•
Warning - the driver will only receive a
warning.
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 370)
106
Lane Keeping Aid
107
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
374
Lane Keeping Aid limitations
In certain demanding driving conditions, Lane
Keeping Aid may not be able to properly assist
the driver. In these situations, it is recommended
that the function be deactivated.
Examples of such situations include:
•
road work
•
winter driving conditions
•
poor road surfaces
•
a very sporty driving style
•
bad weather with reduced visibility
•
roads with indistinct or no lane markings
•
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
•
when the power steering works at reduced
power, e.g. during cooling due to overheating
(see section “Speed-dependent steering
force”).
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's camera unit,
which has some general limitations – see the
section "Camera unit limitations".
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 370)
•
Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance
(p. 276)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
375
Lane Keeping Aid symbols and
messages
A number of symbols and messages related to
Lane Keeping Aid LKA
108
may be displayed in
the instrument panel.
Some examples of symbols and messages are shown in the table below.
Symbol Message Meaning
Driver support system
Reduced functionality Service required
The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced.
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
LKA's steering assistance is disabled when the driver's hands are not on the wheel. Follow
the instructions and steer the vehicle.
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
LKA will go into standby mode until the driver begins steering the vehicle again.
108
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
377
Lane Keeping Aid symbols in the
instrument panel
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA
109
) uses symbols in the
instrument panel for various situations.
Some examples of symbols and
descriptions of the situations in
which they might appear are
provided below.
Available
Available ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are WHITE.
Lane Keeping Aid is able to detect one or both of
the traffic lane's side marker lines.
Unavailable
Unavailable ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are GRAY.
Lane Keeping Aid is unable to detect the lane
marker lines, the vehicle's speed is too low or the
road is too narrow.
Steering/warning indicator
Steering/warning ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are
COLORED.
Indicates that the Lane Keeping Aid system is
alerting the driver and/or attempting to steer the
vehicle back into the lane.
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 370)
109
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
378
Steering assistance at risk of
collision
The
Collision avoidance assistance function
is intended to help the driver reduce the risk of
the vehicle inadvertently veering from the traffic
lane and/or colliding with another vehicle or
obstacle by actively steering the vehicle back
into the lane and/or swerving out of the way.
Collision avoidance assistance consists of
three sub-functions:
•
Run-Off Mitigation with steering assistance
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from oncoming traffic
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind*
After the system has automatically intervened,
this text message will appear in the instrument
panel:
•
Collision avoidance assistance –
Automatic intervention
NOTE
It is always the driver who must decide how
much the vehicle should be in control – the
vehicle can never take command.
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating steering assistance
during collision risks (p. 378)
•
Symbols and messages for steering assis-
tance during collision risks (p. 387)
•
Run-Off Mitigation with steering assistance
(p. 379)
•
Run-Off Mitigation with steering assistance
levels (p. 379)
•
Activating/deactivating Run-Off Mitigation
with steering assistance (p. 380)
•
Limitations of Run-Off Mitigation with steer-
ing assistance (p. 381)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from oncoming traffic (p. 381)
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
during collision risks with oncoming vehicles
(p. 382)
•
Limitations of steering assistance during col-
lision risks from oncoming traffic (p. 383)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind* (p. 384)
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
during collision risks from behind* (p. 385)
•
Limitations of steering assistance during col-
lision risks from behind (p. 385)
Activating/deactivating steering
assistance during collision risks
The driver can choose to have this function On
or Off.
Use this button in the center
display's Function view to turn
the function On and Off.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions of the
following are deactivated:
•
Steering assistance at risk of run-off
•
Steering assistance at risk of head-on
collision
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind*
Although it is possible to deactivate the func-
tion, the driver is advised to keep it activated
since it can help improve driving safety in
most cases.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
379
Run-Off Mitigation with steering
assistance
This sub-function is intended to help reduce the
risk of the vehicle inadvertently running off the
road by actively steering the vehicle back onto
the road.
The function is active at speeds between
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible traffic lane markings/lines.
The system uses a camera to monitor the edges
of the road and the painted side marker lines. If
the vehicle is about to cross the edge of the road,
the function will attempt to steer the vehicle back
onto the road. If this is not sufficient to keep the
vehicle on the road, the brakes will also be
applied.
However, the function will not provide either
steering assistance or braking if the turn signal is
used. The function will also not be activated if it
detects that the driver is actively operating the
vehicle.
After the system has automatically intervened,
this text message will appear in the instrument
panel:
•
Collision avoidance assistance –
Automatic intervention
WARNING
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of run-
off" subfunction is supplementary driver
support intended to help improve driving
safety – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
The function cannot detect barriers, rails
or similar obstacles at the side of the
road.
•
"Steering assistance at risk of run-off" is
not a substitute for the driver's attention
and judgment. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the vehicle is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
Run-Off Mitigation with steering
assistance levels
This function has two activation levels for inter-
vention:
•
Steering assistance only
•
Steering assistance with braking
Steering assistance only
Intervention with steering assistance.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
380
Steering assistance with braking
Intervention with steering assistance and braking.
Braking intervention assists in situations where
steering assistance alone is not sufficient. Brak-
ing force is automatically adapted according to
the situation at the moment the vehicle begins to
run off the road.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
Activating/deactivating Run-Off
Mitigation with steering assistance
The driver can choose to have this function On
or Off.
Use this button in the center
display's Function view to turn
the function On and Off.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions of the
following are deactivated:
•
Steering assistance at risk of run-off
•
Steering assistance at risk of head-on
collision
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind*
Although it is possible to deactivate the func-
tion, the driver is advised to keep it activated
since it can help improve driving safety in
most cases.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
•
Run-Off Mitigation with steering assistance
(p. 379)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
381
Limitations of Run-Off Mitigation
with steering assistance
In certain demanding driving conditions, the
function may not be able to properly assist the
driver. In these situations, it is recommended
that it is turned off.
Examples of such situations include:
•
road work
•
winter driving conditions
•
narrow roads
•
poor road surfaces
•
a very sporty driving style
•
bad weather with reduced visibility
•
roads with indistinct or no lane markings
•
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
•
when the power steering works at reduced
power, e.g. during cooling due to overheating
(see section “Speed-dependent steering
force”).
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's combined
camera and radar unit, which has certain gen-
eral limitations; see sections "Camera limita-
tions" and "Radar sensor limitations".
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
•
Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance
(p. 276)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
Steering assistance during collision
risks from oncoming traffic
This sub-function can help assist a distracted
driver who has not noticed that the vehicle is
veering into oncoming traffic.
The function provides assistance by swerving your vehi-
cle back into your own lane.
Oncoming vehicles
Own vehicle
The function is active at speeds between
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible traffic lane markings/lines.
If your vehicle is starting to veer from your own
lane and a vehicle is approaching from the oppo-
site direction, this function can help the driver
steer the vehicle back into its own lane.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
382
However, the function will not provide steering
assistance if the turn signal is used. The function
will also not be activated if it detects that the
driver is actively operating the vehicle.
After the system has automatically intervened,
this text message will appear in the instrument
panel:
•
Collision avoidance assistance –
Automatic intervention
WARNING
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of head-
on collision" subfunction is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
•
Pilot Assist is only activated if there is a
high risk of collision – you must therefore
never wait for the function to intervene.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgment. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the
vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
during collision risks with oncoming vehicles
(p. 382)
•
Limitations of steering assistance during col-
lision risks from oncoming traffic (p. 383)
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance during collision risks
with oncoming vehicles
The driver can choose to have this function On
or Off.
Use this button in the center
display's Function view to turn
the function On and Off.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions of the
following are deactivated:
•
Steering assistance at risk of run-off
•
Steering assistance at risk of head-on
collision
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind*
Although it is possible to deactivate the func-
tion, the driver is advised to keep it activated
since it can help improve driving safety in
most cases.
DRIVER SUPPORT
383
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from oncoming traffic (p. 381)
Limitations of steering assistance
during collision risks from
oncoming traffic
The function may have limited functionality in
certain situations and not intervene, e.g.:
•
for smaller vehicles such as motorcycles
•
on roads that do not have clear lane mark-
ings
•
if more than half of your vehicle has moved
into the adjacent lane
•
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph)
•
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
Functionality may also be reduced in other situa-
tions, such as:
•
road work
•
winter driving conditions
•
narrow roads
•
poor road surfaces
•
a very sporty driving style
•
bad weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding driving conditions, the func-
tion may not be able to properly assist the driver.
In these situations, it is recommended that it is
turned off.
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's combined
camera and radar unit, which has certain gen-
eral limitations; see sections "Camera limita-
tions" and "Radar sensor limitations".
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from oncoming traffic (p. 381)
•
Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance
(p. 276)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
384
Steering assistance during collision
risks from behind*
If you become distracted and do not notice your
vehicle starting to veer out of the lane while
another vehicle is approaching from behind or is
in your vehicle's blind spot, this sub-function can
help provide assistance.
The function provides assistance by steering your vehi-
cle back into your own lane.
Another vehicle in blind spot zone
Own vehicle
If your vehicle is beginning to veer out of your
lane while another vehicle is in your blind spot or
another vehicle is rapidly approaching in the next
lane, this function can help the driver steer the
vehicle back into its own lane.
Even if the driver intentionally changes lanes
using a turn signal without noticing another vehi-
cle approaching, the function can provide assis-
tance.
The function is active at speeds between
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible traffic lane markings/lines.
After the system has automatically intervened,
this text message will appear in the instrument
panel:
•
Collision avoidance assistance –
Automatic intervention
WARNING
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of rear-
end collision" subfunction is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
•
Pilot Assist is only activated if there is a
high risk of collision – you must therefore
never wait for the function to intervene.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgment. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the
vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
during collision risks from behind* (p. 385)
•
Limitations of steering assistance during col-
lision risks from behind (p. 385)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
385
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance during collision risks
from behind*
The driver can choose to have this function On
or Off.
Use this button in the center
display's Function view to turn
the function On and Off.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions of the
following are deactivated:
•
Steering assistance at risk of run-off
•
Steering assistance at risk of head-on
collision
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind*
Although it is possible to deactivate the func-
tion, the driver is advised to keep it activated
since it can help improve driving safety in
most cases.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind* (p. 384)
Limitations of steering assistance
during collision risks from behind
The function may have limited functionality in
certain situations and not intervene, e.g.:
•
for smaller vehicles such as motorcycles
•
if more than half of your vehicle has moved
into the adjacent lane
•
on roads/lanes with indistinct or no side lane
markings
•
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph)
•
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
Functionality may also be reduced in other situa-
tions, such as:
•
road work
•
winter driving conditions
•
narrow roads
•
poor road surfaces
•
a very sporty driving style
•
bad weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding driving conditions, the func-
tion may not be able to properly assist the driver.
In these situations, it is recommended that it is
turned off.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
386
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's combined
camera and radar unit, which has certain gen-
eral limitations; see sections "Camera limita-
tions" and "Radar sensor limitations".
In addition to the camera and radar sensor, the
function also uses the vehicle's rearward-facing
radar, which has certain general limitations the
driver should be aware of. See additional informa-
tion in the section "BLIS limitations".
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind* (p. 384)
•
Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance
(p. 276)
•
Camera limitations (p. 336)
•
Radar sensor limitations (p. 331)
•
BLIS limitations (p. 355)
DRIVER SUPPORT
387
Symbols and messages for steering
assistance during collision risks
A number of symbols and messages related to
the function may be displayed in the instrument
panel.
Some examples of symbols and messages are shown in the table below.
Symbol Message Meaning
Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
When the function is activated, a message will appear to alert the driver.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the
button in the center of the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 378)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
388
Park Assist*
The Park Assist function can help the driver
when maneuvering in tight spaces by indicating
distances to obstacles using audible signals and
graphics in the center display.
Display view showing obstacle zones and sensor sec-
tors.
The center display shows an overview of the vehi-
cle in relation to objects that have been detected.
The marked sector indicates where the obstacle
is located. The closer the vehicle symbol is to a
marked sector forward/rearward, the closer the
detected obstacle is to your vehicle.
The side sectors change color as the distance
between the vehicle and an object decreases.
The audible signals will also speed up the closer
the obstacle is to the vehicle. The volume of the
audio system will be automatically lowered.
Audible signals for obstacles in front and to the
sides of the vehicle are active when the vehicle is
moving but will cease after the vehicle has been
stationary for approx. 2 seconds. Audible signals
for obstacles behind the vehicle will remain active
even when the vehicle is stationary.
If a detected obstacle is within approx. 30 cm
(1 ft) from the front or rear of the vehicle, the
tone will become constant and the active sen-
sor's field closest to the vehicle symbol will be
filled in.
At distances within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an
obstacle to the sides of the vehicle, an rapid puls-
ing signal will be given and the active sector
fields will change color from ORANGE to RED.
The volume of the Park Assist audible signals
can be adjusted while the signal is being given
using the >II knob or in the center display's Top
view under
Settings.
NOTE
•
Besides in the sector closest to the vehi-
cle symbol, audible warnings are only pro-
vided for objects located directly in the
vehicle's path.
WARNING
•
The Parking Assist function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and help make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
The parking sensors have dead/blind
spots where objects cannot be detected.
•
Pay particular attention to people and
animals near the vehicle.
•
Parking Assist is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgment. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the
vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
•
Park Assist front, rear and sides (p. 389)
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 390)
•
Park Assist limitations (p. 391)
•
Recommended maintenance for Park Assist
(p. 392)
•
Park Assist symbols and messages (p. 393)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
389
Park Assist front, rear and sides
Park Assist has different parameters depending
on which part of the vehicle is approaching an
obstacle.
Front camera
Continuous tone warning signal when the obstacle is
less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the vehicle
110
.
Park Assist's front sensors are automatically acti-
vated when the engine is started. They are active
at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The distance monitored extends approx. 80 cm
(2.5 ft) in front of the vehicle.
NOTE
The Parking Assist system is deactivated
when the parking brake is applied or when P
is selected on vehicles with automatic trans-
mission.
CAUTION
When installing auxiliary lights: Make sure
these do not obscure the sensors – the auxili-
ary lights could be perceived as an obstacle.
Back
Continuous tone warning signal when the obstacle is
less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the vehicle
110
The rear sensors will be activated if the vehicle
begins rolling backward or if reverse gear is
engaged.
The distance monitored extends
approx. 1.5 meters (5 ft) behind the vehicle.
The Parking Assist system's rear sensors will be
automatically deactivated if the vehicle is backing
up with a trailer connected to the vehicle's elec-
trical system.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car-
rier on the trailer hitch – without Volvo original
trailer cables – the Parking Assist system may
have to be turned off manually to prevent the
sensors from reacting to these.
110
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
390
Side sensors
Rapid pulsing warning signal when the obstacle is less
than approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from the vehicle
110
.
Park Assist's side sensors are automatically acti-
vated when the engine is started. They are active
at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The distance monitored is approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft)
out from the sides.
The detection area increases significantly when
the steering angle of the front wheels increases
and depending on the steering wheel position,
obstacles up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft) directly
behind or in front of the vehicle can be detected
(also see “Side sensor fields” in the section “Sen-
sor field from Park Assist for Park Assist Cam-
era”).
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
•
Sensor field from Park Assist for Park Assist
Camera (p. 399)
Activating/deactivating Park Assist
The Park Assist Pilot function can be activated/
deactivated.
On/Off
Park Assist's front and side sensors are automat-
ically activated when the engine is started. The
rear sensors are activated if the vehicle is moving
backward or reverse gear is engaged.
The function can be activated/
deactivated in the center dis-
play's Function view.
–
Tap the Park Assist button in Function view.
> The Park Assist Pilot indicator light shows
the status of the function: GREEN (on) or
GRAY (off).
In vehicles equipped with Park Assist Camera,
Park Assist can also be activated/deactivated
from the relevant camera view.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
110
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
391
Park Assist limitations
Park Assist may not be able to detect all condi-
tions in all situations and functionality may there-
fore be limited in certain cases.
The driver should be aware of the following limi-
tations for Park Assist:
WARNING
Be extra cautious when
reversing if this symbol is
shown when a trailer, bike
carrier or similar is attached
and electrically connected
to the vehicle.
The symbol indicates that
the rear parking assist sensors are deacti-
vated and will not warn of any obstacles.
CAUTION
Objects such as chains, thin and glossy poles
or low obstacles may end up in the "signal
shadow" and then go temporarily undetected
by the sensors – the pulsating tone may then
unexpectedly stop instead of becoming a
constant tone as expected.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such
as protruding ramps.
•
In such situations, pay extra attention and
maneuver/drive the vehicle very slowly or
stop the current parking maneuver –
there may be a high risk of damage to
the vehicle or other objects since infor-
mation from the sensors is not always
reliable in such situations.
CAUTION
In some circumstances, the Park Assist Sys-
tem may produce false warnings due to exter-
nal sound sources with the same ultrasonic
frequencies as those the system works with.
Examples of such sources are horns, wet tires
on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust noise
from motorcycles, etc.
NOTE
When a trailer hitch is configured with the
vehicle electrical system, the trailer hitch pro-
trusion is included when the function meas-
ures the distance to objects behind the vehi-
cle.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
392
Recommended maintenance for
Park Assist
For Park Assist to function optimally, its sensors
must be cleaned regularly with water and car
washing detergent.
Location of the Park Assist sensors
111
.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors could
cause false warnings, reduced function, or no
function.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
111
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
393
Park Assist symbols and messages
Symbols and messages for the Park Assist may
be displayed in the instrument panel and/or the
center display.
Some examples of symbols and messages are shown in the table below.
Symbol Message Meaning
The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings for obstacles/objects will
be provided.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-
ded
One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as pos-
sible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop
is recommended.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the
button in the center of the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 388)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
394
Park Assist Camera*
The Park Assist Camera can help provide the
driver when maneuvering in tight spaces by alert-
ing the driver to obstacles using the camera
screen and graphics in the center display.
The Park Assist Camera is a support function
that is automatically activated when reverse gear
is engaged. It can also be started manually from
the center display.
Example camera view
112
.
Zoom
113
- zoom in/out
360° view* - activate/deactivate all cameras
PAS* - activate/deactivate Parking Assist
Lines - activate/deactivate trajectory lines
Towbar* - activate/deactivate trajectory lines
for towbar*
114
CTA* - activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
WARNING
•
The Parking Camera function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and help make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
The parking cameras have dead/blind
spots where objects cannot be detected.
•
Pay particular attention to people and
animals near the vehicle.
•
Objects/obstacles may be closer to the
vehicle than they appear on the screen.
•
The parking cameras are not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgment.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe
manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
112
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
113
The trajectory lines will not be displayed when zooming in.
114
Not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
395
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera views (p. 395)
•
Park Assist Camera trajectory lines (p. 397)
•
Sensor field from Park Assist for Park Assist
Camera (p. 399)
•
Starting the Park Assist Camera (p. 400)
•
Park Assist Camera limitations (p. 401)
•
Recommended maintenance of the Park
Assist Camera (p. 402)
•
Park Assist Camera symbols and messages
(p. 403)
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 390)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358)
Park Assist Camera views
PAC can display a 360° panoramic view as well
as separate views for each of the other cameras:
rear, front, left and right.
360° view*
The location of the cameras and their approximate fields
of vision.
The 360° view function activates all Park Assist
Cameras and all four sides of the vehicle are
shown in the center display at once to help the
driver see what is around the vehicle while
maneuvering at low speeds.
From the 360° view, each camera view can be
activated separately:
•
Tap the screen to select the camera's field of
vision, e.g. in the area in front/above the front
camera.
The active cameras will be indi-
cated by a camera symbol on
the vehicle symbol in the center
display.
If the vehicle is equipped with
Park Assist System*, the dis-
tance to detected obstacles will be illustrated by
fields in different colors.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually. See "Starting the Park Assist Camera"
for more information.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
396
Back
The rear camera
115
is located above the license plate.
The rear camera shows a wide area behind the
vehicle. On certain models, part of the bumper
and the towbar (if installed) may be visible.
Objects on the center display may appear to be
leaning slightly. This is normal.
Front camera
The front Park Assist Camera
116
is located in the grille.
The front camera can be useful when pulling out
from areas with limited visibility, such as a drive-
way surrounded by a hedge. The front camera is
active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) and is
automatically turned off when the vehicle
exceeds this speed.
If the vehicle does not reach a speed of 50 km/h
(30 mph) and speed falls below 22 km/h
(14 mph) within 1 minute after the front camera
turns off, the camera will be reactivated.
Side cameras
The side cameras
116
are located in the rearview mirrors.
The side cameras can show views along each
side of the vehicle.
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera* (p. 394)
•
Starting the Park Assist Camera (p. 400)
115
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
116
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
397
Park Assist Camera trajectory lines
The Park Assist Camera uses trajectory lines
and fields on the screen to indicate the vehicle's
position in relation to its immediate surround-
ings.
Example
117
of trajectory lines.
The trajectory lines show the anticipated trajec-
tory for the vehicle's outermost dimensions based
on the current position of the steering wheel to
help simplify parallel parking, backing into tight
spaces or attaching a trailer.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were painted lines on the ground behind the
vehicle and are directly affected by the way in
which the steering wheel is turned. This enables
the driver to see path the vehicle will take, even if
he/she turns the steering wheel.
These lines also indicate the outermost limits that
any object (towbar, rearview mirrors, corners of
the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer that is not
electrically connected to the vehicle, the
screen guide lines show the path the
vehicle will take – not the trailer.
•
The screen does not show guide lines
when a trailer is electrically connected to
the vehicle's electrical system.
•
Guide lines are not shown when zooming
in.
CAUTION
•
Bear in mind that when the rearward
camera view is selected, the screen only
shows the area behind the vehicle – pay
attention to the sides and front of the
vehicle when steering while reversing.
•
The same applies to the reverse – pay
attention to what is happening with the
rear parts of the vehicle when the front
camera view is selected.
•
Note that the guide lines show the short-
est path – pay extra attention to ensure
that the vehicle sides do not come in
contact with/travel over anything when
steering while driving forward or that the
vehicle front moves toward/over anything
when steering while reversing.
117
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
398
Trajectory lines in 360° view*
360° view with trajectory lines
117
.
In the 360° view, trajectory lines are shown
behind, in front of, or to the sides of the vehicle,
depending on the direction of travel.
•
When driving forward: Front lines
•
When backing up: Side lines and rear lines.
When the front or rear camera is selected, the
trajectory lines will be shown regardless of the
vehicle's direction of travel.
With a side camera selected, the trajectory lines
will only be shown if the vehicle is backing up.
Trajectory lines for a towbar*
Towbar with trajectory line
117
.
Towbar - activate trajectory lines for towbar.
Zoom - zoom in/out.
The camera can help make hitching a trailer eas-
ier by showing an anticipated trajectory line for
the towbar's path toward the trailer.
1.
Tap
Towbar (1).
> The trajectory line for the towbar's antici-
pated path toward the vehicle will appear
and the vehicle's trajectory lines will dis-
appear.
Trajectory lines cannot be displayed for
both the vehicle and the towbar at the
same time.
2.
Tap
Zoom (2) for a close-up view for more
precise maneuvering.
> The camera will zoom in.
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera* (p. 394)
117
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
399
Sensor field from Park Assist for
Park Assist Camera
If the vehicle is equipped with Park Assist, dis-
tances will be shown in the 360° view with col-
ored fields for each sensor that has detected an
obstacle.
Front and rear sensors
The screen can display colored sensor fields on the
vehicle symbol
118
.
The front and rear fields change colors (from
YELLOW to ORANGE to RED) as the vehicle
moves closer to an obstacle.
Field color rear-
ward
Distance in meters (feet)
Yellow 0.6-1.5 (2.0-4.9)
Orange 0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0)
Red 0-0.3 (0-1.0)
Field color forward Distance in meters (feet)
Yellow 0,6–0,8 (2,0–2,6)
Orange 0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0)
Red 0-0.3 (0-1.0)
When the sensor field color is red, the audible
pulsing sounds will change to a continuous tone.
Side sensor fields
Warning signals vary depending on the vehicle's
intended direction of travel. Depending on the
steering wheel position, warnings may be given
for obstacles diagonally in front of or behind the
vehicle, not only directly behind the vehicle.
Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be
detected
118
.
Left-side front sensor field
Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended
direction of travel forward – varies according
to steering wheel position
Sector with RED field color and rapidly puls-
ing tone
Right-side rear sensor field
Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended
direction of travel rearward – varies according
to steering wheel position.
118
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
400
The color of the side field changes as the vehicle
moves closer to the object – from YELLOW to
RED.
Side field color Distance in meters (feet)
Yellow 0,25–0,9 (0,8–3,0)
Red 0–0,25 (0–0,8)
When the sensor field is RED, the audible pulsing
signal will become more rapid.
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera* (p. 394)
Starting the Park Assist Camera
The Park Assist Camera starts automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or can be started
manually using one of the center display's func-
tion buttons.
Camera view when backing up
When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows
the rear view
119
.
Camera view when manually starting
the camera
Start the Park Assist Camera
using this button in the center
display's Function view.
The screen will first show the
most recently used camera
view. However, each time the
engine is started, the previous side view will be
replaced by the 360° view and a previously dis-
played zoomed-in rear view will be replaced by
the regular rear view.
Automatically deactivating the camera
Front view switches off when the vehicle's speed
reaches 25 km/h (16 mph) to help avoid dis-
tracting the driver. It will be automatically reactiva-
ted if the vehicle's speed falls below 22 km/h
(14 mph) within 1 minute as long as the vehicle's
speed has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph).
Other camera views switch off at 15 km/h
(9 mph) and are not reactivated.
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera* (p. 394)
119
In Canada, it is also possible to select the 360° view.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
401
Park Assist Camera limitations
The Park Assist Camera may not be able to
detect all conditions in all situations and func-
tionality may therefore be limited.
The driver should be aware of the following limi-
tations for the Park Assist Camera:
WARNING
Be extra cautious when
reversing if this symbol is
shown when a trailer, bike
carrier or similar is attached
and electrically connected
to the vehicle.
The symbol indicates that
the rear parking assist sensors are deacti-
vated and will not warn of any obstacles.
NOTE
A bike carrier and other accessories mounted
on the rear of the vehicle can obscure the
camera's view.
Blind sectors
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of
vision.
With 360° view selected, objects/obstacles may
not be detected if they are located in the "joints"
where the edges of the individual camera views
meet.
WARNING
Even if it seems as though only a fairly small
section of the screen image is obstructed, this
may mean that a relatively large sector is hid-
den and obstacles there may not be detected
until they are very near the vehicle.
Defective camera
If a camera sector is dark and
contains this symbol, this indi-
cates that the camera is not
functioning properly.
See the following illustration for
an example.
The vehicle's left-side camera is malfunctioning.
Dark camera sector
A dark camera sector may also be displayed in
the following situations, but without the defective
camera symbol:
•
a door is open
•
the tailgate is open
•
a rearview mirror is folded in
Lighting conditions
The camera image is automatically adjusted
according to the current lighting conditions. This
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
402
means that the brightness and quality of the
image may vary slightly. Poor lighting conditions
may result in reduced image quality.
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera* (p. 394)
Recommended maintenance of the
Park Assist Camera
Each of the Park Assist Cameras, located above
the license plate, the grille and in both door mir-
rors, require a certain degree of maintenance.
Clean the camera lenses regularly using luke-
warm water and car washing detergent. Wash
gently to avoid scratching the lens.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens free of dirt, snow and
ice to help ensure the best functionality. This
is particularly important in poor light condi-
tions.
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera* (p. 394)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
403
Park Assist Camera symbols and
messages
Symbols and messages for the Park Assist
Camera may be displayed in the instrument
panel and/or the center display.
Some examples of symbols and messages are shown in the table below.
Symbol Message Meaning
The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings or field markings for obsta-
cles/objects will be provided.
The camera is not functioning properly.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning
needed
One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is
recommended.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the
button in the center of the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park Assist Camera* (p. 394)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
404
Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP
120
) helps the driver pull
into and out of parking spaces.
PAP first checks whether there
is sufficient space and then
steers the car into the space.
The center display uses sym-
bols, graphics and messages to
inform the driver of what steps
need to be taken and when.
WARNING
•
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
help make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and road
conditions.
•
Pay particular attention to people and
animals near the vehicle.
•
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgment. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the vehi-
cle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the vehicle – the driver's role is to:
•
keep close watch of the area around the
vehicle
•
follow the instructions on the center dis-
play
•
change gears (reverse/forward) – a
"ping" sound indicates when the driver
should change gears
•
regulate and maintain a safe speed
•
apply the brakes and stop.
Related information
•
Types of parking with Park Assist Pilot
(p. 404)
•
Parking with Park Assist Pilot (p. 406)
•
Leaving a parking space with Park Assist
Pilot (p. 408)
•
Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 409)
•
Recommended maintenance for Park Assist
Pilot (p. 411)
•
Park Assist Pilot* messages (p. 412)
Types of parking with Park Assist
Pilot
Park Assist Pilot (PAP
121
) can be used for the
following types of parking.
120
Park Assist Pilot
121
Park Assist Pilot
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
405
Parallel parking
Overview of parallel parking.
The PAP function helps park the vehicle using
the following steps:
1. The system searches for and measures
potential parking spaces.
2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into
the parking space.
3. The vehicle's position in the space is
adjusted by driving forward/backward.
The
Park Out function can be used to receive
assistance from PAP while pulling out of a park-
ing space. See the section “Leaving a parking
space with Park Assist Pilot”.
Perpendicular parking
Perpendicular parking overview.
The PAP function helps the vehicle using the fol-
lowing steps:
1. The system searches for and measures
potential parking spaces.
2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into
the space and its position is adjusted by driv-
ing forward/backward.
NOTE
The PAP function Park Out cannot help the
vehicle leave a perpendicular parking space –
the function should only be used for parallel
parking.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 404)
•
Leaving a parking space with Park Assist
Pilot (p. 408)
DRIVER SUPPORT
406
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
Park Assist Pilot (PAP
122
) helps the driver park
using three different steps. The function can also
help the driver pull out of a parking space.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the vehicle – the driver's role is to:
•
keep close watch of the area around the
vehicle
•
follow the instructions on the center dis-
play
•
change gears (reverse/forward) – a
"ping" sound indicates when the driver
should change gears
•
regulate and maintain a safe speed
•
apply the brakes and stop.
Information about the actions required by the
driver are provided in the center display using
symbols, graphics and/or text.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria have
been met after the engine is started:
•
No trailer is hitched to the vehicle
•
Your vehicle's speed is lower than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
NOTE
The distance between the vehicle and parking
spots should be 0.5-1.5 meters (1.6-5.0 ft)
when PAP is looking for parking.
Parking
PAP parks the vehicle using the following steps:
1. The system searches for and measures
potential parking spaces.
2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into
the parking space.
3. The vehicle is positioned in the parking
space (the driver may be prompted to shift
gears).
Searching for and measuring potential
parking spots
The function can be activated
in the center display's Function
view.
It can also be accessed from
the camera views.
Parallel parking overview.
Perpendicular parking overview.
To do so:
122
Park Assist Pilot
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
407
1. The vehicle's speed may not exceed
30 km/h (20 mph) when parallel parking or
20 km/h (12 mph) when perpendicular park-
ing.
2.
Tap
Park In in Function view or in Camera
view.
> PAP will search for a potential parking
space and measure it to determine if it is
big enough.
3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when a
graphic and message in the center display
indicate that a suitable parking space has
been found.
> A pop-up window will appear.
4.
Select
Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and engage reverse gear.
NOTE
PAP searches for space for parking, shows
instructions and guides the vehicle on its pas-
senger side. But, if so desired the vehicle can
be parked on the driver's side of the street:
•
Activate the turn signals on the driver's
side – the system will then search for
space to park on that side of the vehicle
instead.
Backing into a parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
To back into a parking space:
1. Make sure the path behind your vehicle is
clear and engage reverse gear.
2. Back up slowly and carefully without touch-
ing the steering wheel and do not exceed a
speed of 7 km/h (4 mph).
3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when
instructed to do so by a graphic and mes-
sage in the center display.
NOTE
•
Keep your hands away from the steering
wheel when the PAP function is acti-
vated.
•
Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
•
To achieve the best results – wait until
the steering wheel is finished turning
before beginning to drive forward/in
reverse.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
408
Positioning the vehicle in the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
To do so:
1.
Move the gear selector to D, wait until the
steering wheel turns and then drive slowly
forward.
2. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when
instructed to do so by a graphic and mes-
sage in the center display.
3. Engage reverse gear and back up slowly.
4. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when
instructed to do so by a graphic and mes-
sage in the center display.
The function will switch off automatically and a
graphic and message will appear to indicate that
parking has been completed. Adjustments can
always be made be the driver afterward. Only the
driver can determine when the vehicle is correctly
parked.
CAUTION
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by PAP compared to when
they are used by the Parking Assist system.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 404)
Leaving a parking space with Park
Assist Pilot
The function
Park Out can also help the driver
to leave a parking space.
NOTE
Leaving a parking space with the Park Out
function should only be used in connection
with parallel parking – it does not work for
perpendicular parking.
The Park Out function is acti-
vated in the center display's
Function view or in Camera
view.
To do so:
1.
Tap
Park Out in Function view or in Camera
view.
2. Move the gear selector to the suitable posi-
tion (e.g. D or R) for the direction in which
you will be pulling out of the parking space.
3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when
instructed to do so by a graphic and mes-
sage in the center display. Follow the instruc-
tions in the same way as for the parking pro-
cedure.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
409
Note that the steering wheel can "spring" back
when the procedure is completed and the driver
may need to turn the steering wheel back to the
maximum position in order to pull out of the park-
ing space.
If PAP determines that the driver can pull out of
the parking space without any extra maneuvers,
the function will be deactivated, even if it seems
as though the vehicle is not completely out of the
parking space.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 404)
Park Assist Pilot* limitations
Park Assist Pilot PAP
123
may not be able to
detect all conditions in all situations and func-
tionality may therefore be limited.
WARNING
•
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
help make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and road
conditions.
•
Pay particular attention to people and
animals near the vehicle.
•
Bear in mind that the front end of the
vehicle may swing out towards oncoming
traffic during the parking maneuver.
•
Objects situated higher than the detec-
tion area of the sensors are not included
when the parking maneuver is calculated,
which could cause PAP to swing into the
parking space too early. Such parking
spaces should be avoided for this reason.
•
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgment. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the vehi-
cle is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
The driver should be aware of the following limi-
tations for Park Assist Pilot:
123
Park Assist Pilot
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
410
The parking sequence is cancelled
A parking sequence will be cancelled if:
•
the driver moves the steering wheel
•
the vehicle's speed exceeds 7 km/h (4 mph)
•
the driver taps
Cancel in the center display
•
when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic
stability control are engaged - e.g. when a
wheel loses grip on a slippery road
•
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
A message in the center display will explain why
the parking sequence was cancelled.
CAUTION
Under certain circumstances, PAP may not be
able to find parking spaces – one reason may
be that the sensors are disrupted by external
sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic
frequencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust
noise from motorcycles, etc.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
reduce their function and can make measure-
ment impossible.
Driver responsibility
The driver should keep in mind that PAP is a
parking aid ‒ not an infallible fully automatic sys-
tem. The driver must always be prepared to take
control and cancel a parking sequence if neces-
sary.
There are a number of things to keep in mind
when parking, including:
•
The driver is always responsible for determin-
ing if the space suggested by PAP is suita-
ble for parking.
•
Do not use PAP when using snow chains or
a temporary spare tire.
•
Do not use PAP if there are any objects pro-
truding from the vehicle.
•
Heavy rain or snowfall may inhibit PAP's abil-
ity to accurately measure a parking space.
•
While searching and measuring the parking
space, PAP may be unable to detect objects
located far into the space.
•
PAP may not suggest parking spaces on
narrow streets if it does not detect sufficient
space for maneuvering the vehicle.
•
Use approved tires
124
inflated to the correct
tire pressure because this affects PAP's abil-
ity to provide parking assistance.
•
PAP's function is based on the way the vehi-
cles are parked behind and in front of your
parking space. If they are, for example,
parked too close to the curb, there is a risk
that your vehicle's tires or wheel rims could
be damaged by the curb during the parking
procedure.
•
Perpendicular parking spaces may not be
detected or may be suggested unnecessarily
if a parked vehicle is sticking out more than
other parked vehicles.
•
PAP is intended to provide parking assis-
tance on straight streets, not sections of
street with sharp curves or bends. Always
make sure that your vehicle is parallel to rel-
evant parking spaces when PAP is measur-
ing the parking space.
CAUTION
Switching to another approved wheel and/or
tire dimension could change the tire circum-
ference, which would then require the PAP
system to be updated. Consult a workshop –
an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
124
"Approved tires" refers to tires of the same type and make as the vehicle's original, factory-installed tires.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
411
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 404)
•
Parking with Park Assist Pilot (p. 406)
•
Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance
(p. 276)
Recommended maintenance for
Park Assist Pilot
For Park Assist Pilot (PAP
125
) to function opti-
mally, its sensors must be cleaned regularly with
water and car washing detergent.
Location of the Park Assist sensors
126
.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors could
cause false warnings, reduced function, or no
function.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 404)
125
Park Assist Pilot
126
Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
412
Park Assist Pilot* messages
Messages for Park Assist Pilot PAP
127
may be
displayed in the instrument panel and/or the
center display.
Some examples of symbols and messages are shown in the table below.
Message Meaning
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be erased by briefly pressing
the
button in the center of the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 404)
127
Park Assist Pilot
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
414
Starting the vehicle
The vehicle can be started using the start knob
in the tunnel console when the remote key is in
the passenger compartment.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
WARNING
Before starting:
•
Buckle your seat belt.
•
Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mir-
rors.
•
Make sure you can fully depress the
brake pedal.
The remote key is not physically used to start the
ignition because the vehicle is equipped with the
keyless Passive Start system.
To start the vehicle:
1. The remote key must be inside the vehicle.
For vehicles with Passive Start, the key must
be in the front section of the passenger
compartment. With the optional keyless lock-
ing/unlocking function*, the key can be any-
where in the vehicle.
2. Press and hold down the brake pedal
1
as far
as possible.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
The control will automatically return to the
original position.
WARNING
•
Never use more than one inlay mat at a
time on the driver's floor. If any other type
of floor mat is used, remove the original
mat from the driver's seat floor before
driving. All types of mats must be securely
anchored in the attachment points in the
floor. Make sure the floor mat does not
impede the movement of the brake pedal
or accelerator pedal in any way, as this
could be a serious safety hazard.
•
Volvo's floor mats are specially manufac-
tured for your vehicle. They must be prop-
erly secured in the attachment points in
the floor to help ensure they cannot slide
and become trapped under the pedals.
The starter motor will crank until the engine
starts or until overheating protection is triggered.
Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console.
1
If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to turn the start knob clockwise to start the engine.
STARTING AND DRIVING
415
If the Vehicle key not found message is shown
in the instrument panel at start, place the remote
key at the backup reader and then make a new
start attempt.
NOTE
When the remote key is placed in the backup
reader, make sure that no other vehicle keys,
metal objects or electronic devices (e.g. cellu-
lar phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) are in
the backup reader. Multiple vehicle keys close
to each other in the backup reader can dis-
rupt their functionality.
CAUTION
If the engine has not responded after 3
attempts – wait for 3 minutes before starting
a new attempt. Starting capability increases if
the starter battery is given time to recover.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the vehicle while driving or the vehicle is
being towed.
WARNING
•
Always remove the remote key from the
passenger compartment when you leave
the vehicle and make sure the ignition is
in mode 0.
•
Always put the gear selector in P and
apply the parking brake before leaving
the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unsu-
pervised while the engine is running.
•
Always open the garage door fully and
make sure that ventilation is very good
before starting the engine in a garage.
The exhaust fumes produced by the vehi-
cle contain carbon monoxide, which is
invisible and odorless but very toxic.
NOTE
With a cold start, idling speed may be consid-
erably higher than normal for certain engine
types. This is done to get the emissions sys-
tem up to normal operating temperature as
quickly as possible, which minimizes exhaust
emissions and protects the environment.
CAUTION
•
When starting in cold weather, the auto-
matic transmission may shift up at slightly
higher engine speeds than normal until
the automatic transmission fluid reaches
normal operating temperature.
•
Do not race a cold engine immediately
after starting. This could prevent fluids
from properly lubricating vital compo-
nents in the engine before it has reached
the proper operating temperature.
•
The engine should be idling when the
gear selector is moved. Never accelerate
until the gear is fully engaged. Accelerat-
ing rapidly before a gear is properly
engaged could lead to harder wear of
components.
•
To help prevent the transmission oil from
overheating, select P or N when idling at
a standstill for prolonged periods of time.
Related information
•
Switching off the vehicle (p. 416)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 201)
•
Jump starting using another battery (p. 456)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 417)
STARTING AND DRIVING
416
Switching off the vehicle
The vehicle can be switched off using the start
knob in the tunnel console.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
To switch off the vehicle:
–
Turn the start knob clockwise and release to
switch off the vehicle. The control will auto-
matically return to the original position.
If the vehicle rolls:
–
Turn clockwise and hold the knob until the
vehicle switches off.
Related information
•
Starting the vehicle (p. 414)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 201)
•
Jump starting using another battery (p. 456)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 417)
Ignition modes
The vehicle's ignition can be put in various
modes (levels) to make different functions availa-
ble.
To enable the use of a limited number of func-
tions when the engine is not running, the ignition
can be put in one of three different levels: 0, I
and II. These levels are referred to as "ignition
modes" in the Owner's Manual.
The following table shows which functions are
available in each ignition mode:
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
417
Mode Functions
0
•
The odometer, clock and tem-
perature gauge are illuminated
A
.
•
The power* seats can be
adjusted.
•
The power windows can be used.
•
The center display is activated
and can be used
A
.
•
The infotainment system can be
used
A
.
In this mode, the functions are availa-
ble for a limited time and then switch
off automatically.
I
•
The panoramic roof, power win-
dows, 12-volt electrical socket in
the passenger compartment,
Bluetooth, navigation, phone,
blower and windshield wipers can
be used.
•
The power seats can be adjusted.
•
The 12-volt electrical socket* in
the cargo compartment can be
used.
Electrical current will be taken
from the battery in this ignition
mode.
Mode Functions
II
•
The headlights illuminate.
•
Warning/indicator lights illumi-
nate for 5 seconds.
•
A number of other systems are
activated. However, seat and rear
window heating can only be acti-
vated when the engine is running.
This ignition mode uses a lot of
current from the battery and
should be avoided whenever pos-
sible!
A
Also activated when the door is opened.
Related information
•
Starting the vehicle (p. 414)
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 201)
•
Jump starting using another battery (p. 456)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 417)
Selecting ignition mode
The vehicle's ignition can be put in various
modes (levels) to make different functions availa-
ble.
Selecting an ignition mode
Start knob in the tunnel console.
•
Ignition mode 0 - Unlock the vehicle and
keep the remote key in the passenger com-
partment.
NOTE
To set level I or II without engine start – do
not depress the brake pedal (or clutch pedal
for vehicles with manual transmission) when
selecting this ignition mode.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
418
•
Ignition mode I - Turn the start knob clock-
wise and release it. The control will automati-
cally return to the original position.
•
Ignition mode II - Turn the start knob clock-
wise and hold it there for approx. 5 seconds.
Release the knob, which will automatically
return to its original position.
•
Back to ignition mode 0 - To return to igni-
tion mode 0 from mode I and II, turn the start
knob clockwise and release it. The control
will automatically return to the original posi-
tion.
Related information
•
Starting the vehicle (p. 414)
•
Switching off the vehicle (p. 416)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 201)
•
Jump starting using another battery (p. 456)
Brake functions
The vehicle's brakes are used to reduce speed
or prevent the vehicle from rolling.
In addition to the wheel brakes and parking
brakes, the vehicle is also equipped with a num-
ber of automatic brake assist functions. These
systems help the driver by e.g. keeping the vehi-
cle stationary when the brake pedal is not
depressed (e.g. at a traffic light or intersection),
when starting up a hill or when driving down a hill.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
following brake assist functions may be included:
•
Auto-hold brakes (Auto Hold)
•
Hill Start Assist (Hill Start Assist)
•
Braking assist after a collision
•
City Safety
•
Hill Descent Control (Hill Descent Control)
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 418)
•
Parking brake (p. 421)
•
Auto-hold brakes (p. 425)
•
Braking assist after a collision (p. 426)
•
Hill Start Assist (p. 426)
•
City Safety™ (p. 339)
•
Hill Descent Control (p. 445)
Brakes
The brake pedal is used to apply the vehicle's
regular brakes, which are part of the brake sys-
tem.
The vehicle is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will
go down further when depressed. More pressure
will then be required from the driver for normal
braking effect.
The driver's pressure on the brake pedal is
enhanced by a power braking function.
WARNING
Power braking only functions if the engine is
running.
If the brake pedal is used when the engine is
turned off, the pedal will feel stiffer than usual
and greater pressure must be applied to brake
the vehicle.
In very hilly areas or when driving with a heavy
load, engine braking in manual gear should be
used to augment the brakes. Engine braking is
most effective if the same gear is used both
uphill and downhill. Use the Off Road drive mode
to increase the engine braking effect when driv-
ing on steep downgrades at low speeds.
STARTING AND DRIVING
419
Anti-lock brakes
The vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS), which helps prevent the wheels
from locking and helps maintain steering control
when braking. Vibrations may be felt from the
brake pedal when ABS is operating, which is nor-
mal.
After the vehicle is started, a brief test of the
ABS system is automatically performed when the
driver releases the brake pedal. An additional
automatic test of the system may be performed
when the vehicle is traveling at a low speed. Dur-
ing the test, the brake pedal may feel as though it
is pulsating.
Symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Meaning
A
B
Check the brake fluid level. If the
level is low, fill brake fluid and
check to determine the reason for
the loss of brake fluid.
A
B
Steady glow for 2 seconds after
the engine is started: Automatic
function check.
Steady glow for more than 2 sec-
onds: Fault in the ABS system. The
vehicle's regular brake system is
still working, but without the ABS
function.
A
In Canada.
B
In the US.
WARNING
If the warning symbols for both brake fault
and ABS fault are lit simultaneously, there
may be a fault in the brake system.
•
If the brake fluid reservoir level is normal
when this occurs, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop to have the brake sys-
tem checked - an authorized Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
•
If the brake fluid has fallen below the MIN
level in the brake fluid reservoir, the vehi-
cle should not be driven until the brake
fluid has been filled. The reason for the
brake fluid loss must be checked.
Related information
•
Brake Assist System (p. 420)
•
Auto-hold brakes (p. 425)
•
Hill Start Assist (p. 426)
•
Braking on wet roads (p. 420)
•
Braking on salted roads (p. 420)
•
Maintenance of the brake system (p. 421)
•
Brake lights (p. 163)
STARTING AND DRIVING
420
Brake Assist System
The brake enhancing system, Brake Assist
System (BAS), helps increase braking force and
thereby reduce braking distance.
The system monitors the driver's braking habits
and increases braking force when necessary.
Braking force can be increased up to the point at
which the ABS intervenes. The function is deacti-
vated when pressure on the brake pedal is
decreased.
NOTE
When BAS is activated, the brake pedal will
go down slightly more than usual. Press
(hold) down the brake pedal as long as nec-
essary.
When the brake pedal is released, all braking
ceases.
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 418)
Braking on wet roads
Prolonged driving in heavy rain without braking
may cause braking effect to be slightly delayed
the first time the brakes are applied.
This may also occur after washing the vehicle. It
will then be necessary to apply greater pressure
to the brake pedal. You should therefore maintain
a greater distance to the vehicle ahead.
Firmly apply the brakes after washing the vehicle
or driving on wet roads. This helps warm up the
brake discs, enabling them to dry more quickly
and protecting them against corrosion. Consider
the current traffic situation when braking.
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 418)
•
Braking on salted roads (p. 420)
Braking on salted roads
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may
form on the brake discs and brake pads.
This could increase stopping distance. Maintain
an extra large safety distance to the vehicle
ahead. Make sure to also:
•
Apply the brakes from time to time to help
remove salt. Make sure braking does not
pose a risk to any other road users.
•
Gently apply the brakes when you have fin-
ished driving and before driving again.
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 418)
•
Braking on wet roads (p. 420)
STARTING AND DRIVING
421
Maintenance of the brake system
Regularly check the brake system components
for wear.
To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as possi-
ble, follow the Volvo service schedule specified in
the Warranty and Maintenance Records Informa-
tion booklet. New and replaced brake pads and
brake discs do not provide optimal braking effect
until they are "broken in" by driving a few hun-
dred kilometers (miles). Compensate for the
reduced braking effect by applying greater pres-
sure to the brake pedal. Volvo recommends only
using brake pads approved for your Volvo.
CAUTION
The brake system's components should be
regularly checked for wear.
Contact a workshop for advice on how to do
this or let a workshop perform the inspection
- an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 418)
Parking brake
The parking brake helps keep the vehicle sta-
tionary by mechanically locking two wheels.
The parking brake controls are located in the tunnel
console between the seats.
When the electric parking brake is being applied,
a faint sound can be heard from the brake's elec-
tric motor. This sound can also be heard during
the automatic function check of the parking
brake.
If the vehicle is stationary when the parking brake
is applied, it will only be applied to the rear
wheels. If it is applied while the vehicle is moving,
the normal brakes will be used on all four wheels.
Braking will be transferred to only the rear
wheels when the vehicle is almost stopped.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 422)
•
Parking on a hill (p. 423)
•
Parking brake malfunction (p. 424)
•
Auto-hold brakes (p. 425)
STARTING AND DRIVING
422
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
Use the parking brake to help keep the vehicle
stationary when it is parked.
Activating the parking brake
1. Pull up the control.
> The symbol in the instrument panel will
illuminate when the parking brake is acti-
vated.
2. Make sure the vehicle is stationary.
Symbol in the instrument panel
Symbol Meaning
A
B
The symbol will be illuminated
when the parking brake is acti-
vated.
A flashing symbol indicates that a
fault has been detected. Read the
message in the instrument panel.
A
In Canada.
B
In the US.
Automatic activation
The parking brake is applied automatically:
•
when the ignition is switched off and the set-
ting for automatically activating the parking
brake is activated in the center display.
•
if the Auto-hold function (automatic brake
application when the vehicle is stationary) is
activated and the vehicle has been stationary
for a prolonged period of time (5-10
minutes).
•
when the gear selector is moved to P on a
steep hill.
Emergency braking
In an emergency, the parking brake can be acti-
vated when the vehicle is moving by pulling and
holding up the control. The braking process is
canceled when the control is released or if the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
NOTE
In case of emergency braking at high speeds,
a signal sounds during the brake procedure.
Deactivating the parking brake
Deactivating manually
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Press the control.
> The parking brake will release and the
symbol in the instrument panel will go out.
STARTING AND DRIVING
423
Deactivating automatically
1. Fasten your seat belt.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3. Start the vehicle.
4.
Move the gear selector to D or R and press
the accelerator pedal.
> The parking brake will release and the
symbol in the instrument panel will go out.
NOTE
When the vehicle is initially started, the park-
ing brake could disengage automatically even
if the driver's seat belt is not buckled.
Related information
•
Settings for automatically activating the park-
ing brake (p. 423)
•
Parking brake malfunction (p. 424)
•
Parking brake (p. 421)
•
Parking on a hill (p. 423)
Settings for automatically activating
the parking brake
Choose whether the parking brake should be
activated automatically when the vehicle is
switched off.
This selection is made in the Settings menu in
the center display.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
and select or deselect the
Auto Activate Parking Brake function.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 422)
•
Parking brake (p. 421)
Parking on a hill
Always use the parking brake when parking on a
hill.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on an incline. Selecting a gear or putting the
automatic transmission in P may not be suffi-
cient to keep the vehicle stationary in all sit-
uations.
If the vehicle is pointing uphill:
•
Turn the front wheels so they are pointing
away from the curb.
If the vehicle is pointing downhill:
•
Turn the front wheels so they are pointing
toward the curb.
Heavy load uphill
Heavy loads, such as a trailer, could cause the
vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake
is released automatically on steep uphill gradi-
ents. To help avoid this, pull the control upward
while you are driving away. Release the control
when the vehicle gains traction.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 422)
STARTING AND DRIVING
424
Parking brake malfunction
If you are unable to deactivate or activate the
parking brake after several attempts, contact an
authorized Volvo workshop.
A audible warning signal will sound if the parking
brake is applied while the vehicle is being driven.
If the vehicle must be parked before the problem
is rectified, turn the wheels as when parking on
an incline and put the gear selector in P.
Low battery charge level
If the battery charge level is too low, it will not be
possible to apply or release the parking brake.
Connect an auxiliary battery to the vehicle if the
battery is discharged.
Replacing brake pads
Due to the design of the electric parking brake,
the rear brake pads must be replaced by a work-
shop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Meaning
A
B
A flashing symbol indicates that a
fault has been detected. See the
message in the instrument panel.
A
B
Fault in the brake system. See the
message in the instrument panel.
Information message in the instru-
ment panel.
A
In Canada.
B
In the US.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 422)
•
Start battery (p. 612)
•
Volvo's service program (p. 588)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
425
Auto-hold brakes
With the Auto-hold brake function, the driver can
release the brake pedal and the brakes will
remain applied, for example, when the vehicle
has stopped at a traffic light or intersection.
When the vehicle stops, the brakes are activated
automatically. The function can use either the
normal brakes or the parking brakes to keep the
vehicle stationary and works on flat surfaces or
hills. When driving off, the brakes will be automat-
ically released if the driver's seat belt is buckled.
NOTE
When braking to a stop on an uphill or down-
hill gradient, depress the brake pedal with
slightly more force than usual before releas-
ing to ensure that the vehicle cannot move at
all.
The parking brake is activated if:
•
the vehicle is switched off
•
the driver's door is opened
•
the driver's seat belt is removed
•
the vehicle has been stationary for a pro-
longed period of time (5-10 minutes)
Symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Meaning
This symbol illuminates when the
function is using the normal brakes
to keep the vehicle stationary.
A
B
This symbol illuminates when the
function is using the parking brake
to keep the vehicle stationary.
A
Canadian models.
B
US models.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating Auto-hold at a
standstill (p. 425)
•
Brakes (p. 418)
•
Parking brake (p. 421)
•
Hill Start Assist (p. 426)
Activating and deactivating Auto-
hold at a standstill
The Auto-hold brake function at a standstill is
activated with the button in the tunnel console.
–
Press the button in the tunnel console to
activate or deactivate the function.
> The indicator light in the button will illumi-
nate when the function is activated. The
function will remain active the next time
the vehicle is started.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
426
When shutting off
If the function is active and holding the
vehicle stationary using the normal
brakes (A symbol lit), the brake pedal
must be depressed while pressing the
button in order to deactivate Auto-hold.
•
The function will remain off until it is reactiva-
ted.
•
When Auto-hold is switched off, Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will remain active to help pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling backward when
starting up a hill.
Related information
•
Auto-hold brakes (p. 425)
Hill Start Assist
The function for assisting when starting the vehi-
cle on inclines, Hill Start Assist (HSA), helps
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when
starting on an uphill gradient. When backing up
a hill, HSA helps prevent the vehicle from rolling
forward.
The function retains pressure from the brake
pedal in the brake system for several seconds
after the brake pedal has been released.
This temporary braking effect is released after a
few seconds or when the driver begins driving.
Hill Start Assist is available even if the Auto-hold
brake function is switched off.
Related information
•
Auto-hold brakes (p. 425)
•
Brakes (p. 418)
Braking assist after a collision
In a collision in which the activation level is
reached for the pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners
or airbags, or if a collision with a large animal is
detected, the vehicle's brakes will be automati-
cally activated. This function is intended to help
prevent or reduce the effects of any subsequent
collision.
After a serious collision, it may no longer be pos-
sible to control and steer the vehicle. In order to
avoid or mitigate a possible further collision with
a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's path, the
brake assist system is activated automatically to
help stop the vehicle safely.
The brake lights and hazard warning flashers are
activated during braking. When the vehicle has
stopped, the hazard warning flashers will con-
tinue to flash and the parking brake will be
applied.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk
of being hit by passing traffic, the driver can over-
ride the system by depressing the accelerator
pedal.
This function assumes that the brake system is
intact after a collision.
Brake assist is part of the Rear Collision Warning
and Blind Spot Information safety systems.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
427
Related information
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 352)
•
BLIS* (p. 353)
•
Brake functions (p. 418)
Transmission
The transmission is part of the vehicle's driveline
(power transmission) between the engine and
the drive wheels. The function of the transmis-
sion is to change gears depending on speed
and power needs.
The vehicle has an 8-speed automatic transmis-
sion. The number of gears allows the engine's
torque and power band to be effectively utilized.
Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save
fuel when driving at a constant engine speed.
Manual shifting is also possible. The instrument
panel shows the gear currently in use.
CAUTION
Check the operating temperature of the
transmission to help avoid damage to any of
the drive system components. If there is a risk
of overheating, a warning symbol will appear
in the instrument panel and a text message
will be displayed. Follow the recommenda-
tions given.
Symbols in the instrument panel
If a problem should occur with the transmission, a
symbol and a message will appear in the instru-
ment panel.
Symbol Meaning
Information and messages related
to the transmission. Follow the rec-
ommendations provided.
Hot or overheated transmission.
Follow the recommendations provi-
ded.
Reduced performance/Acceler-
ation performance reduced
In the event of a temporary fault in
the driveline, the vehicle may go
into a "limp home" mode with
reduced power output to help avoid
damage to the driveline.
Related information
•
Gear selector positions for automatic trans-
missions (p. 428)
STARTING AND DRIVING
428
Gear selector positions for
automatic transmissions
In vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
system selects the optimal gear for the current
driving conditions. The transmission also has a
manual mode.
The instrument panel shows which gear is cur-
rently in use:
P, R, N, D or M.
In manual gear mode, the gear indicator in the
instrument panel displays the gear currently
being used.
Gear selector positions
Park - P
In P mode, the transmission is mechanically
locked.
Select P when the vehicle is parked or when star-
ting the engine. The vehicle must be stationary
when Park is selected.
To move to another gear from Park, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition in
mode II.
When parking – apply the parking brake before
shifting to Park.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on an incline. Selecting a gear or putting the
automatic transmission in P may not be suffi-
cient to keep the vehicle stationary in all sit-
uations.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in the P position
before the vehicle can be locked and the
alarm set.
Reverse - R
Select R when backing up. The vehicle must be
stationary when Reverse is selected.
Neutral - N
No gear is selected and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is
stationary with the gear selector in N.
To move the gear selector from Neutral to
another gear, the brake pedal must be depressed
and the ignition in mode II.
D drive mode
D is the normal driving gear position. The trans-
mission shifts up or down automatically depend-
ing on acceleration and speed. The vehicle must
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
from R to D.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
429
Manual shifting mode - M
Manual shifting mode can be selected at any
time during a drive. Engine braking will occur
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Select manual shifting mode by moving the gear
selector sideways from D to ±. The current gear
will be displayed in the instrument panel.
•
Push the gear selector forward toward +
(plus) and release to shift up one gear.
•
Pull the gear selector backward toward –
(minus) and release to shift down one gear.
Manual shifting mode in the instrument panel
2
.
For smooth shifting and engine performance, the
transmission will shift down automatically if the
vehicle's speed becomes too low for the selected
gear.
Move the gear selector sideways to D at any time
to return to automatic shifting.
Related information
•
Shiftlock (p. 431)
•
Using the steering wheel paddles* to shift
(p. 429)
•
The kickdown function (p. 432)
Using the steering wheel paddles*
to shift
The steering wheel paddles are a supplement to
the gear selector and make it possible to shift
manually without removing your hands from the
steering wheel.
Activating the steering wheel paddles
In order to shift gears using the paddles, they
must first be activated:
–
Pull one of the paddles toward the steering
wheel.
> A number in the instrument panel indi-
cates the current gear being used.
Instrument panel when the paddles are activated for
shifting.
2
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
430
In shift mode M, the paddles are automatically
activated.
Instrument panel when the paddles are activated for
shifting in manual mode.
Change
To shift one gear:
–
Pull one of the paddles toward the steering
wheel and then release.
"-": Shift down one gear.
"+": Shift up one gear.
As long as the engine speed (rpm) is within the
permissible range for the selected gear, a gear
shift will take place each time a paddle is pulled.
After each gear shift, a number indicating the
current gear will be displayed in the instrument
panel.
Turning off Start/Stop
Manual deactivation in gear position D
–
Deactivate the paddles by pulling the right
paddle (+) toward the steering wheel and
holding it until the number of the current
gear is no longer displayed in the instrument
panel.
Automatic deactivation
In gear position D, the steering wheel paddles
are deactivated after a short period of time if they
are not used. The number of the current gear will
no longer be displayed in the instrument panel. If
engine braking is currently being used, the pad-
dles will remain active until engine braking stops.
In gear position M, the paddles will not activate
automatically.
Related information
•
Gear selector positions for automatic trans-
missions (p. 428)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
431
Shiftlock
The automatic transmission's shiftlock function
helps prevent inadvertently moving the gear
selector between different positions.
There are two types of shiftlocks: mechanical and
automatic.
Mechanical shiftlock
The gear selector can be moved back and forth
between N and D. The other positions have a
shiftlock that is operated using the lock button on
the gear selector.
Press and hold the shiftlock button and move the
gear selector forward or backward between P, R,
N and D.
Automatic shiftlock
The automatic shiftlock has a separate safety
system.
From Park - P
To move to another gear from P (Park), the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition in
mode II.
From Neutral - N
If the gear selector is in N and the vehicle has
been stationary for at least 3 seconds (with or
without the engine running), the gear selector will
be locked in that position.
To move the gear selector from N to another
gear, the brake pedal must be depressed and the
ignition in mode II.
Related information
•
Gear selector positions for automatic trans-
missions (p. 428)
•
Deactivating the automatic shiftlock (p. 431)
Deactivating the automatic shiftlock
The automatic shiftlock can still be disengaged
even when there is no electrical current to the
vehicle.
If the vehicle cannot be driven (e.g. due to a dis-
charged battery), the gear selector must be
moved to the N position so that the vehicle can
be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the storage compart-
ment in front of the gear selector. Locate the
hole with a spring-loaded button in the bot-
tom of the compartment.
Press a small screwdriver or similar object
into the hole and hold it down.
Move the gear selector to N and release the
button.
4. Replace the rubber mat.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
432
Related information
•
Shiftlock (p. 431)
•
Gear selector positions for automatic trans-
missions (p. 428)
The kickdown function
Kickdown
3
is used when maximum acceleration
is needed, e.g. when passing.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed all the
way to the floor (past the normal full accelerator
position), the transmission will automatically
engage kickdown, i.e. immediately shift down to a
lower gear.
If the accelerator pedal is released from the kick-
down position, the transmission will automatically
shift up again.
Safety function
The transmission control module is equipped with
a downshift protection feature to help prevent the
engine from overheating.
In some conditions, the transmission will prevent
downshifting/kickdown if this would lead to such
high engine speed (rpm) that the engine could
be damaged. If the driver still attempts downshift-
ing or kickdown at a high rpm, nothing will hap-
pen and the original gear will remain selected.
With kickdown, the vehicle can downshift one or
more steps at a time depending on the engine
speed. The vehicle upshifts when the engine rea-
ches its maximum rpm to prevent engine dam-
age.
Related information
•
Gear selector positions for automatic trans-
missions (p. 428)
3
Only possible with automatic transmission.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
433
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
All-wheel drive, All Wheel Drive (AWD), also
called four-wheel drive, means that power is dis-
tributed to all four wheels, which improves trac-
tion.
To achieve the best traction, power is automati-
cally directed to the wheels that have the best
grip. The system continuously calculates the
need for torque to the rear wheels, and can
immediately redistribute up to half of the engine's
torque to the rear wheels.
All-wheel drive also has a stabilizing effect at
higher speeds. In normal driving conditions, most
of the engine's power is directed to the front
wheels. When the vehicle is stationary, all-wheel
drive is always activated in preparation for maxi-
mum traction during acceleration.
All-wheel drive reacts differently depending on
which drive mode is selected.
Related information
•
Drive modes* (p. 433)
•
Low Speed Control (p. 444)
•
Transmission (p. 427)
Drive modes*
Drive modes affect the vehicle's driving charac-
teristics in different ways to enhance and sim-
plify the driving experience in certain types of sit-
uations.
Drive modes enable easy access to the vehicle's
many functions and settings in different driving
situations. The following systems are adapted to
help optimize driving characteristics in each drive
mode:
•
Steering
•
Engine/transmission/all-wheel drive
•
Brakes
•
Shock absorbers
•
Instrument panel
•
Start/Stop function
•
Climate control settings
Select the drive mode that is best suited to the
current driving conditions. Keep in mind that not
all drive modes are available in all situations.
Available drive modes
COMFORT
•
This is the vehicle's default mode.
When the engine is started, the vehicle will be in
Comfort mode and the Start/Stop function will be
activated. This setting offers driving comfort, light
steering and soft suspension.
ECO
•
Adapt the vehicle for more fuel-efficient and
eco-friendly driving with Eco mode.
In this mode, the Start/Stop function is activated
and certain climate settings are reduced.
The instrument panel has an ECO gauge to facili-
tate fuel-efficient driving.
OFF ROAD
•
Helps maximize the vehicle's ability to tra-
verse difficult terrain or poor roads.
Steering is light and all-wheel drive and Hill
Descent Control are activated. The Start/Stop
function is deactivated.
This mode can only be activated at low speeds.
The permitted speed range will be shown in the
speedometer. If this speed is exceeded, Off road
mode will be deactivated and another drive mode
activated.
In Off road mode, a compass will be displayed
between the speedometer and the tachometer in
the instrument panel.
NOTE
This drive mode is not designed to be used
for normal street driving.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
434
DYNAMIC
•
Dynamic mode is designed to help provide
sportier driving characteristics and a faster
acceleration response.
Gear shifting will be faster and more distinct and
the transmission will prioritize gears with a higher
traction force.
Steering response is faster and suspension is
stiffer
4
to help reduce body roll when cornering.
The Start/Stop function is deactivated.
INDIVIDUAL
•
Customizes drive mode to personal preferen-
ces.
Select one of the drive modes as a basis and
adjust the settings to achieve your preferred driv-
ing characteristics. These settings will be stored
in the active driver profile and will be available
every time the vehicle is unlocked with that
remote key.
Individual drive mode is only available if it has
been activated in the center display.
Settings view
5
for Individual drive mode.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap My Car Individual Drive Mode and
select
Individual Drive Mode.
3.
Under
Presets, select one of the following
drive modes as a basis: Eco, Comfort or
Dynamic.
The following settings can be modified:
•
Driver Display
•
Steering Force
•
Powertrain Characteristics
•
Brake Characteristics
•
Suspension Control
•
ECO Climate
•
Start/Stop.
Related information
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 435)
•
ECO drive mode (p. 435)
•
Economical driving (p. 447)
•
Start/Stop function (p. 438)
•
Low Speed Control (p. 444)
•
Hill Descent Control (p. 445)
•
All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 433)
•
Driver profiles (p. 138)
4
Vehicles with Four-C.
5
The image is schematic and the details may vary depending on vehicle model or software update.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
435
Changing drive mode*
Select the drive mode that is best suited to the
current driving conditions.
The drive mode is changed using the control in
the tunnel console.
Keep in mind that not all drive modes are availa-
ble in all situations.
To change drive mode:
1.
Press the DRIVE MODE control.
> A pop-up menu will appear in the center
display.
2. Roll the wheel upward or downward to the
desired drive mode.
3. Press the drive mode control or tap its button
in the center display to confirm the selection.
> The selected drive mode is shown in the
instrument panel.
If a drive mode is grayed out in the pop-up menu,
it cannot be selected.
Related information
•
Drive modes* (p. 433)
•
Activating and deactivating ECO drive mode
using the function button (p. 438)
•
Activating and deactivating Low Speed Con-
trol using the function button (p. 445)
•
Activating and deactivating Hill Descent Con-
trol using the function button (p. 446)
ECO drive mode
The Eco drive mode optimizes the vehicle's driv-
ing characteristics for more fuel-efficient and
eco-friendly driving.
Use this mode to save fuel and promote eco-
friendly driving.
When ECO mode is activated, the following cha-
racteristics are modified:
•
The automatic transmission's shifting points.
•
Engine control and accelerator pedal
response.
•
Eco Coast functionality is activated and
engine braking is disabled when the acceler-
ator pedal is released at speeds between
65 and 140 km/h (40 and 87 mph).
•
Some of the climate system settings will be
reduced or switched off.
•
Information will be shown in the ECO gauge
in the instrument panel to help promote
more eco-friendly and economical driving.
Coast function Eco Coast
Eco Coast essentially deactivates engine braking,
allowing the vehicle's kinetic energy to be used
to roll greater distances. When the driver releases
the accelerator pedal, the transmission is auto-
matically disengaged from the engine. Engine
speed is reduced to idling speed to reduce fuel
consumption.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
436
This function is most effective in driving situa-
tions where the vehicle can roll freely for a long
distance, e.g. on roads with slight downgrades or
when a decrease in speed is anticipated, such as
when approaching an area with a lower speed
limit.
Activating Eco Coast
The function is activated when the accelerator
pedal is fully released and the following condi-
tions are met:
•
Eco drive mode is activated.
•
The gear selector is in D.
•
The vehicle's speed is approximately
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
•
The gradient of the downgrade is less than
approximately 6%.
COASTING will be displayed in the instrument
panel when Eco Coast is being used.
Limitations
Eco Coast is not available if:
•
The engine and/or transmission are not at
normal working temperatures.
•
The gear selector is moved from D to manual
shifting mode.
•
The vehicle's speed is not within the
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) range.
•
The gradient of the downgrade is more than
approximately 6%.
•
The steering wheel paddles* are being used
for manual shifting.
Deactivating and turning off Eco Coast
In certain situations, it may be advisable to deac-
tivate or turn off Eco Coast so that engine brak-
ing can be used. These situations might include
driving down steep hills or before passing
another vehicle to help ensure this can be done
as safely as possible.
Deactivate Eco Coast by:
•
Pressing the accelerator or brake pedal.
•
Moving the gear selector to manual mode.
•
Using the steering wheel paddles* to shift.
Turn off Eco Coast by:
•
Switching drive mode* or switching off drive
mode Eco in Function view.
It is possible to roll short distances even without
Eco Coast in order to help conserve fuel. How-
ever, for the best fuel economy, Eco Coast should
be activated and used to roll longer distances.
Cruise control Eco Cruise
When cruise control is activated in the Eco drive
mode, the vehicle's acceleration and deceleration
will be slower than in other drive modes to help
further conserve fuel. Because of this, the vehi-
cle's actual speed may be slightly above or below
the set speed.
•
On a level road, the vehicle's actual speed
may differ from the set speed when cruise
control is active and the vehicle is coasting.
•
On a steep uphill gradient, the vehicle's
speed is reduced until the transmission
downshifts. Reduced acceleration is then ini-
tiated in order to reach the set speed.
•
On a downhill gradient in which the vehicle is
coasting, the vehicle's actual speed may be
slightly above or below the set speed. The
function uses engine braking to keep the set
speed. If necessary, the normal brakes are
also applied.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
437
ECO gauge in the instrument panel
Eco gauge in 12" instrument panel*.
Eco gauge in 8" instrument panel.
The ECO gauge indicates how economical cur-
rent driving is:
•
A low reading in the green area of the gauge
indicates economical driving.
•
A high reading is shown when driving is not
economical, e.g. heavy braking or rapid accel-
eration.
The ECO gauge also has an indicator showing
how a reference driver would drive in the same
driving situation. This is shown by the short
pointer in the gauge.
ECO Climate
In Eco mode, ECO climate is automatically acti-
vated in the passenger compartment to help
reduce energy consumption.
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, settings
for certain climate system and electricity con-
suming functions are reduced. Some of these
settings can be reset manually, but full func-
tionality will only be restored by switching off
the ECO function or adapting the
Individual*
drive mode to full climate system functionality.
If condensation forms on the windows, tap the
max defroster button, which will function normally.
Related information
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 435)
•
Activating and deactivating ECO drive mode
using the function button (p. 438)
•
Drive modes* (p. 433)
•
Economical driving (p. 447)
•
Start/Stop function (p. 438)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
438
Activating and deactivating ECO
drive mode using the function
button
There is a function button for Eco drive mode in
the center display's Function view if the vehicle
is not equipped with a drive mode control in the
tunnel console.
When the engine is switched off, ECO mode is
deactivated and must therefore be reactivated
each time the engine is started. ECO will be dis-
played in the instrument panel when the function
is activated.
Selecting Eco drive mode in the center
display's Function view
–
Tap the Driving Mode ECO button to acti-
vate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator light in the button will illumi-
nate when the function is activated.
Related information
•
ECO drive mode (p. 435)
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 435)
•
Drive modes* (p. 433)
Start/Stop function
Start/Stop is a function that temporarily switches
off the engine when the vehicle has stopped,
e.g. at a traffic light or in heavy traffic, and then
starts it again automatically when the brake
pedal is released.
The Start/Stop function reduces fuel consump-
tion, which helps to reduce exhaust emissions.
The system makes it possible to drive more eco-
nomically and climate-smart by letting the engine
auto-stop when appropriate.
Related information
•
Driving with the Start/Stop function (p. 438)
•
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 440)
•
Drive modes* (p. 433)
Driving with the Start/Stop function
Start/Stop is a function that temporarily turns off
the engine when the vehicle is stationary and
then automatically starts it again when the vehi-
cle starts moving.
The Start/Stop function is available when the
ignition is started and can be activated if certain
conditions are met. The instrument panel indi-
cates if the function is available, active or not
available.
All of the vehicle's ordinary systems, such as
lighting, radio, etc. function normally when the
engine has been auto-stopped. Certain functions
may be temporarily reduced, however, such as
the climate system's blower speed or extremely
high audio system volume.
Auto-stop
To auto-stop the engine:
•
Stop the vehicle by applying the brakes and
keep the brake pedal depressed. The engine
will auto-stop.
In Eco or Comfort
6
drive mode, the engine may
auto-stop before the vehicle has completely stop-
ped.
With Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist acti-
vated, the engine will auto-stop after approxi-
mately three seconds.
6
Normal start mode.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
439
Auto-start
The following conditions must be met for the
engine to auto-start.
•
Release the brake pedal. The engine will
auto-start and the vehicle can be driven. On
an uphill gradient, Hill Start Assist (HSA) will
activate to help prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing backward.
•
When Auto-hold is activated, auto-start will
be delayed until the accelerator is pressed.
•
When Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist
are activated, the engine will auto-start when
the accelerator pedal is depressed or the
button on the left-side steering wheel
keypad is pressed.
•
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and
press the accelerator pedal. The engine will
auto-start.
•
On a downhill gradient: Release the brake
pedal slightly so that the vehicle begins to
roll. The engine will auto-start after a slight
increase in speed.
Symbols in the instrument panel
12" instrument panel*
•
READY will be displayed in the tachometer
when Start/Stop is available.
•
An indicator in the tachometer will point
toward READY when Start/Stop is active
and the engine has auto-stopped.
•
READY will be grayed-out when Start/Stop
is not available.
•
No message will be shown when the func-
tion is turned off.
The function is active and the engine has auto-stopped.
8" instrument panel
The symbol is displayed at the bottom of the
speedometer.
Symbol Meaning
White symbol: the function is avail-
able.
Beige symbol: The function is
active and the engine has auto-
stopped.
Symbol Meaning
the function is not available
because the conditions have not
been met.
No symbol will be shown when the
function is turned off.
Related information
•
Temporarily deactivating the Start/Stop func-
tion (p. 440)
•
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 440)
•
Start/Stop function (p. 438)
•
Hill Start Assist (p. 426)
•
Auto-hold brakes (p. 425)
STARTING AND DRIVING
440
Temporarily deactivating the Start/
Stop function
In certain situations, it may be advisable to tem-
porarily turn the Start/Stop function off.
To turn off Start/Stop, tap the
Start/Stop function button in
the center display's Function
view. The indicator light in the
button will go out when the
function has been turned off.
The function will remain turned off until:
•
it is reactivated
•
the drive mode is changed to Eco.
Related information
•
Driving with the Start/Stop function (p. 438)
•
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 440)
Conditions for the Start/Stop
function
Certain conditions must be met for Start/Stop to
function.
If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in
the instrument panel.
The engine does not auto-stop
The engine will not auto-stop if:
•
the vehicle has not reached a speed of
ca 10 km/h (6 mph) after starting.
•
after several auto-stops, the speed must
again exceed approximately ca 10 km/h
(6 mph) before the next auto-stop.
•
the driver's seat belt is unbuckled.
•
the start battery's charge is below the mini-
mum level.
•
the engine is not running at its normal oper-
ating temperature.
•
the ambient temperature is under approxi-
mately -5 °C (23 °F) or over approximately
30 °C (86 °F).
•
windshield heating is activated.
•
the climate system settings and the actual
climate in the passenger compartment differ.
•
the vehicle is backing up.
•
the start battery's temperature is above or
below the permitted limits.
•
the driver is turning the steering wheel hard.
•
the road gradient is very steep.
•
the hood is open.
•
driving at high altitude and the engine has
not reached its normal operating tempera-
ture.
•
ABS has been activated.
•
hard braking (even if the ABS system has
not been activated).
•
many starts during a short period of time
have triggered the starter motor's overheat-
ing protection.
•
a trailer's electrical system is connected to
the vehicle's electrical system.
•
the transmission is not running at its normal
operating temperature.
•
The gear selector is in mode M (±).
The engine does not auto-start
The engine will not auto-start after an auto-stop
if:
•
the driver is not wearing a seat belt, the gear
selector is in the P position and the driver's
door is open. The engine must be started
normally.
The engine auto-starts while the brake
pedal is depressed
In the following situations, the engine will auto-
start even if the brake pedal is depressed:
STARTING AND DRIVING
441
•
High levels of condensation on the inside of
the windows.
•
the climate system settings and the actual
climate in the passenger compartment differ.
•
Electrical current consumption is temporarily
high or the start battery's charge is below the
minimum level.
•
The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly.
•
The hood is open.
•
The vehicle begins to roll or increases speed
slightly if the engine auto-stopped before the
vehicle was at a standstill.
•
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled with the
gear selector in the D or N positions.
•
The gear selector is moved from D to R or M
(±).
•
The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D. An audible signal and a text
message informs the driver that the ignition
is on.
WARNING
Do not open the hood if the engine has auto-
stopped. Turn off the engine by switching off
the ignition before lifting the hood.
Related information
•
Start/Stop function (p. 438)
•
Driving with the Start/Stop function (p. 438)
•
Temporarily deactivating the Start/Stop func-
tion (p. 440)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
442
Leveling control* and suspension
Self-leveling and suspension functions are con-
trolled automatically.
Rear leveling control keeps the rear section of
the vehicle at the same height regardless of load.
Leveling control may also remain active when the
vehicle is parked.
Shock absorbers (Four-C)
The shock absorbers are adapted to the selected
drive mode and vehicle speed. The shock absorb-
ers are normally set to provide the best possible
comfort and are adjusted continuously according
to the road surface and the vehicle's acceleration,
braking and cornering.
Transporting
When transporting the vehicle on a ferry, train or
truck, only secure (lash) the vehicle around the
tires, not using any other parts of the chassis.
Changes in the pneumatic suspension may occur
during transport, which could adversely affect the
lashing and result in damage.
Symbols and messages in driver display
Symbol Message Meaning
Suspension
Deactivated by user
Active chassis has been switched off manually by the user.
Suspension
Temporarily reduced performance
Active chassis performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use. If this
message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshop
A
.
Suspension
Service required
A fault has occurred. Visit a workshop
A
as soon as possible.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
443
Symbol Message Meaning
Suspension failure
Stop safely
A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, have the car towed to a workshop
A
.
Suspension
Slow down Vehicle too high
A fault has occurred. If the message appears while driving, contact a workshop
A
.
Suspension
Auto adjusting vehicle level
Level control of the car's rear axle to target height is in progress.
A
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Leveling control settings* (p. 444)
•
Drive modes* (p. 433)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
444
Leveling control settings*
Turn off leveling control before lifting the vehicle
with a jack to help avoid problems with the
pneumatic suspension.
Center display settings
Disable Leveling Control
In certain situations, this function must be turned
off, e.g. before the vehicle is raised using a jack*.
The level difference caused by raising the vehicle
with a jack could cause problems with the pneu-
matic suspension.
Turning off the function in the center display:
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
.
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
Related information
•
Leveling control* and suspension (p. 442)
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
Low Speed Control
The low-speed function, Low Speed Control
(LSC), facilitates and improves control and trac-
tion on rough roads and slippery surfaces, e.g.
when towing a trailer on grass or up boat ramps.
In vehicles equipped with drive mode control*,
the function is included in the Off Road drive
mode.
Low Speed Control is designed for driving on
rough roads and when towing trailers at low
speeds, up to approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
When driving at low speeds, LSC prioritizes low
gears and all-wheel drive to help avoid wheel spin
and improve traction on all wheels. The accelera-
tor pedal will be less responsive to improve trac-
tion and speed control at low speeds.
The function is activated together with Hill
Descent Control (HDC), which makes it possible
to control speed going down steep hills using the
accelerator pedal and reduces the need to use
the brake pedal. The system makes it possible to
maintain a low and uniform speed when driving
down steep hills.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
will change.
NOTE
This drive mode is not designed to be used
for normal street driving.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
high speeds and must be reactivated at lower
speeds if so desired.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating Low Speed Con-
trol using the function button (p. 445)
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 435)
•
Hill Descent Control (p. 445)
•
All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 433)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
445
Activating and deactivating Low
Speed Control using the function
button
There is a function button for driving at low
speeds with
Hill Descent Control in the center
display's Function view if the vehicle is not
equipped with a drive mode control in the tunnel
console.
Selecting Low Speed Control in the
center display's Function view
–
Tap the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator light in the button will illumi-
nate when the function is activated.
When the engine is switched off, the function will
be automatically deactivated.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
high speeds and must be reactivated at lower
speeds if so desired.
Related information
•
Low Speed Control (p. 444)
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 435)
Hill Descent Control
The function for assisting when driving downhill,
Hill Descent Control (HDC), is a low-speed
function with increased engine braking. The
function makes it possible to increase or
decrease the vehicle's speed on steep downhill
gradients by only using the accelerator pedal,
without applying the brakes.
In vehicles equipped with drive mode control*,
the function is included in the Off Road drive
mode.
HDC is designed for driving on rough roads at
low speeds and downhill gradients with slippery
or otherwise difficult road surfaces. The driver
does not need to use the brake pedal but can
instead focus on steering.
WARNING
HDC is only intended to be a supplementary
braking aid and it does not function in all sit-
uations.
The driver is always ultimately responsible for
operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
Function
Hill Descent Control allows the vehicle to move
forward or backward at very low speeds assisted
by the brake system. The driver can increase the
speed by pressing the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
446
return to very low speed regardless of how steep
the hill is and without the brakes needing to be
applied. The brake lights will illuminate when the
function is activated.
The driver can brake to stop or slow the vehicle
at any time by depressing the brake pedal.
HDC is activated along with Low Speed Control
(LSC), which facilitates and improves traction and
control on rough and slippery surfaces. The sys-
tem is intended to be used at low speeds, up to
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
To keep in mind when using HDC
•
If the function is switched off while driving on
a steep downhill gradient, braking effect will
be gradually reduced.
•
HDC can be used in gear positions D and R,
and in manual gears 1 or 2.
•
It is not possible to manually shift to third
gear or higher when HDC is active.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
will change.
NOTE
This drive mode is not designed to be used
for normal street driving.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
high speeds and must be reactivated at lower
speeds if so desired.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating Hill Descent Con-
trol using the function button (p. 446)
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 435)
•
Low Speed Control (p. 444)
•
All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 433)
Activating and deactivating Hill
Descent Control using the function
button
There is a function button for assistance on
steep gradients with
Hill Descent Control in
the center display's Function view if the vehicle
is not equipped with a drive mode control in the
tunnel console.
Selecting Hill Descent Control in the
center display's Function view
HDC only works at low speeds.
–
Tap the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator light in the button will illumi-
nate when the function is activated.
When the engine is switched off, the function will
be automatically deactivated.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
high speeds and must be reactivated at lower
speeds if so desired.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
447
Related information
•
Hill Descent Control (p. 445)
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 435)
Economical driving
Drive economically and more environmentally
conscious by thinking ahead, avoiding rapid
starts and stops and adapting driving style and
speed to the current traffic conditions.
Observe the following rules:
•
For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco
drive mode.
•
Use the Eco Coast function in drive mode
Eco - engine braking is deactivated, allowing
the vehicle's kinetic energy to be used to roll
greater distances.
•
Use gear D as often as possible and avoid
using the kick-down function.
•
For manual gear shifting, use the highest
possible gear for the current traffic situation
and road conditions - fuel consumption is
reduced at lower engine speeds (rpm). Use
the gear indicator
7
.
•
Maintain a steady speed and a generous fol-
lowing distance to traffic ahead to minimize
braking.
•
Fuel consumption is increased at high
speeds - air resistance increases with speed.
•
The trip computer's current fuel consumption
indicator can help promote more fuel-effi-
cient driving.
•
Do not warm up the engine by idling. It is
better to begin driving normally immediately
after starting the engine. A cold engine uses
more fuel than a warm engine.
•
Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle to
drive short distances. The engine does not
have time to reach a normal operating tem-
perature and this leads to increased fuel
consumption.
•
Use engine braking to brake the vehicle,
when this is safe for other road users.
•
Maintain the correct pressure in the tires and
check pressure regularly.
•
The type of tires used could affect fuel con-
sumption - consult a retailer for advice on
suitable tires.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the vehicle
- the heavier the load, the higher the fuel
consumption.
•
Roof loads increase air resistance and
increase fuel consumption. Remove roof
boxes, ski racks, etc. that are not in use.
•
Avoid driving with the windows open.
7
Certain markets only.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
448
WARNING
Never turn off the engine while the vehicle is
moving, e.g. when driving downhill. This deac-
tivates certain important systems such as
power steering and brakes.
Other factors that decrease fuel
consumption
•
Dirty air cleaner.
•
Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter.
•
Incorrect front-end alignment.
•
Incorrect wheel alignment.
Some of the above items and others are checked
as part of Volvo's standard maintenance sched-
ule.
Related information
•
Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure (p. 27)
•
ECO drive mode (p. 435)
•
Checking tire pressure (p. 545)
Preparing for a long trip
It is important to have the vehicle's systems and
equipment checked carefully before driving long
distances.
Check that:
•
the engine is running properly and that fuel
consumption is normal
•
there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
•
the brake pedal is functioning optimally
•
all lights are working ‒ adjust the headlight
height if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load
•
tire tread depth and air pressure are at cor-
rect levels. Change to snow tires when driv-
ing in areas where there is a risk of snowy or
icy roads
•
the start battery is sufficiently charged
•
the wiper blades are in good condition
Related information
•
Checking tire pressure (p. 545)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Winter driving (p. 449)
•
Economical driving (p. 447)
•
Vehicle modem settings (p. 523)
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 460)
•
Pilot Assist (p. 314)
•
Speed limiter (p. 281)
•
Tire sealing system (p. 560)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
449
Winter driving
It is important to check the vehicle before driving
in cold/snowy conditions to make sure it can be
driven safely.
Before the cold season arrives:
•
Make sure the engine coolant contains 50%
antifreeze. This mixture helps protect the
engine from frost erosion down to
approx. -35 °C (-31 °F). Do not mix different
types of antifreeze as this could pose a
health risk.
•
Keep the fuel tank well filled to prevent con-
densation from forming.
•
Check the viscosity of the engine oil. Oil with
low viscosity (thinner oil) improves cold-
weather starting and reduces fuel consump-
tion when driving with a cold engine.
CAUTION
Low-viscosity oil should not be used with hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
Check the condition and charge level of the
start battery. Cold weather places greater
demands on the start battery and reduces its
capacity.
•
Use washer fluid containing antifreeze to
help prevent ice from forming in the washer
fluid reservoir.
Slippery driving conditions
For optimal traction and roadholding, Volvo rec-
ommends using snow tires on all wheels when-
ever there is a risk of snow or ice on the road.
NOTE
Certain countries require use of winter tires
by law. Not all countries permit the use of
studded tires.
Practice driving on slippery surfaces under con-
trolled conditions to learn how the vehicle reacts.
Related information
•
Snow tires (p. 559)
•
Snow chains (p. 559)
•
Braking on salted roads (p. 420)
•
Braking on wet roads (p. 420)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Start battery (p. 612)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
•
Refilling coolant (p. 603)
Driving through standing water
Driving the vehicle through a deep pool of stand-
ing water on a water-covered roadway is called
fording. This must be done with great caution.
The vehicle can be driven through water up to a
depth of 30 cm (11 in) at no more than walking
speed. Be particularly careful when driving
through flowing water.
When driving through standing water, drive slowly
and do not stop the vehicle. When you have
passed the water, press lightly on the brake pedal
and check that the brakes are functioning prop-
erly. Water, mud, slush, etc. can make the brake
linings slippery, resulting in delayed braking
effect.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with contacts for an
electric heater or trailer coupling, clean these
after driving in water or mud.
•
Do not allow the vehicle to stand in water up
to the sills any longer than absolutely neces-
sary. This could result in electrical malfunc-
tions.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
450
CAUTION
•
Engine damage could occur if water
enters the air cleaner.
•
If water enters the transmission, the lubri-
cating ability of the oils is reduced and
the service life of these systems is short-
ened.
•
Damage to any component, engine,
transmission, turbocharger, differential or
its internal components caused by flood-
ing, vapor lock or insufficient oil is not
covered under warranty.
•
If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in
water, do not attempt to restart it. Have
the vehicle towed out of the water to a
workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop
is recommended. Risk of engine failure.
CAUTION
Because it can be difficult to determine the
water depth, avoid driving through standing or
running water.
Related information
•
Recovery (p. 466)
•
Low Speed Control (p. 444)
Opening/closing the fuel filler door
The vehicle must be unlocked before the fuel
filler door can be opened
8
.
An arrow next to the fuel pump
symbol in the instrument panel
indicates the side of the vehicle
on which the fuel filler door is
located.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pressing lightly
on its rear edge.
2. After refueling, press the fuel filler door
lightly to close it.
Related information
•
Refueling (p. 450)
Refueling
The fuel tank is equipped with a fuel filling sys-
tem without a cover.
Refueling the vehicle at a service
station
Refueling is done as follows.
1. Turn off the engine and open the fuel filler
door.
2. Select a fuel approved for use in the vehicle.
For more information on approved fuels, see
the section on “Fuel”.
3. Insert the pump's nozzle into the fuel filler
pipe's opening. There are two flaps just
inside the fuel filler pipe and the pump's noz-
zle must push both of these flaps open
before fuel can be added.
8
Only locking and unlocking using the remote key, Passive Entry or Volvo On Call will affect the status of the fuel filler door.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
451
4. Avoid overfilling the tank. Do not press the
handle on the filler nozzle again after it has
initially stopped pumping.
> The fuel tank is now filled.
NOTE
An over-full tank may overflow in hot weather.
CAUTION
Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In
addition to causing damage to the environ-
ment, gasolines containing alcohol can cause
damage to painted surfaces, which may not
be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Refueling from a fuel container
When filling from a fuel container, use the funnel
provided in a foam block under the floor hatch in
the cargo compartment.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Insert the funnel into the fuel filler pipe's
opening. There are two flaps just inside the
fuel filler pipe and the tube section of the
funnel must push both of these flaps open
before fuel can be added.
WARNING
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To mini-
mize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do
not idle the engine except as necessary, serv-
ice your vehicle in a well ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more infor-
mation go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/
passenger-vehicle.
Related information
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 450)
•
Fuel (p. 451)
Fuel
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gaso-
line to control engine deposits.
Deposit control gasoline (gasoline with
detergent additives)
Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping injec-
tors and intake valves clean. Consistent use of
deposit control gasolines will help ensure good
driveability and fuel economy. If you are not sure
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
additives, check with the service station operator.
NOTE
Volvo recommends not using external fuel
injector cleaning systems, e.g. do not add
detergent additives to gasoline before or after
refueling.
Unleaded fuel
All Volvo vehicles have a three-way catalytic con-
verter and must only use unleaded gasoline. US
and Canadian regulations require that pumps
delivering unleaded gasoline are labeled
"UNLEADED". Only the nozzles of these pumps
will fit in your vehicle's fuel filler inlet. It is unlaw-
ful to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle labeled
"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline dam-
ages the three-way catalytic converter and the
heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated use of
leaded gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
452
the emission control system and could result in
loss of emission warranty coverage. State and
local vehicle inspection programs will make
detection of misfueling easier, possibly resulting
in emission test failure for misfueled vehicles.
NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an
octane enhancing additive called methyl-
cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission
Control System performance may be affected,
and the Check Engine Light (malfunction
indicator light) located on your instrument
panel may light. If this occurs, please return
your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for service.
Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,
"Oxygenated fuels"
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws require
that the service pump be marked indicating use
of alcohols or ethers. However, there are areas in
which the pumps are unmarked. If you are not
sure whether there is alcohol or ethers in the
gasoline you buy, check with the service station
operator. To meet seasonal air quality standards,
some areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Volvo permits the use of the following "oxygen-
ated" fuels. However, the specified octane ratings
must still be met.
Alcohol - Ethanol
Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume
may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as
Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Ethers - MTBE/ETBE: Fuels containing up to
22% MTBE/ETBE by volume may be used.
Methanol
Do not use gasolines containing methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can
result in vehicle performance deterioration and
can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such
damage may not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Related information
•
Octane rating (p. 452)
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 450)
•
Refueling (p. 450)
•
Emission controls (p. 454)
Octane rating
Volvo requires premium fuel (91 octane
9
or
higher) for all T5, T6 and T8 engines, and rec-
ommends AKI 93 for optimal performance and
fuel economy. See decal examples in illustra-
tions 1 and 2.
9
AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
453
Minimum octane
Decals
Illustration 1: Sample fuel pump octane label
9
.
Illustration 2: Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap on
vehicles that require premium fuel
10
.
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Volvo endorses the use of "TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline" where available to help maintain
engine performance and reliability. TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline meets a new standard jointly
established by leading automotive manufactures
to meet the needs of today's advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers (stations) will, in
most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
the "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" standards.
NOTE
Information about TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line is available at www.toptiergas.com.
NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or
changing gasoline brands, it may be neces-
sary to fill the tank more than once before a
difference in engine operation is noticeable.
Fuel Formulations
Do not use gasoline that contains lead or manga-
nese as a knock inhibitor, and do not use lead
additives. Besides damaging the exhaust emis-
sion control systems on your vehicle, lead has
been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area
where you must fill your own gas tank, take pre-
cautions. These may include:
•
standing upwind away from the filler nozzle
while refueling
•
refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth of
the filler neck during refueling
•
wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.
Use of Additives
With the exception of gas line antifreeze during
winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or
other store-bought additives to your vehicle's
fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may
damage your engine, and some of these additives
contain organically volatile chemicals. Do not
needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals.
WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched on
while refueling your vehicle. If the phone rings,
this may cause a spark that could ignite gaso-
line fumes, resulting in fire and injury.
9
AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2
10
For supplementary information - see the car's Service and Warranty Booklet.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
454
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,
and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust
gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside
the vehicle, make sure the passenger com-
partment is ventilated, and immediately return
the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for correction.
Demanding driving
In demanding driving conditions, such as when
towing a trailer or driving in hot weather or for
prolonged periods at high altitudes, it may be a
good idea to switch to a higher-octane fuel (AKI
9
91 or higher) or to switch to another brand of
gasoline in order to fully utilize the vehicle's
engine capacity and optimize traction.
Related information
•
Fuel (p. 451)
•
Emission controls (p. 454)
Emission controls
Three-way catalytic converter
•
Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving the
electrical, fuel or distributor ignition systems,
may cause unusually high three-way catalytic
converter temperatures. Do not continue to
operate your vehicle if you detect engine
misfire, noticeable loss of power or other
unusual operating conditions, such as engine
overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned
engine will help avoid malfunctions that
could damage the three-way catalytic con-
verter.
•
Do not park your vehicle over combustible
materials, such as grass or leaves, which can
come into contact with the hot exhaust sys-
tem and cause such materials to ignite under
certain wind and weather conditions.
•
Excessive starter cranking (in excess of one
minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded
engine can cause three-way catalytic con-
verter or exhaust system overheating.
•
Remember that tampering or unauthorized
modifications to the engine, the Engine Con-
trol Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and
can cause three-way catalytic converter or
exhaust system overheating. This includes:
altering fuel injection settings or compo-
nents, altering emission system components
or location or removing components, and/or
repeated use of leaded fuel.
NOTE
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.
Heated oxygen sensors
The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen
content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed
into a control module that continuously monitors
engine functions and controls fuel injection. The
ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously
adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce
harmful emissions.
Related information
•
Octane rating (p. 452)
•
Fuel (p. 451)
9
AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2
STARTING AND DRIVING
455
Overheating of engine and
transmission
In demanding driving conditions, such as driving
in mountainous areas or hot weather, there is a
risk of the engine or transmission overheating,
especially when carrying heavy loads.
•
Engine power may be temporarily limited.
•
Remove any auxiliary lights mounted in front
of the grille when driving in hot weather.
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system becomes too high, a warning symbol
will appear in the instrument panel along with
the message
Engine temperature High
temperature Stop safely. Pull over to a
safe location and let the engine idle for a few
minutes to cool down.
•
If the message
Engine temperature High
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant Level low, turn off engine is dis-
played, stop the vehicle and turn off the
engine.
•
If the transmission begins to overheat, an
alternative gear shifting program will be
selected. An integrated protective function
will also be activated, the warning symbol will
illuminate and the message
Transmission
warm
Reduce speed to lower
temperature or Transmission hot Stop
safely, wait for cooling will be displayed in
the instrument panel. Follow the recommen-
dations given by reducing speed or stopping
the vehicle safely and letting the engine idle
for a few minutes to let the transmission
cool.
•
If the vehicle begins to overheat, the air con-
ditioning may be temporarily switched off.
•
After a prolonged period of driving in
demanding conditions, do not turn off the
engine immediately after stopping.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a short time after the engine is
switched off.
Symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Meaning
High engine temperature. Follow
the recommendations provided.
Low coolant level. Follow the rec-
ommendations provided.
Transmission hot/overheated/cool-
ing. Follow the recommendations
provided.
Related information
•
Refilling coolant (p. 603)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 460)
•
Preparing for a long trip (p. 448)
STARTING AND DRIVING
456
Battery drain
The electrical functions in the vehicle drain the
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using ignition
mode II when the engine is switched off. Use
ignition mode I instead, as this uses less electri-
cal current.
Note that certain accessories may also drain
power from the electrical system. Do not use
functions that use a lot of electrical current when
the engine is turned off. Examples of such func-
tions are:
•
blower
•
headlights
•
windshield wipers
•
audio system (especially at high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low, a message is
shown in the driver display. The vehicle's energy-
saving function will then turn off or reduce certain
functions, such as the blower and/or the audio
system.
–
Charge the battery by starting the engine
and let it run for at least 15 minutes (driving
charges the battery faster than letting the
engine idle).
Related information
•
Start battery (p. 612)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
Jump starting using another battery
If the start battery is discharged, current from
another battery can be used to start the vehicle.
Jumper cable connecting points.
To avoid short circuits or other damage, the fol-
lowing steps are recommended when jump star-
ting the battery using another battery:
1.
Put the ignition in mode 0.
2. Make sure the auxiliary battery (the battery
used to jump start the discharged battery)
has a voltage of 12 volts.
3. If the auxiliary battery is in another vehicle,
turn off that vehicle's engine and make sure
that the vehicles are not touching each other.
4. Clamp the red jumper cable onto the auxiliary
battery's positive (+) terminal (1).
CAUTION
Connect the jump cable carefully to prevent
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Fold back the cover over your vehicle's posi-
tive (+) jump start terminal (2).
6. Clamp the other end of the red jumper cable
to your vehicle's positive (+) jump start termi-
nal (2).
7. Clamp the black jumper cable onto the auxili-
ary battery's negative (-) terminal (3).
8. Clamp the other end of the black jumper
cable to your vehicle's negative (-) ground
point (4).
9. Make sure the jumper cables are securely
attached to help prevent sparks while jump
starting.
10. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes at a higher idling
speed than normal, about 1500 rpm.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
457
11. Start the engine of the vehicle with the dead
battery.
CAUTION
Do not touch the connections between the
cable and the vehicle during the start attempt.
Risk of sparking.
12. Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order ‒ first the black cables and then the
red cables.
Make sure that none of the clamps of the
black jumper cables come into contact with
either vehicle's positive (+) jump start termi-
nals or either of the red jumper cable's con-
nected clamps.
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds, chemicals known
to the state of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after han-
dling.
WARNING
•
Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.
•
Do not connect the jumper cable to any
part of the fuel system or to any moving
parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.
•
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin,
fabrics or painted surfaces.
•
If contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark. Do not smoke near the
battery. Failure to follow the instructions
for jump starting can lead to injury.
Related information
•
Starting the vehicle (p. 414)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 201)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 417)
Retractable towbar*
The Volvo retractable towbar is specially
designed for the vehicle.
Overview
Weight decal
Ball cover
Safety wire attachment bracket
Trailer wiring socket
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
458
Folding out the towbar
1. Open the tailgate. There is a button for oper-
ating the towbar on the right rear side of the
cargo compartment. The indicator light in the
button must glow steadily orange for the
folding function to be active.
2. Press and release the button. Pressing too
long on the button may prevent the towbar
from folding out.
> The towbar will fold out partially and
become visible under the bumper. The
indicator light will flash orange.
NOTE
The towbar must complete the fold-out
sequence before it can be moved to the fixed
position. This sequence may take a few sec-
onds. If the towbar cannot be locked in the
fixed position, wait for a few seconds and try
again.
WARNING
Avoid standing close to the center of the rear
bumper while the towbar is folding out.
3. Pull up the towbar until it locks in the fixed
position. The indicator light in the button will
glow steadily orange. Remove the cover from
the towbar ball.
> The towbar is now ready for use.
WARNING
•
Be sure the towbar is securely locked in
position before attaching anything to it.
•
Always attach the trailer's safety wire
securely to the towbar's safety wire
attachment bracket.
STARTING AND DRIVING
459
NOTE
An energy-saving mode activates after a short
time and the indicator light will go out. Reacti-
vate the folding towbar function by closing
and then reopening the tailgate.
If the vehicle's electrical system has detected
an attached trailer, the indicator light will no
longer glow steadily.
Retracting the towbar
CAUTION
Be sure that no trailer wiring connector or
adapter is connected to the towbar's electri-
cal socket before retracting it.
1. Open the tailgate. Press the button for fold-
ing the towbar in and out on the right rear
side of the cargo compartment and release.
Pressing too long on the button may prevent
the towbar from folding in.
> The towbar will automatically fold down to
the unlocked position. The indicator light
in the button will flash orange.
WARNING
Never press the operating button if anything
is attached to the towbar.
2. Fix the towbar in the retracted position by
pushing it up under the bumper, where it will
lock in place.
> The indicator light in the button will glow
steadily orange if the towbar is correctly
locked in the retracted position.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 460)
•
Towing capacity and tongue weight (p. 654)
STARTING AND DRIVING
460
Driving with a trailer
There are a number of things to consider when
towing a trailer, such as the towbar, the trailer
and how the load is distributed in the trailer.
Load-carrying capacity is determined by the vehi-
cle's curb weight. The total weight of all passen-
gers and any installed accessories, e.g. towbar,
reduces the vehicle's load-carrying capacity by
the corresponding amount.
•
Towbars used on the vehicle must be
approved for the applicable use.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towbar complies with the
specified maximum towball weight. The
tongue weight is calculated as part of the
vehicle's payload.
•
Increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load.
•
The engine is subjected to more load than
usual when towing a trailer.
•
Towing a trailer affects the vehicle's han-
dling, durability and driving economy.
•
Do not drive with a heavy trailer when the
vehicle is very new. Wait until the mileage
has reached at least 1000 km (620 miles).
•
On long and steep downgrades, the vehicle's
brakes are subjected to much more load
than usual. When manually shifting, down-
shift and adapt speed accordingly.
•
Follow applicable regulations regarding per-
mitted speed and weight.
•
Drive slowly when towing a trailer up a long
and steep incline.
•
The maximum trailer weights given only apply
to altitudes up to 1000 meters (3280 feet)
above sea level. At higher altitudes, engine
power (and thus the vehicle's climbing ability)
is decreased due to the reduced air density,
and the maximum trailer weight must there-
fore be reduced. The weight of the vehicle
and trailer must be decreased by 10% for
each additional 1000 m (3280 feet) or part
thereof.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
than 12%.
•
Avoid overloading and other incorrect use.
•
The trailer's brakes must be balanced with
the vehicle's brakes to help ensure safe
stops (follow applicable local regulations).
CAUTION
•
Bumper-attached trailer hitches must not
be used on Volvos, nor should safety
chains be attached to the bumper.
•
Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
rear axle must not be used.
•
Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake
system directly to the vehicle brake sys-
tem, nor a trailer's lighting system directly
to the vehicle lighting system. Consult
your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for
correct installation.
•
When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety
chains or wire must be correctly fastened
to the attachment points provided in the
trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety
chain or wire must never be fastened to
or wound around the towing ball.
NOTE
The optional detachable trailer hitch may not
be available in all markets or on all models.
Consult your Volvo retailer.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer,
driving at high altitudes and fuel quality are
factors that significantly increase a vehicle's
fuel consumption.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
461
Trailer weights
WARNING
Please adhere to the recommendations provi-
ded for trailer weight. If the recommendations
are not followed, the vehicle and trailer may
be difficult to control during evasive maneu-
vers and braking.
NOTE
The specified maximum trailer weights are
those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
regulations may set additional restrictions on
trailer weight and speed. The trailer hitches
may be certified for higher towing weights
than the vehicle is permitted to tow.
Self-leveling suspension*
The vehicle's self-leveling system attempts to
keep the vehicle at a constant level, regardless of
load (up to the maximum permitted weight).
When the vehicle is stationary, the rear end of the
vehicle will be slightly lowered, which is normal.
Driving in hilly terrain or hot weather
In certain conditions, there is a risk of overheat-
ing when driving with a trailer. If overheating of
the engine and drive system is detected, a warn-
ing symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel
along with a message.
The automatic transmission selects the optimal
gear for the current load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic transmission into a
higher gear than what the engine can handle ‒ it
is not always preferable to drive in high gears at
low rpm.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3.
Put the gear selector in P.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Put chocks behind the wheels when the vehicle
is parked on a hill with a trailer attached.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2.
Put the gear selector in D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal and start driving.
Related information
•
Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 461)
•
Checking trailer lights (p. 462)
•
Towing capacity and tongue weight (p. 654)
•
Overheating of engine and transmission
(p. 455)
Trailer Stability Assist*
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA
11
) is a function
designed to help stabilize a vehicle that is tow-
ing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have
begun to sway. The function is part of the Elec-
tronic Stability Control system ESC
12
.
Reasons for swaying
A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for
various reasons. Normally this only occurs at high
speeds. However, if the trailer is overloaded or
unevenly distributed, e.g. too far back, there is a
risk of swaying even at low speeds.
Swaying may be caused by factors such as:
•
The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden,
strong crosswind.
•
The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an
uneven road or over a bump.
•
Sudden movements of the steering wheel.
Once swaying has begun, it can be difficult or
impossible to stop it. This makes the vehicle and
trailer difficult to control and there is a risk of
swerving into oncoming traffic or driving off the
road.
Trailer Stability Assist function
Trailer Stability Assist continuously monitors the
vehicle's movements, particularly lateral move-
ments. If swaying is detected, the brakes are
11
Trailer Stability Assist
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
462
applied individually on the front wheels, which has
a stabilizing effect on the vehicle and trailer. This
is often enough to enable the driver to regain
control of the vehicle.
If the Trailer Stability Assist function's first
attempt is not adequate to stop the swaying
motion, the brakes are applied on all wheels and
engine power is temporarily reduced. As the
swaying motion begins to decrease and the vehi-
cle and trailer have once again become stable,
TSA stops regulating the brakes/engine power
and the driver regains control of the vehicle.
NOTE
Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if the
driver selects the sport mode by deactivating
ESC in the center display's menu system.
Trailer Stability Assist may not intervene if the
driver tries to compensate for the swaying motion
by moving the steering wheel rapidly, because
the system will then not be able to determine if it
is the trailer or the driver causing the swaying.
When Trailer Stability Assist is
activated, the ESC symbol is
displayed in the instrument
panel.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 460)
•
Electronic Stability Control (p. 277)
Checking trailer lights
When connecting a trailer, make sure that all of
the lights on the trailer are functioning before
starting to drive.
Trailer turn signals and brake lights
If one or more of the turn signals or brake lights
on the trailer is not working, a symbol and mes-
sage will be displayed in the instrument panel.
The other lights on the trailer must be checked
manually by the driver before the vehicle is driven.
Symbol Message
•
Trailer turn indicator Right
turn indicator malfunction
•
Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
•
Trailer brake light Malfunc-
tion
If any of the trailer's turn signal lights is not work-
ing, the turn signal symbol in the instrument
panel will also flash more quickly than normal.
Trailer rear fog light
When a trailer is connected, the vehicle's rear fog
light may not illuminate and rear fog light func-
tionality is instead transferred to the trailer. If this
12
Electronic Stability Control
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
463
is the case, check to see if the trailer is equipped
with a rear fog light before activating the vehicle's
fog lights when driving with a trailer to help
ensure safe operation.
Checking trailer lights*
Automatic check
When the trailer has been connected to the vehi-
cle's electrical system, its lights can be checked
by automatically activating them. This function
helps the driver check that the trailer's lights are
functioning correctly before starting to drive.
In order to perform this check, the engine must
be turned off.
1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar,
the message
Automatic Trailer Lamp
Check will appear in the instrument panel.
2. Acknowledge the message by pressing the
O button on the right-side steering wheel
keypad.
> The light check will begin.
3. Get out of the vehicle to perform the check.
> All of the lights on the trailer will begin
flashing, and then illuminate separately
one at a time.
4. Visually check that all of the trailer's lights
are functioning correctly.
5. After a short time, all of the trailer's lights will
start flashing again.
> The light check is completed.
Disabling the automatic check
The automatic light check can be disabled in the
center display.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Deselect
Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.
Manual check
If the automatic check has been disabled, the
check can be started manually.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Select
Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
> The light check will begin. Get out of the
vehicle to perform the check.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 460)
Towing using a towline
This section refers to one vehicle being towed
behind another using a towline.
Before towing another vehicle, check applicable
speed limit regulations.
Preparations and towing
CAUTION
Note that the vehicle must always be towed
with the wheels rolling forward.
•
Do not tow a vehicle with automatic
transmission at a speed greater than
80 km/h (50 mph) or for a distance
greater than 80 km (50 miles).
WARNING
•
Ignition mode II must be active – all air-
bags are deactivated in ignition mode I.
•
Always have the remote key in the vehicle
when it is towed.
WARNING
The brake and steering servos do not work
when the engine is off – it takes
about 5 times more pressure on the brake
pedal and steering requires much more effort
than normal.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
464
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
2. Attach the towline to the towing eyelet.
3.
Put the vehicle in ignition mode II – without
pressing the brake pedal, turn the start knob
clockwise and hold it there for about
4 seconds. Release the knob, which will
automatically return to its original position.
4. Move the gear selector to neutral and
release the parking brake.
If the battery charge level is too low, it may
not be possible to release the parking brake.
Connect an auxiliary battery to the vehicle if
the battery is discharged.
> The towing vehicle can now start driving.
5. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehi-
cle slows down by applying light pressure to
the brake pedal. This will help avoid jarring
movements.
6. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop the
vehicle.
Jump starting
Do not tow the vehicle to start the engine. Use an
auxiliary battery if the start battery's charge level
is so low that the engine cannot be started.
CAUTION
Attempting to tow with the engine running
could result in damage to the three-way cata-
lytic converter.
Related information
•
Attaching and removing the towing eyelet
(p. 464)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 163)
•
Recovery (p. 466)
•
Jump starting using another battery (p. 456)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 417)
Attaching and removing the towing
eyelet
Use the towing eyelet when towing. Screw the
towing eyelet securely into place in the threaded
outlet behind the cover on the right-hand side of
the front and rear bumpers.
NOTE
If the vehicle is equipped with a towbar, there
is no rear attachment for the towing eye.
Attaching the towing eyelet
Take out the towing eyelet, which is stored in
a foam block under the floor in the cargo
compartment.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
465
Front: Remove the cover by pressing on the
mark with a finger.
> The cover turns along its center line and
can then be removed.
Rear: Remove the cover - press the marker
with your finger while prying open the oppo-
site side/corner open with a coin or similar.
> The cover turns along its center line and
can then be removed.
4. Screw in the towing eyelet until it reaches its
stop.
Fasten the eyelet securing by, for example,
inserting a lug wrench* through it and using
this as a lever.
CAUTION
It is important that the towing eye is screwed
in securely as far as possible.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
466
To consider before using the towing eyelet
•
In certain conditions, the towing eyelet may
be used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed tow
truck. The vehicle's position and ground
clearance determines if this is possible.
•
If the incline of the tow truck is too steep or
if the ground clearance under the vehicle is
insufficient, attempting to pull it up using the
towing eyelet may result in damage.
•
If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow
truck's lifting device instead of using the
towing eyelet.
WARNING
No person or object should be behind the tow
truck when the vehicle is lifted onto the bed
of the truck.
CAUTION
The towing eyelet is only intended for towing
on roads, and must not be used to pull vehi-
cles from ditches or any similar purpose
involving severe strain. Call a tow truck for
professional assistance.
Removing the towing eyelet
–
Unscrew the towing eyelet after use and
return it to its storage location in the foam
block.
Replace the cover on the bumper.
Related information
•
Towing using a towline (p. 463)
•
Recovery (p. 466)
•
Tool kit (p. 552)
Recovery
This section refers to transporting the vehicle
with a tow truck or similar vehicle.
Call a professional towing service for assistance.
In certain conditions, the towing eyelet can be
used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck.
For vehicles equipped with leveling control*:
If the vehicle is equipped with pneumatic suspen-
sion, this feature must be turned off before the
vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck. Turning off the
function in the center display.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
.
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
The vehicle's location and ground clearance
determine if it can be lifted onto a tow truck. If
the incline of the tow truck is too steep or if the
ground clearance under the vehicle is insufficient,
attempting to pull it up may result in damage. In
this case, the vehicle should only be lifted with
the tow truck's lifting equipment.
WARNING
No person or object should be behind the tow
truck when the vehicle is lifted onto the bed
of the truck.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
467
CAUTION
The towing eyelet is only intended for towing
on roads, and must not be used to pull vehi-
cles from ditches or any similar purpose
involving severe strain. Call a tow truck for
professional assistance.
CAUTION
Note that the vehicle must always be towed
with the wheels rolling forward.
Related information
•
Attaching and removing the towing eyelet
(p. 464)
HomeLink
®
*
13
HomeLink
®14
is a programmable remote control,
integrated in the vehicle electrical system, that
can control up to three different devices (e.g.
garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor and
indoor lighting) and thereby replace the remote
controls for these.
General
The illustration is generic – the design may vary.
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Indicator light
HomeLink
®
is delivered integrated in the rearview
mirror. The HomeLink
®
panel consists of three
programmable buttons and an indicator light in
the mirror.
For more information about HomeLink
®
, please
visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or call 1-800-355-3515.
Save the original remote controls for future pro-
gramming (e.g. for use in another vehicle). It is
also advisable to delete the button programming
if the vehicle is sold.
Related information
•
Using HomeLink
®
* (p. 469)
•
Programming HomeLink
®
* (p. 468)
•
Type approval for HomeLink
®
* (p. 470)
13
Certain markets only.
14
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
468
Programming HomeLink
®
*
15
Follow these instructions to program
HomeLink
®
, reset all programming, or program
individual buttons.
NOTE
In some vehicles, the ignition must be on or in
the "accessory position" before HomeLink
®
can be programmed or used. It can be a good
idea to put new batteries in the remote con-
trol being replaced by HomeLink
®
for faster
programming and better radio signal trans-
mission. The HomeLink
®
buttons should be
reset before programming.
WARNING
While HomeLink
®
is being programmed, the
garage door or gate being programmed may
be activated. Make sure that no one is near
the door or gate during programming. When
programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside of the garage.
1.
Point the remote control at the HomeLink
®
button to be programmed and hold it about
2-8 cm (1-3 inches) from the button. Do not
obstruct the HomeLink
®
indicator light.
Note: Some remote controls are more effec-
tive at programming HomeLink
®
from a dis-
tance of about 15-20 cm (6-12 inches). Try
moving the remote control closer or further
away if you are experiencing any difficulties
programming.
2. Press and hold both the remote control but-
ton and the HomeLink
®
button to be pro-
grammed.
3. Do not release the buttons until the indicator
light has stopped flashing slowly (about once
a second) and either flashes quickly (about
10 times a second) or glows steadily.
>
Steady glow: Indication that program-
ming is complete. Press the programmed
button twice to activate.
Flashing quickly: The device being pro-
grammed with HomeLink
®
may have a
security function that requires an extra
step. Try pressing the programmed button
twice to see whether the programming
works. Otherwise, continue with the fol-
lowing steps.
4. Locate the "training" button
16
on the
receiver for the e.g. garage door opener. It is
usually located near the antenna bracket on
the receiver.
5. Press and release the "training" button once.
Programming must be completed within 30
seconds after pressing the button.
6.
Press and release the HomeLink
®
button to
be programmed. Repeat the press/hold/
release sequence a second time. For some
receivers, the sequence may need to be
repeated a third time.
> Programming is now completed and the
garage door, gate, etc. should now be
activated when the programmed button is
pressed.
If you experience any difficulties programming,
please contact HomeLink
®
at:
15
Certain markets only.
16
The name and color of the button varies depending on the manufacturer.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
469
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or call 1-800-355-3515.
Programming individual buttons
To program an individual HomeLink
®
button:
1. Press and hold the desired button for about
20 seconds.
2.
When the indicator light on HomeLink
®
starts flashing slowly, it is possible to pro-
gram as usual.
Note: If the button you are reprogramming
does not program with a new device, it will
return to the previously saved programming.
Resetting the HomeLink
®
buttons
It is only possible to reset all HomeLink
®
buttons
at once. It is not possible to reset individual but-
tons. Individual buttons can only be reprogram-
med.
–
Press and hold the outer buttons (1 and 3)
on HomeLink
®
for about 10 seconds.
> When the indicator light goes from a
steady glow to flashing, the buttons have
been reset and are ready for reprogram-
ming.
Related information
•
Using HomeLink
®
* (p. 469)
•
HomeLink
®
* (p. 467)
•
Type approval for HomeLink
®
* (p. 470)
Using HomeLink
®
*
17
Once HomeLink
®
is programmed, it can be
used instead of the separate remote controls.
Press and hold the programming button. The
garage door, gate, alarm system, etc. will be acti-
vated (this may take several seconds). If the but-
ton is held down for more than 20 seconds,
reprogramming will begin. The indicator light will
glow steadily or flash when the button has been
pressed. The original remote controls may be
used concurrently with HomeLink
®
if desired.
NOTE
If the ignition is off, HomeLink
®
works for
30 minutes after the driver's door has been
opened.
WARNING
•
If you use HomeLink
®
to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near the
gate or door while it is in motion.
•
Do not use HomeLink
®
with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by US fed-
eral safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For
more information, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
Related information
•
HomeLink
®
* (p. 467)
•
Programming HomeLink
®
* (p. 468)
•
Type approval for HomeLink
®
* (p. 470)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
470
Type approval for HomeLink
®
*
18
FCC (USA) and IC (Canada)
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and
Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This
device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING
The transmitter has been tested and complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the device.
19
Type approval for EU
Gentex Corporation hereby declares that
HomeLink
®
Model UAHL5 complies with the
Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.
Wavelengths within which the radio equipment
operates:
•
433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.
•
868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.
•
868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.
•
869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.
•
869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation,
600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464,
USA
For more information, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
HomeLink
®
* (p. 467)
Compass*
An integrated compass in the upper right corner
of the rearview mirror shows the direction the
vehicle is traveling.
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different compass directions are shown
with the abbreviations:
N (north), NE (northeast),
E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (south-
west), W (west) and NW (northwest).
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 471)
•
Calibrating the compass* (p. 471)
17
Certain markets only.
18
Certain markets only.
19
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
471
Activating and deactivating the
compass*
An integrated compass in the upper right corner
of the rearview mirror shows the direction the
vehicle is traveling.
Activating and deactivating the
compass
The compass is automatically activated when the
vehicle is started.
To deactivate/activate the compass manually:
–
Use a paper clip or similar object to press the
button on the bottom of the mirror.
Related information
•
Compass* (p. 470)
•
Calibrating the compass* (p. 471)
Calibrating the compass*
The globe is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass should be calibrated if the vehicle
is driven from one zone to another.
To calibrate the compass:
1. Stop the vehicle in a large, open area away
from steel constructions and high-voltage
power lines.
2. Start the engine and switch off all electrical
equipment (climate system, wipers, etc.) and
make sure all doors are closed.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not even be initiated if
electrical equipment is not turned off.
3. Hold the button on the bottom of the rear-
view mirror pressed for about 3 seconds
(using e.g. a paper clip). The number of the
current magnetic zone is shown.
15
14
13
12
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button on the underside of the
mirror repeatedly until the desired magnetic
zone (
1–15) appears (see the map of mag-
netic zones).
5.
Wait until the display again shows
C, or
press and hold the button on the underside
of the rearview mirror for approx. 6 seconds
until C is displayed.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display. This indicates
that calibration is complete. Drive in a circle
two more times to fine-tune the calibration.
7.
Vehicles with heated windshields*: If
C is
shown in the display when the windshield
heating function is activated, perform step 6
above with the heating function on.
8. Repeat the above procedure as needed.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
474
Audio, media and Internet
The audio and media system consists of a media
player and a radio. A cellular phone can also be
connected through Bluetooth to use hands-free
functions or play music in the vehicle. When the
vehicle is connected to the Internet, it is also
possible to use apps to play media.
Audio and media overview
The functions can be controlled using voice com-
mands, the steering wheel keypad or the center
display. The number of speakers and amplifiers
varies depending on the audio system installed in
the vehicle.
System updates
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. When the vehicle has an Internet con-
nection, system updates can be downloaded for
optimal functionality; see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 496)
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Apps (p. 476)
•
Voice control (p. 147)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Driver distraction (p. 39)
•
Handling system updates via Download Cen-
ter (p. 591)
•
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 527)
Sound settings
The sound system is precalibrated for optimal
sound reproduction, but these settings can be
personalized.
The system's volume is normally adjusted using
the volume control below the center display or
the right-side steering wheel keypad. This
applies, for example, when playing music or the
radio or during phone calls and active traffic mes-
sages.
Optimal sound reproduction
The audio system is precalibrated for optimal
sound reproduction using digital signal process-
ing. This calibration takes into account speakers,
amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, lis-
tener position, etc. for each combination of vehi-
cle model and audio system. There is also a
dynamic calibration that takes into account the
volume control setting and the vehicle's speed.
Personal settings
Different settings are available in Top view under
Settings Sound depending on the vehicle's
sound system.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
475
Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins)
•
Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
•
Balance - balance between right/left and
front/rear speakers.
•
System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
High Performance Pro* (Harman
Kardon)
•
Equalizer - setting of equalizer.
•
Balance - balance between right/left and
front/rear speakers.
•
System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
High Performance
•
Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
•
Balance - balance between right/left and
front/rear speakers.
•
System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
Related information
•
Sound experience* (p. 475)
•
Media player (p. 496)
•
Voice control settings (p. 150)
•
Phone settings (p. 518)
•
Audio, media and Internet (p. 474)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
Sound experience*
Sound experience is an app that provides
access to additional sound settings.
Open Sound Experience from the center dis-
play's App view. Depending on the sound system
installed in the vehicle, the following settings are
possible:
Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins)
•
Studio - the sound can be optimized for
Driver, All and Rear.
•
Individual stage - surround sound mode
with settings for intensity and enclosure.
•
Concert hall - reproduces the acoustics of
Gothenburg's Concert Hall
Recreate the acoustics from the Gothenburg Concert
Hall.
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
476
High Performance Pro* (Harman
Kardon)
•
Seat Optimization - the sound can be opti-
mized for Driver, All and Rear.
•
Surround - surround sound mode with level
settings.
•
Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
Related information
•
Sound settings (p. 474)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
Apps
The App view contains applications (apps) that
provide access to certain vehicle services.
Swipe the center display screen from right to
left
1
to access the App view from the Home view.
This view displays downloaded apps (third-party
apps) as well as apps for integrated functions,
such as
FM radio.
App view. (generic illustration; basic apps vary depend-
ing on market and model)
Several basic apps are always available. More
apps such as web radio and music services can
be downloaded when the car is connected to the
Internet.
Some apps can only be used when the vehicle is
connected to the Internet.
1
Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
477
Start an app by pressing the app in the center
display's app view.
Related information
•
Download apps (p. 477)
•
Updating apps (p. 478)
•
Deleting apps (p. 478)
•
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 505)
•
Android Auto* (p. 508)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Hard disk storage space (p. 526)
•
Terms of use and data sharing (p. 526)
Download apps
New apps can be downloaded when the vehicle
is connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data downloading can affect other services
such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the
affect on other services is experienced as
problematic, the download can be interrupted.
Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch
off or cancel other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay extra
attention to the data traffic costs.
1.
Open the
Download Center app in App
view.
2.
Select
New apps to open a list of apps that
are available but are not installed in the vehi-
cle.
3. Tap on the row for an app in order to expand
in the list and get more information about the
app.
4.
Select
Install to start the download and
installation of the app.
> The current status of the download and
installation will be shown.
If a download cannot be started immedi-
ately, a message will be displayed. The
app will remain in the list and it will be
possible to reattempt downloading.
Canceling a download
–
Tap Abort to cancel a download in progress.
Note that only a download can be cancelled. An
installation cannot be cancelled once it has
begun.
Related information
•
Apps (p. 476)
•
Updating apps (p. 478)
•
Deleting apps (p. 478)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Handling system updates via Download Cen-
ter (p. 591)
•
Hard disk storage space (p. 526)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
478
Updating apps
Apps can be updated when the vehicle is con-
nected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data downloading can affect other services
such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the
affect on other services is experienced as
problematic, the download can be interrupted.
Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch
off or cancel other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay extra
attention to the data traffic costs.
If an app is being used while an update is in pro-
gress, it will be restarted to complete the update.
Update all
1.
Open the
Download Center app in App
view.
2.
Select
Install all.
> The update will begin.
Update certain apps
1.
Open the
Download Center app in App
view.
2.
Select
Application updates to open a list
of all available updates.
3.
Find the desired app and select
Install.
> The update will begin.
Related information
•
Apps (p. 476)
•
Download apps (p. 477)
•
Deleting apps (p. 478)
•
Handling system updates via Download Cen-
ter (p. 591)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
Deleting apps
When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, it
is possible to uninstall apps.
If the app is being used, it must be closed before
it can be uninstalled.
1.
Open the
Download Center app in App
view.
2.
Select
Application updates to open a list
of all installed apps.
3.
Find the desired app and select
Uninstall to
begin uninstalling the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it will
be removed from the list.
Related information
•
Apps (p. 476)
•
Download apps (p. 477)
•
Updating apps (p. 478)
•
Handling system updates via Download Cen-
ter (p. 591)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
479
Radio
The radio can receive broadcasting from AM
and FM wavebands with HD Radio™
Technology and SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio *.
When the vehicle has an Internet connection, it
is also possible to listen to web radio.
The radio can be controlled
using voice commands, the
right-side steering wheel key-
pad or the center display.
Related information
•
Starting the radio (p. 479)
•
Changing waveband and radio station
(p. 480)
•
Storing radio favorites (p. 481)
•
Radio settings (p. 482)
•
RBDS (p. 483)
•
HD Radio™ (p. 483)
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 486)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
•
Media player (p. 496)
Starting the radio
The radio is started from the center display's
App view.
1.
Open the desired waveband (e.g.
FM) from
App view.
2. Select a radio station.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
Searching for a radio station (p. 481)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
480
•
Changing waveband and radio station
(p. 480)
•
Storing radio favorites (p. 481)
•
Radio settings (p. 482)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
Changing waveband and radio
station
Instructions for changing wavebands, waveband
lists and radio stations in the selected list are
provided here.
Changing wavebands
Swipe from App view on the center display and
select the desired waveband (e.g.
FM) or open
the App menu in the instrument panel with the
right-side steering wheel keypad and make your
selection there.
Changing a list in a waveband
1.
Tap
Library.
2.
Select playback from
Stations, Favorites or
Genres.
3. Tap the desired station in the list.
Favorites – only plays selected favorite channels.
Genres - only plays channels broadcasting the
selected genre or program type, e.g. pop, classi-
cal, etc.
Changing radio stations in a selected
list
–
Press or under the center display
or on the right-side steering wheel keypad.
> Move step-by-step through the selected
list.
It is also possible to change radio station in the
selected list via the center display.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
Searching for a radio station (p. 481)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
•
Storing radio favorites (p. 481)
•
Radio settings (p. 482)
•
App menu in instrument panel (p. 104)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
481
Searching for a radio station
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
radio stations that are sending out the strongest
signals in the vehicle's current location.
Searching is performed in different ways depend-
ing on the waveband selected:
•
AM - stations and frequency.
•
FM, stations, genres and frequency.
1.
Tap
Library.
2.
Tap .
> Search view will displayed and the key-
board will open.
3. Enter a search word/phrase.
> The search will start and change as char-
acters are entered. Search results will be
displayed by category.
Searching for a station manually
Searching manually makes it possible to find and
tune to stations that are not on the automatically
compiled list of the strongest stations in the area.
–
Tap Manual tuning, drag the control or tap
or . Press and hold to skip to the
next available station in the frequency band.
You can also use the right-side steering
wheel keypad.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
Starting the radio (p. 479)
•
Changing waveband and radio station
(p. 480)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
•
Radio settings (p. 482)
Storing radio favorites
It is possible to add a radio a radio station in the
Radio favorites app and in the list of favorites
for the waveband (e.g. FM). Instructions for add-
ing and removing favorites are provided below.
Radio favorites
Radio favorites shows saved
favorites from all wavebands.
1.
Open the
Radio favorites app from App
view.
2. Tap the desired station in the list to listen.
Adding and deleting radio favorites
–
Tap to add/remove a radio channel from
the waveband's list of favorites or Radio
favorites.
If a favorite station is deleted here, it will also be
deleted from that waveband's list of favorites.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
Starting the radio (p. 479)
•
Searching for a radio station (p. 481)
•
Changing waveband and radio station
(p. 480)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
482
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
•
Radio settings (p. 482)
•
App menu in instrument panel (p. 104)
Radio settings
There are a number of different radio functions
that can be activated and deactivated.
Canceling a traffic message
A current broadcast (e.g. a traffic message) can
be temporarily interrupted by pressing
in the
right-side steering wheel keypad or tapping
Cancel in the center display.
Activating and deactivating radio
functions
Pull down Top view and select Settings
Media and the desired waveband to see available
functions.
AM/FM Radio
•
HD Radio AM: HD Radio
™
Technology:
makes it possible for AM audio to achieve an
audio quality comparable to analog FM.
•
HD Radio FM: HD Radio™ Technology:
makes it possible to achieve a sound quality
comparable with a CD.
•
Show Broadcast Information: shows
information on program content, artists, etc.
•
Freeze Program Name: select to stop the
program service name from scrolling continu-
ously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds.
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
Pull down Top view and select Settings
Media SiriusXM to show a list of available
options.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
Settings for SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
(p. 489)
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 126)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
483
RBDS
RBDS radio
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) enables
certain functionality
2
, such as:
•
Searches for program types or new broad-
casts
•
Text information about currently broadcast
programs
Related information
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
Radio settings (p. 482)
HD Radio™
HD Radio is a brand name registered by the DTS,
Inc.
3
. They are the developer of a broadcasting
technology called IBOC or In Band On Channel,
which refers to the method of transmitting a digi-
tal radio broadcast signal centered on the same
frequency as the AM or FM station's present fre-
quency.
Introduction
Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broad-
cast (generic illustration)
NOTE
HD Radio volume may fade in and out at
times due to coverage limitations.
The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"
since it is both analog and digital. During hybrid
operation, receivers still continue to receive the
analog (non-digital) signal. HD Radio receivers
incorporate both modes of reception, where the
receiver will automatically switch to the analog
signal if the digital signal cannot be decoded or
is lost by the receiver.
When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, the
symbol will appear in the infotainment sys-
tem display. The symbol will be displayed in dif-
ferent colors:
•
Grayed-out symbol: No HD Radio broad-
cast reception
•
White symbol: the radio is actively receiving
an HD broadcast
•
Orange symbol: the radio is receiving an
HD broadcast with digital sound
More information about HD Radio and IBOC can
be found on DTS, Inc.'s website, www.dts.com.
Artist Experience™
A radio station's logo and album art can be dis-
played. If a station opts to provide this informa-
tion, it is broadcast once every 12 minutes, which
means that there may be a delay before the
logo/album art appear on the screen. The radio
can store 100 station logos so the next time the
radio is tuned to the same station, the logo will
2
Certain stations only.
3
HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under license from DTS' U.S. and foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS.
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
484
be displayed immediately. Album art is synched
with the artist that you are currently listening to.
Ball game mode
This feature means that a main FM station (HD1)
will broadcast live events, where the content of
the programming is more important than sound
quality, in analog mode only to help prevent the
delay between analog and digital broadcasting.
The HD Radio symbol will be white during live
broadcasts and "Live" will be displayed next to
the symbol.
Benefits of digital broadcasting
•
Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality
and AM as analog FM).
•
Some FM frequencies offer a greater num-
ber of listening choices through "multicast-
ing" (consisting of a frequency's main chan-
nel and any sub-channels that may also be
available on that particular frequency.)
•
When receiving a digital signal there is no
multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/crack-
ling due to outside influences.
How HD Radio ™ Technology
broadcasting works
HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio
and broadcasts of this type are available in many
areas of the United States. However, there are a
few key differences:
•
Instead of transmitting one analog signal,
stations send out a bundled signal - both
analog and digital.
•
An HD Radio receiver can receive both digi-
tal and analog broadcasts. Depending on the
terrain and location of the vehicle (which will
influence the signal strength), the receiver
will determine which signal to receive.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
Activating and deactivating the HD Radio
™
(p. 484)
•
HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 485)
•
HD Radio™ limitations (p. 486)
•
Changing waveband and radio station
(p. 480)
•
Searching for a radio station (p. 481)
Activating and deactivating the HD
Radio™
HD Radio is deactivated when the car leaves the
factory.
When listening to an HD Radio station and driv-
ing through areas with weak HD signals (fringe
areas), you may experience that the radio repeat-
edly switches between analog/digital and digital/
analog reception. If this happens, it may be desir-
able to switch HD off.
Carry out the following to activate or deactivate
HD Radio:
1. Drag down the top view and tap on
Settings.
2.
Press
Media and AM/FM Radio.
3.
Press
HD Radio AM or HD Radio FM to
activate/deactivate the function.
If HD radio is deactivated, the radio will be unable
to receive digital broadcasts but it will continue to
function as a conventional radio (analog AM/FM
receiver). Please note that when HD is switched
off, it will not be possible to tune in to sub-chan-
nels.
Note that if you activate or deactivate HD Radio
only the selected wavelength band is affected.
Related information
•
HD Radio™ (p. 483)
•
HD Radio
™
sub-channels (p. 485)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
485
•
HD Radio™ limitations (p. 486)
•
Opening contextual setting in the center dis-
play (p. 135)
HD Radio™ sub-channels
In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM
wavebands only) will also have sub-channels
offering additional types of programming or
music.
Sub-channels
Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels
If any sub-channels are available, they will listed
below the main channel on the screen. In this
example, WILD-FM HD2 is a sub-channel.
Selecting sub-channels
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), tap the
station on the screen or press the forward/back
arrow keys on the right-side steering wheel key-
pad or below the screen.
Sub-channels can also be saved as radio favor-
ites.
If you tap a sub-channel favorite, it may take up
to 6 seconds before the channel becomes audi-
ble. If you tap a station while you are out of digital
range of the transmitter,
No reception will be
displayed.
Related information
•
HD Radio™ (p. 483)
•
Activating and deactivating the HD Radio™
(p. 484)
•
Changing waveband and radio station
(p. 480)
•
Searching for a radio station (p. 481)
•
HD Radio
™
limitations (p. 486)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
486
HD Radio™ limitations
Limitations
•
Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM only):
The main channel is the only channel that
can receive in hybrid mode (both digital and
analog). If a frequency has sub-channels,
they are broadcast in digital mode only. The
main FM channel will be displayed as, for
example, "WRIF-FM HD1". The sub-FM
channels will be displayed as"WRIF-FM
HD2", "WRIF-FM HD3", etc.
•
Reception coverage area: Due to current
IBOC transmitter power limitations, the
reception coverage area in digital mode is
somewhat more limited than the station's
analog coverage area. Be aware that, like all
radio transmission technology, terrain, time of
day, vegetation and buildings can have a
positive or negative effect on radio reception.
•
Analog to digital/digital to analog blend-
ing: Analog to digital blending will occur as
the signal strength reaches a preset thresh-
old in the receiver. This will be noticeable in
fringe areas (areas with weak reception) and
is normal.
NOTE
There may be a noticeable difference in
sound quality when a change from analogue
to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such
as:
•
Volume increase or decrease
•
Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/
Treble cut or boost
•
Time alignment (Digital program material
in extreme cases can be as much as 8
seconds behind the analogue). This will
noticeable as a "stuttering" effect.
The above items are dependant on the
broadcaster's equipment settings and do
not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio
receiver or antenna systems.
Related information
•
HD Radio™ (p. 483)
•
Activating and deactivating the HD Radio™
(p. 484)
•
HD Radio
™
sub-channels (p. 485)
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
The SiriusXM
®
Satellite system broadcasts from
of a number of high elevation satellites in geo-
synchronous orbit.
Listening to satellite radio
The digital signals from the satellites are line-of-
sight, which means that physical obstructions
such as bridges, tunnels, etc, may temporarily
interfere with signal reception.
Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects
transported on roof racks or in a ski box, or other
antennas that may impede signals from the
SiriusXM
®
satellites.
Selecting SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio
mode
1. From the center display's Home view, swipe
from right to left to come to App view.
2.
Tap the SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio icon.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
487
Home view with SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio activated
If there is no subscription activated, tap channel
1, where you will be prompted on the screen to
phone SiriusXM
®
.
If a cell phone is paired and connected to the
vehicle, you can also subscribe by:
1. From Home view, pull down the Settings
menu.
2.
Open the settings menu for SiriusXM
®
Satel-
lite radio.
3.
Tap
Unsubscribed Services
4.
To call SiriusXM
®
, enter the phone number.
They will activate the subscription of your
choice. This may take several minutes.
When the subscription has been activated, tap
the SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio icon to start the
function and display the channel list included in
your subscription.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
Using SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 487)
•
Settings for SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
(p. 489)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* (p. 490)
Using SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio offers several features
for finding and listening to music, news, sporting
events, etc. being broadcast on satellite radio
stations.
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio functions
With SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio activated, tap
Library to display a screen offering the following
functions:
•
Search (the magnifying glass icon)
•
Channels
•
Favorites
•
Categories
If you have used this view previously, you will be
returned to the most recently used one.
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
488
Search
Tap the magnifying glass to display a screen
where you can enter text using the center dis-
play's keyboard or by writing in the free-text field
to search for e.g., a station number, an artist,
song title, etc.
Channels
Tap to display a complete list of the channels
included in your subscription. Tap a channel
name to listen. If a subscription to a channel has
expired, its name will be grayed-out on the
screen.
For quick access to a channel that you often lis-
ten to, tap the star to the right of the channel's
name. It will then be added to your list of favor-
ites.
Favorites
Tap to display the channels that you have added
to this list. Tap a channel name to listen.
Categories/Genres
Tap to display the categories available. Tap a cat-
egory or genre name to display the channels that
it contains and then tap a channel to listen.
If you have activated alerts (see the “Alerts” sec-
tion below) and an alert is activated for an artist,
song or team, temporary virtual categories will
also be created and displayed. The channels cur-
rently broadcasting the song, artist or broadcast-
ing a program with the selected team will be lis-
ted in a virtual category.
EPG (Electronic Program Guide)
On the center display's Home view, tap EPG for
information about e.g., when a program is being
broadcast and its name, description, artist, etc. If
no information is currently available, No
information will be displayed.
Alerts
If this feature has been selected under SiriusXM
Settings, the Alerts button will be displayed on
the Home view.
To add e.g. an artist's name, song title or a sports
team to the list of alerts:
1. Tune to a channel that is broadcasting a
song, game, etc., of your choice.
2.
Tap the
Alerts button.
3. A pop-up window will be displayed showing a
list of alerts (nothing will be displayed if the
selected channel does not support the alert
function).
4. Select one of the alternatives in list (only one
can be selected at a time).
5. The song/artist/team will now be added to
the list of alerts. Favorite sports teams can
also be added to the list using “Game Alert”
in the SiriusXM satellite radio settings.
> When your choice is being broadcast on a
channel, you will be informed by a pop-up.
iTunes tagging
From the center display's Top view, tap SiriusXM
Settings. Tap the iTunes Tagging menu. Tap
the iTunes Tagging box to activate/deactivate
this function and tap Close to return to Home
view. Tap Tags List to display a list of all tagged
songs.
If the function is activated, the
iTunes tag button
will be displayed in Home view. If a song is played
that you would like to buy in the iTunes store, tap
this button while the song is playing to tag it. If a
song with iTunes Tagging information is availa-
ble, the button will be selectable. Tap the button
to tag the song. If you would like to buy a tagged
song via iTunes, Tap the iTunes tag button.
To buy a song in iTunes, begin by connecting an
iPhone/iPod/iPad to the USB port in the tunnel
console. The iTunes tagging list will automatically
be transferred to the device and removed from
the list in the vehicle. If the device is connected
when a song is tagged, the data will automatically
be saved in the device. To purchase the song,
consult the iTunes support page.
Related information
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 486)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 131)
•
Settings for SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
(p. 489)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
489
•
Settings for SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio*
(p. 489)
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 503)
Settings for SiriusXM
®
Satellite
radio*
There are numerous settings that can be made
to enhance your SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio listen-
ing experience.
Settings
Drag down the top view and tap on Settings
Media SiriusXM. The following alternatives
will be displayed:
Traffic Jump
Tap to display a list of cities from which you can
choose to get traffic/weather information (or
Traffic jump off to deactivate the feature). Tap
to select a city (JUMP will be displayed on the
Home screen next to Library). Tap Back to
return to the list of settings or Close to return to
the Home screen.
From the Home screen, tap
JUMP to activate the
function. When traffic/weather information is
available from the selected city, the radio will
automatically tune to the channel providing the
information. When the information/announce-
ment is finished, the radio will automatically
return to the channel that you were previously lis-
tening to.
During an announcement, tap
JUMP to interrupt
the message and return to the station that you
were currently listening to.
Alert Notifications
Tap the box to activate/deactivate. When acti-
vated, you will be notified if a song, artist, etc. that
you have selected is playing. You will be asked if
you want to listen.
Alert Notifications Sound
Opt to receive an audible alert when one of your
selected choices is being played.
Sort Channels
Select how to sort your channels list.
iTunes Tagging
Tap to display a menu with the options: iTunes
Tagging and Tags List. With this feature acti-
vated, songs can be tagged for later purchase
from the iTunes store.
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
490
Game Alerts
Tap to display a list of sports.
Tap a sport to display a list of teams and tap a
box on the right side of the screen to select a
team as a favorite. An alert will then be provided
when information about the team is being broad-
cast.
Tap Confirm below the list to return to the list of
sports.
Tap
Back to return to the list of settings or
Close to return to the main screen.
Unsubscribed Services
If you have a SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio subscrip-
tion, any channels not included in the subscrip-
tion will be listed here. Call SiriusXM™ to sub-
scribe. The phone number will be shown on the
screen. If a cell phone is paired and connected to
the vehicle, tap the phone number to make the
call.
Skipped Stations
Tap to display a list of channels that you would
like to skip (hide). Hide channels from the chan-
nel list by tapping the boxes to the right of the
screen. Skipped (hidden) channels will not be
shown in the channel list. However, a channel
previously selected as a favorite will still be dis-
played in the list of favorites, even it has been
added to the skip list.
Skipped Categories
Tap to display a list of categories. Tap a category
to skip (hide) it. It will not be displayed in the list
of categories.
Related information
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 486)
•
Using SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 487)
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
*
SiriusXM Travel Link is a feature offered by
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* that can provide infor-
mation about e.g., weather forecasts, weather
alerts, service stations, sports, etc. in the vicinity
of the vehicle.
Starting SiriusXM Travel Link
NOTE
SiriusXM Travel Link services are only availa-
ble in vehicles equipped with the Sensus
Navigation system.
From the center display's App view, tap Travel
Link to activate the feature. A disclaimer text will
be displayed. Tap OK to display a list of SiriusXM
Travel Link services:
•
Alerts
•
Fuel
•
Sports
•
Weather
•
Favorites
In order to use one or more of these services, the
user has to subscribe to the ones desired.
To subscribe to a SiriusXM Travel Link service:
1. Open the center display's Top view.
2.
Tap
Settings.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
491
3.
Press
SiriusXM Travel Link and
Subscription Status.
> To subscribe, call the phone number listed
on the screen.
Any services not subscribed will be grayed out
and contain the text
Service not subscribed.
When the services have been activated (subscri-
bed), tap the one of your choice to start it.
The following applies for all of the
SiriusXM
Travel Link services:
•
Pressing the
Back button will take you back
to the previous screen
•
Pressing the
Close button will take you to
the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen.
NOTE
If the Close button is used to return to the
SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, the fol-
lowing applies (the Weather service is used
here as an example):
•
If you have already used the
Weather
function, tapping Weather again in the
SiriusXM Travel Link home screen
before using any other SiriusXM
Travel Link service will return you to the
point where you left the Weather service.
•
If another
SiriusXM Travel Link service
is used (e.g., Fuel, Sports, etc.) before
you return to the Weather service, you
will be returned to the default Weather
view (in this case, Local).
The same principle applies to all of the
SiriusXM Travel Link services.
Favorites
Many SiriusXM Travel Link selections can be
saved for easy access as favorites by tapping the
"star" icon next to the selection where applicable.
To display a list of your favorites, tap the
Favorites application in the SiriusXM Travel Link
home screen.
Related information
•
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio* (p. 486)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Fuel (p. 494)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Sports (p. 495)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Weather (p. 492)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Notifications
(p. 493)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
492
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
*
- Weather
This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides
weather-related information near the vehicle, at a
local ski resort, etc.
From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, to
display weather-related information:
–
Tap the Weather button to display this
screen.
At the top of the screen, the following categories
will be displayed:
•
Search (the magnifying glass icon)
•
Local
•
Ski condition
•
Areas
•
Favorites
Tap the category of your choice.
Search
Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function is
supported in the current context, a keyboard will
appear on the screen. Enter the text of your
choice and tap
Search for detailed information
from the SiriusXM Travel Link database.
Local
4
Information from the closest weather station will
be displayed and the following alternatives are
available:
•
Map view
•
Today
•
5 days
Map view
Tap the map to display it in full-screen mode. Tap
Back to return to the original map view.
Tap Map options to display the following alter-
natives.
•
Weather radar
•
Storm attributes
•
Surface features
•
Tropical storm tracks
•
Winds
Tap the relevant box to the right of the option to
select/deselect it. Tap
Done to confirm and
return to the previous screen or Cancel.
Today
Tap to see the current temperature, or the tem-
perature in 3/6 hours.
Tap
Back to return to the Local screen or Close
to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link home
screen.
5 days
Tap to see weather information for the coming 5
days.
Tap Back to return to the Local screen or Close
to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link home
screen.
Ski condition
Tap to display a list of ski areas in the vicinity of
the vehicle. Tap a name in the list for information
such as if the ski area is open/closed, tempera-
ture, wind conditions, snow conditions, the num-
ber of lifts that are in operation, etc.
•
Weather locations
•
Ski location
Tap Map view to display a map and a weather
legend.
Tap
Map options to display the following alter-
natives.
•
Weather radar
•
Storm attributes
•
Surface features
•
Tropical storm tracks
•
Winds
Tap the relevant box to the right of the option to
select/deselect it. Tap
Done to confirm and
return to the previous screen or Cancel.
4
This is the weather default unless another alternative has been selected.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
493
Areas
Tap Areas to display a list of areas/locations in
states from the SiriusXM Travel Link database.
Scroll to a state and tap to display:
•
Weather locations: tap arrow to the right to
display a list of towns. Scroll to desired town
and tap for detailed weather information. You
can choose Map view, today, 5 days or Favor-
ites (star)
•
Ski locations: tap arrow at right to display
local ski areas. Tap an area for detailed info.
For information about storing a location, state,
town, etc. as a favorite, see the heading "Favor-
ites" in the article "SiriusXM Travel Link."
Related information
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* (p. 490)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Fuel (p. 494)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Sports (p. 495)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Notifications
(p. 493)
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
*
-
Notifications
This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides notifi-
cations of potential weather problems or other
emergency situations in the vicinity of the vehi-
cle.
From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, to
show notifications:
–
Tap the Alerts button to display this screen.
•
If any notifications are currently available, a
message will appear at the top of the screen.
They can also be listed from the
Settings
menu in the center display's Top view.
•
If no notifications are available,
No active
alerts will be displayed.
Types of notifications
To select the types of notifications to be dis-
played:
1.
From the
Alerts screen, tap the Select
alerts button at the bottom of the screen.
2. This displays the types of notifications that
can be displayed. Tap the box to the right of
each type of notification to select/deselect it.
3.
Tap
Done when you have made your selec-
tions. You will return to the
Alerts screen.
Information about a notification
If any notifications have been displayed on the
screen, tap one for more detailed information (i.e.,
the location of the weather problem on a map
and a description of the situation).
If a phone number is available in a notification, a
Call button will be displayed. Tap this button for
additional information.
Related information
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* (p. 490)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Fuel (p. 494)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Sports (p. 495)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Weather (p. 492)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
494
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
*
- Fuel
5
This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides infor-
mation and guidance to service stations near the
vehicle providing the type of fuel that you prefer/
require for your vehicle.
From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, to
show fuel information:
–
Tap the Fuel button to display the main fuel
screen.
The following categories are shown:
•
Search (the magnifying glass icon)
•
Nearby
•
Recommended
•
Favorites
•
Brands
Tap one of the alternatives to display its screen.
NOTE
In each of the categories listed, tapping the
Select fuel type button near the bottom of
the screen opens a sub-view where you can
specify the type of fuel preferred/required
(Regular, Midrange, Premium, Diesel,
Electric 120V, etc.) Tap Done to return to
the previous screen.
Search
Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function is
supported in the current context, a keyboard will
appear on the screen. Enter the text of your
choice and tap
Search for detailed information if
available.
Nearby
Tap for a list of service stations in the vicinity of
the vehicle, with the nearest station at the top of
the list.
The following information will be provided where
available:
•
For vehicles using gasoline, the price infor-
mation for regular gasoline (unless another
grade/type of fuel has been selected in
Select fuel type)
•
For electric vehicles/hybrids, information
about charging stations, showing the total
number of charging ports and the number of
ports currently not in use
•
the distance to the station
•
a star icon to set the service station as a
favorite
Tap the name of a service station to display more
detailed information.
For guidance to the service station, tap the
Start
navigation or Add as waypoint buttons. See
the Sensus Navigation* supplement for additional
information about using the navigation system.
Recommended
Tap for a list of service stations near the vehicle,
displayed according to the price of regular gaso-
line (unless another grade/type of fuel has been
selected in
Select fuel type) or of stations
offering the greatest number of available charg-
ing ports for electric vehicles/hybrids. The station
offering the lowest price/most available charging
ports will be displayed at the top of the list. Tap
the name of a service station to display more
detailed information.
Favorites
Tap for a list of service stations that have been
stored as favorites. Tap the name of a service
station to display more detailed information.
In addition to the Select fuel type button at the
bottom of the screen, tap the Edit button to
delete individual stations from the list or tap
Delete to clear the list. Tap Done to return to
the previous screen.
Brands
1.
Tap
Brands to display a list of service sta-
tion brands in the area.
5
This service is not available in Canada.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
495
2. Tap a brand to display a list of service sta-
tions affiliated with that brand (BP, Exxon,
etc.).
3. Tap the name of a service station to display
more detailed information.
In addition to the
Select fuel type button at the
bottom of the screen, tap the Sort button to
arrange the list according to Nearest or
Cheapest/Recommended. Tap Done to
return to the previous screen.
Related information
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* (p. 490)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Notifications
(p. 493)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Sports (p. 495)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Weather (p. 492)
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
*
- Sports
This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides infor-
mation about sporting events, tournaments,
teams, leagues, etc.
From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, to
display sports information:
–
Tap the Sports button to display the main
sports screen.
A number of sports categories will be listed
(Football, Baseball, Basketball, etc.)
Tap a sport to select a league in that sport (NFL,
MLB, etc.) or a sport organization (PGA, LPGA,
etc.).
The following is an example of the result of
tapping Baseball:
1. MLB (Major League Baseball) will be dis-
played.
2. Tap MLB to display the two leagues in Major
League Baseball (American League or
National League).
3. Tap one of the league names to display the
divisions in the league.
4. Tap one of the divisions to display:
•
In progress: play-by-play information
about a match/game/tournament cur-
rently in progress. Continue tapping to
display. In the detailed view, you can also
select a radio station that is currently
broadcasting an ongoing sporting event
•
Headlines for MLB: Tap to display brief
headline information
•
Scheduled: schedules for coming
matches, games, etc.
•
Scores: match/game results
The same principle applies to all sports.
Related information
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* (p. 490)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Notifications
(p. 493)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Fuel (p. 494)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Weather (p. 492)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
496
Media player
The media player can play audio from the CD
player* and from external audio sources con-
nected via USB port or Bluetooth. It can also
play video format via the USB port.
When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, it
is also possible to listen to web radio, audio
books and to access music services via apps.
The media player is controlled
from the center display. Several
functions can also be con-
trolled using voice commands
or the right-side steering wheel
keypad.
The radio, which is also handled by the media
player, is described in a separate section.
Related information
•
Playing media (p. 496)
•
Controlling and changing media (p. 498)
•
Media searches (p. 499)
•
Apps (p. 476)
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
CD player* (p. 500)
•
Video (p. 500)
•
Streaming media via Bluetooth
®
(p. 502)
•
Playing media via the USB port (p. 502)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
Playing media
The media player is controlled from the center
display. Several other functions can also be con-
trolled using the right-side steering wheel key-
pad or by using voice commands.
The radio can also be controlled in the media
player. See the section describing the radio.
Starting a media source
App view. (Generic illustration; basic apps vary depend-
ing on market and model).
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
497
CD*
1. Insert a CD.
2.
Open the
CD app from App view.
3. Select the track you would like to play.
> Playback will begin.
USB flash drive
1. Inset a USB flash drive.
2.
Open the
USB app from App view.
3. Select the track you would like to play.
> Playback will begin.
MP3 player and iPod
®
NOTE
To start playback from an iPod, the iPod app
must be used (not USB).
When an iPod is used as source, the car's
audio and media system has a menu struc-
ture similar to the iPod player's own menu
structure.
1. Connect a media source.
2. Start playback in the connected media
source.
3.
Open the app (
iPod, USB) from App view.
> Playback will begin.
Bluetooth-connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Connect a media source.
3. Start playback in the connected media
source.
4.
Open the
Bluetooth app from App view.
> Playback will begin.
Media with Internet connection
Medial playback from apps with Internet connec-
tion:
1. Connect the vehicle to the Internet.
2. Open the app from the App view.
> Playback will begin.
Read the separate section on how to download
apps.
Video
1. Connect a media source.
2.
Open the
USB app from App view.
3. Tap the title you would like to play.
> Playback will begin.
Apple CarPlay
CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Android Auto
Android Auto is described in a separate section.
Related information
•
Handling the App menu in the instrument
panel (p. 105)
•
Radio (p. 479)
•
Controlling and changing media (p. 498)
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 503)
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
(p. 502)
•
Download apps (p. 477)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Video (p. 500)
•
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 505)
•
Android Auto* (p. 508)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
•
Compatible file formats for media (p. 504)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
498
Controlling and changing media
Media playback can be controlled using voice
commands, the steering wheel keypad or the
center display.
The media player can be con-
trolled using voice commands,
the right-side steering wheel
keypad or the center display.
Volume - turn the knob under the center display
or tap
on the right-side steering wheel
keypad to raise or lower the volume.
Play/pause - tap the image for the track you
would like to play, or press the button below the
center display or
on the right-side steering
wheel keypad.
Changing track/song - tap the desired track in
the center display, or press
or below
the center display or on the right-side steering
wheel keypad.
Rewinding/fast-forwarding - tap the time axis in
the center display and drag it sideways, or press
and hold
or below the center display or
on the right-side steering wheel keypad.
Changing media source - select from among pre-
vious sources in the app, tap the desired app in
App view or use the right-side steering wheel
keypad to select the app in the app menu
.
Library - tap the button to play
from the library.
Shuffle - tap the button to play
tracks in a random order.
Similar - tap the button to use
Gracenote to search for similar
music on the USB device and
create a playlist from the music
found. The playlist can contain
up to 50 tracks.
Change device - tap the but-
ton to toggle between USB
devices when more than one is
connected.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 496)
•
Media searches (p. 499)
•
Sound settings (p. 474)
•
Apps (p. 476)
•
Gracenote
®
(p. 499)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
499
Media searches
Searches can be performed to locate a specific
artist, composer, song title, album, video, audio
book or playlist. If the vehicle is connected to the
Internet, it is also possible to search for pod-
casts (online digital media).
1.
Tap .
> Search view will displayed and the key-
board will open.
2. Enter a search word/phrase.
3.
Tap
Search.
> A search will be performed on connected
devices and the results will be displayed
by category.
Swipe the screen horizontally to display each cat-
egory separately.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 496)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Playing media (p. 496)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 131)
Gracenote
®
Gracenote identifies artists, albums, tracks and
any associated images that can be displayed
during playback.
Gracenote MusicID
®
is a standard for music rec-
ognition.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap
Media Gracenote®.
3. Choose settings for Gracenote data:
•
Gracenote
®
Online Search - search
Gracenote's online database for currently
playing media.
•
Gracenote® Multiple Results - select how
Gracenote data should be displayed if there
are multiple search results.
1 - the file's original data will be used.
2 - Gracenote data will be used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
•
None - no result will be displayed.
Updating Gracenote
The contents of the Gracenote database are con-
tinuously updated. For optimal functionality,
update to the latest version. See
support.volvocars.com for information and down-
loads.
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
500
Related information
•
Playing media (p. 496)
•
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 527)
CD player*
The media player can play CDs with compatible
audio files.
Disc slot.
Eject button.
Related information
•
Playing media (p. 496)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 150)
•
Compatible file formats for media (p. 504)
Video
The media player can play videos from USB-
connected devices.
Video is not available when the vehicle is moving;
only audio will be played. Video will resume when
the vehicle is stationary.
Information on compatible media formats is provi-
ded in a separate section.
Related information
•
Playing video (p. 501)
•
Playing DivX
®
(p. 501)
•
Video settings (p. 501)
•
Compatible file formats for media (p. 504)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
501
Playing video
The
USB app in App view is used to play videos.
1. Connecting media source (USB device).
2.
Open the
USB app from App view.
3. Tap the title you would like to play.
> Playback will begin.
Related information
•
Video (p. 500)
•
Playing DivX
®
(p. 501)
•
Video settings (p. 501)
•
Compatible file formats for media (p. 504)
Playing DivX
®
The DivX Certified
®
device must be registered to
play purchased DivX video-on-demand (VOD)
movies.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap
Video DivX® VOD to get a registra-
tion code.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and
to complete the registration process.
Related information
•
Video (p. 500)
•
Playing video (p. 501)
•
Video settings (p. 501)
•
Compatible file formats for media (p. 504)
Video settings
Some video playback settings can be adjusted,
e.g. language.
The following can be adjusted by opening Top
view and tapping
Settings Video or with the
video player in full-screen mode:
Audio
Language, Off and Subtitle Language.
Related information
•
Video (p. 500)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
502
Streaming media via Bluetooth
®
The vehicle's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth and can play audio files from
Bluetooth-enabled external devices such as cel-
lular phones and tablets.
In order for the media player to be able to wire-
lessly play audio files from an external device, the
device must be connected to the vehicle via
Bluetooth.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
(p. 502)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Playing media (p. 496)
•
Compatible file formats for media (p. 504)
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
Connect a Bluetooth
®
device to the vehicle to
wirelessly play media and give the vehicle an
Internet connection if it is available.
Many cellular phones on the market currently
offer wireless Bluetooth
®
technology, but not all
phones are fully compatible with the vehicle. For
additional information on compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
The procedure for connecting a media device is
the same as for connecting a cellular phone to
the vehicle via Bluetooth
®
.
Related information
•
Streaming media via Bluetooth
®
(p. 502)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Playing media (p. 496)
Playing media via the USB port
External audio sources, such as an iPod® or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio sys-
tem via the vehicle's USB port.
Devices with rechargeable batteries can be
charged when they are connected via the USB
port and the ignition is in mode I, II or the engine
is running.
The content on the external source can be read
faster if it only contains data of a compatible for-
mat. Video files can also be played via the USB
port.
Some MP3 players have their own file system
that the vehicle has support for.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 503)
•
Playing media (p. 496)
•
Video (p. 500)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 503)
•
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 505)
•
Android Auto* (p. 508)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
503
Connecting a device via the USB
port
External audio sources, such as an iPod
®
or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio sys-
tem via any of the vehicle's USB ports.
If the vehicle has two USB ports, the phone must
be connected to the port with the white frame to
use Apple CarPlay* or Android Auto*.
USB ports (type A) in the tunnel console. Route the
cable forward to help avoid pinching when the cover is
closed.
V90CC Volvo Ocean Race also has USB ports
(type A) for charging
6
on the rear of the tunnel
console and in the cargo area.
Related information
•
Playing media (p. 496)
•
Playing media via the USB port (p. 502)
•
Media player (p. 496)
•
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 503)
•
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 503)
•
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 505)
•
Android Auto* (p. 508)
Technical specifications for USB
devices
For the contents of USB devices to be read, the
following specifications must be met.
Any folder structures will not be shown in the
center display during playback.
Max. number
Files 15 000
Folders 1 000
Folder levels 8
Playlists 100
Tracks in a playlist 1 000
Subfolders No limit
Technical specifications for the USB-A
connector
•
Type A port
•
Version 2.0
•
Voltage 5 V
•
Max. current 2.1 A
Related information
•
Playing media via the USB port (p. 502)
6
It is not possible to playback media in the car's audio or media system via these ports. Charging may be restricted during certain use.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
504
Compatible file formats for media
In order to play media, the following file formats
must be used.
Audio files
For-
mat
File extension Codec
MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4
part III Audio),
HE-AAC (aacPlus
v1/v2)
WMA .wma WMA8/9,
WMA9/10 Pro
WAV .wav LPCM
FLAC .flac FLAC
Video files
Format File extension
MP4 .mp4, .m4v
MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
Format File extension
AVI .avi
AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx
ASF .asf, .wmv
MKV .mkv
Subtitles
Format File extension
SubViewer .sub
SubRip .srt
SSA .ssa
DivX
®
DivX-certified devices have been tested for high-
quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you
see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play
your favorite DivX videos.
Profile DivX Home Theater
Video codec DivX, MPEG-4
Resolution 720x576
Audio speed
(bit rate)
4.8Mbps
Frame rate 30 fps
File extension .divx, .avi
Max. file size 4 GB
Audio codec MP3, AC3
Subtitles XSUB
Special func-
tions
Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play
Reference Meets all requirements of
the DivX Home Theater
profile. Visit divx.com for
more information and soft-
ware tools to convert your
files into DivX Home
Theater video.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 496)
•
Video (p. 500)
•
Playing DivX
®
(p. 501)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
505
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
With CarPlay, you can listen to music, make
phone calls, get driving instructions, send/
receive messages and use Siri, all while remain-
ing focused on driving.
CarPlay works with select
Apple devices. If the car does
not already support CarPlay,
this can be retrofitted. Contact
a Volvo retailer to install
CarPlay.
Information about supported apps and compati-
ble phones is available on the Apple website:
www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Using apps that are
not compatible with CarPlay could cause the con-
nection between iPhone and the vehicle to be
lost. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for
the content of CarPlay.
When using map navigation via CarPlay, guidance
will only be shown on the center display and not
in the instrument panel or head-up display.
CarPlay apps can be controlled from the center
display, a phone or with the right-side steering
wheel keypad (for certain functions). The apps
can also be voice-controlled using Siri. Press and
hold the
button on the steering wheel to
start voice control with Siri. Press briefly to acti-
vate the vehicle's own voice control system. If Siri
cuts off too soon, press and hold the
7
but-
ton on the steering wheel.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to your
iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are
fully responsible for your and any others
person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Related information
•
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 505)
•
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 506)
•
Voice control (p. 147)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 136)
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
To use CarPlay, the Siri voice control must be
activated in your phone. The phone must also
have an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or a mobile
network.
Connecting an iPhone and starting
CarPlay
NOTE
CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is disa-
bled. A cell phone or media player connected
to the vehicle via Bluetooth will therefore not
be available when CarPlay is active. An alter-
native source must be used to provide an
Internet connection for the vehicle's apps.
Use Wi-Fi or the vehicle's integrated modem.
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. If there
are two USB ports, use the one with the
white frame.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap
OK.
3.
Tap
Apple CarPlay in App view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
Accept to connect.
> The CarPlay tile will open and compatible
apps will be displayed.
7
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
506
5. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start up.
Starting CarPlay
CarPlay can be started as follows after an iPhone
is connected.
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. If there
are two USB ports, use the one with the
white frame.
>
If the auto start setting is selected -
the name of the phone will be displayed.
2. Tap the name of the phone - the CarPlay tile
will open and compatible apps will be dis-
played.
3.
If the CarPlay tile does not open, tap
Apple
CarPlay in App view.
> The CarPlay tile will open and compatible
apps will be displayed.
4. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start up.
CarPlay will run in the background if another app
is started in the same tile. To display CarPlay in
the tile, tap the CarPlay icon in App view.
Switching connection between CarPlay
and iPod
CarPlay to iPod
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Proceed to
Communication Apple
CarPlay
.
3. Uncheck the box for the Apple device that
should no longer start CarPlay automatically
when the USB cable is connected.
4. Remove and then reinsert the Apple device
into the USB port.
5.
Open the
iPod app from App view.
iPod to CarPlay
1.
Tap
Apple CarPlay in App view.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap
OK.
3. Remove and then reinsert the Apple device
into the USB port.
> The Apple CarPlay tile will open and com-
patible apps will be displayed
8
.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 503)
•
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 505)
•
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 506)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 521)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 522)
•
Voice control (p. 147)
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
Settings for an Apple device connected through
CarPlay
9
.
Automatic start
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Communication Apple CarPlay and
select the desired setting:
•
Check the box - CarPlay will start auto-
matically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
•
Uncheck the box - CarPlay will not start
automatically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in
the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected, the oldest one will be deleted.
To delete the list, the settings must be rest in the
center display (factory reset).
System Volumes
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Sound System Volumes to change
the settings for the following:
•
Voice Control
•
Navi Voice Guidance
•
Phone Ringtone
8
Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
507
Related information
•
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 505)
•
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 505)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 136)
Tips for using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
Here are some useful tips for when you use
CarPlay
®
.
•
Update your iPhone with the latest version of
iOS operating system and ensure that the
apps have been updated.
•
In the event of a problem with CarPlay, dis-
connect the phone from the USB port and
reconnect. Otherwise, try to close the app on
the phone that is not working and then
restart the app, or try closing all apps and
restart your phone.
•
If the apps do not appear when CarPlay
starts (black screen), try minimizing and
expanding the tile for CarPlay.
•
Using apps that are not compatible with
CarPlay may sometimes mean that the con-
nection between the phone and the car is
broken. Information about supported apps
and compatible phone models can be found
on Apple's website. You can also search for
CarPlay in the App Store to find information
about apps that are compatible with CarPlay
in your market.
•
CarPlay only works with iPhone
10
.
NOTE
Availability and functionality can vary depend-
ing on market.
Related information
•
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 505)
9
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks of Apple Inc..
10
Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
508
Android Auto*
Android Auto lets you listen to music, make calls,
get driving directions and use apps customized
for your vehicle from an Android device.
Android Auto can be used with selected Android
devices.
For information on supported apps and compati-
ble devices, please go to www.android.com/
auto/. For third-party apps, see Google Play.
Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the
content of Android Auto.
Android Auto is started from App view. After
Android Auto has been initially started, the app
will start automatically the next time the device is
connected. The automatic start setting can be
deactivated in Settings.
NOTE
When a phone is connected to Android Auto,
it is possible to steam to another media player
via Bluetooth. Bluetooth is active while
Android Auto is in use.
When using navigation guidance provided by
Android Auto, navigation will only be shown on
the center display and not in the instrument
panel or head-up display.
Android Auto can be controlled from the center
display, with the right-side steering wheel keypad
or by using voice commands. Press and hold the
button to activate voice control and tap the
same button to deactivate.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for
Android Auto or its features or applications.
When you use Android Auto, your car
transfers certain information (including its
location) to your connected Android phone.
You are fully responsible for your and any
other person’s use of Android Auto.
Related information
•
Using Android Auto* (p. 508)
•
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 509)
Using Android Auto*
To use the
Android Auto app, the app must be
installed on the phone and the phone must be
connected to the vehicle's USB port.
Connecting an Android device for the first
time
1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port
with the white frame.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap
OK.
3.
Tap
Android Auto in App view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
Accept to connect.
> The Android Auto tile will open and com-
patible apps will be displayed.
5. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start up.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
509
From a previously connected Android device
1. Connect the device to the USB port.
>
If the auto start setting is selected -
the name of the phone will be displayed.
2. Tap the name of the phone - the
Android Auto tile will open and compatible
apps will be displayed.
3.
If the automatic start setting is not acti-
vated - open the
Android Auto app from
App view.
> The Android Auto tile will open and com-
patible apps will be displayed.
4. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start up.
Android Auto will run in the background if
another app is started in the same tile. To display
Android Auto in the tile, tap the Android Auto
icon in App view.
Related information
•
Android Auto* (p. 508)
•
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 509)
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 503)
•
Voice control (p. 147)
Settings for Android Auto*
Settings for phones initially connected with
Android Auto.
Automatic start
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Communication Android Auto and
select setting:
•
Check the box - Android Auto will start
automatically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
•
Uncheck the box - Android Auto will not
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored
in the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected, the oldest one will be deleted.
A factory reset must be performed to delete the
list.
System Volumes
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Sound System Volumes to change
the settings for the following:
•
Voice Control
•
Navi Voice Guidance
•
Phone Ringtone
Related information
•
Android Auto* (p. 508)
•
Using Android Auto* (p. 508)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 136)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
510
Tips for using Android Auto*
Here are some useful tips for when you use
Android Auto.
•
Ensure that your apps are updated.
•
When starting the car, wait until the center
display has started, connect the phone and
then open Android Auto from the app view.
•
In the event of problems with Android Auto,
disconnect your Android phone from the
USB port and then reconnect via USB. Oth-
erwise, try closing the app on the phone and
then restarting the app.
•
When a phone is connected to Android Auto
it is still possible to playback media via
Bluetooth to another media player. The
Bluetooth function is on when Android Auto
is used.
Related information
•
Android Auto* (p. 508)
Phone
A phone equipped with Bluetooth can be wire-
lessly connected to the vehicle's integrated
hands-free system.
The audio and media system offers hands-free
functionality for remotely controlling a number of
the phone's features. The phone's integrated
controls can also be used, even when it is con-
nected to the vehicle.
When the phone has been paired and connected
to the vehicle, it can be used as an Internet con-
nection or to make or receive calls, send or
receive text messages or wirelessly play music.
The phone is controlled from the center display,
and the App menu (accessed using the right-side
steering wheel keypad) and voice commands can
also be used to control certain functions.
Overview
Microphone.
Phone.
Phone handling in the center display.
Keypad for controlling phone functions
shown in the center display and voice com-
mands.
Instrument panel.
Related information
•
Handling phone calls (p. 515)
•
Managing the phone book (p. 517)
•
Handling text messages (p. 516)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
511
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 513)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 513)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 514)
•
Switch between phones connected via Blue-
tooth (p. 514)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devices
(p. 514)
•
Phone settings (p. 518)
•
Voice control (p. 147)
•
Handling the App menu in the instrument
panel (p. 105)
•
Sound settings (p. 474)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a
Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
Pair a Bluetooth-enabled phone to the vehicle to
make calls, send/receive text messages and
wirelessly play media from the vehicle, or con-
nect the vehicle to the Internet.
Two Bluetooth devices can be connected at the
same time, but in that case, only one will be used
for wireless playback. The most recently paired
phone will be automatically connected to make
calls, send/receive text messages, play media or
use as an Internet connection. It is possible to
change what the phone is used for under
Bluetooth Devices via the settings menu in the
center display's Top view.
After the device has been connected/registered
for the first time via Bluetooth, the device no
longer needs to be visible/searchable. It just
needs to have Bluetooth activated. A maximum of
20 paired Bluetooth devices can be stored in the
vehicle.
There are two ways to pair a phone to the vehicle.
Searching for the phone from the vehicle or
searching for the vehicle from the phone.
Option 1 - searching for the phone from
the vehicle
1. Make the phone discoverable/visible using
its Bluetooth function.
2. Open the phone tile in the center display.
•
If no phone has been paired to the vehi-
cle, tap
Add phone.
•
If a phone has been paired to the vehicle,
tap
Change . Tap Add phone in the
pop-up window.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices will be
displayed. The list will be updated as new
devices are discovered.
3. Tap the name of the phone you would like to
connect.
4. Make sure that the code displayed in the
vehicle matches the one in the phone. If it
does, confirm the code in both places.
5. In the phone, accept or cancel the options
for selecting the phone's contacts and text
messages.
NOTE
•
The message function must be activated
in certain phones.
•
Not all cell phones are fully compatible
and may not be able to display contacts
and messages in the vehicle.
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
512
Option 2 - searching for the vehicle
from the phone
1. Open the phone tile in the center display.
•
If no phone has been paired to the vehi-
cle, tap
Add phone Make vehicle
discoverable
.
•
If a phone has been paired to the vehicle,
tap
Change . Tap Add phone
Make vehicle discoverable in the pop-
up window.
2. Activate Bluetooth in the phone.
3. Search in the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices will be
displayed.
4. Select the vehicle's name from the list of
devices in the phone.
5. A pop-up window for the connection is
shown in the car. Confirm the connection.
6. Make sure that the code displayed in the
vehicle matches the one shown in the exter-
nal device. If it does, confirm the code in both
places.
7. In the phone, accept or cancel the options
for selecting the phone's contacts and text
messages.
NOTE
•
The message function must be activated
in certain phones.
•
Not all cell phones are fully compatible
and may not be able to display contacts
and messages in the vehicle.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is being
updated, it is possible that the connection will
be interrupted. Delete the phone from the car
and reconnect.
Compatible phones
Many cellular phones on the market currently
offer wireless Bluetooth technology, but not all
phones are fully compatible with the vehicle. For
additional information on compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 513)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 513)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 514)
•
Switch between phones connected via Blue-
tooth (p. 514)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devices
(p. 514)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 519)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a
Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
513
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
A phone can be automatically connected to the
vehicle via Bluetooth. The phone must have first
been paired with the vehicle.
Only the two most recently connected phones
can be connected automatically.
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before turn-
ing the vehicle's ignition to mode I.
2.
Turn the ignition to I or higher.
> The phone will be connected.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 513)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 514)
•
Switch between phones connected via Blue-
tooth (p. 514)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devices
(p. 514)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 519)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a
Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
A phone can be manually connected to the vehi-
cle via Bluetooth. The phone must have first
been paired with the vehicle.
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone.
2. Open the phone tile.
> A list of available phones will be displayed.
3. Tap the name of the phone you would like to
connect.
> The phone will be connected.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 513)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 514)
•
Switch between phones connected via Blue-
tooth (p. 514)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devices
(p. 514)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 519)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a
Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
514
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-
connected phone
Disconnect a Bluetooth-connected phone from
the vehicle by deactivating Bluetooth in the
phone.
When the phone is out of range of the vehicle, it
will be automatically disconnected. If a call is in
progress when the phone is disconnected from
the vehicle, the call will be transferred from the
vehicle's speakers and microphone to the cellular
phone.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Phone settings (p. 518)
•
Switch between phones connected via Blue-
tooth (p. 514)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devices
(p. 514)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 519)
Switch between phones connected
via Bluetooth
It is possible to switch between Bluetooth-con-
nected phones.
1. Open the phone tile.
2.
Tap
Change or pull down Top view and
tap
Settings Communication
Bluetooth Devices Add device.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices will be
displayed.
3. Tap the name of the phone you would like to
connect.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 519)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 514)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devices
(p. 514)
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected
devices
Phones or other devices in the list of registered
Bluetooth devices can be removed.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Communication Bluetooth
Devices
.
> A list of registered Bluetooth devices is
displayed.
3. Tap the name of the device you would like to
remove.
4.
Tap
Remove device and confirm.
> The device is no longer registered in the
vehicle.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 514)
•
Switch between phones connected via Blue-
tooth (p. 514)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 519)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
515
Handling phone calls
Handling phone calls in the vehicle for a
Bluetooth-connected cellular phone.
Generic illustration.
Making calls
1. Open the phone tile.
2. Initiate a call by selecting the phone number
from the recent calls list, entering the num-
ber on the keypad or selecting a number
from the phone book (list of contacts). You
can search or scroll to find a contact in the
phone book. Tap
in the phone book to
add a contact to
Favorites.
3.
Tap
to make a call.
4.
Tap to end the call.
Calls can also be made from the list of recent
calls using the app menu, which can be opened
using the
button on the right-side steering
wheel keypad.
Making multiple calls
While the call is in progress:
1.
Tap
Add call.
2. Select from the list of recent calls, favorites
or contacts.
3. Tap an item/row in the list of recent calls or
for the contact in the phone book.
4.
Tap
Swap call to switch between calls.
5.
Tap to end the current call.
Group (conference) calls
While multiple calls are in progress:
1.
Tap
Join calls to merge ongoing calls.
2.
Tap
to end the call.
Incoming calls
Incoming phone calls will be shown on the instru-
ment panel and in the center display. Manage the
calls using the right-side steering wheel keypad
or the center display.
1.
Tap
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap to end the call.
Incoming calls while another call is in
progress
1.
Tap
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap to end the call.
Privacy
–
While a call is in progress, tap Privacy and
select setting:
•
Switch to mobile phone - the hands-
free function will be disabled and the call
will proceed on the cellular phone.
•
Driver focused - the microphone in the
ceiling liner on the passenger side will be
muted and the call will proceed using the
vehicle's hands-free function.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149)
•
Handling the App menu in the instrument
panel (p. 105)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 131)
•
Managing the phone book (p. 517)
•
Handling text messages (p. 516)
•
Sound settings (p. 474)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
516
Handling text messages
11
A Bluetooth-connected cellular phone's text
messages can be handled in the vehicle.
Text message functionality needs to be activated
in certain phones. Not all phones are fully com-
patible and therefore cannot display contacts and
messages in the vehicle. For additional informa-
tion on compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Handling text messages in the center
display
Text messages are only shown in the center dis-
play if the relevant setting is made.
Tap Messages in App view to
handle text messages in the
center display.
NOTE
When the vehicle is moving:
•
Only one row of the message will be dis-
played. Tap
Read out to have the entire
message read aloud.
•
The center display's keyboard cannot be
used.
Reading text messages in the center display
aloud
Tap the icon to have the message read
aloud.
Sending text messages in the center
display
12
1. It is possible to reply to text messages or
create a new message.
•
To reply to a text message - tap the name
of the contact who sent the message and
then tap
Answer.
•
To create a new message - tap
Create
new. Select a contact or enter a phone
number.
2. Write the message.
3.
Tap
Send.
Handling test messages in the
instrument panel
Text messages are only shown in the instrument
panel if the relevant setting is made.
Reading new text messages in the
instrument panel aloud
–
To have the message read aloud, select
Read out using the steering wheel keypad.
Dictating replies in the instrument panel
After the test message has been read aloud, it is
possible to answer briefly with dictation if the
vehicle has an Internet connection.
–
Tap Answer using the steering wheel key-
pad. A dictation dialog will start.
Message alert
Alerts can be activated and deactivated in the
text message settings.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Text message settings (p. 517)
•
Phone settings (p. 518)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 131)
11
Only applies to certain markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for more information.
12
Only certain phones can send messages via the vehicle. For additional information on compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
517
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Terms of use and data sharing (p. 526)
Text message settings
Settings for handling text messages received
through a connected phone can be personal-
ized.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Communication Text Messages
and select settings:
•
Notification in center display - display
text message notifications in the center
display's status bar.
•
Notification in driver display - displays
notifications in the driver's display and
incoming messages can be managed
using the steering wheel's right-hand key-
pad.
•
Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text messages.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Handling text messages (p. 516)
•
Phone settings (p. 518)
Managing the phone book
When a phone is connected with Bluetooth to
the vehicle, contacts can be managed directly in
the center display.
Up to 3,000 contacts can be displayed from the
phone selected in the center display.
Scroll by letter or to find contacts. Only
letters matching existing contacts in the
phone book will be shown.
Search contacts - tap to search by
phone number or name in the phone book.
Favorites - tap to add/remove a con-
tact from the list of favorites.
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
518
Sorting
The phone book is sorted in alphabetical order
and special characters and numbers are sorted
under
. The list can be sorted by either first
name or last name. This is adjusted in your cellu-
lar phone settings.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Phone settings (p. 518)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 149)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 131)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
Phone settings
When the phone is connected to the car, the fol-
lowing settings can be made:
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Communication Phone and select
settings:
•
Ringtones - select a ring tone. Ring
tones from the cellular phone or the vehi-
cle can be used. Some phones are not
fully compatible and it may not be possi-
ble to use the phone's ring tones in the
vehicle. For additional information on
compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
•
Sort Order - select sort order in the con-
tact list.
Call notifications in head up display*
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
.
3.
Select
Show Phone.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Text message settings (p. 517)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 519)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Head-up display* (p. 144)
•
Sound settings (p. 474)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
519
Settings for Bluetooth devices
Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Communication Bluetooth
Devices
and select settings:
•
Add device - start the procedure for pairing
a new device.
•
Previously paired devices - lists regis-
tered/paired devices.
•
Remove device - remove a connected
device.
•
Allowed services for this device - select
what the device will be used for: making
calls, sending/receiving messages, stream-
ing media, Internet connection.
•
Internet connection connect the vehicle to
the Internet using the device's Bluetooth
connection.
Bluetooth
®
declaration of conformity
USA
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment. This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 510)
•
Phone settings (p. 518)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
Internet-connected vehicle*
When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, it
is possible to use web radio and music services
via apps, download software and contact retail-
ers from the vehicle.
The vehicle can be connected to the Internet
using Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or the vehicle's integrated
modem (SIM card).
When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, it
is possible to share the vehicle's Internet connec-
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
520
tion (Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devices, e.g.
tablets, can access the Internet
13
.
The Internet status is shown by a symbol in the
center display's status bar.
NOTE
Data (data traffic) is transfered when using
the internet, which can incur additional costs.
Activating data roaming can cause additional
charges.
Contact your network operator about data
traffic costs.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the vehicle to the Internet using
Wi-Fi or the vehicle's modem.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the vehicle to the Internet using
Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or the vehicle's modem.
Read Terms and Conditions for Services and
Customer Privacy Policy
at
support.volvocars.com before connecting the car
to the Internet.
Related information
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 126)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a
Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 521)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 522)
•
Apps (p. 476)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 524)
•
Sharing Internet from the vehicle via Wi-Fi
hotspot (tethering) (p. 523)
•
Deleting Wi-Fi networks (p. 525)
•
Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 525)
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
•
Terms of use and data sharing (p. 526)
13
This is not possible when the vehicle is connected to another Wi-Fi hotspot.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
521
Connecting the vehicle to the
Internet via a Bluetooth-connected
phone
Establish an Internet connection using Bluetooth
and tethering from a phone and get access to
multiple connected services in your vehicle.
1. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via a
Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone must
first be paired with the vehicle via Bluetooth.
2. Make sure that the phone supports Internet
sharing (tethering) and that the function is
activated. The function is called “personal
hotspot” on iPhones and “Wi-Fi hotspot“ on
Android phones. For iPhones, the “Personal
Hotspot” menu page must remain open until
the Internet connection is established.
3. If the phone has been connected via Blue-
tooth previously, tap
Settings in the center
display's Top view.
4. Tap
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
.
5.
Mark the window for
Bluetooth Internet
connection under the heading Internet
connection.
6. If a different connection is being used, con-
firm the connection change.
> Your vehicle is now connected to the
Internet via your Bluetooth-connected
phone.
NOTE
The cellular phone and network operator
must support tethering (sharing of Internet
connection) and the subscription must
include data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the vehicle to the Internet using
Wi-Fi or the vehicle's modem.
Related information
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 522)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 511)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 521)
•
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 505)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 524)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 519)
Connecting the vehicle to the
Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi)
Establish an Internet connection using Wi-Fi
through Internet sharing (tethering) from a phone
and get access to the connected services in
your vehicle.
1. Make sure that the phone supports Internet
sharing (tethering) and that the function is
activated. The function is called “personal
hotspot” on iPhones and “Wi-Fi hotspot“ on
Android phones. For iPhones, the “Personal
Hotspot” menu page must remain open until
the Internet connection is established.
2.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
3. Proceed to Communication Wi-Fi.
4. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/
uncheck the Wi-Fi box.
5. If a different connection is being used, con-
firm the connection change.
6. Tap the name of the network you would like
to connect.
7. Enter the network password.
> The vehicle will connect to the network.
Please note that certain cellular phones will disa-
ble Internet sharing (tethering) when the connec-
tion to the vehicle has been broken, e.g. when the
phone has been removed from the vehicle. The
phone's tethering function will then need to be
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
522
reactivated the next time the phone's hotspot is
used to connect to the Internet.
When a phone is connected to the vehicle, it will
be saved for future use. To display a list of saved
networks or to manually delete saved networks,
tap
Settings Communication Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
NOTE
The cellular phone and network operator
must support tethering (sharing of Internet
connection) and the subscription must
include data traffic.
Technical and security requirements for Wi-Fi
connection are described in a separate section.
Related information
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Deleting Wi-Fi networks (p. 525)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 524)
•
Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 525)
Connecting the vehicle to the
Internet via vehicle modem (SIM
card)
For vehicles equipped with Volvo On Call, it is
possible to establish an Internet connection via
the vehicle modem and a personal SIM card (P-
SIM).
When the vehicle is connected using the inte-
grated modem, the Volvo On Call services will
use this connection.
1.
Insert a personal SIM card in the holder
under the floor of the cargo compartment.
2.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
3. Tap
Communication Vehicle Modem
Internet
.
4. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/
uncheck the
Vehicle modem Internet box.
5. If a different connection is being used, con-
firm the connection change.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The vehicle will connect to the network.
Related information
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 524)
•
Vehicle modem settings (p. 523)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
523
Vehicle modem settings
Your vehicle is equipped with a modem that can
be used to connect the vehicle to the Internet. It
is also possible to share this Internet connection
over Wi-Fi.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Communication Vehicle Modem
Internet
and select settings:
•
Vehicle modem Internet - select this to
use the vehicle's modem to connect to the
Internet.
•
Data usage - tap Reset to reset the coun-
ter for the amount of data received and sent.
•
Network
Select carrier
- select a service provider
manually or automatically.
Data roaming - if the box is checked, the
vehicle modem will attempt to connect to the
Internet when the vehicle is outside its home
network (e.g. if you are in another country).
Please note that this could entail additional
charges. Consult with your service provider
for data roaming terms under your contract.
•
SIM card PIN
Change PIN
- a maximum of 4 digits can be
entered.
Disable PIN - select whether a PIN code
will be required to access the SIM card.
•
Send request code - used to e.g. download
or check the balance remaining on a prepaid
phone card. This function is specific to your
service provider.
Related information
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 522)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 524)
Sharing Internet from the vehicle via
Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)
When the vehicle is connected to the Internet,
other devices may share the vehicle's Internet
connection
14
.
The network service provider (SIM card) must
support Internet sharing (tethering).
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
524
2. Tap
Communication Vehicle Wi-Fi
Hotspot
.
3.
Tap
Network name to assign a name to the
hotspot.
4.
Tap
Password and create a password. This
password can then be used to connect other
devices to this hotspot.
5.
Tap
Frequency band and select a fre-
quency for the hotspot to use to transmit
data. Please note that selecting a frequency
is not possible on all markets.
6. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/
uncheck the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot box.
7. If Wi-Fi is being used to connect to the Inter-
net, confirm the change of connections.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot.
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi hotspot can cause addi-
tional charges from your network operator.
Contact your network operator about data
traffic costs.
The connection status is shown by a symbol in
the center display's status bar.
Tap
Connected devices to see a list of cur-
rently connected devices.
Related information
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 126)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 524)
No or poor Internet connection
Factors affecting the Internet connection.
The amount of data transmitted depends on the
services or apps currently in use in the vehicle.
Streaming music, for example, involves the trans-
mission of a large amount of data, and this
requires a good connection and a strong signal.
Phone to vehicle
Internet connection speed may vary depending
on the location of the cellular phone in the vehi-
cle. Move the phone closer to the center display
to increase signal strength. Make sure that noth-
ing is between the phone and center display that
could be blocking the signal.
Phone to network operator
The speed of the mobile network varies depend-
ing on the coverage in the vehicle's current loca-
tion. Coverage may be poorer in e.g. tunnels,
mountainous areas, deep valleys or indoors. Con-
nection speed is also dependent on the subscrip-
tion you have with your service provider.
NOTE
If you experience any problems with data traf-
fic, contact your network service provider.
14
This does not apply when the vehicle is connected to the Internet via Wi-Fi.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
525
Restarting the phone
If you experience any Internet connection prob-
lems, it may help to restart your phone.
Related information
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 525)
Deleting Wi-Fi networks
Networks that are not needed can be deleted.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view.
2. Proceed to Communication Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
3.
Tap
Forget to delete the network.
4. Confirm the selection.
> The vehicle will no longer connect to the
deleted network.
Deleting all networks
All networks can be deleted at once by perform-
ing a factory reset. Please note that all user data
and system settings will be restored to original
default factory settings.
Related information
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 524)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 136)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 521)
Wi-Fi technology and security
Networks must meet certain criteria in order for
the vehicle to connect.
It is possible to connect to the following types of
networks:
•
Frequency - 2.4 or 5 GHz
15
.
•
Standards - 802.11 a/b/g/n.
•
Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP.
The vehicle's Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
Wi-Fi devices inside the vehicle.
Performance may be impaired if multiple devices
are using a frequency at the same time.
Related information
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
15
Selecting a frequency is not possible on all markets.
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
526
Terms of use and data sharing
The first time certain services and apps are
started, a pop-up window with the heading
Terms and conditions and Data sharing may
open.
The aim is to inform the user about Volvo's terms
of use and data sharing policy. By accepting data
sharing, the user accepts that certain information
will be sent from the vehicle. This is required for
certain services and apps to work with full func-
tionality.
Data sharing can be set from the center display's
Settings menu.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating data sharing
(p. 526)
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
Data sharing for relevant services and apps can
be set via the Settings menu in the center dis-
play.
1.
Tap
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap
System Privacy and data.
3. Select to activate or deactivate data sharing
for individual services and all apps.
NOTE
After visiting a Volvo workshop, you may need
to reactivate data sharing so that services and
apps will work again.
Related information
•
Terms of use and data sharing (p. 526)
Hard disk storage space
It is possible to view how much space is remain-
ing on the vehicle's hard disk.
Storage information for the vehicle's hard disk
can be shown, including total capacity, available
capacity and how much space is used for instal-
led apps. The information is found under
Settings System System Information
Storage.
Related information
•
Apps (p. 476)
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
527
License agreement for audio and
media
A license is an agreement on the right to con-
duct a certain activity or the right to use some-
one else's right according to terms and condi-
tions specified in the agreement. The following
texts are Volvo's agreements with manufactur-
ers/developers.
Bowers & Wilkins
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of
the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of
B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark
of DuPont.
Dirac Unison
®
Dirac Unison co-optimizes the loudspeakers in
frequency, time and space for the best possible
bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful
reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of
specific performance venues. Using advanced
algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeak-
ers digitally based on acoustic high-precision
measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra,
it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in
perfect unison.
DivX
®
DivX
®
, DivX Certified
®
and associated logos are
trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used under
license.
This DivX Certified
®
device can play DivX® Home
Theater Home Theater video files up to 576p
(including .avi, .divx). Download free software at
www.divx.com to create, play and stream digital
video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified
®
device must be registered in order to
play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies. To obtain your registration code, locate
the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu.
Go to vod.divx.com for more information on com-
pleting the registration process.
Patent number
Covered by one or more of the following patents
in the US: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
Gracenote
®
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
528
Portions of the content are copyright © of
Gracenote or its providers.
Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
are either registered trademarks of Gracenote,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Gracenote
®
End User License Agreement
This application or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. in Emeryville, California, United
States (“Gracenote”). The software from Grace-
note (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
application to perform disc and/or file identifica-
tion and obtain music-related information, includ-
ing name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embed-
ded databases (collectively “Gracenote Servers”)
and to perform other functions. You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the intended
End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACE-
NOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate
these restrictions. If your license terminates, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in all
Gracenote Data, all Gracenote Software, and all
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will Gracenote become
liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc.
may enforce its rights under this Agreement
against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to
track queries for statistical purposes. The pur-
pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow the Gracenote service to count queries
without knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote serv-
ice.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Grace-
note Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote
makes no representations or warranties, express
or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Grace-
note Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Grace-
note reserves the right to delete data from the
Gracenote Servers or to change data categories
for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient.
No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software
or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that func-
tioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not
obligated to provide you with new enhanced or
additional data types or categories that Grace-
note may provide in the future and is free to dis-
continue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE
RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSE-
QUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR
FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by
American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
herein with the permission of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: Redistributions of
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
529
source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution. Neither the name of the
<ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample
Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January
26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon
Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created
by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions: The above copyright notice including
the dates of first publication and either this
permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of the
FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
([email protected]). All rights reserved
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
530
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Unicode: 5.1.0
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or
Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
531
dealings in these Data Files or Software without
prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
Declaration of Conformity
USA
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment. This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
532
Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode
causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU.
For more information, see support.volvocars.com.
United
Arab Emi-
rates:
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
533
Country/
Area
Kazakh-
stan
Model name: NR-0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Export country: Japan
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
534
Country/
Area
China:
1.
■ 使用频率2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
■ 最大率谱密度 天线增益 10dBi 时≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限20 ppm
■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射)率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
•
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
•
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
•
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
•
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
•
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采措施消除干扰后方可继续
使用
4.使用微率无线电设备，必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
535
Country/
Area
Korea:
B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든
지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다.
Malaysia
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards)
Regulations 2000.To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067)
||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
536
Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan:
低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司商號或使用者均不得擅自
變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應
立停用，改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線
電通信低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
•
Audio, media and Internet (p. 474)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Media player (p. 496)
•
Gracenote
®
(p. 499)
•
Sensus - connection and entertainment
(p. 30)
WHEELS AND TIRES
WHEELS AND TIRES
538
Tires
The function of the tires is to carry loads, provide
traction on road surfaces, reduce vibrations and
protect the wheels from wear.
The tires significantly influence the vehicle's driv-
ing characteristics. The type, dimensions, tire
pressure and speed rating have a considerable
impact on how the vehicle performs.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according to
the vehicle's tire information placard on the B-pil-
lar (the structural member at the side of the vehi-
cle, at the rear of the driver's door opening).
WARNING
A damaged tire could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com-
bination designed to provide maximum dry
pavement performance with consideration for
hydroplaning resistance. They may be more
susceptible to road hazard damage and,
depending on driving conditions, may achieve
a tread life of less than 30,000 km (20,000
miles). Even if this vehicle is equipped with
Volvo's advanced AWD or stability system,
these tires are not designed for winter driving,
and should be replaced with winter tires when
weather conditions dictate.
The tires have good road holding characteristics
and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces.
It should be noted however that the tires have
been developed to give these features on snow/
ice-free surfaces.
Most models are equipped with "all-season" tires,
which provide a somewhat higher degree of road-
holding on slippery road surfaces than tires with-
out the "all-season" rating. However, for optimal
roadholding on icy or snow-covered roads, Volvo
recommends snow tires on all four wheels.
When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires
are the same size designation, type (radial) and
preferably from the same manufacturer, on all
four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering
the vehicle's roadholding and handling characte-
ristics.
Recommended tires
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo origi-
nal tires that have the VOL
1
marking on the side
of the tires. These tires have been designed spe-
cifically for your vehicle. It is therefore important
when replacing tires that the new tires have this
same marking to help maintain the vehicle's driv-
ing characteristics, comfort and fuel consumption.
New tires
Tires are perishable goods. After a few years,
they will begin to harden and their friction proper-
ties will gradually deteriorate. Always replace tires
with the freshest tires possible. This is particularly
important for snow tires. A series of numbers is
1
This may vary for certain tire dimensions.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
539
imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. The last four
digits in the series is the Department of
Transportation (DOT) stamp and indicates the
week and year the tire was manufactured. The
tire in the illustration has 0717 as the last four
digits, which means it was manufactured week 7
of 2017.
Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not
being used. It is recommended that tires gener-
ally be replaced after 6 years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high load-
ing conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exposure can
accelerate the aging process. The temporary
spare
2
should also be replaced at 6-year inter-
vals, even if it has never been used. A tire with
e.g., visible cracks or discoloration should be
replaced immediately.
Tire economy
•
Maintain correct tire pressure.
•
Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire
screeching.
•
Tire wear increases with speed.
•
Correct front wheel alignment is very impor-
tant.
•
Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy and
driving comfort.
•
Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.
•
When replacing tires, the tires with the most
tread should be mounted on the rear wheels
to reduce the chance of oversteer during
hard braking.
•
Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.
Tire rotation
Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Driving
style, tire pressure, climate and road conditions
affect how quickly the tires age and exhibit signs
of wear. Maintaining the correct tire pressure
helps keep tread wear evenly distributed.
To help prevent differences in tread depth and
wear patterns forming on the tires, the front and
rear wheels should be rotated, i.e. the front tires
moved to the rear and the rear tires moved to the
front. Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first
time after approximately 5000 km (ca
3100 miles) and thereafter at 10,000 km
(approx. 6200 miles) intervals.
If you have any questions regarding tread depth,
Volvo recommends consulting an authorized
Volvo workshop. If significant differences in wear
(> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between the
tires have already occurred, the least worn tires
should always be mounted on the rear wheels. A
front-wheel skid (understeer) is usually easier to
control than a rear-wheel skid (oversteer). If the
front wheels skid, the vehicle will continue in a
straight line instead of the rear wheels skidding
to the side, which could cause you to completely
lose control of the vehicle. It is therefore impor-
tant that the rear wheels never lose grip before
the front wheels.
Storing wheels and tires
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted on
rims), they should be suspended off the floor or
placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on
their sides or standing upright, but should not be
suspended.
CAUTION
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be stored in
close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc.
2
Not available on all models.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
540
WARNING
•
The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unapproved
wheel/tire size combinations can nega-
tively affect your vehicle's stability and
handling.
•
Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations
will not be covered by your new vehicle
warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility
for death, injury, or expenses that may
result from such installations.
Related information
•
Checking tire pressure (p. 545)
•
Tire direction of rotation (p. 540)
•
Tread wear indicator (p. 541)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 547)
•
Tire sealing system (p. 560)
•
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (p. 544)
•
Tire terminology (p. 541)
•
Tire sidewall designations (p. 542)
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
Tire direction of rotation
Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
direction are marked with an arrow on the side-
wall.
The arrow shows the tire's direction of rotation.
•
The tire should maintain the same direction
of rotation throughout its service life.
•
Tires should only be moved between the
front and back, never from right to left or vice
versa.
•
Incorrectly mounted tires impair the vehicle's
braking properties and ability to force aside
rain, snow and slush.
•
The tires with the most tread should always
be mounted on the rear wheels to help
reduce the risk of skidding.
NOTE
Use tires of the same type, dimensions and
make (manufacturer) on each axle.
Related information
•
Tires (p. 538)
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
541
Tread wear indicator
The tread wear indicator shows the status of the
tire's tread.
The tread wear indicator is a narrow elevated
strip running across the tire's longitudinal tread
grooves. The letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
are visible on the side of the tire. When approxi-
mately 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) is left on the tread,
the tread will be at the same height as the tread
wear indicator. Replace the tire as soon as possi-
ble. Tires with low tread offer very poor traction in
rain or snow.
Related information
•
Tires (p. 538)
Tire terminology
The following is a glossary of tire-related terms.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings,
notes or warnings such as standard load, radial
tubeless, etc.
•
Tire information placard: A placard show-
ing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure, and the
maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
•
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number
on the sidewall of each tire providing infor-
mation about the tire brand and manufactur-
ing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.
•
Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
•
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35
psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increas-
ing the inflation pressure beyond this pres-
sure will not increase the tires load carrying
capability.
•
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
tire's load carrying capability.
•
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
•
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit
of air pressure.
•
B-pillar: The structural member at the side
of the vehicle behind the front door.
•
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next
to the rim.
•
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead
area and the tread.
•
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perime-
ter of the tire that contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.
•
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a
tire and tube assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
•
Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilograms
that can be carried by the tire. This rating is
established by the tire manufacturer.
•
Maximum permissible inflation pressure:
the greatest amount of air pressure that
should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set
by the tire manufacturer.
•
Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
which is based on the type of tires that are
mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This
information can be found on the tire inflation
placard(s) located on the driver's side B-pillar
and in the tire inflation table in this chapter.
•
Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same temperature
as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
542
perature is normally reached after the vehicle
has been parked for at least 3 hours.
Related information
•
Tires (p. 538)
Tire sidewall designations
The following information can be found on a
tire's sidewall.
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
place standardized information on the sidewall of
all tires (see the illustration).
The vehicle has been certified with certain combi-
nations of wheels and tires.
The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
The tire designation:
NOTE
Please be aware that the following tire desig-
nation is an example only and that this par-
ticular tire may not be available on your vehi-
cle.
1.
215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
larger the number, the wider the tire.
2.
65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width
in percent.
3.
R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the
symbol indicate that the vehicle is
equipped with optional self-supporting run
flat tires
3
.
4.
15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
inches).
5.
95: The tire's load index. In this example, a
load index of 95 equals a maximum load of
1521 lbs (690 kg).
6.
H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum
speed at which the tire is designed to be
driven for extended periods of time, carrying
a permissible load for the vehicle, and with
correct inflation pressure. For example, H
indicates a speed rating of 210 km/h
(130 mph).
3
Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models.
WHEELS AND TIRES
543
NOTE
The tire's load index and speed rating may
not appear on the sidewall because they are
not required by law.
7.
M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Ter-
rain, AS = All Season
8.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers are the
factory code where the tire was manufac-
tured, the next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was made. For example,
0717 means that the tire was manufactured
during week 7 of 2017. The numbers in
between are marketing codes used at the
manufacturer's discretion. This information
helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for
safety recall purposes.
9.
Tire Ply Composition and Material Used:
Indicates the number of plies indicates or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
10.
Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire
information placard located on the B-Pillar
for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
11.
Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades.
12.
Maximum permissible inflation pressure:
the greatest amount of air pressure that
should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set
by the tire manufacturer.
Speed Symbol
A tire's Speed Symbol (SS) indicates the maxi-
mum speed for which the tire has been certified
and should be at least equivalent to the vehicle's
top speed.
Winter tires, with or without studs, are exceptions
and may use a lower SS. When winter tires are
installed, the vehicle may not be driven faster
than the tires' SS.
The vehicle's speed should always be determined
by the posted speed limit and traffic and road
conditions, not the tire's SS.
The following table indicates the maximum per-
missible speed for each SS.
M 130 km/h (81 mph)
Q 160 km/h (100 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING
•
The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unapproved
wheel/tire size combinations can nega-
tively affect your vehicle's stability and
handling.
•
Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations
will not be covered by your new vehicle
warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility
for death, injury, or expenses that may
result from such installations.
Related information
•
Tires (p. 538)
WHEELS AND TIRES
544
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY REQUIRE-
MENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE GRADES.
Quality grades can be found, where applica-
ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and many depart significantly from the norm due
to variation in driving habits, maintenance practi-
ces and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
TRACTION
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
TEMPERATURE
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of
performance that all passenger vehicle tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-infla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
tire failure.
Related information
•
Tires (p. 538)
•
Tire sidewall designations (p. 542)
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
545
Checking tire pressure
Correct inflation pressure helps improve driving
stability, save fuel and increase the service life of
the tires.
Tire pressure decreases over time, which is nor-
mal. Tire pressure also varies depending on the
ambient temperature. Driving on under-inflated
tires could cause the vehicle to overheat and lead
to damage. Tire pressure affects traveling com-
fort, road noise and driving characteristics.
Check the pressure in the tires every month. Use
the recommended inflation pressure for cold tires
for optimal tire performance and wear. Under-
inflated or over-inflated tires could cause uneven
tread wear.
Use an air pressure gauge and check the infla-
tion pressure on all the tires, including the spare
tire
4
, at least once a month and before long trips.
Volvo strongly recommends buying a reliable air
pressure gauge, as the automatic gauges provi-
ded at service stations may be inaccurate.
WARNING
•
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread separation, or
"blow-out," with unexpected loss of vehi-
cle control and increased risk of injury.
•
Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-
rying capacity of your vehicle.
Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when the
tires are cold.
The tires are considered to be cold when they
have the same temperature as the surrounding
(ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
After driving for approximately 1.6 km (1 mile),
the tires are considered to be warm. If you need
to drive longer than that to inflate the tires, check
and record the inflation pressure of the tires first
and inflate accordingly when you arrive at the
pump.
When the ambient temperature changes, so does
the inflation pressure. A 10-degree temperature
drop causes a corresponding drop in inflation
pressure of 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the inflation
pressure of the tires regularly and adjust to the
correct pressure, which can be found on the vehi-
cle's tire information placard or certification label.
If you check inflation pressure when the tires are
warm, you should never release air. The tires
become warm after driving and it is normal for
warm tires to have an inflation pressure above
the recommended pressure for cold tires. A warm
tire with an inflation pressure equal to or under
the recommended pressure for cold tires could
be significantly under-inflated.
Related information
•
Adjusting tire pressure (p. 546)
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 547)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 547)
•
Tires (p. 538)
4
Not available in all models.
WHEELS AND TIRES
546
Adjusting tire pressure
Tire pressure decreases over time, which is nor-
mal. The tire pressure must therefore be
adjusted to maintain the recommended tire pres-
sure.
Use the recommended inflation pressure for cold
tires for optimal tire performance and wear.
NOTE
To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure,
pressure should be checked when the tires
are cold. The tires are considered to be cold
when they have reached the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature (about 3
hours after the vehicle was last driven). After
driving for a few kilometers, the tires will warm
up and the pressure will increase.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire and press
the air pressure gauge firmly onto the valve.
2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres-
sure; see the tire pressure placard on the
driver's side B pillar for recommended pres-
sures for factory-mounted tires.
3. Screw the valve cap back on.
NOTE
•
After inflating a tire, always replace the
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
4. Visually inspect the tire to make sure there
are no nails or other embedded objects that
could puncture the tire and cause air leak-
age.
5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are
no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregulari-
ties.
6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including
the spare tire
5
.
NOTE
If you have overfilled the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center of
the valve. Then recheck the pressure with
your tire gauge.
Some spare tires require higher inflation pres-
sure than the other tires. Consult the tire
inflation pressure table or the inflation pres-
sure placard.
Related information
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 547)
•
Checking tire pressure (p. 545)
•
Inflate tires with the compressor included in
the tire sealing system (p. 565)
•
Approved tire pressure (p. 659)
5
Not available on all models.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
547
Recommended tire pressure
The tire pressure placard on the driver's side B
pillar (between the front and the rear door) indi-
cates tire pressure for different loads and speed
conditions.
The decal specifies the designation for the fac-
tory-mounted tires on the vehicle, as well as load
limits and inflation pressures.
Related information
•
Checking tire pressure (p. 545)
•
Approved tire pressure (p. 659)
Tire pressure monitoring system*
The tire pressure monitoring system
6
provides a
warning symbol in the instrument panel if pres-
sure is too low in one or more tires.
Symbol Explanation
This symbol illuminates to indicate
low inflation pressure.
If there is a system malfunction, the
inflation pressure warning symbol
will flash for approximately one
minute and then glow steadily.
System description
The tire pressure monitoring system measures
differences in rotational speed between the
wheels through the ABS system to determine if
the tires are properly inflated. If inflation pressure
in a tire is too low, its diameter (and consequently
its rotational speed) changes. By comparing the
tires with each other, the system can determine if
the pressure in one or more tires is too low.
General information about the tire pressure
monitoring system
In the following description, the tire monitoring
system is generally referred to as TPMS.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
7
should be checked monthly when cold and infla-
ted to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire cau-
ses the tire to overheat and can lead to tire fail-
ure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main-
tenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-infla-
tion has not reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with the low tire
6
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
7
Not available on all models.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
548
pressure telltale. When the system detects a mal-
function, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to con-
tinue to function properly.
Messages in the instrument panel
If tire pressure is too low, the low tire pressure
warning symbol is shown in the instrument panel
along with a message.
•
Tire pressure low Check tires, calibrate
after fill
•
Tire pressure system Temporarily
unavailable
•
Tire pressure system Service required
To keep in mind
•
Always calibrate the system after changing
wheels or adjusting tire pressure. See the tire
pressure placard on the driver's side B pillar
for Volvo-recommended tire pressures.
•
If you switch to a tire of another size than the
factory-mounted tires, the system must be
calibrated for these tires to avoid false warn-
ings.
•
If a spare wheel
8
is used, it is possible that
the tire pressure monitoring system will not
work correctly due to the differences
between the wheels.
•
The system does not replace the need for
regular tire inspection and maintenance.
•
It is not possible to deactivate the tire pres-
sure monitoring system.
WARNING
•
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to
tire failure, which could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle.
•
The system cannot predict sudden tire
damage.
Related information
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 547)
•
Viewing tire pressure status in the center
display* (p. 550)
•
Action when warned of low tire pressure
(p. 551)
•
Calibrating the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem* (p. 549)
8
Not available on all models.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
549
Calibrating the tire pressure
monitoring system*
In order for the tire pressure monitoring system
9
to function correctly, tire pressure reference val-
ues must be set correctly. This must be done
each time the tires are changed or the tire pres-
sure is adjusted.
For example, when driving with a heavy load or at
high speeds (over 160 km/h (100 mph)), tire
pressure should be adjusted to the Volvo-recom-
mended tire pressure values. The system should
then be recalibrated.
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres-
sure; see the tire pressure placard on the
driver's side B pillar for recommended pres-
sures for factory-mounted tires.
3. Start the vehicle.
4.
Open the
Car Status app in App view.
5.
Tap
TPMS.
NOTE
The car must be stationary when calibration is
started.
6.
Tap
Calibrate.
7.
Tap
OK to confirm that the tire pressure in
all four tires has been checked and adjusted.
8. Run the car until calibration is complete.
Calibration is done when the vehicle is driv-
ing at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph).
If the car's ignition is switched off before cal-
ibration is complete, the tires in the center
display change color from gray to green upon
next start-up, even if calibration is not com-
plete. Perform the calibration again and allow
it to complete within the same operating
cycle to ensure that the calibration is carried
out correctly.
> When enough data has been collected for
the system to detect low tire pressure, the
color of the tire symbols in the center dis-
play will change from gray to green. The
system will not provide any other confir-
mation that calibration has been comple-
ted.
If start-up of calibration fails, the following
message appears:
Calibration
unsuccessful. Try again..
9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
550
NOTE
Always remember to calibrate the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System when the wheels
have been changed or the tire inflation pres-
sure has been corrected according to the tire
pressure decal or tire inflation pressure table.
If correct reference values have not been set,
the system cannot issue low tire pressure
alerts correctly.
The vehicle must be stationary with the
engine running to access the calibration but-
ton and to start the calibration process.
WARNING
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
which is invisible and odorless but very poi-
sonous. For this reason, always perform the
calibration procedure outdoors or in a work-
shop with exhaust gas evacuation equipment.
Related information
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 547)
•
Adjusting tire pressure (p. 546)
•
Viewing tire pressure status in the center
display* (p. 550)
•
Action when warned of low tire pressure
(p. 551)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 547)
Viewing tire pressure status in the
center display*
With the system for tire pressure monitoring
10
,
tire pressure status can be viewed in the center
display.
Checking status
1.
Open the
Car Status app in App view.
2.
Tap
TPMS to display the status of the tires.
Status indicator light
The graphic in the center display shows the sta-
tus of each tire
11
.
Green tire:
•
Inflation pressure is above the warning
threshold.
Yellow tire:
•
The tire's inflation pressure is too low. Stop
and check/inflate the tire as soon as possi-
ble. Recalibrate the system after adjusting
the tire pressure.
All tires yellow:
•
The inflation pressure is too low in one or
more tires. Stop and check/inflate the tires
as soon as possible. Recalibrate the system
after adjusting tire pressure.
10
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
551
All tires gray:
•
Calibration in progress.
•
Status unknown.
The vehicle may need to be driven for a few
minutes at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph) to
activate the system.
All tires gray and a message:
•
Tire pressure system Temporarily
unavailable. The indicator symbol will flash
for about 1 minute and then glow steadily.
The system is temporarily unavailable and will
be activated momentarily.
•
Tire pressure system Service required.
The indicator symbol will flash for about 1
minute and then glow steadily. If the system
is not working properly, contact a work-
shop
12
.
Related information
•
Calibrating the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem* (p. 549)
•
Action when warned of low tire pressure
(p. 551)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 547)
•
Vehicle status (p. 592)
Action when warned of low tire
pressure
When the system for monitoring inflation pres-
sure
13
detects low inflation pressure in a tire,
immediate action is required.
If the system's indicator symbol illumi-
nates and the message
Tire pressure
low is displayed, check the tire pres-
sure and inflate if necessary.
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Check the inflation pressure on all four tires
using a tire pressure gauge.
3. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres-
sure; see the tire pressure placard on the
driver's side B pillar for recommended pres-
sures for factory-mounted tires.
4. Through calibration of the system via the
center display after the tire pressure has
been adjusted.
Please be aware that the indicator symbol
will not go out until the low tire pressure has
been corrected and the system has been
recalibrated.
NOTE
To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure,
pressure should be checked when the tires
are cold. The tires are considered to be cold
when they have reached the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature (about 3
hours after the vehicle was last driven). After
driving for a few kilometers, the tires will warm
up and the pressure will increase.
NOTE
•
After inflating a tire, always replace the
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
WARNING
•
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to
tire failure, which could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle.
•
The system cannot predict sudden tire
damage.
11
The illustration is generic. Layout may vary depending on vehicle model or software version.
12
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
13
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
552
Related information
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 547)
•
Adjusting tire pressure (p. 546)
•
Calibrating the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem* (p. 549)
•
Viewing tire pressure status in the center
display* (p. 550)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 547)
•
Inflate tires with the compressor included in
the tire sealing system (p. 565)
When changing wheels
The wheels can be changed, e.g. to switch to
snow tires or spare tires. Follow the applicable
instructions for removing and installing the
wheel.
Changing to tires of another dimension
Make sure that the tire dimension is approved for
use on the vehicle.
If you change to tires of another dimension, con-
tact an authorized Volvo workshop to update the
vehicle's software. A software update may be
necessary when changing to tires of larger/
smaller dimensions or when changing to or from
snow tires.
Related information
•
Removing a wheel (p. 554)
•
Installing a wheel (p. 556)
•
Tool kit (p. 552)
•
Snow tires (p. 559)
•
Spare wheel (p. 557)
•
Wheel bolts (p. 553)
Tool kit
Tools for e.g. towing or changing wheels are
provided in the vehicle's cargo compartment.
The foam block under the cargo compartment
floor contains the towing eyelet, the tire sealing
system, the tool for removing plastic wheel bolt
covers and the tool for removing the locking
wheel bolts.
If the vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel*
14
, a
jack, lug wrench, and a package with
disposable gloves and a bag for the damaged
wheel are also provided.
Related information
•
When changing wheels (p. 552)
•
Jack* (p. 553)
14
Not available on all models.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
553
Jack*
The jack can be used to lift the vehicle to e.g.
change a wheel.
The illustration is generic – the design may vary.
CAUTION
•
When not in use, the jack* should be kept
in its storage compartment under the
cargo compartment floor.
•
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary sit-
uations such as changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. Only the jack that
came with your particular model should
be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle
needs to be lifted more frequently or for a
prolonged period, using a garage jack or
hoist is recommended. Always follow this
device's instructions for use.
The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to fit.
Models with leveling control*
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional pneu-
matic suspension, it must be turned off before
the vehicle is lifted on a jack.
Related information
•
Tool kit (p. 552)
Wheel bolts
The wheel bolts hold the wheel in place on the
wheel hub.
CAUTION
The wheel bolts should be tightened to
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Over-tightening or
under-tightening could damage the threaded
joints.
Only use rims that have been tested and
approved by Volvo and are included in Volvo's
original product range.
Use a torque wrench to check that the wheel
bolts are tightened correctly.
Do not grease the wheel bolt threads.
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be tightened
again several days after a wheel change.
Temperature fluctuations and vibrations can
cause them to loosen slightly.
Locking wheel bolts*
A tool for removing the locking wheel bolts is
located in the foam block under the cargo com-
partment floor.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
554
Related information
•
Removing a wheel (p. 554)
•
Installing a wheel (p. 556)
Removing a wheel
Instructions for removing a wheel when chang-
ing wheels. Wheel changes must always be car-
ried out correctly.
CAUTION
•
When not in use, the jack* should be kept
in its storage compartment under the
cargo compartment floor.
•
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary sit-
uations such as changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. Only the jack that
came with your particular model should
be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle
needs to be lifted more frequently or for a
prolonged period, using a garage jack or
hoist is recommended. Always follow this
device's instructions for use.
WARNING
•
Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in the Park (P) position.
•
Block the wheels standing on the ground,
use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.
•
Check that the jack is not damaged, the
threads are properly lubricated and it is
free from dirt.
•
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-
slippery surface and that it is upright and
not leaning.
•
The jack must correctly engage in the
jack attachment.
•
No objects should be placed between the
base of the jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment bar
on the vehicle.
•
Never let anyone remain in the vehicle
when it is raised on a jack.
•
If a tire must be changed near passing
traffic, make sure all passengers move to
a safe location.
•
Use a jack intended for the vehicle when
changing a tire. For any other job, use
stands to support the vehicle.
•
Never crawl under or allow any part of
your body to be extended under a vehicle
supported by a jack.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
555
1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning flashers
if a wheel change must be performed in an
area with traffic.
2. Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in P.
For vehicles with
Leveling Control*: If the
vehicle is equipped with pneumatic suspen-
sion, this must be switched off before the
vehicle is lifted with the jack*.
3.
Take out the jack*, lug wrench* and tool for
removing the plastic covers, which are
stowed in the foam block.
Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel bolts.
4. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels that are still on the ground. For exam-
ple, use heavy wooden blocks or large
stones.
5.
Using the lug wrench*, screw the towing eye
into place as far as possible according to the
instructions.
CAUTION
The towing eyelet must be screwed into the
lug wrench* as far as possible.
6. Remove the plastic covers from the wheel
bolts using the designated tool.
7. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the
lug wrench/towing eye to loosen the wheel
bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downward (coun-
terclockwise).
8. When hoisting the vehicle, it is important that
the jack* or garage lift arms are positioned
on the designated points under the vehicle.
The triangle markings on the plastic cover
indicate where the jack attachment points/
lifting points are located. There are two jack
attachment points on each side of the vehi-
cle. There is a groove for the jack at each
attachment point.
9. Position the jack under the attachment point
being used, ensuring that the surface is firm,
flat and not slippery.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
556
10. Crank it up until it is properly aligned and it is
in contact with the vehicle's jack attachment
point. Make sure the top of the jack (or the
garage lift arms) is correctly positioned in the
attachment point, with the bump on the top
of the jack in the recess in the attachment
point and the base positioned vertically under
the attachment point.
11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far as
possible from the side of the vehicle, which
will position the jack's arms perpendicular to
the vehicle's direction of movement.
12. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed can move freely. Unscrew the wheel
bolts and lift off the wheel.
Related information
•
Leveling control settings* (p. 444)
•
When changing wheels (p. 552)
•
Hoisting the vehicle (p. 596)
•
Jack* (p. 553)
•
Tool kit (p. 552)
•
Installing a wheel (p. 556)
Installing a wheel
Instructions for installing a wheel during a wheel
change.
NOTE
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary situa-
tions such as changing wheels in the event of
a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your
particular model should be used to lift the
vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more
frequently or for a prolonged period, using a
garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always
follow this device's instructions for use.
WARNING
•
Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in the Park (P) position.
•
Block the wheels standing on the ground,
use rigid wooden blocks or large stones.
•
Check that the jack is not damaged, the
threads are properly lubricated and it is
free from dirt.
•
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-
slippery surface and that it is upright and
not leaning.
•
The jack must correctly engage in the
jack attachment.
•
No objects should be placed between the
base of the jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment bar
on the vehicle.
•
Never let anyone remain in the vehicle
when it is raised on a jack.
•
If a tire must be changed near passing
traffic, make sure all passengers move to
a safe location.
•
Use a jack intended for the vehicle when
changing a tire. For any other job, use
stands to support the vehicle.
•
Never crawl under or allow any part of
your body to be extended under a vehicle
supported by a jack.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
557
1. Clean the contact surfaces between the
wheel and the wheel hub.
2. Lift the wheel into place. Tighten the wheel
bolts securely.
Do not grease the wheel bolt threads.
3. Lower the vehicle so that the wheel cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts in a crisscross pat-
tern (as shown in illustration). It is important
that the wheel bolts are securely tightened.
Tighten to a torque of 140 Nm (103 ft.lbs.).
Use a torque wrench to check torque.
5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheel bolts.
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be tightened
again several days after a wheel change.
Temperature fluctuations and vibrations can
cause them to loosen slightly.
NOTE
•
After inflating a tire, always replace the
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
Related information
•
Leveling control settings* (p. 444)
•
When changing wheels (p. 552)
•
Hoisting the vehicle (p. 596)
•
Jack* (p. 553)
•
Tool kit (p. 552)
•
Removing a wheel (p. 554)
Spare wheel
15
The spare wheel is a Temporary Spare and can
be used to temporarily replace a punctured tire
on one of the vehicle's regular wheels.
The spare tire is only intended for temporary use.
Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as possi-
ble.
The driving characteristics of the vehicle change
and ground clearance reduces when the spare
wheel is used. Do not wash the vehicle in an
automatic car wash while using the Temporary
Spare.
The recommended tire pressure must be main-
tained regardless of at which position the tempo-
rary spare wheel is used on the vehicle.
If the spare wheel is damaged, a new one can be
purchased from a Volvo retailer.
WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem-
porary replacement for a punctured tire. It
must be replaced as soon as possible by a
standard tire. Road holding and handling may
be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in
use. Do not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph).
15
Not available on all models.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
558
WARNING
•
The vehicle must never be driven with
more than one "Temporary Spare" tire
mounted.
•
Driving with a spare wheel may alter the
driving characteristics of the vehicle.
Replace the spare wheel with a normal
wheel as soon as possible.
•
The spare wheel is smaller than the nor-
mal wheel, which affects the vehicle's
ground clearance. Watch for high curbs
and do not wash the vehicle in an auto-
matic car wash when a spare wheel is
mounted.
•
Follow the manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure for the spare wheel.
•
On all-wheel drive vehicles, the drive on
the rear axle can be disconnected.
•
If the spare wheel is mounted on the
front axle, snow chains must not be used.
•
The spare wheel must not be repaired.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be driven with wheels of
different dimensions or with a spare tire other
than the one that came with the vehicle. The
use of different size wheels can seriously
damage your vehicle's transmission.
Location
This illustration is general. The shape and design of the
foam block may vary depending on vehicle model.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside of the wheel facing down-
ward. The same bolt runs through both the spare
wheel and foam block to hold them into place.
The foam block contains all tools needed to
change a wheel.
Related information
•
When changing wheels (p. 552)
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 547)
Accessing the spare wheel
Follow these instructions regarding handling the
spare wheel.
1. Lift the rear edge of the cargo compartment
floor.
2. Unscrew the retaining bolt.
3. Lift out the foam block containing the tools.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
Stowing a flat tire
1. Take out the package containing the wheel
bag from the foam block and put the wheel
in the bag.
2. Return the tools to their correct positions in
the foam block and put the foam block back
in the vehicle.
3. Screw down the foam block with the retain-
ing bolt and lower the cargo compartment
floor.
4. Put the flat tire in the trunk/cargo compart-
ment.
Related information
•
Spare wheel (p. 557)
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
559
Snow tires
Snow tires are designed for winter driving.
Volvo recommends snow tires with specific
dimensions. The tire dimensions vary depending
on engine type. When driving with snow tires, the
correct type of tires must be mounted on all four
wheels.
NOTE
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice on the best
choice of rims and tires.
Tips for changing snow tires
When switching between regular tires and snow
tires, mark the tires according to which side they
were mounted on, e.g. L for left and R for right.
Studded tires
Studded tires should be broken in by driving
500–1000 km (300–600 miles) slowly and gen-
tly to help the studs settle properly in the tires.
This gives the tire, and especially the studs, a
longer service life.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of studded
tires vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera-
tures place considerably higher demands on tires
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom-
mends not driving on snow tires that have a tread
depth of less than 4 mm (0.15 inch).
Related information
•
When changing wheels (p. 552)
•
Winter driving (p. 449)
•
Tread wear indicator (p. 541)
Snow chains
Using snow chains and/or snow tires can help
improve traction in winter driving conditions.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
snow chains that are suitable for the vehicle
model and the tire and wheel sizes. Only one-
sided snow chains are permitted.
If uncertain about snow chains, Volvo recom-
mends contacting an authorized Volvo work-
shop. Use of the wrong snow chains could
cause serious damage to the vehicle and
result in an accident.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
560
CAUTION
Snow chains can be used on the vehicle, with
the following restrictions:
•
Volvo recommends not using snow
chains on wheel dimensions larger than
18 inches.
•
Always follow the manufacturer's installa-
tion instructions carefully. Install chains
as tightly as possible and retighten peri-
odically.
•
Only put snow chains on the front wheels
(also applies to all-wheel drive vehicles).
•
If accessory, aftermarket or "custom"
tires and wheels with different dimen-
sions than the original tires and wheels
are used, snow chains in some cases
may NOT be used. Sufficient distance
between the chains and brakes, suspen-
sion and body components must be
maintained.
•
Check local regulations regarding the use
of snow chains before installing.
•
Never exceed the snow chain manufac-
turer's specified maximum speed limit.
Under no circumstances should you
exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).
•
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when
driving with snow chains.
•
Avoid driving on surfaces without snow as
this wears out both the snow chains and
the tires.
•
The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well
as locked wheel braking.
•
Some types of strap-on chains affect
brake components and therefore must
NOT be used.
Consult a Volvo retailer for more information
about snow chains.
Related information
•
Winter driving (p. 449)
Tire sealing system
16
The temporary tire sealing system can be used
to seal a puncture in a tire or to check and
adjust the pressure in the tire.
Models equipped with a spare wheel
17
do not
have the tire sealing system.
WARNING
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To mini-
mize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do
not idle the engine except as necessary, serv-
ice your vehicle in a well ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more infor-
mation go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/
passenger-vehicle.
The tire sealing system consists of a compressor
and a bottle containing sealing compound. The
sealing functions as a temporary repair.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
561
NOTE
The sealing compound effectively seals tires
with punctures in the tread but may not be
able to fully seal tires with punctures in the
sidewall. Do not use the tire sealing system
on tires with large tears, cracks or similar
damage.
NOTE
The compressor is intended for temporary tire
sealing and is approved by Volvo.
Location
The tire sealing system is located in a foam block
under the floor of the cargo compartment.
Sealing compound expiration date
The sealing compound bottle must be replaced if
its expiration date has passed (see the decal on
the bottle). Handle the old bottle as hazardous
waste.
Related information
•
Using the tire sealing system (p. 561)
•
Inflate tires with the compressor included in
the tire sealing system (p. 565)
•
Tires (p. 538)
Using the tire sealing system
Sealing a tire using the tire sealing system, the
Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
Overview
Electrical cable
Hose
Air release valve
Protective hose cover
Speed limit sticker
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Air pressure gauge
16
Certain models only.
17
Not available on all models.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
562
Sealing compound bottle
Switch
Connecting
NOTE
Do not break the seal of the bottle before
use. The seal is broken automatically when
the bottle is screwed into place.
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:
•
The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in the
illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, natu-
ral and 2) ethanediol. These substances
are harmful if swallowed.
•
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory tract,
the skin, the central nervous system, and
the eyes.
Precautions:
•
Keep out of reach of children.
•
Do not ingest the contents.
•
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with
the skin. Remove any clothing that has
come into contact with sealant.
•
Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
•
Skin: Wash affected areas of the skin
with soap and water. Get medical atten-
tion if symptoms occur.
•
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper
and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
•
Inhalation: Move the exposed person to
fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical
attention.
•
Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical per-
sonnel. Get medical attention.
•
Disposal: Dispose of this material and its
container at a hazardous or special waste
collection point.
WARNING
•
Do not remove the bottle while the tire
sealing system is being used.
•
Do not remove the hose while the tire
sealing system is being used.
1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning flashers
if the tire sealing system is to be used in an
area with traffic.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi-
lar object, do not remove it. It will help seal
the hole.
2. Peel off the speed limit sticker from the side
of the compressor. Affix the decal to a clearly
visible location on the windshield to remind
the driver not to exceed this speed limit. Do
not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) while
using a tire that has been temporarily
repaired with the tire sealing system.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
563
3.
Make sure the switch is in the 0 (Off) posi-
tion and take out the electric cable and the
hose.
4. Unscrew the orange cover on the compres-
sor and unscrew the cap on the sealing com-
pound bottle.
5. Screw the bottle onto the bottle holder as far
as possible.
The bottle and the bottle holder are equip-
ped with catches to help prevent the sealing
compound from leaking. Once the bottle is
screwed into place into the bottle holder, it
cannot be unscrewed. The bottle can only be
removed by a workshop. Volvo recommends
an authorized Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle. It is equipped with
a catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw the
hose's valve connector as far as possible
onto the valve.
Be sure the air release valve on the com-
pressor's hose is completely closed.
7. Connect the electrical cable to the nearest
12 V outlet and start the vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the vehicle's other
12 V sockets are used while the compressor
is running.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle
while the engine is running.
WARNING
Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to serious
injury. Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space or a space without sufficient
ventilation.
8. Start the compressor by moving the switch to
the I (On) position.
WARNING
Never stand next to a tire being inflated with
the compressor. If cracks, bulges, etc. form on
the tire, switch off the compressor immedi-
ately. The vehicle should not be driven. Call
roadside assistance to have the vehicle towed
to a workshop for inspection/replacement of
the tire. Volvo recommends an authorized
workshop.
NOTE
When the compressor first starts, air pressure
may temporarily increase up to 6 bar (88 psi)
but should decrease again after approxi-
mately 30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tire for 7 minutes.
CAUTION
To help avoid overheating, the compressor
should never be used for more than
10 minutes at a time.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
564
10. Switch off the compressor and check the
inflation pressure using the air pressure
gauge. The inflation pressure should be
between 1.8 bar (22 psi) and 3.5 bar
(51 psi). If the inflation pressure is too high,
use the air release valve to release air.
WARNING
If pressure falls below 1.8 bar (22 psi), the
hole in the tire may be too large. The vehicle
should not be driven. Call roadside assistance
to have the vehicle towed to a workshop for
inspection/replacement of the tire. Volvo rec-
ommends an authorized workshop.
11. Switch off the compressor and remove the
electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the hose from the tire's valve and
screw the valve cap back on.
NOTE
•
After inflating a tire, always replace the
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
13. Put the protective hose cover onto the hose
to help prevent leakage of any residual seal-
ing compound. Return the equipment to the
cargo compartment.
14. Immediately drive the vehicle at least 3 km
(2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) to allow the sealing compound to
seal the tire, and then recheck the inflation
pressure.
NOTE
During the tire's first revolution, some sealing
compound may spray out of the puncture
hole.
WARNING
Before driving away, make sure that no one is
near the vehicle who could be sprayed with
sealing compound. Make sure no one is
within 2 meters(7 feet) of the vehicle.
15.
Rechecking the inflation pressure
Connect the hose to the tire's valve and
screw the hose connector onto the valve as
far as possible. The compressor must be
switched off.
16. Check the inflation pressure on the air pres-
sure gauge.
•
If the pressure is under 1.3 bar (19 psi),
the tire is not sufficiently sealed. The vehi-
cle should not be driven. Call roadside
assistance to have the vehicle towed.
•
If the inflation pressure is higher than
1.3 bar (19 psi), the tire must be inflated
to the inflation pressure specified on the
tire pressure decal on the driver's side
door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi). If
the inflation pressure is too high, use the
air release valve to release air.
NOTE
Replace the sealing compound bottle and
hose after use. Volvo recommends having
these replaced by an authorized Volvo work-
shop.
WARNING
Check inflation pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends driving to the nearest author-
ized Volvo workshop to have the tire replaced/
repaired. Inform the workshop that the tire con-
tains sealing compound.
WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
565
The sealing compound bottle must be replaced
after use. Volvo recommends contacting an
authorized Volvo workshop for replacement.
WARNING
After using the tire sealing system, the vehicle
should not be driven farther than approxi-
mately 200 km (120 miles).
NOTE
The compressor is an electric device. Follow
local regulations for disposal.
Related information
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 547)
•
Tire sealing system (p. 560)
•
Inflate tires with the compressor included in
the tire sealing system (p. 565)
Inflate tires with the compressor
included in the tire sealing system
The vehicle's original tires can be inflated using
the compressor in the tire sealing system.
1. The compressor must be switched off. Make
sure that the switch is in the 0 (Off) position
and take out the electrical cable and the
hose.
2. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw the
hose's valve connector as far as possible
onto the valve.
Be sure the air release valve on the com-
pressor's hose is completely closed.
3. Connect the electrical cable to the nearest
12 V outlet and start the vehicle.
WARNING
Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to serious
injury. Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space or a space without sufficient
ventilation.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle
while the engine is running.
4. Start the compressor by moving the switch to
the I (On) position.
CAUTION
Risk of overheating. The compressor should
not be running for longer than 10 minutes at
a time.
5. Inflate the tire to the pressure specified on
the tire pressure decal on the driver's side
door pillar. If the inflation pressure is too
high, use the air release valve to release air.
6. Switch off the compressor. Remove the hose
and the electrical cable.
7. Screw the valve cap back onto the tire.
NOTE
•
After inflating a tire, always replace the
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
NOTE
The compressor is an electric device. Follow
local regulations for disposal.
||
WHEELS AND TIRES
566
Related information
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 547)
•
Using the tire sealing system (p. 561)
•
Tire sealing system (p. 560)
Determining the vehicle's permitted
weight
Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-
mum return of vehicle design performance.
Weight designations
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and
the vehicle's tire information placard:
Curb weight
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Capacity weight
All weight added to the curb weight, including
cargo and optional equipment. When towing, tow-
bar weight is also part of cargo weight.
Permissible axle weight
The maximum allowable weight that can be car-
ried by a single axle (front or rear). These num-
bers are shown on the Federal/Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label.
The total load on each axle must never exceed its
maximum permissible weight.
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement "the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's plac-
ard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa-
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
WHEELS AND TIRES
567
WARNING
•
Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other weight
rating limits can cause tire overheating
resulting in permanent deformation or
catastrophic failure.
•
Do not use replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the tires that
were original equipment on the vehicle
because this will lower the vehicle's GVW
rating. Use only tires with the correct load
carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo
retailer for information.
Related information
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
570
Passenger compartment interior
Overview of the passenger compartment interior
and storage spaces.
Front seats
Storage compartment in the door panel and near the
steering wheel, glove compartment and sun visors.
Storage compartments with cup holders, electrical out-
lets, net pocket* and USB ports in the tunnel console.
Rear seat
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders* in
the center seat's backrest, storage pocket* in the front
seat's backrest and electrical outlets in the tunnel con-
sole.
WARNING
Store loose objects, such as cell phone, cam-
era, remote control for extra equipment, etc.,
in the glove compartment or another compart-
ment. Otherwise, these could injure people in
the vehicle in the event of hard braking or a
collision.
CAUTION
Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be
easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do not
place keys, phones or similar items on sensi-
tive surfaces.
Related information
•
Electrical outlets (p. 572)
•
Using the glove compartment (p. 575)
•
Sun visors (p. 576)
•
Tunnel console (p. 571)
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 503)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
571
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the front
seats.
Storage compartment with cover*. The cover
can be opened/closed by pressing the han-
dle.
Storage compartment with cup holder and
12 V socket.
Storage compartment and USB port under
the armrest.
Climate control panel for the rear seats* or
storage compartment.
WARNING
Store loose objects, such as cell phone, cam-
era, remote control for extra equipment, etc.,
in the glove compartment or another compart-
ment. Otherwise, these could injure people in
the vehicle in the event of hard braking or a
collision.
NOTE
One of the sensors for the alarm* is located
under the cup holder in the center console.
Avoid placing coins, keys and other metal
objects in the cup holder as this could trigger
the alarm.
CAUTION
Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be
easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do not
place keys, phones or similar items on sensi-
tive surfaces.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 570)
•
Electrical outlets (p. 572)
•
Climate system controls (p. 216)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
572
Electrical outlets
There are two 12 V electrical outlets and one
120 V electrical outlet* in the tunnel console,
and one 12 V electrical outlet* in the trunk/cargo
compartment.
If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,
contact a workshop - an authorized Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
12 V outlets
12 V outlet in the tunnel console, front seat.
The 12 V outlets can be used for devices
intended for this such as MP3 players, coolers
and cellular phones.
12 V outlet in the tunnel console, rear seat.
12 V outlet in trunk/cargo compartment*.
Electrical outlets in the tunnel console -
rear seat*
Electrical outlets in the tunnel console, rear seat.
The high-voltage outlet* can be used for devices
intended for this, such as chargers, laptops, etc.
High-voltage outlet status indicator
light
An LED
1
light on the outlet indicates its status:
1
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
573
Status indicator light Cause Action
Steady green light The outlet is providing electrical current to a connected device. None.
Flashing orange light The outlet's voltage converter is too hot (e.g. if the device draws too much cur-
rent or if the temperature in the passenger compartment is very high).
Unplug the device, let the voltage converter cool
down and plug in the device again.
The connected device is drawing too much current (at the moment or con-
stantly) or is not functioning properly.
None. The device cannot be used in the outlet.
Indicator light off The outlet has not detected a device plugged into the outlet. Make sure the device is correctly plugged into
the outlet.
The outlet is not active. Make sure the vehicle's ignition is in at least
mode I.
The outlet has been active but has been deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the start battery.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 570)
•
Using the electrical outlets (p. 574)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
574
Using the electrical outlets
The 12 V outlet can be used for devices
intended for this such as MP3 players, coolers
and cellular phones.
The high-voltage outlet* can be used for devices
intended for this, such as chargers, laptops, etc.
The ignition must be in at least mode I for the
outlets to supply current. The outlets will then be
active as long as there is sufficient charge in the
start battery.
If the engine is turned off and the vehicle is
locked, the outlets will be deactivated. If the
engine is turned off and the vehicle remains
unlocked, the sockets will remain active for up to
7 minutes.
NOTE
Bear in mind that using the electrical outlets
when the engine is off could cause the starter
battery to have too low of a charge level,
which could limit other functionality.
Accessories connected to the electrical out-
lets can be activated even when the vehicle
electrical system is off or if preconditioning is
used. For this reason, disconnect plugs when
they are not in use to prevent the starter bat-
tery from becoming discharged.
WARNING
•
Do not use accessories with large or
heavy plugs – they could damage the out-
let or come loose while you are driving.
•
Do not use accessories that could cause
disruptions to e.g. the vehicle's radio
receiver or electrical system.
•
Position the accessory so that there is no
risk of it injuring the driver or passengers
in the event of heavy braking or a colli-
sion.
•
Pay attention to connected accessories
as they can generate heat that could burn
passengers or the interior.
Using 12 V outlets
1. Remove the stopper (tunnel console) or fold
down the cover (trunk/cargo compartment)
over the socket and plug in the device.
2. Unplug the device and put the stopper back
in (tunnel console) or fold up the cover
(trunk/cargo compartment) when the socket
is not in use or left unattended.
CAUTION
The maximum power is 120 W (10 A) per
outlet.
Using high-voltage outlets
The ignition must be in at least mode I for outlets
to supply current. The outlets will then be active
as long as there is sufficient charge in the start
battery.
1.
Slide down the cover over the outlet and plug
in the device.
>
The LED
2
light on the outlet will indicate
its status.
2. The outlet is supplying electrical current
when the light is glowing steadily green.
3. Disconnect the device by pulling out the plug
(do not pull on the cord).
Pull up the cover when the outlet is not in
use or is left unattended.
CAUTION
The maximum power is 150 W.
WARNING
Do not attempt to alter or repair the high-volt-
age outlet on your own. Volvo recommends
contacting an authorized Volvo workshop.
2
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
575
WARNING
•
Only use accessories that are not dam-
aged or malfunctioning. The accessories
must be designed for 120 V and 60 Hz,
with plugs intended for the outlet. The
accessories must be CE marked, UL
marked or have an equivalent safety
marking.
•
New let outlets, plugs or accessories
come into contact with water or another
fluid. Do not touch or use the outlet if it
appears damaged or has been in contact
with water or another fluid.
•
Do not connect power strips, adapters or
extension cords to the outlet has this
could cause the outlet's safety functions
to malfunction.
•
The outlet is equipped with a pet guard.
Make sure that no one picks at or dam-
ages the outlet in such a way that the
guard is disabled. Children should not be
left unsupervised in the vehicle when the
outlet is active.
Failure to follow the above could lead to
severe or fatal electrical shocks.
Related information
•
Electrical outlets (p. 572)
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 570)
Using the glove compartment
The glove compartment is located on the pas-
senger side. The glove compartment can be
used to store the Owner's Manual, maps, etc.
There is also room for a pen and a card holder.
Locking and unlocking the glove box*
The glove compartment can be locked when the
vehicle is left at a workshop, hotel, etc. The glove
compartment can then only be locked/unlocked
with the glove compartment key.
Storage compartment for the key. The illustration is
generic – the design may vary.
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
576
The illustration is generic – the design may vary.
To lock the glove compartment:
Insert the key into the lock on the glove com-
partment.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
Remove the key from the lock.
–
To unlock, perform the above steps in
reverse.
Using the glove box as a cooled area*
The glove compartment can be used to cool e.g.
drinks or food. Cooling is possible when the cli-
mate system is active (i.e. when the ignition is in
mode II or when the engine is running).
The illustration is generic – the design may vary.
Activate cooling
Deactivate cooling
–
Activate or deactivate cooling by moving the
control as far as possible toward the passen-
ger compartment/glove compartment.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 570)
•
Private Locking (p. 269)
Sun visors
In the ceiling in front of the driver and front pas-
senger, there are sun visors that can be lowered
and angled to the side as necessary.
The illustration is generic – the design may vary.
The mirror lighting* comes on automatically when
the cover is lifted up.
The mirror frame has a holder for e.g. cards or
tickets.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 570)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
577
Cargo compartment
The vehicle has a flexible cargo compartment
that makes it possible to carry and secure large
objects.
The cargo capacity of the vehicle can be consid-
erably increased by folding down the rear seat
backrests. Use the load anchoring eyelets or gro-
cery bag holders to help secure objects in place,
and the retractable cargo compartment cover* to
help conceal objects in the cargo compartment.
The towing eyelet and tire sealing system, or the
temporary spare tire*, are located under the
cargo compartment floor.
Related information
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
•
Grocery bag holders (p. 579)
•
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 580)
•
Installing and removing the cargo compart-
ment cover* (p. 580)
Loading recommendations
There are a number of things to consider when
carrying loads in or on the vehicle.
Load-carrying capacity is determined by the vehi-
cle's curb weight. The total weight of all passen-
gers and any installed accessories reduces the
vehicle's load-carrying capacity by the corres-
ponding amount.
WARNING
The vehicle's driving characteristics change
depending on the weight and position of the
load.
Loading the cargo compartment/trunk
•
Position objects so they are pressing against
the rear seat backrests.
•
Distribute the load evenly.
•
Heavy objects should be positioned as low
as possible. Avoid placing heavy objects on
folded-down seat backrests.
•
Cover sharp corners with a soft cloth or simi-
lar to help prevent damage to the upholstery.
•
Use the load anchoring eyelets and tension-
ing straps or similar to secure all objects.
WARNING
In a head-on collision at a speed of 50 km/h
(30 mph), an unsecured object weighing 20
kg (44 pounds) can reach a projectile weight
equivalent to 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
WARNING
If objects are loaded higher than the upper
edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm (4
in.) space between the objects and the win-
dow. Objects placed closer to this could
impede the function of the inflatable curtain
concealed inside the headlining.
WARNING
Always secure the load. Otherwise, it may shift
during heavy braking and injure people in the
vehicle.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Turn off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long objects.
Otherwise, it is possible for the load to reach
the gear lever or gear selector and move it to
a drive position – which could cause the vehi-
cle to begin rolling.
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
578
Extra cargo space
The rear seat backrests can be folded down to
increase cargo compartment space and simplify
loading. If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, make sure that no objects loaded into the
vehicle prevent the WHIPS system for the front
seats from functioning correctly.
The ski hatch in the rear seat can be folded down
to carry skis or other long, thin objects.
Related information
•
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 580)
•
Folding down the rear seat backrests
(p. 197)
•
Rear seat ski hatch (p. 580)
•
Roof loads and load carriers (p. 578)
•
Leveling control* and suspension (p. 442)
•
Weights (p. 653)
Roof loads and load carriers
Volvo-developed load carriers are recommended
for carrying loads on the roof of the vehicle.
Volvo load carriers are specially designed to help
prevent damage to your vehicle and help ensure
maximum safety while driving. Volvo load carriers
are available from authorized Volvo retailers.
Carefully follow the installation instructions provi-
ded with the load carriers.
•
Distribute the load evenly throughout the
load carriers. Place heavier cargo at the bot-
tom of the load.
•
Check periodically to ensure that the load
carriers and load are properly secured.
Secure the load firmly using tie straps or
similar.
•
If the load is longer than the vehicle, such as
a canoe or kayak, attach the towing eyelet in
its front outlet and secure the tie straps in it.
•
The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con-
sumption increase with the size of the load.
•
Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid acceleration, hard
braking and fast cornering.
WARNING
The vehicle's center of gravity and driving
characteristics are altered by roof loads.
Follow the vehicle's specifications regarding
weights and maximum permitted load.
Related information
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
•
Weights (p. 653)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
579
Grocery bag holders
Grocery bag holders (hooks) help keep shop-
ping bags in place and prevent them from falling
over and spilling their contents in the cargo
compartment.
On the sides of the cargo compartment
There are two grocery bag holders in the side
panel on each side of the cargo compartment.
CAUTION
The grocery bag holders are only intended to
hold weights up to 5 kg (11 lbs).
Under the floor hatch*
There are two grocery bag holders and an elastic
band
3
in the hatch in the cargo compartment
floor. The strap can be attached in four different
positions.
Open the hatch to access the grocery bag hold-
ers. Use the provided elastic strap to secure
shopping bags in a suitable position. Bags with
handles of a suitable size can also be hung on
the hooks.
Related information
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
•
Installing and removing the cargo net*
(p. 585)
•
Installing and removing the cargo compart-
ment cover* (p. 580)
•
Installing and removing the steel cargo grid*
(p. 583)
3
Additional elastic straps can be ordered from a Volvo retailer.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
580
Load anchoring eyelets
The load anchoring eyelets in the cargo com-
partment can be used to secure objects with
straps, a net, etc.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects in or pro-
truding from the vehicle can cause injury in
the event of hard braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seat belt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
•
Weights (p. 653)
Rear seat ski hatch
The hatch in the rear seat backrest can be
opened to transport long, narrow objects such
as skis.
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to
vehicle model.
1. In the cargo compartment, grasp the ski
hatch handle and pull it down.
2. Fold down the armrest in the rear seat.
If the private locking function is used, the ski
hatch must be closed.
Related information
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
•
Private Locking (p. 269)
•
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 580)
Installing and removing the cargo
compartment cover*
The cover can be rolled out to conceal objects
in the cargo compartment.
Installing the cargo compartment cover
Press the end piece on one side of the cover
into the retaining bracket in the side panel of
the cargo compartment.
Then put the other end piece in the recess in
the side panel on the opposite side.
Push the end piece down on both sides, one
at a time.
> When a click is heard and the red marks
on each end piece are no longer visible,
the cover is in place. Check that it is
secure.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
581
4.
Fold out the cover's front flap to eliminate the
gap between the cover and the rear seat
backrest.
CAUTION
The flap has two plastic parts that hold it into
place.
Do not hang shopping bags or similar items
on these plastic parts. They are not designed
for this and could break.
If the cargo net* is used at the same time as the
cargo compartment cover, the net has to be put
into place first.
Removing the cargo compartment
cover
In retracted position:
1. Press the button on one of the cover's ends
and lift out that end.
2. Carefully lift the cover up and out.
> The other end will release automatically
and the cover can then be lifted out of the
cargo compartment.
Related information
•
Operating the cargo compartment cover*
(p. 581)
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
Operating the cargo compartment
cover*
The cover can be used in two positions: fully
open to completely cover the cargo compart-
ment or partially retracted to make it easier to
reach further into the cargo compartment.
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
582
Fully open
1. Grasp the handle and pull the cover out and
above the side panels in the cargo compart-
ment. Pull the cover to its end position.
2. Press the cover's attaching pins down into
the grooves in the side panels. Let the cover
retract slightly while pressing the handle
lightly upward to hook the attaching pins into
place.
> The cover will be secured in the fully open
position.
CAUTION
Do not place objects on top of the cargo
compartment cover.
Loading mode
From the fully opened position:
Grasp the handle and pull it rearward as far
as possible.
Press the cover slightly downward.
Move the cover and its attaching pins care-
fully forward and upward over the hooks.
> The cover will retract until it stops in the
partially retracted position.
Returning to the fully open position from the par-
tially retracted position:
1. Grasp the handle and pull the cover out as
far as possible.
2. Release the handle so that the attaching
pins engage into the hooks.
> The cover will be secured in the fully open
position.
In vehicles equipped with the automatic cargo
compartment cover*, the cover will retract from
the fully open position to the partially retracted
position every time the tailgate is opened, and will
return to the fully open position when the tailgate
is closed. The cover will detect if anything
obstructs its movement and automatically retract.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of injury when opening
and closing the electrically operated* cargo
compartment cover.
CAUTION
If large or bulky objects are placed in the
cargo compartment, put the automatic* cargo
compartment cover in the fully retracted posi-
tion to help prevent it from coming into con-
tact with the object.
NOTE
Automatic operation of the cargo compart-
ment cover may not be possible at low pas-
senger compartment temperatures.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
583
Retracting the cover
1. From the fully opened position:
Lift the cover's handle and pull it rearward to
release the cover's attaching pins from the
grooves. Let the cover retract.
From the partially retracted position:
Grasp the handle and pull the cover out of
the groves to the fully open position. Lift the
handle and pull it rearward to release the
cover's attaching pins from the grooves. Let
the cover retract.
2. Let the cover retract with its attaching pins
above the side panels until it stops in the
fully retracted position.
Keep in mind that a retracted cover could reduce
rearward visibility.
Related information
•
Installing and removing the cargo compart-
ment cover* (p. 580)
Installing and removing the steel
cargo grid*
The steel cargo grid helps prevent loads or pets
in the cargo compartment from being thrown for-
ward into the passenger compartment.
For safety reasons, the steel grid must always be
installed and secured correctly.
WARNING
Under no circumstances may a person be in
the cargo compartment when the vehicle is
moving. Heavy braking or a collision could
lead to serious injury.
Installation
CAUTION
The steel cargo grid may only be used in the
rear position (behind the rear seat) described
here.
Before installing the steel grid, the existing plas-
tic ceiling mounting consoles must be replaced
with steel consoles. Volvo recommends that the
ceiling consoles are only replaced by an author-
ized Volvo workshop or retailer.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.
2. Make sure that the steel grid is facing the
right direction. Lift the grid into the vehicle
through one of the rear doors.
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
584
3.
Position the grid's attachment points in the
ceiling consoles.
The next step will be easier if two people
hold the steel grid in the right position.
4.
Screw the provided screw into place using
the provided 6 mm Allen wrench. Repeat on
the other side. Recommended torque: 20 Nm
(15 ft-lb).
> Check to make sure the steel grid is
securely in place.
5. Return the backrest to the upright position.
For more information on necessary tools and pro-
cedures for installing/removing, see the assem-
bly instructions
4
provided with the steel grid.
CAUTION
The steel cargo grid cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo compartment cover is
mounted.
Related information
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
•
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 580)
4
Assembly instructions no. 31659257.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
585
Installing and removing the cargo
net*
The cargo net helps prevent objects in the cargo
compartment from entering the passenger com-
partment in the event of a sudden stop or hard
braking.
The cargo net is attached at four points.
For safety reasons, the cargo net must always be
mounted and secured according to the following
description.
The net is made of strong nylon weave and can
be attached in two different locations in the vehi-
cle:
•
Rear mounting - behind the rear seats.
•
Front mounting - behind the front seats.
WARNING
Objects in the cargo compartment must
always be securely anchored, even with a cor-
rectly installed cargo net.
Installing the cargo net
Rear mounting
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests to make
mounting easier.
2. Guide the ends of the cargo net's cassette
over the load anchoring eyelets in the side
panel recesses. Press the ends of the cas-
sette into place on each side. Make sure the
cassette is securely in place.
3. Pull up the net.
4. Insert one of the net's upper attachments
into the corresponding rear ceiling bracket
and press it as far forward into the bracket
as possible.
5. Press the other attachment into the rear ceil-
ing bracket on the opposite side and press it
as far forward into the bracket as possible.
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
586
Front mounting
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.
2. Align the cassette's mounting rails above the
mounting brackets on the backrest.
3. Press the cassette into the mounting brack-
ets.
4. Pull up the net.
5. Insert one of the net's upper attachments
into the corresponding front ceiling bracket
and press it as far forward into the bracket
as possible.
6. Press the other attachment into the rear ceil-
ing bracket on the opposite side and press it
as far forward into the bracket as possible.
Removing the cargo net
1. Remove the cargo net from the ceiling
brackets by pressing the hook attachments
rearward. Let the net retract into the cas-
sette.
2.
Rear mounting:
Press the button on each side of the cas-
sette to release the ends from the load
anchoring eyelets. Lift out the net.
Front mounting:
Slide the cassette off of the mounting brack-
ets and lift then net out.
Related information
•
Loading recommendations (p. 577)
•
Load anchoring eyelets (p. 580)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
588
Volvo's service program
To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as pos-
sible, follow the Volvo service schedule speci-
fied in the Warranty and Maintenance Records
Information booklet.
WARNING
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To mini-
mize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do
not idle the engine except as necessary, serv-
ice your vehicle in a well ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more infor-
mation go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/
passenger-vehicle.
Volvo recommends having an authorized Volvo
workshop perform service and maintenance.
Volvo workshops have the staff, service literature
and special tools to guarantee the highest quality
of service.
CAUTION
To ensure the Volvo warranty is not invalida-
ted, check and follow the Service and War-
ranty Booklet.
Introduction
The maintenance services contain several checks
that require special instruments and tools and
therefore must be performed by a qualified tech-
nician. To keep your Volvo in top condition, spec-
ify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts
and Accessories.
The Federal Clean Air Act - U.S.
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle manu-
facturers to furnish written instructions to the ulti-
mate purchaser to assure the proper servicing
and function of the components that control
emissions. These services, which are listed in the
"Warranty and Service Records Information"
booklet, are not covered by the warranty. You will
be required to pay for labor and material used.
Maintenance
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
before it was delivered to you, in accordance with
Volvo specifications. The maintenance proce-
dures outlined in the Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet, many of which will
positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should
be performed as indicated. It is recommended
that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be
retained in case questions arise concerning
maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should
also be performed anytime a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Applicable warranties - U.S./Canada
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian
regulations, the following list of warranties is pro-
vided.
•
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
•
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
•
Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
•
Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tems Limited Warranty
•
Emission Design and Defect Warranty
•
Emission Performance Warranty
These are federal warranties; other warranties are
provided as required by state/provincial law.
Refer to your separate Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet for detailed informa-
tion concerning each of the warranties.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
589
Periodic maintenance helps minimize
emissions
NOTE
•
Refer to your Service and Warranty Book-
let for a comprehensive service and main-
tenance schedule up to 240,000 km
(150,000 miles). This program contains
inspections and services necessary for
the proper function of your vehicle and
includes components that affect vehicle
emissions.
•
The Warranty and Service Records Infor-
mation booklet also contains detailed
information concerning the warranties
that apply to your vehicle.
On-board Diagnostic System
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diagnostic
information about your vehicle's emission con-
trols. It can light the Check Engine light (MIL) if it
detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a
component or system that is not performing
within an expected range. A fault may be perma-
nent or temporary. OBD II will store a message
about any fault.
Emission inspection readiness
How do states use OBD II for emission
inspections?
Many states connect a computer directly to a
vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can then
read "faults." In some states, this type of inspec-
tion has replaced the tailpipe emission test.
How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission
inspection?
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection
for any of the following reasons:
•
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.
•
If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your part,
OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your
vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the
inspection practices in your area.
•
If you had recent service that required dis-
connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
information may be incomplete and "not
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
ready may fail inspection.
How can I prepare for my next OBD II
emission inspection?
•
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit or was
lit but went out without service, have your
vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced
by a qualified Volvo technician.
•
If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that
required disconnecting the battery, a period
of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II
system to "ready" for inspection. Two half-
hour trips of mixed stop-and-go/highway
driving are typically needed to allow OBD II to
reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can pro-
vide you with more information on planning a
trip.
•
Maintain your vehicle in accordance with your
vehicle's maintenance schedule.
Owner maintenance
Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals
are described in your vehicle's Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet.
The following points can be carried out between
the normally scheduled maintenance services.
Each time the car is refueled:
•
Check the engine oil level.
•
Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and taillights.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
590
Monthly:
•
Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect
the tires for wear.
•
Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min" and
"max" markings.
•
Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
•
Wipe driver information displays with a soft
cloth.
•
Visually inspect battery terminals for corro-
sion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal
connector, or a battery near the end of its
useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer
for additional information.
As needed:
Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to
reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup of
dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt res-
idues.
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at
the base of the windshield, and from other places
where they may collect.
NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase or
subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
Related information
•
Vehicle status (p. 592)
•
Scheduling service and repairs (p. 593)
•
Connecting equipment to the vehicle's data
link connector (p. 37)
•
Technician certification (p. 38)
•
Climate control system service (p. 599)
•
Maintenance of the brake system (p. 421)
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 600)
Data transfer between vehicle and
workshop over Wi-Fi
Volvo workshops have a designated Wi-Fi net-
work for secure data transfer between your vehi-
cle and the workshop. Your visit to the workshop
will be easier and more effective when diagnos-
tics information and software can be transferred
over the workshop's network.
When you arrive at the workshop, your service
technician can connect your vehicle to the work-
shop's Wi-Fi network to perform troubleshooting
and download software. For this type of commu-
nication, the vehicle only connects to a work-
shop's network. It is not possible to connect the
vehicle to another Wi-Fi network (e.g. your home
network) in the same way as to a workshop's net-
work.
Connecting with remote key
Connection is usually managed by the service
technician, who will use the remote key buttons. It
is therefore important to bring a key with buttons
with you when you visit the workshop. Pressing
the lock button on the remote key three times will
connect the vehicle to the workshop's Wi-Fi net-
work.
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network,
the symbol appears in the center display.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
591
WARNING
The vehicle may not be driven when it is con-
nected to the workshop's networks and sys-
tems.
Related information
•
Handling system updates via Download Cen-
ter (p. 591)
•
Scheduling service and repairs (p. 593)
Download Center
With the vehicle connected to the Internet
1
,
updates for a number of the vehicle's systems
can be downloaded from the center display.
The Download Center app is
started from the center display
and makes it possible to:
•
search for and update system software
•
update Sensus Navigation* map data
•
download, update and delete apps.
Related information
•
Handling system updates via Download Cen-
ter (p. 591)
•
Download apps (p. 477)
•
Updating apps (p. 478)
•
Deleting apps (p. 478)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
Handling system updates via
Download Center
System updates for Internet-connected vehicles
and infotainment can be updated via Download
Center. Updates can be done one at a time or
all at the same time.
Searching for update
If an update is available, the
message
New software
updates available will be dis-
played in the center display's
status field.
In order for system updates to be possible, the
vehicle must have an Internet connection
2
.
–
Go to Download Center in the center dis-
play's App view.
> If no search has been performed since
the last time the infotainment system was
started, a search will be initiated. No
search will begin if a software download is
in progress.
A number in
System updates shows
how many updates are available. Tap to
display a list of updates that can be instal-
led in the vehicle.
1
There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.
2
There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
592
NOTE
Data downloading can affect other services
such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the
affect on other services is experienced as
problematic, the download can be interrupted.
Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch
off or cancel other services.
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the igni-
tion is switched off and the vehicle is left.
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the vehicle is left as the
update is resumed the next time the vehicle is
used.
Updating all system software
–
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
To avoid displaying a list, select
Install all via
System updates
.
Updating individual system software
–
Select Install to choose the software you
would like to download.
Canceling software download
–
Tap the checkbox in the activity indicator that
replaced
Install when the download began.
Note that only a download can be cancelled. An
installation cannot be cancelled once it has
begun.
Deactivating the background search for
software update
Automatic background searching for software
updates is activated as the default factory setting,
but the function can be deactivated.
1.
Tap
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap
System Download Center.
3.
Tap to deselect
Auto Software Update.
Related information
•
Download Center (p. 591)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
Vehicle status
The vehicle's general status can be displayed in
the center display along with the option to
schedule service
3
.
The Car Status app is started
from the center display's App
view and has four tabs:
3
Certain markets only.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
593
•
Messages - status messages
•
Status – checking engine oil level and
AdBlue level
4
•
TPMS - tire inflation pressure check
•
Appointments - appointment information
and vehicle information
3
.
Related information
•
Handling messages saved from the instru-
ment panel (p. 109)
•
Checking and filling engine oil (p. 601)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 547)
•
Scheduling service and repairs (p. 593)
•
Sending vehicle information to the workshop
(p. 594)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
Scheduling service and repairs
5
This service offers a convenient way to schedule
service and workshop appoints directly from the
vehicle.
When it is time for service, and in certain cases if
the vehicle requires repairs, a message will be
displayed in the instrument panel and at the top
of the center display. The time for service is
determined by how much time has elapsed, the
number of hours the engine has run, or the dis-
tance driven since the last service.
To use the service
•
Create a Volvo ID and register it to the vehi-
cle.
•
To select a Volvo retailer you would like to
contact, go to www.volvocars.com and log in.
•
To send and receive appointment informa-
tion, the vehicle must be connected to the
Internet
6
.
Book service
Book a service request when desired or when a
message is displayed indicating that service or
repairs are needed.
1.
Open the
Car Status app from App view in
the center display.
2.
Tap
Appointments.
3.
Tap
Request appointment.
4.
Check that your
Volvo ID is correct.
5.
Make sure your preferred
Workshop is cor-
rect.
6.
In the
Tap to write information to the
workshop field, you can provide details on
what you would like performed during the
visit or other important information to your
workshop.
4
AdBlue Diesel models only.
3
Certain markets only.
5
Certain markets only.
6
There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
594
7.
Tap
Send appointment request.
> You will receive an appointment sugges-
tion by email within a couple of days
7
.
You will also receive the same message
via email and when you log in to
www.volvocars.com.
On some markets, the message in the
instrument panel indicating that the vehi-
cle requires service will go out once the
appointment request has been sent.
8.
Tap
Cancel request if you would like to
cancel your request.
The appointment request contains information
about your vehicle that helps the workshop plan
for your visit.
The retailer will send you a digital appointment
suggestion. Information about your retailer is also
available in the vehicle so that you can contact
your workshop at any time.
Accepting an appointment suggestion
When the vehicle has received an appointment
suggestion, a message will be displayed at the
top of the center display.
1. Tap the message.
2. To accept the suggested appointment, tap
Accept. Otherwise, tap Send new
proposal or Decline.
For some markets, the system reminds you when
an appointment time is approaching and the navi-
gation system
8
can also guide you to the work-
shop at the appointed time.
Related information
•
Vehicle status (p. 592)
•
Sending vehicle information to the workshop
(p. 594)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
Sending vehicle information to the
workshop
9
Vehicle-related information can be sent at any
time from the vehicle, e.g. if you schedule a visit
to a workshop and would like to assist your
workshop by providing additional basic informa-
tion. Sending vehicle information is not the same
as scheduling service.
1.
Open the
Car Status app from App view in
the center display.
2.
Tap
Appointments.
3.
Tap
Send vehicle data.
> A message confirming that vehicle-related
information has been sent will appear at
the top of the center display. You can
cancel data transmission by tapping the
checkbox in the activity indicator.
Information is sent via the vehicle's Inter-
net connection
10
.
7
Timespan may vary depending on market.
8
For vehicles with Sensus Navigation*.
9
Certain markets only.
10
There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
595
Vehicle information can be accessed by any
retailer if they are provided with your vehicle iden-
tification number (VIN
11
).
Vehicle information contents
The most recently saved vehicle-related informa-
tion will be sent (the last time the vehicle was
turned on). This includes information regarding:
•
service requirements
•
time since last service was performed
•
function status
•
fluid levels
•
mileage (odometer reading)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN
11
)
•
software version
•
diagnostic information.
Related information
•
Scheduling service and repairs (p. 593)
•
Vehicle status (p. 592)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 117)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 519)
11
Vehicle Identification Number.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
596
Hoisting the vehicle
When hoisting the vehicle, it is important to
ensure the jack/vehicle hoist is correctly
engaged in the designated attachment points
under the vehicle.
For vehicles with self-leveling*, pneumatic sus-
pension (if installed) must be turned off before
the vehicle is lifted. Turning off the function in the
center display.
WARNING
If the vehicle is lifted on a garage jack, the
jack must be placed under one of the four lift-
ing points. Make sure that the vehicle is cor-
rectly positioned on the jack and that it can-
not slide off. Make sure the jack plate has a
rubber pad to help keep the vehicle stable
and prevent damage. Always use axle stands
or similar.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack
intended for your specific vehicle model. If a
jack other than that recommended by Volvo is
used, follow the instructions included with the
equipment.
The vehicle's ordinary jack is only intended to
be used in temporary situations for short peri-
ods of time, such as when changing wheels in
the event of a flat tire. If the vehicle needs to
be lifted more frequently, or for a longer
period of time than for a wheel change, a
garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always
follow the instructions for use provided with
the equipment.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
598
Opening and closing the hood
To open the hood, pull the lever in the passen-
ger compartment and then turn the handle under
the hood.
Opening the hood
Pull the lever near the pedals to release the
hood from its fully closed position.
Turn the handle under the front edge of the
hood counterclockwise to release the catch
and lift the hood.
Warning - hood not closed
When the hood is released, a warning
symbol and graphic will be displayed in
the instrument panel and an audible
signal will sound. If the vehicle begins
to roll, the audible signal will be repeated several
times.
NOTE
If the warning symbol is illuminated or an
audible warning signal sounds even though
the hood is securely closed, consult a work-
shop - an authorized Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Closing the hood
1. Press down the hood until it begins to close
under its own weight.
2. When the hood reaches the catch at the
handle in the front edge of the vehicle, press
down on the hood to close it completely.
WARNING
Risk of injury! When closing, make sure that
the hood is completely unobstructed and that
no one can be injured.
WARNING
Make sure the hood locks securely after clos-
ing. It must audibly lock on both sides.
Hood not completely closed. The illustration is generic -
details may vary according to vehicle model.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
599
Hood completely closed. The illustration is generic -
details may vary according to vehicle model.
WARNING
Never drive with the hood open!
If there are any indications while driving that
the hood is not completely closed, stop imme-
diately and close it securely.
Related information
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 600)
•
Door and seat belt reminders (p. 51)
Climate control system service
Service and repairs on the air conditioning sys-
tem should only be done by an authorized work-
shop.
Troubleshooting and repairs
The air conditioning system contains a fluores-
cent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used to
search for leaks in the system.
Volvo recommends contacting an authorized
Volvo workshop.
Vehicles with R134a refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains the
refrigerant R134a under pressure. Service
and repairs to the system should only be done
by an authorized workshop.
Related information
•
Volvo's service program (p. 588)
Replacing a windshield with head-
up display*
Vehicles with a head-up display have a special
type of windshield that meets the requirements
for displaying projected information.
Volvo recommends contacting an authorized
Volvo workshop for assistance replacing the
windshield. The correct type of replacement
windshield must be used in order for the head-up
display to function properly.
Related information
•
Head-up display* (p. 144)
•
Cleaning the head-up display* (p. 630)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
600
Engine compartment overview
This overview shows some service-related com-
ponents.
The layout of the engine compartment may vary depend-
ing on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Brake fluid reservoir (located on the driver's
side)
Washer fluid filler pipe
12
Fusebox
Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe
WARNING
Bear in mind that the cooling fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment behind
the radiator) may start or continue running
automatically up to about 6 minutes after the
engine is turned off.
Always entrust engine washing to a workshop
– an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended. If the engine is hot, there is a risk of
fire.
WARNING
The ignition system works with extremely high
and dangerous voltages. The vehicle electrical
system should always be in ignition mode 0
when work in being performed in the engine
compartment.
Do not touch any spark plugs or ignition coils
when the vehicle electrical system is in igni-
tion mode II or when the engine is warm.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the hood (p. 598)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Refilling coolant (p. 603)
•
Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 619)
•
Checking and filling engine oil (p. 601)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
Engine oil
For the recommended service intervals and war-
ranties to be applied, an approved engine oil
must be used.
Volvo recommends:
12
Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refueling.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
601
If the engine oil is not checked regularly and the
level becomes low, this could cause serious
engine damage.
CAUTION
To satisfy the requirements for the engine's
service intervals, all engines are factory-filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil.
Great care has been put into the choice of oil,
with consideration given to service life, starta-
bility, fuel consumption and environmental
impact.
For the recommended service intervals to
apply, an approved engine oil must be used.
Only use the prescribed oil grade to top off or
change the oil. Otherwise, there is a risk of
the vehicle's service life, startability, fuel con-
sumption and environmental impact being
affected.
Failure to use engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity could cause damage to
engine-related components. Volvo Car Corpo-
ration disclaims warranty liability for such type
of damage.
Volvo recommends entrusting oil changes to
an authorized Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems to warn if the oil
level is too low/high or the oil pressure is low. On
engine variants with an oil pressure sensor, a
warning symbol is displayed in the instrument
panel when oil pressure is low
. On engine
variants with an oil level sensor, the
warn-
ing symbol in the instrument panel and display
messages are used to alert the driver. Some
engine variants have both systems. Contact a
Volvo retailer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter according to
the schedule specified in the Warranty and Main-
tenance Records Information booklet. Oils of a
higher grade than that specified may be used. If
the vehicle is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo
recommends using an oil with a higher grade
than that specified.
Related information
•
Checking and filling engine oil (p. 601)
•
Engine oil specifications (p. 656)
Checking and filling engine oil
The engine oil level is monitored by an electronic
oil level sensor.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
602
Filler pipe
13
.
It may be necessary to top up engine oil between
regularly scheduled services.
No action is necessary with regard to engine oil
level until a message appears in the instrument
panel.
WARNING
If this symbol is shown together
with the message
Engine oil level
Service required, visit a workshop
– an authorized Volvo workshop is
recommended. The oil level may be too high.
CAUTION
If this symbol is shown together
with a message about low oil level,
for example
Engine oil level low
Refill 1 liter, fill only with the indi-
cated volume, e.g. 1 liter (1 quart).
WARNING
Do not spill oil on the hot exhaust pipes as
this could cause a fire.
Viewing oil level in the center display
The oil level can be viewed using the electronic
oil level gauge in the center display once the
vehicle has been started. The oil level should be
checked regularly.
1.
Open the
Car Status app from App view in
the center display.
2.
Tap
Status to display the oil level.
Oil level graphic in the center display.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The vehicle
must have been driven approximately 30 km
(20 miles) and have been stationary
5 minutes on a level surface and with the
engine off before the correct oil level will be
displayed.
13
Engines with an electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
603
NOTE
If the conditions for measuring oil level are
not properly fulfilled (time after engine shut-
down, vehicle inclination, ambient tempera-
ture, etc.) the message
No value available
will be shown in the center display. This does
not mean that anything is wrong in the vehi-
cle systems.
Related information
•
Engine oil (p. 600)
•
Engine oil specifications (p. 656)
•
Ignition modes (p. 416)
•
Vehicle status (p. 592)
Refilling coolant
Coolant helps keep the combustion engine at
the right operating temperature. The heat trans-
ferred from the engine to the coolant can be
used to warm the passenger compartment.
When refilling coolant, follow the instructions on
the package. Never fill the cooling system with
only water. The risk of freezing is increased with
too low or too high amounts of coolant.
If there is coolant under the vehicle, smoke from
the cooling system, or if more than 2 liters (about
2 quarts) of coolant has been added to the sys-
tem, there could be something wrong with the
cooling system and starting the vehicle could
damage the engine. Call a tow truck and do not
attempt to start the engine.
WARNING
The coolant may be very hot. Never unscrew
the cap when the coolant is hot. If coolant
must be filled, unscrew the expansion tank
cap slowly to relieve overpressure.
Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive vehicle.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
604
Unscrew the cover in the plastic covering.
Unscrew the expansion tank cap and fill
coolant as needed. The level should not
exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the
expansion tank.
Put the components back in place in the reverse
order.
CAUTION
•
Do not ingest the contents. May cause
damage to organs (kidneys).
•
Use premixed coolant according to Vol-
vo's recommendations. If concentrated
coolant is used, make sure that the cool-
ant mixture is 50% coolant and 50%
water of acceptable quality.
•
Do not mix different types of coolant.
•
To help ensure sufficient corrosion pro-
tection in the system, only use new cool-
ant when replacing larger components in
the cooling system.
•
Never run the engine unless the cooling
system is properly filled. An improperly
filled cooling system could lead to high
temperatures and cracks in the cylinder
heads.
•
High levels of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
Related information
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 600)
•
Coolant specifications (p. 657)
Replacing bulbs
The bulbs in the halogen headlights, backup
lights and rear fog light can be changed without
the help of a workshop.
Halogen headlights are not available on all mod-
els and markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for
more information.
LED
14
bulbs must be replaced by a workshop.
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
For information on lights not mentioned in
this article, contact a Volvo dealer or a certi-
fied Volvo service technician.
The bulbs in the halogen headlights can be
changed without the help of a workshop. Before
a bulb can be replaced, the plastic covering over
the headlight must be removed.
If you are experiencing problems with any lights
other than light bulbs, contact a workshop
15
. If
there is a problem with an LED
14
light, the entire
lamp unit will normally need to be replaced.
WARNING
The vehicle electrical system must be in igni-
tion mode 0 when bulbs are replaced.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
605
CAUTION
Never touch the bulb glass with your bare fin-
gers. Grease and oils from your fingers vapor-
ize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the
reflector, which may damage it.
NOTE
If the error message persists after the defec-
tive bulb has been replaced, we recommend a
visit to an authorized Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Exterior lighting such as headlights and tail-
lights may develop temporary condensation
on the inside of the lens. This is normal. All
exterior lighting is designed to resist this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing once the light has been lit for
some period of time.
NOTE
Bulbs for active curve lighting* contain traces
of mercury and should therefore always be
submitted to a certified Volvo service techni-
cian.
Related information
•
Location of exterior lights (p. 606)
•
Removing the plastic cover to replace bulbs
(p. 605)
•
Replacing the low beam headlight bulbs
(p. 607)
•
Replacing the high beam headlight bulbs
(p. 607)
•
Replacing daytime running lights/front park-
ing light bulbs (p. 608)
•
Replacing front turn signal bulbs (p. 609)
•
Replacing backup lights (p. 610)
•
Replacing the rear fog light bulb (p. 610)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 611)
Removing the plastic cover to
replace bulbs
The headlight bulbs can be replaced without the
assistance of a workshop, but before a bulb can
be replaced, the plastic cover over the headlight
needs to be removed.
–
Release the pins in the plastic cover's four
clips by pressing them down with a screw-
driver or similar object and remove the cover-
ing.
14
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
15
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
606
NOTE
To bear in mind when refitting the covering:
•
The pin in the clip must be pressed back
completely before the clip is reinstalled in
the covering.
•
When the covering is reinstalled, the pin
must be pressed in until the end surface
is level with the surface of the clip.
Related information
•
Replacing bulbs (p. 604)
•
Replacing the low beam headlight bulbs
(p. 607)
•
Replacing the high beam headlight bulbs
(p. 607)
•
Replacing daytime running lights/front park-
ing light bulbs (p. 608)
•
Replacing front turn signal bulbs (p. 609)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 611)
Location of exterior lights
The vehicle's exterior lighting consists of several
different bulbs. LED
16
bulbs must be replaced
by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Front bulbs (vehicles with halogen
headlights)
Low beams
High beams
Daytime running light/parking light
Turn signal
Front fog light/cornering illumination* (LED)
Rear bulbs
Parking light (LED)
Parking light (LED)
Fog light
Backup light
Turn signal
17
Brake light (LED)
Brake light ‒ central, high-mounted (LED)
Related information
•
Replacing bulbs (p. 604)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 611)
•
Lighting panel and controls (p. 154)
16
LED (Light Emmitting Diode)
17
Contact a workshop for replacement ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
607
Replacing the low beam headlight
bulbs
The low beam bulbs in the halogen headlights
can be changed without the help of a workshop.
Before the bulbs can be replaced, the plastic cov-
ering over the headlight must be removed.
CAUTION
Never touch the bulb glass with your bare fin-
gers. Grease and oils from your fingers vapor-
ize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the
reflector, which may damage it.
Left headlight.
1. Remove the low beam rubber cover from the
headlight housing.
2. Remove the connector from the bulb.
3. Remove the bulb by pressing it slightly
upward and then pulling it out.
4. Insert the new bulb in the socket. The bulb's
guiding pin should point straight up.
5. Press the connector into place.
6. Put the rubber cover back in place.
Related information
•
Location of exterior lights (p. 606)
•
Removing the plastic cover to replace bulbs
(p. 605)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 611)
Replacing the high beam headlight
bulbs
The high beam bulbs in the halogen headlights
can be changed without the help of a workshop.
Before the bulbs can be replaced, the plastic cov-
ering over the headlight must be removed.
CAUTION
Never touch the bulb glass with your bare fin-
gers. Grease and oils from your fingers vapor-
ize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the
reflector, which may damage it.
Left headlight.
1. Remove the high beam rubber cover from
the headlight housing.
2. Remove the bulb by turning the bulb holder
upward and then pulling it straight out.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
608
3. Carefully pry the plastic sleeve by the con-
nector's locking lug to release it.
4. Remove the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb.
6. Position the bulb in the socket and turn it
downward.
7. Put the rubber cover back in place.
Related information
•
Location of exterior lights (p. 606)
•
Removing the plastic cover to replace bulbs
(p. 605)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 611)
Replacing daytime running lights/
front parking light bulbs
The daytime running light/parking light bulbs in
the halogen headlights can be changed without
the help of a workshop.
Before the bulbs can be replaced, the plastic cov-
ering over the headlight must be removed.
NOTE
Daytime running lights/parking lights are eas-
ier to reach if the high beam headlight bulbs
are removed. The high beam headlights are
mounted above and to the side of the daytime
running lights/parking lights. Remove the
high beam headlight bulb by turning the bulb
holder upward and then pulling it straight out.
CAUTION
Never touch the bulb glass with your bare fin-
gers. Grease and oils from your fingers vapor-
ize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the
reflector, which may damage it.
Left headlight.
1. Remove the daytime running light/parking
light rubber cover from the headlight hous-
ing.
2. Pull the daytime running light/parking light
bulb holder straight out.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Position the bulb holder in the socket and
push it into place.
6. If the high beam bulb holder has come loose,
position it in the socket and turn downward.
7. Put the rubber cover back in place.
Related information
•
Location of exterior lights (p. 606)
•
Removing the plastic cover to replace bulbs
(p. 605)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
609
•
Bulb specifications (p. 611)
•
Replacing the high beam headlight bulbs
(p. 607)
Replacing front turn signal bulbs
The turn signal bulbs in the halogen headlights
can be changed without the help of a workshop.
Before the bulbs can be replaced, the plastic cov-
ering over the headlight must be removed.
Left headlight.
1. Remove the turn signal rubber cover from
the headlight housing.
2. Press the retaining catches together and pull
the bulb holder straight out.
3. The bulb holder and bulb must be replaced
as one unit.
4. Position the bulb holder in the socket and
push it into place.
5. Put the rubber cover back in place.
Related information
•
Location of exterior lights (p. 606)
•
Removing the plastic cover to replace bulbs
(p. 605)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 611)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
610
Replacing backup lights
The light bulb for the backup light is located
behind the panel in the tailgate.
1. Remove the panel on the inside of the tail-
gate by turning both clips counterclockwise a
quarter-turn. Remove the panel. Place the
panel in a safe location out of the way.
Left-side bulb housing.
2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-
terclockwise and pulling it out.
3. Remove the old bulb by pressing it in and
turning it counterclockwise.
4. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and
turning it clockwise.
5. Put the panel back in place and turn it clock-
wise.
6. Turn both clips a quarter-turn clockwise to
secure the panel.
Related information
•
Location of exterior lights (p. 606)
•
Removing the plastic cover to replace bulbs
(p. 605)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 611)
Replacing the rear fog light bulb
The rear fog light bulb is located behind a panel
on the inside of the tailgate on the driver's side.
To replace the rear fog light bulb:
Tailgate inner panel.
1. Remove the panel on the inside of the tail-
gate by turning both knobs a quarter-turn
counterclockwise. Unhook the panel and put
it to the side.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
611
Left-side bulb housing.
2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it a quar-
ter-turn counterclockwise and then pulling it
out.
3. Remove the old bulb from the bulb holder by
pressing it in and turning it counterclockwise.
4. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and
turning it clockwise.
5. Wipe any dirt, grease or moisture from the
bulb's glass.
6. Insert the bulb into the bulb holder and turn
it a quarter-turn clockwise.
7. Put the panel back into place and secure it
by turning the knob a quarter-turn clockwise.
Related information
•
Location of exterior lights (p. 606)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 611)
Bulb specifications
The following specifications apply to the bulbs in
the halogen headlights, backup lights and rear
fog light.
If you are experiencing problems with any other
lights, contact a workshop
18
.
Function
W
A
Type
Low beams 55 H11
High beams 65 H9
Front turn signal 24 PY24W
Daytime running light/
parking light, front
21/5 W21/5W
Backup light 21 H21W LL
Rear fog light 21 H21W LL
A
Watt
Related information
•
Location of exterior lights (p. 606)
•
Replacing bulbs (p. 604)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
612
Start battery
The vehicle has a single-pole electrical system
that uses the chassis and engine mount as con-
ductors.
The start battery is used to start the electrical
system and power the starter motor and other
electrical equipment in the vehicle.
The start battery should only be replaced by a
workshop
19
.
The vehicle has a voltage-regulated alternating
current generator.
The start battery is a 12 V battery, designed for
the carbon dioxide reducing functions Start/Stop
and regenerative charging, and to support the
functionality of the car's different systems.
The service life and performance of the start bat-
tery are affected by factors such as driving style,
driving conditions, climate, battery discharges,
number of starts, etc.
•
Never disconnect the start battery while the
engine is running.
•
Make sure the cables to the start battery are
correctly connected and the clamps are
securely tightened.
WARNING
•
Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.
•
Do not connect the jumper cable to any
part of the fuel system or to any moving
parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds.
•
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin,
fabrics or painted surfaces.
•
If contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark. Do not smoke near the
battery. Failure to follow the instructions
for jump starting can lead to injury.
Connection points
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-
cals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
Use the vehicle's connection points in the engine
compartment to connect an external start battery
or battery charger.
The battery terminals on the car's start battery in
the luggage/cargo area must not be used.
If the start battery is being charged, the support
battery will also be charged.
Positive connection point
Negative connection point
18
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
19
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
613
CAUTION
Only a modern battery charger with controlled
charge voltage should be used to charge the
starter battery and support battery. The rapid
charging function should not be used as this
could damage the battery.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the following could cause
the infotainment energy save mode to tempo-
rarily stop working and/or a message in the
driver's display regarding the state of charge
of the starter battery may be temporarily
incorrect after an external starter battery or
battery charger has been connected:
•
The negative battery terminal of the vehi-
cle's starter battery must never be used
to connect an external starter battery or
battery charger – only the vehicle's neg-
ative charging point should be used as
a grounding point.
NOTE
If the starter battery becomes discharged too
many times, it will shorten its service life.
The service life of the starter battery is affec-
ted by several factors, such as driving condi-
tions and climate. The starting capacity of the
battery reduces gradually over time. The bat-
tery must therefore be recharged if the vehi-
cle is not used or a long period of time or if it
is only driven short distances. Severe cold fur-
ther limits the starting capacity.
To keep the starter battery in a good condi-
tion, the vehicle should be driven at least
15 minutes per week or the battery should be
connected to a battery charger with automatic
trickle charging.
A starter battery that is always kept fully
charged has the maximum service life.
Location
The start battery is located in the cargo compartment.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the func-
tion for automatic opening and closing must
be reset to function correctly. A reset is
required in order for the pinch protection to
work.
CAUTION
On certain models, the battery is secured with
a tensioning strap. Make sure that the ten-
sioning strap is always securely tightened.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
614
Specifications for start battery
Battery type H7 AGM H8 AGM
Voltage (V) 12 12
Cold start capacity
A
- CCA
B
(A)
800 850
Dimensions, L×W×H 315×175×190 mm (12.4×6.9×7.5 inches) 353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches)
Capacity (Ah) 80 95
A
According to EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Volvo recommends that batteries are replaced by
an authorized Volvo workshop.
CAUTION
If replacing the battery, make sure you
replace it with a battery of the same size, cold
start capacity and type as the original battery
(see the decal on the battery).
Related information
•
Battery symbols (p. 616)
•
Support battery (p. 615)
•
Jump starting using another battery (p. 456)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
615
Support battery
In addition to the start battery, vehicles equipped
with the Start/Stop function also have a support
battery.
Vehicles with the Start/Stop function are equip-
ped with two 12-volt batteries ‒ a heavy-duty
start battery and a support battery that provides
extra current during the Start/Stop function's
start sequence.
The support battery is located in a box next to the spring
strut in the engine compartment.
NOTE
•
The higher the current consumption in
the vehicle, the more the alternator has to
work and the batteries have to be
charged = increased fuel consumption.
•
When the starter battery capacity has
dropped below the lowest permissible
level, the Start/Stop function is disen-
gaged.
When the Start/Stop function is temporarily
reduced due to high current consumption:
•
The engine will auto-start, even if the driver
does not lift their foot from the brake pedal.
The support battery does not normally require
more service than the start battery. If you have
any questions or concerns, consult a workshop ‒
an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
CAUTION
If the following is not observed, the Start/
Stop function may temporarily stop working
after connection of an external starter battery
or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal of the vehi-
cle's starter battery must never be used
to connect an external starter battery or
battery charger – only the vehicle's neg-
ative charging point should be used as
a grounding point.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
616
NOTE
If the starter battery is discharged to the
extent that the vehicle does not have normal
electrical functions and the engine must then
be jump-started with an external battery or a
battery charger, the Start/Stop function may
remain activated. If the Start/Stop function
shortly thereafter auto-stops the engine, there
is a huge risk that auto-start of the engine will
fail due to insufficient battery capacity since
the battery had not had time to recharge.
If the vehicle has been jump-started or if
there has not been enough time for the bat-
tery to be charged with a battery charger, it is
advisable to temporarily deactivate the
Start/Stop function until the battery has been
recharged by the vehicle. At an ambient tem-
perature of about +15°C (about 60°F), the
battery must be charged by the vehicle for at
least one hour. At lower ambient tempera-
tures, the charging time can increase to
3-4 hours. It is advisable to charge the battery
with an external battery charger.
Specifications for support battery
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacity
A
-
CCA
B
(A)
170
Dimensions, L×W×H
150×90×130 mm
(5.9×3.5×5.1
inches)
Capacity (Ah) 10
A
According to EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
CAUTION
If replacing the battery, make sure you
replace it with a battery of the same size, cold
start capacity and type as the original battery
(see the decal on the battery).
Related information
•
Start battery (p. 612)
•
Start/Stop function (p. 438)
•
Battery symbols (p. 616)
Battery symbols
There are warning symbols and information on
the batteries.
Wear protective goggles.
See the Owner's Manual for
additional information.
Keep batteries away from
children.
Batteries contain corrosive
acid.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
617
Avoid smoking, open
flames, and/or sparks.
Risk of explosion.
Recycle properly.
NOTE
A used start battery or backup battery con-
tains lead and must be recycled in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Related information
•
Start battery (p. 612)
•
Support battery (p. 615)
Fuses and fuseboxes
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the vehicle's electrical system from damage by
short circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with a
higher amperage than that specified to
replace a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to a fire.
If any electrical component or function is not
responding, the component may have blown a
fuse due to temporary overload. If the same fuse
blows repeatedly, there may be a problem with
the component. Volvo recommends contacting an
authorized Volvo workshop to have the compo-
nent checked.
Location of fuseboxes
The illustration is generic - appearance may vary accord-
ing to vehicle model.
Engine compartment
Under the glove compartment
Trunk/cargo compartment
Related information
•
Replacing fuses (p. 618)
•
Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 625)
•
Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 619)
•
Fuses under the glove compartment
(p. 622)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
618
Replacing fuses
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the vehicle's electrical system from damage by
short circuiting or overloading.
1. Refer to the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and examine it from the
side to determine if the curved metal wire in
the fuse is intact.
3. If the wire is broken, replace the fuse with a
new fuse of the same color and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with a
higher amperage than that specified to
replace a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to a fire.
WARNING
Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for
assistance replacing fuses not listed in the
Owner's Manual. If performed incorrectly, sig-
nificant damage can be caused to the electri-
cal system.
Related information
•
Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 617)
•
Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 625)
•
Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 619)
•
Fuses under the glove compartment
(p. 622)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
619
Fuses in the engine compartment
The fuses in the engine compartment help pro-
tect electrical components such as engine and
brake functions.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
620
Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the fuse
box cover to assist in removing and inserting
fuses.
There are also spaces for several extra fuses in
the fusebox.
Positions
There is a decal with a diagram of the locations
of the fuses on the inside of the cover.
•
Fuses 1-13, 18-30, 35-37 and 46-54 are
"Micro" fuses.
•
Fuses 14-17, 31-34 and 38-45 are
"MCase" fuses and should only be replaced
by a workshop
20
.
Function Ampere
– –
– –
– –
Ignition coils (gasoline); spark
plugs (gasoline)
15
Oil pump solenoid; A/C mag-
netic coupling; heated oxygen
sensor, center (gasoline);
heated oxygen sensor, rear
(diesel)
15
Function Ampere
Vacuum regulators; valve;
valve for power pulse (diesel)
7.5
Engine control module; actua-
tor; throttle unit; EGR valve
(diesel); turbo position sensor
(diesel); turbocharger valve
(gasoline)
20
Engine control module 5
– –
Solenoids (gasoline); valve;
Engine cooling system ther-
mostat (gasoline); EGR cool-
ing pump (diesel); glow control
module (diesel)
10
Spoiler shutter control module;
Radiator shutter control mod-
ule; Relay windings for power
pulse (diesel)
5
– –
Engine control module 20
Starter motor 40
Starter motor Shunt
Function Ampere
Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
12 V outlet in tunnel console,
front
15
12 V outlet in tunnel console
between rear seats
15
12 V outlet in trunk/cargo
compartment*
15
– –
Left-side headlight, some
models with LED
A
15
Right-side headlight, some
models with LED
A
15
20
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
621
Function Ampere
– –
Heated windshield*, left side
Shunt
Heated windshield*, left side
40
Headlight washers*
25
Windshield washer 25
Transmission control module 15
Horn 20
Alarm siren*
5
Brake system control module
(valves, parking brake)
40
Wipers 30
Rear window washer 25
Heated windshield*, right side
40
Parking heater*
20
Brake system control module
(ABS pump)
40
– –
Heated windshield*, right side
Shunt
Function Ampere
Fed when ignition is on:
engine control module, trans-
mission components, electrical
power steering, central electri-
cal module, brake system con-
trol module
5
– –
Right-side headlight 7.5
Right-side headlight, some
models with LED
A
15
– –
– –
Battery connection control
module
5
Airbags 5
Left-side headlight 7.5
Left-side headlight, some
models with LED
A
15
Accelerator pedal sensor 5
A
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Related information
•
Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 617)
•
Replacing fuses (p. 618)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
622
Fuses under the glove compartment
Fuses under the glove compartment provide pro-
tection for e.g. electrical outlets, displays and
door modules.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
623
Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the fuse
box cover to assist in removing and inserting
fuses.
There are also spaces for several extra fuses in
the distribution box in the engine compart-
ment.
Positions
•
Fuses 1, 3-21, 23-36, 39-53 and 55-59 are
"Micro" fuses.
•
Fuses 2-22, 37-38 and 54 are "MCase"
fuses and should only be replaced by a work-
shop
21
.
Function Ampere
– –
Electrical outlet in tunnel con-
sole between rear seats*
30
– –
Movement sensor*
5
Media player 5
Instrument panel 5
Center console buttons 5
Sun sensor 5
Function Ampere
Sensus control module 20
– –
Steering wheel module 5
Module for start knob and
parking brake controls
5
Heated steering wheel* mod-
ule
15
– –
– –
– –
– –
Climate system control mod-
ule
10
– –
Data link connector OBD-II 10
Center display 5
Climate system blower module
(front)
40
Function Ampere
USB HUB 5
Instrument lighting; Interior
lighting; Rearview mirror auto-
dim function*; Rain and light
sensors*; Rear tunnel console
keypad, rear seat*; Power front
seats*; Rear door control pan-
els; Climate system blower
module left/right
7.5
Control module for driver sup-
port functions
5
Panoramic roof with sun cur-
tain*
20
Head-up display*
5
Passenger compartment light-
ing
5
– –
Ceiling console display (seat
belt reminder/front passenger
side airbag indicator)
5
– –
Humidity sensor 5
21
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
624
Function Ampere
Door module in right-side rear
door
20
Fuses in the trunk/cargo com-
partment
10
Control module for Internet-
connected vehicle; Control
module for Volvo On Call
5
Door module in left-side rear
door
20
Audio control module (ampli-
fier) (certain models only)
40
– –
Multi-band antenna module 5
Front seat massage function*
5
– –
Rear window wiper 15
Fuel pump control module 15
– –
– –
Driver's seat heating 15
Function Ampere
Front passenger's seat heat-
ing
15
Coolant pump 10
– –
Door module in left-side front
door
20
Active chassis control module*
20
– –
Sensus control module 10
– –
– –
Door module in right-side
front door
20
– –
TV* (certain markets only)
5
Primary fuse for fuses 9, 53
and 58
15
Related information
•
Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 617)
•
Replacing fuses (p. 618)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
625
Fuses in the cargo compartment
The fuses in the cargo compartment help pro-
tect electrical components such as the power
seats*, airbags and seat belt tensioners.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
626
The fuse box is located on the right-hand side.
Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the fuse
box cover to assist in removing and inserting
fuses.
There are also spaces for several extra fuses in
the distribution box in the engine compart-
ment.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
627
Positions
•
Fuses 13-17 and 21-36 are "Micro" fuses.
•
Fuses 1-12, 18-20 and 37 are "MCase"
fuses and should only be replaced by a work-
shop
22
.
Function Ampere
Heated rear window 30
– –
Pneumatic suspension* com-
pressor
40
Lock motor for rear seat back-
rest, right side
15
–
Lock motor for rear seat back-
rest, left side
– –
Control module for reduction
of nitrous oxides (diesel)
30
Power tailgate*
25
Power front passenger seat*
20
Towbar* control module
40
Function Ampere
Seat belt tensioner module
(right side)
40
Internal relay windings 5
Control module for reduction
of nitrous oxides (diesel)
15
Foot movement detection
module for opening the power
tailgate*
5
USB hub/accessory port –
– –
Towbar* control module
25
Accessory module 40
Power driver seat*
20
Seat belt tensioner module
(left side)
40
Park Assist Camera*
5
– –
– –
– –
Function Ampere
– –
Control module for airbags
and seat belt tensioners
5
– –
Heated rear seat (left side)*
15
– –
Blind Spot Information
(BLIS)*; Exterior reverse signal
control module
5
USB port in cargo compart-
ment
5
Modules for seat belt tension-
ers
5
Emissions system actuator
(gasoline, certain engine vari-
ants)
5
– –
All Wheel Drive (AWD) control
module*
15
22
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
629
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately for best results. It is
important to vacuum before using a cleaning
agent.
CAUTION
•
Some colored clothing (for example, dark
jeans and suede garments) may stain the
upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to
clean and treat these parts of the uphols-
tery as soon as possible.
•
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, gasoline, mineral spirit or
concentrated alcohol to clean the interior
as this can damage the upholstery as
well as other interior materials.
•
Never spray cleaning agent directly onto
components that have electrical buttons
and controls. Wipe instead with a damp
cloth with cleaning agent.
•
Sharp objects and Velcro can damage
the car's textile upholstery.
Related information
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 629)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 631)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 631)
•
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 631)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 632)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 633)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood sur-
faces (p. 634)
Cleaning the center display
Marks, stains, finger smudges etc. on the center
display may affect its performance and readabil-
ity. Clean the screen regularly with a microfiber
cloth.
To clean the center display:
1. Turn off the center display by pressing and
holding the Home button.
2. Wipe the screen clean with the microfiber
cloth provided or use another microfiber
cloth of similar quality. Wipe the screen with
a clean, dry microfiber cloth using small, cir-
cular motions. If necessary, moisten the cloth
slightly.
3. Reactivate the display by pressing the Home
button briefly.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
630
CAUTION
The microfiber cloth must be free of sand and
dirt when cleaning the center display.
CAUTION
When cleaning the center display, apply only
light pressure to the screen. Pressing too
hard could damage the screen.
CAUTION
Do not spray liquid or corrosive chemicals
directly onto the center display. Do not use
window cleaners, cleaning agents, aerosol
sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or deter-
gents that contain abrasives.
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tis-
sue paper, as these may scratch the center
display.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 629)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 631)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 631)
•
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 631)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 632)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 633)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood sur-
faces (p. 634)
Cleaning the head-up display*
Carefully wipe the glass covering the head-up
display unit with a clean and dry microfiber cloth.
If necessary, the cloth may be slightly moistened.
Never use strong stain removers. For difficult
cleaning conditions, a special cleaning agent can
be purchased at a Volvo retailer.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-
play* (p. 145)
•
Head-up display* (p. 144)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
631
Cleaning fabric upholstery and
ceiling liner
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately for best results. It is
important to vacuum before using a cleaning
agent.
Fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
Never scrape or rub a stain, as this could damage
the upholstery. Never use strong stain removers,
as this could change the color of the upholstery.
Use soapy water or a similar detergent. For more
difficult stains caused by oil, ice cream, shoe pol-
ish, etc., use a stain remover. Consult with your
Volvo retailer.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 629)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 629)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 631)
•
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 631)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 632)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 633)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood sur-
faces (p. 634)
Cleaning the seat belt
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately for best results. It is
important to vacuum before using a cleaning
agent.
Seat belts
Use water and a synthetic soap solution. Spe-
cially designed textile cleaning agents are availa-
ble for purchase at Volvo retailers. Make sure the
belt is dry before it is retracted.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 629)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 629)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 631)
•
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 631)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 632)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 633)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood sur-
faces (p. 634)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately for best results. It is
important to vacuum before using a cleaning
agent.
Inlay mats and floor mats
Remove the inlay mats to clean the floor mats
and inlay mats separately. Use a vacuum to
remove dust and dirt. Each inlay mat is secured
into place with pins.
Remove the inlay mat by grasping the inlay mat
at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
Put the inlay mat back into place by pressing it in
at each pin.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
632
WARNING
•
Never use more than one inlay mat at a
time on the driver's floor. If any other type
of floor mat is used, remove the original
mat from the driver's seat floor before
driving. All types of mats must be securely
anchored in the attachment points in the
floor. Make sure the floor mat does not
impede the movement of the brake pedal
or accelerator pedal in any way, as this
could be a serious safety hazard.
•
Volvo's floor mats are specially manufac-
tured for your vehicle. They must be prop-
erly secured in the attachment points in
the floor to help ensure they cannot slide
and become trapped under the pedals.
After vacuuming, a specially designed textile
cleaning agent should be used to remove stains
on floor mats. Floor mats should be cleaned with
products recommended by Volvo retailers.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 629)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 629)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 631)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 631)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 632)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 633)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood sur-
faces (p. 634)
Cleaning leather upholstery
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately for best results. It is
important to vacuum before using a cleaning
agent.
Leather upholstery*
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to protect its
original appearance. Over time, sunlight, grease,
dirt, etc. could break down the protective layer.
This could result in scratches and cracking.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatments are
required to preserve the qualities and color of the
leather. Volvo offers a comprehensive product,
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes, for cleaning and
treating leather upholstery that, when used as
directed, preserves the leather's protective coa-
ting.
For best results, Volvo recommends cleaning and
applying protective cream one to four times a
year (or more as needed). Volvo Leather Care Kit
951 0251 and Volvo Leather Softener 943
7429 are available for purchase at Volvo retailers.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
633
Cleaning the leather upholstery
1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp sponge
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
2. Move the sponge in circular motions to apply
the foam to the stain.
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain and
do not rub.
4. Dry the stain using a soft towel and let the
leather dry completely.
Protecting the leather upholstery
1. Apply a small amount of leather protector to
a cloth and then apply the protector to the
leather using light circular movements.
2. Let it dry for approximately 20 minutes.
Protecting the leather upholstery makes it better
able to withstand sunlight's harmful UV rays.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 629)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 629)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 631)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 631)
•
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 631)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 633)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood sur-
faces (p. 634)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately for best results. It is
important to vacuum before using a cleaning
agent.
Leather steering wheel
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with a plastic protector.
Volvo Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather
Softener 943 7429 are recommended for clean-
ing the leather steering wheel. First, remove dirt,
dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth.
CAUTION
Sharp objects such as rings could damage
the leather on the steering wheel.
If there are stains on the steering wheel:
Type 1(ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)
–
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the steering
wheel using a solution of 5% ammonia. For
blood stains, mix approximately 2 dl(1 cup) of
water with 25 g (one ounce) of salt and wipe
the stain.
Type 2(grease, oil, sauces or chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains.
2. Finish by wiping the wheel with an absorbent
paper or towel.
Type 3(dry dirt or dust)
1. Remove the dirt/dust using a soft brush.
2. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 629)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 629)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 631)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 631)
•
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 631)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 632)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood sur-
faces (p. 634)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
634
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood surfaces
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately for best results.
Interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces
A lightly dampened microfiber cloth is recom-
mended for cleaning interior details and surfaces.
These cloths are available for purchase at Volvo
retailers.
Never scrape or rub a stain. Never use strong
stain removers.
CAUTION
Do not use solvent containing alcohol to
clean the instrument panel glass.
CAUTION
Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be
easily scratched. Wipe these surfaces with a
clean and dry microfiber cloth using small, cir-
cular motions. If necessary, moisten the cloth
lightly with clean water.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 629)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 629)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 631)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 631)
•
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 631)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 632)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 633)
Cleaning the exterior
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier to
clean because dirt does not attach as strongly. It
also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the
vehicle looking new. Wash the vehicle in a car
wash or garage with an oil separator and use car
washing detergent.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 634)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 635)
•
Hand washing (p. 635)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 637)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 638)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 638)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 639)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 640)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 640)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
635
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the vehicle when the paint is
matte or to provide extra protection. The vehicle
does not need to be polished until it is at least a
year old. However, it can be waxed during the
first year. Do not polish or wax the vehicle in
direct sunlight. The surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 45 °C (113 °F).
•
Wash and dry the vehicle very carefully
before polishing or waxing. Remove asphalt
and tar stains with asphalt remover or paint
thinner. More stubborn stains can be
removed with a grinding paste designed for
vehicle paint.
•
Use polish first and then liquid or paste wax.
Follow the instructions on the package care-
fully. Many products contain both polish and
wax.
•
A wide range of polymer-based waxes can
be purchased today. These waxes are easy to
use and produce a long-lasting, high-gloss
finish that protects the bodywork against oxi-
dation, road dirt and fading.
CAUTION
Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and rubber.
If using degreaser on plastic and rubber, only
rub (if necessary) with slight pressure. Use a
soft sponge.
Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear away
or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polish containing abrasives must not be used.
CAUTION
Only use paintwork treatments recommended
by Volvo. Other treatments, such as preserva-
tion, sealing, protection, luster sealing or simi-
lar, could damage the paintwork. Paintwork
damage caused by such treatments are not
covered by Volvo's warranty.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 634)
•
Hand washing (p. 635)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 637)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 638)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 638)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 639)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 640)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 640)
Hand washing
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier to
clean because dirt does not attach as strongly. It
also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the
vehicle looking new. Wash the vehicle in a car
wash or garage with an oil separator and use car
washing detergent.
Hand washing
Keep the following points in mind when washing
the vehicle:
•
Avoid washing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
This could cause the detergent or wax to dry
out and become abrasive.
•
Remove bird droppings from paintwork as
soon as possible. It contains chemicals that
affect and discolor paintwork very quickly.
Use e.g. soft paper or a sponge soaked in
lots of water. Consult an authorized Volvo
workshop for assistance removing discolora-
tion.
•
Hose down the underbody, including the
wheel housings and bumper.
•
Hose down the entire vehicle and remove
any loose dirt, droppings etc. to reduce the
risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray
directly onto locks.
•
If necessary, use cold degreaser on heavily
soiled surfaces. Note that in such cases the
surfaces must not be hot from the sun.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
636
•
Wash using a sponge, car washing detergent
and plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with lukewarm soap
solution or car washing detergent.
•
Dry the vehicle using a clean, soft chamois or
a squeegee. Try not to let drops of water dry
in strong sunlight. This could cause water
drying stains that may need to be polished
out.
•
In areas with heavy industrial emissions,
more frequent washing of the vehicle's exte-
rior is recommended.
•
Tar spots from asphalt may remain even after
washing. Use a tar remover to remove these
spots after washing the vehicle.
WARNING
Always entrust engine washing to a workshop.
If the engine is hot, there is a risk of fire.
CAUTION
Dirty headlights do not work as well. Clean
them regularly, e.g. when refueling.
Do not use corrosive cleaners. Use water and
a non-abrasive sponge.
NOTE
Exterior lighting such as headlights and tail-
lights may develop temporary condensation
on the inside of the lens. This is normal. All
exterior lighting is designed to resist this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing once the light has been lit for
some period of time.
CAUTION
•
Make sure that the panoramic roof* and
sun shade are closed before washing the
vehicle.
•
Never use abrasive polishing agents on
the panoramic roof.
•
Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the panoramic roof.
CAUTION
Remember to remove dirt from the drain
holes in the doors and sills after washing the
vehicle.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 634)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 635)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 637)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 638)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 638)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 639)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 640)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 640)
•
Settings for automatically activating the park-
ing brake (p. 423)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
637
Automatic car washes
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier to
clean because dirt does not attach as strongly. It
also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the
vehicle looking new.
An automatic car wash is a fast and easy way to
keep your vehicle clean, but it does not reach all
areas of the vehicle. For best results, Volvo rec-
ommends hand washing your vehicle or supple-
menting automatic car washes with a hand wash.
NOTE
Volvo recommends not washing the vehicle in
an automatic car wash during the first few
months; the paintwork on new vehicles takes
some time to fully harden.
CAUTION
Before driving the vehicle into a car wash,
deactivate the Automatic Braking when Sta-
tionary and Automatic Parking Brake Applica-
tion functions. If the functions are not deacti-
vated, the brake system will seize when the
vehicle is stationary and the vehicle will not be
able to roll.
CAUTION
For automatic car washes in which the vehicle
is pulled forward on rolling wheels:
1. Before washing the vehicle, make sure
that the automatic rain sensor is deacti-
vated. If it is not deactivated and inadver-
tently starts, the wiper arms could be
damaged.
2. To help prevent damage from the auto-
matic car wash machinery, make sure
that the door mirrors are folded in, anten-
nas retracted or removed, and any auxili-
ary lights secured.
3. Drive into the automatic car wash.
4. Turn off the "Automatic Braking when
Stationary" function using the
button
in the tunnel console.
5. Turn off the "Automatic Parking Brake
Application" function in the center dis-
play's Top view.
6. Turn off the engine by turning the start
knob in the tunnel console clockwise.
Hold the knob in position for at least
2 seconds.
The vehicle is now ready for the automatic car
wash.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 634)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 635)
•
Hand washing (p. 635)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 638)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 638)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 639)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 640)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 640)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
638
High-pressure washing
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier to
clean because dirt does not attach as strongly. It
also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the
vehicle looking new. Wash the vehicle in a car
wash or garage with an oil separator. Use a car
washing detergent.
High-pressure washing
If washing the vehicle with a high-pressure wash,
use sweeping movements and keep the nozzle at
least 30 cm (13 in.) from the vehicle. Do not
spray directly onto locks.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 634)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 635)
•
Hand washing (p. 635)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 637)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 638)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 639)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 640)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 640)
Cleaning the wiper blades
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier to
clean because dirt does not attach as strongly. It
also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the
vehicle looking new. Wash the vehicle in a car
wash or garage with an oil separator. Use a car
washing detergent.
Wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
well as insects, ice etc. on the windshield, shorten
the service life of wiper blades.
When cleaning, put the wiper blades in the serv-
ice position.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windshield regu-
larly with a lukewarm soap solution or vehicle
shampoo. Do not use strong solvents.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 634)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 635)
•
Hand washing (p. 635)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 637)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 638)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 639)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 640)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 640)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
639
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and
trim components
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier to
clean because dirt does not attach as strongly. It
also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the
vehicle looking new. Wash the vehicle in a car
wash or garage with an oil separator and use car
washing detergent.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
retailers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of colored plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, e.g. glossy trim. Follow the usage
instructions for the cleaning agent carefully.
Avoid using car washing detergents with a pH
value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. Doing
so could result in the discoloring of anodized alu-
minum surfaces* (as shown in the illustrations
below). Abrasive polishing agents are not recom-
mended for these areas (as shown in the illustra-
tions below).
Components that should be washed with a cleaning
product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
CAUTION
Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and rubber.
If using degreaser on plastic and rubber, only
rub (if necessary) with slight pressure. Use a
soft sponge.
Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear away
or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polish containing abrasives must not be used.
CAUTION
Avoid washing the vehicle with cleaner with a
pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This could
cause discoloration of anodized aluminum
components like the roof rail and around the
side windows.
Never use metal polishing agent on anodized
aluminum components. This could cause dis-
coloration and destroy the surface treatment.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 634)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 635)
•
Hand washing (p. 635)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 637)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 638)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 638)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 640)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 640)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
640
Cleaning rims
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier to
clean because dirt does not attach as strongly. It
also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the
vehicle looking new. Wash the vehicle in a car
wash or garage with an oil separator and use car
washing detergent.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning products recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents could damage the
surface and stain the chromed aluminum rims.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 634)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 635)
•
Hand washing (p. 635)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 637)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 638)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 639)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 640)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 640)
Corrosion protection
Your vehicle is constructed with effective protec-
tion against corrosion.
Corrosion protection for the body consists of
modern metallic protective coatings on the sheet
metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion-
protected and minimized metal overlap, and
shielding plastic components, abrasion protection
and supplemental rust inhibitor in exposed areas.
In the chassis, exposed components of the wheel
suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast
aluminum.
Inspection and maintenance
The corrosion protection does not normally
require maintenance but keeping the vehicle
clean is always a good way to further reduce the
risk of corrosion. The use of strong alkaline or
acidic cleaning fluids should always be avoided
on shiny body components. Any stone chips in
the paint should be touched up as soon as they
are discovered.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 634)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 635)
•
Hand washing (p. 635)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 637)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 638)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 638)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 639)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 640)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
641
Paintwork
The paintwork consists of multiple layers. It is an
important part of the vehicle's corrosion protec-
tion and therefore needs to be checked regu-
larly.
The most common types of paint damage are
minor stone chips, scratches and damage to e.g.
the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers. To
help prevent corrosion, paint damage should be
rectified immediately.
Related information
•
Touching up minor paint damage (p. 641)
•
Color codes (p. 642)
Touching up minor paint damage
The paintwork is an important part of the vehi-
cle's corrosion protection and therefore needs
to be checked regularly. The most common
types of paint damage are minor stone chips,
scratches and damage to e.g. the edges of
fenders, doors and bumpers.
Touching up paint damage
To help prevent corrosion, paint damage should
be rectified immediately.
NOTE
Make sure the surface is clean and dry before
performing any touch-ups to the paint. The
surface temperature should be at least 15
°C (59 °F).
Materials that might be needed
•
Primer
23
‒
special adhesive primer is availa-
ble in a spray can for e.g. plastic-covered
bumpers.
•
Base coat and clear coat ‒ available in spray
cans or as a touch-up pen/stick
24
.
•
Masking tape.
•
Fine-grain sandpaper
23
.
If the damage has not reached all the way down
to the metal, then touch-up paint can be applied
immediately after the surface has been cleaned.
1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-
aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any
loose flakes of paint adhere to it.
If the damage goes down to the bare metal,
you may need to use primer first. If the paint
damage is on a plastic surface, an adhesive
primer should be used for better results.
Spray the primer into the lid of the spray can
and brush on thinly.
2. Light sanding with a very fine-grained sand-
paper or similar may be required before
painting (e.g. if there are uneven edges).
Clean the area carefully and let it dry.
23
If required.
24
Follow the instructions on the packaging for the touch-up pen/stick carefully.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
642
3. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a
small brush, toothpick or similar. When the
primer is dry, apply one or more coats of
paint and then a clear coat, letting the paint
dry between each application.
If there is a longer scratch, follow the same pro-
cedure as above, but first mask off the surround-
ing area to protect the undamaged paint.
Touch-up pens and spray paints are available at
Volvo retailers.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not gone down to the
bare metal and an undamaged coat of paint
remains, apply base coat and clear coat
immediately after cleaning the surface.
Related information
•
Paintwork (p. 641)
•
Color codes (p. 642)
Color codes
Color code
The color code label is located on the left door
pillar and is visible when the left front door is
opened.
Sample color code (1): US models.
Vehicle paint code
Sample color code (1): Canadian models.
Vehicle paint code
It is important to use the right color.
Related information
•
Paintwork (p. 641)
•
Touching up minor paint damage (p. 641)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
643
Changing rear window wipers
The wiper blades help remove water from the
windshield and rear window. Along with the
washer fluid, they clean the glass and help
improve visibility while driving. The windshield
and rear window wiper blades can be replaced.
Changing rear window wipers
Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the lower
section of the blade to the right.
Grasp the center of the wiper blade and lift it
from the window to the stop position.
NOTE
When the wiper arm is halfway folded out, it
will stop in a locking position that helps pre-
vent the arm from falling back onto the rear
window. The wiper arm must be pulled past
the locking position stop in order to change
the wiper blade.
Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to
the right until the blade loosens from the
arm.
3. Press the new wiper blade until it clicks into
place. Check to make sure the blade is
securely in place.
4. Fold the wiper arm back toward the window.
CAUTION
Check the blades regularly. Neglected main-
tenance shortens the life of the blades.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping when
backing up (p. 185)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 182)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 645)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
644
Replacing windshield wiper blades
The wiper blades help remove water from the
windshield and rear window. Along with the
washer fluid, they clean the glass and help
improve visibility while driving. The windshield
and rear window wiper blades can be replaced.
Replacing wiper blades
Raise the wiper arms to the service position.
Service position is activated/deactivated via
the function view in the center display when
the car is stationary and the windshield wip-
ers are not on. Press the button on the wiper
blade attachment and pull the wiper blade
straight out, parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in a new wiper blade until it clicks into
place.
3. Check to make sure the blade is securely in
place.
4. Press the wiper blade back against the wind-
shield.
Wiper blades come in varying lengths
NOTE
When changing wiper blades, make sure that
the blades are of different lengths. The blade
on the driver's side is longer than the one on
the passenger side.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping when
backing up (p. 185)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 182)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 645)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
645
Windshield wipers in the service
position
The windshield wiper blades must be in the serv-
ice (vertical) position for certain operations, e.g.
replacing the blades.
Windshield wipers in the service position.
The windshield wipers must be in the service
position when replacing, washing or lifting the
blades (e.g. to scrape ice or snow from the wind-
shield).
CAUTION
Before placing the wipers in service position,
ensure that they have not frozen to the wind-
shield.
Activating/deactivating service position
The service position can be activated/deactivated
when the vehicle is stationary and the windshield
wipers are switched off. Service position is acti-
vated/deactivated via Function view in the center
display:
Tap the Wiper Service
Position button. The indicator
light in the button will illuminate
when service position is acti-
vated. The windshield wipers
will move to the vertical posi-
tion when service position is
activated. To deactivate the service position, tap
Wiper Service Position once. The indicator light
in the button will go out when service position is
deactivated.
The wiper blades will also move out of service
position if:
•
The windshield wipers are turned on.
•
The windshield washers are turned on.
•
The rain sensor is activated.
•
The vehicle begins moving.
CAUTION
If the wiper arms in service position are raised
from the windshield, they must be folded back
against the windscreen before activating wip-
ing, washing or rain sensor as well as before
departure. This is to prevent scratching the
paint on the hood.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping when
backing up (p. 185)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 182)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 646)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
646
Filling washer fluid
Washer fluid is used to keep the headlights,
windshield and rear window clean. Washer fluid
containing anti-freeze should be used in very
cold weather (below-freezing temperatures).
Fill washer fluid into the reservoir with the blue
cover. The reservoir is used for the windshield
washer, tailgate window washer and headlight
washer*
NOTE
When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of
washer fluid remaining, the message
Washer
fluid
Level low, refill and the symbol
will be displayed in the instrument panel.
Recommended grade: Washer fluid recom-
mended by Volvo, with frost protection during
cold weather and temperatures below the freez-
ing point.
CAUTION
Use Volvo's original washer fluid or an equiva-
lent fluid with the recommended pH value
between 6 and 8, diluted as recommended,
e.g. in a 1:1 solution with pH-neutral water.
CAUTION
Use washer fluid with anti-freeze when tem-
peratures are below the freezing point to help
keep the pump, reservoir and hoses from
freezing.
Volume:
•
Vehicles with headlight washing: 5.5 liters
(5.8 qts).
•
Vehicles without headlight washing: 3.5 lit-
ers (3.7 qts).
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 181)
•
Using the windshield and headlight washers
(p. 183)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping when
backing up (p. 185)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 182)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 184)
•
Windshield wipers in the service position
(p. 645)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 644)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 643)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 180)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 180)
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
648
Type designations
The decals in the vehicle contain information
such as chassis number, type designation, color
code, etc.
Location of decals
The illustration is general and details may vary depending on market and model.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
649
Vehicle Emission Control Information. US
models. Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-
cable emission standards, as evidenced by the
certification label on the underside of the hood.
For further information regarding these regula-
tions, please consult your Volvo retailer.
Vehicle Emission Control Information.
Canadian models. Your Volvo is designed to
meet all applicable emission standards, as evi-
denced by the certification label on the underside
of the hood. For further information regarding
these regulations, please consult your Volvo
retailer.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The
VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the
dashboard. The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) should always be quoted in all correspond-
ence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and
when ordering parts.
Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates
the correct inflation pressures for the tires that
were on the vehicle when it left the factory.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry of
Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada). Your
Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety
standards, as evidenced by the certification label
on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-
ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the
driver's door opening). This label also includes
codes for paint color, etc. For further information
regarding these regulations, please consult your
Volvo retailer. U.S. models have the upper decal;
Canadian models have the lower one.
||
SPECIFICATIONS
650
Engine oil. This label contains the recom-
mended engine oil specifications.
Decal A/C. Refrigerant R134a.
NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner's Manual do
not claim to be exact reproductions of those
found in the vehicle. The purpose is to show
approximately how they look and about where
they are located on the vehicle. The informa-
tion that applies for your vehicle in particular
is found on the decal on the vehicle.
Related information
•
Air conditioning specifications (p. 658)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
651
Dimensions
The vehicle's length, height, etc. are shown in
the table.
Dimensions mm inches
A Ground clear-
ance
A
198 7.8
B Wheelbase 2941 115.8
C Length 4939 194.4
D Load length,
floor, folded
backrest
1988 78.3
Dimensions mm inches
E Load length,
floor
1153 45.4
F
Height
B
1543 60.7
G Load height 704 27.7
H Wheel track,
front
1652
C
1655
D
65.0
C
65.2
D
Dimensions mm inches
I Wheel track,
rear
1643
C
1645
D
64.7
C
64.8
D
J Load width,
floor
1130 44.5
K Width 1903
(1879
E
)
74.9
(74.0
E
)
||
SPECIFICATIONS
652
Dimensions mm inches
L Width incl.
rearview mir-
rors
2052 80.8
M Width incl.
folded rearview
mirrors
1929 75.9
A
At curb weight + 2 people. (Varies slightly depending on tire
dimensions, chassis, etc.)
B
Including roof antenna, at curb weight.
C
Vehicles with 18/19-inch wheels.
D
Vehicles with 20/21-inch wheels.
E
Chassis width.
Related information
•
Weights (p. 653)
SPECIFICATIONS
653
Weights
The following table lists important weight data
for your vehicle.
Category USA
(lbs)
Canada
(kg)
Gross vehicle weight
T6 AWD (B4204T27) 5335 2420
T5 AWD (B4204T23) 5290 2400
Capacity weight
950 430
Permissible axle weights, front
T6 AWD (B4204T27) 2645 1200
T5 AWD (B4204T23) 2625 1190
Permissible axle weights, rear
T6 AWD (B4204T27) 2800 1270
T5 AWD (B4204T23) 2780 1260
Curb weight
4100–4200 1860–1910
Max. roof load
220 100
CAUTION
•
When loading the vehicle, the maximum
gross vehicle weight and permissible axle
weights may not be exceeded.
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 648)
•
Towing capacity and tongue weight
(p. 654)
SPECIFICATIONS
* Option/accessory.
654
Towing capacity and tongue weight
Towing capacity and tongue weight are shown
in the tables below.
Category USA
(lbs)
Canada
(kg)
Max. trailer weights
Without brakes: 1650 750
With brakes (AWD): 2000 900
With brakes (AWD Towing Pack): 3500 1580
Max. tongue weight
AWD: 200 90
AWD Towing Pack: 350 150
CAUTION
•
The maximum trailer weights listed are
only applicable for altitudes up to 3280 ft
(1,000 m) above sea level. With increas-
ing altitude the engine power and there-
fore the car's climbing ability are impaired
because of the reduced air density, so
the maximum trailer weight has to be
reduced accordingly. The weight of the
car and trailer must be reduced by 10%
for every further 3280 ft (1,000 m) (or
part thereof).
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 648)
•
Weights (p. 653)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 460)
•
Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 461)
SPECIFICATIONS
655
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (output, etc.) for each
engine variant are shown in the table below. The
specifications for Special Edition vehicles may
vary.
NOTE
Not all engines are available on all markets.
Engine
Engine code
A
Output
(kW/rps)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque
(Nm/rps)
Torque
(ft. lbs./rpm)
Number of cylinders
T5 / T5 AWD B4204T23 187/92 250/5500 350/25–80 258/1500-4800 4
T6 AWD B4204T27 235/95 316/5700 400/37–90 295/2200–5400 4
A
The engine code, component and manufacturer serial numbers can be found on the engine.
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 648)
•
Engine oil specifications (p. 656)
•
Coolant specifications (p. 657)
SPECIFICATIONS
656
Engine oil specifications
Fully synthetic engine oil of at least
ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower oil grades
may not offer the same fuel economy, engine
performance or engine protection.
Volvo recommends:
General
See the Service and warranty booklet for infor-
mation about oil change intervals.
NOTE
This vehicle is delivered from the factory with
synthetic oil.
Do not use oil additives.
Oil viscosity
The wrong oil viscosity can shorten engine serv-
ice life during normal use. SAE 5W-30 provides
good fuel economy and engine protection. See
the viscosity chart.
Viscosity chart
Extreme driving conditions
Volvo's VCC RBS0-2AE/SAE 0W20 oil is recom-
mended for extreme conditions.
Oil volume
The oil volume for the engine is:
Liter (approx) 5.6
US qts (approx) 5.9
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 648)
•
Checking and filling engine oil (p. 601)
•
Engine oil (p. 600)
SPECIFICATIONS
657
Coolant specifications
Recommended grade: Volvo-approved pre-
mixed coolant. If concentrated coolant is used,
mix with 50% water. Consult a Volvo retailer if
you have any questions.
To avoid deterioration of the cooling system,
engine trouble, etc., only approved Volvo coolant
should be used.
WARNING
Do not ingest. May cause damage to organs
(kidneys). The product contains ethylene gly-
col, inhibitor, emetic, water, etc.
Related information
•
Refilling coolant (p. 603)
Transmission fluid specifications
Under normal driving conditions, the transmis-
sion fluid will not need to be changed during its
service life. However, it may need to be changed
if the vehicle is driven frequently in adverse driv-
ing conditions.
Automatic transmission
Prescribed transmission fluid:
AW1
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 648)
Brake fluid specifications
The medium in the hydraulic brake system is
called brake fluid and is used to transfer braking
force from e.g. pressure on the brake pedal via a
master brake cylinder to one or more slave cylin-
ders, which in turn act on a mechanical brake.
Recommended grade: Volvo Original or similar
fluid that meets a combination of Dot 4, 5.1 and
ISO 4925 class 6.
NOTE
Changing or filling brake fluid should be
entrusted to an authorized Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 600)
SPECIFICATIONS
658
Fuel tank volume
The fuel tank's refillable volume is shown in the
table below.
All models
Liter (approx) 60
US gallons (approx) 15.9
Related information
•
Refueling (p. 450)
•
Octane rating (p. 452)
Air conditioning specifications
The climate system in the vehicle uses a freon-
free R134a refrigerant. For information regarding
the refrigerant, refer to the decal located on the
inside of the hood.
The prescribed grades and volumes for fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system are
shown in the tables below.
A/C Decal
Decal for R134a
Refrigerant
Vehicles with R134a refrigerant
Weight Prescribed grade
700 g (1.54 lbs) R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains the
refrigerant R134a under pressure. Service
and repairs to the system should only be done
by an authorized workshop.
Compressor oil
Volume Prescribed grade
60 ml (2.03 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
Evaporator
CAUTION
The A/C system evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. The new evaporator must be certi-
fied and labeled in accordance with SAE
J2842.
Related information
•
Climate control system service (p. 599)
SPECIFICATIONS
659
Approved tire pressure
The following tire pressures are recommended
by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-
tion placard for information specific to the tires
installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Tire dimensions Cold tire pressure for up to five persons
Front
psi (kPa)
Rear
psi (kPa)
235/55 R18
235/50 R19
245/45 R20
35 (240) 35 (240)
245/40 R21 36 (250) 36 (250)
Temporary spare tire
T125/80 R18
60 (420) 60 (420)
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 648)
•
Checking tire pressure (p. 545)
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 547)
INDEX
661
1, 2, 3 ...
4WD 433
A
ABS
anti-lock brakes 418
AC (Air conditioning) 231
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control 298, 301,
302, 303, 304, 305, 307, 308, 309, 310,
311, 312
Accessories and extra equipment 35
installation 36
Accessory installation warning 36, 37
Active Bending Lights 161
Adapting driving characteristics 276, 433
Adaptive Cruise Control 298, 301, 302,
303, 304, 305, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312
change cruise control functionality 311
function 298
manage speed 302, 303
pass 307, 308
radar sensor 330
set time interval 304, 305
troubleshooting 310
Adjusting the steering wheel 201
Airbag 52
activation/deactivation 56
driver's side 53
passenger side 53, 56
Air bag, see Airbag 52
Air conditioning 231
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade 658
Air distribution 210
air vents 210, 211
changing 210
defrosting 224
recirculation 223
table showing options 213
Air quality 207, 208
allergy and asthma 208
passenger compartment filter 209
Air recirculation 223
Alarm 270
deactivating 271
Allergy and asthma-inducing substances 208
All Wheel Drive, AWD 433
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 433
All Wheel Drive (four-wheel drive) 433
Android Auto 508, 510
Antenna
location 260
Apple CarPlay 505, 507
Approach lighting 164
Apps 476
Assistance at risk of collision 378, 379,
380, 381, 382, 383, 384, 385, 387
Audio and media 474
Audio system
HD digital radio 486
SiriusXM® Satellite radio 486, 487, 489
Auto-climate 222
Auto hold 425
Auto-hold brakes 425
activate and deactivate 425
after collision 426
Automatic car wash 637
Automatic engine stop
auto-stop 438
Automatic high beam 159
Automatic locking 264
Automatic relocking 244, 257
Automatic Speed Limiter 285, 287, 288, 289
Automatic transmission 428
kickdown 432
oil 657
Trailer 460
INDEX
INDEX
662
B
Backrest
front seat, adjusting 188, 189, 192,
193, 194, 195
rear seat, folding 197
Battery
jump-start 456
Maintenance 612
start 612
support 615
symbols on the battery 616
warning symbols 616
BLIS 353, 354, 355, 356
Blower
adjusting 227, 228
air distribution 210
air vents 211
Bluetooth
connect 502
connecting vehicle to Internet 521
phone 510
settings 519
Book service and repair 593
Booster cushions 71
Brake assist
after collision 426
Brake fluid
grade 657
Brake functions 418
Brake light 163
Brakes 418
anti-lock brakes, ABS 418
automatic when stationary 425
Brake Assist System, BAS 420
brake lights 163
brake system 418
emergency brake lights 163
handbrake 421
Maintenance 421
on salted roads 420
on wet roads 420
brake system
fluid 657
C
Camera sensor 349
Camera unit 335, 339
Capacity weight 566, 653
Cargo compartment 577
attachment points 580
cargo net 585
electrical outlet 572, 574
Lighting 166
Cargo compartment cover 580, 581
cargo net 585
Cargo net 585
Car wash 634, 635, 637, 638, 639, 640
Catalytic converter 454
recovery 464
CD player 500
Cell phone, see Phone 511
Center console 571
Center display
change appearance 133
cleaning 629
climate controls 216
Function view 124
keyboard 128
messages 142, 143
operation 114, 117, 121, 126
overview 111
settings 134, 135
switch off and change volume 133
symbols in status bar 126
views 117
Central locking 260
Change of owner 136
Changing a wheel 552
INDEX
663
Checking engine oil level 602
Child restraints 63, 65
booster cushions 71
convertible seats 69
infant seats 67
integrated booster cushion 75
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 74
lower attachment points 73
recalls and registration 65
top tether anchors 72
Child safety 63
Child safety locks 262
City Safety 339, 340, 342, 343, 349, 351
City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles 348
City Safety in crossing traffic 345, 346
City Safety when evasive maneuver preven-
ted 347
Cleaning 631, 633, 634
automatic car wash 637
car wash 634, 635, 637, 638, 639, 640
center display 629
Seat belts 631
textile upholstery 629, 631, 632
upholstery 629, 631, 632, 633, 634
wheels 640
Cleaning wheels 640
Cleaning wiper blades 638
Clean Zone 207
Clean Zone Interior Package 208
Climate 204
auto-regulation 222
blower control 227, 228
parking 232
perceived temperature 205
Sensors 205
temperature control 229, 230, 231
voice control 206
zones 204
Climate controls 216
center display 216
rear seat 216
Climate system 204, 216
Refrigerant 658
repairs 599
Clock, setting 94
Collision 42, 47, 52, 61
Collision warner
detection of pedestrians 343
radar sensor 330
Collision warning 339, 352
Color code, paintwork 642
Color codes 642
Compass 470, 471
calibration 471
Condensation in headlights 635, 637,
638, 639
Connecting vehicle to Internet
No connection or poor connection 524
via a mobile device (WiFi) 521
via cellular phone (Bluetooth) 521
via vehicle's modem 522
Connect phone 511
Contact information 26
Convertible seats 69
coolant 657
Coolant, filling 603
Cooling system
overheating 455
Cornering illumination 162
Corner Traction Control 277
Corrosion protection 640
Covering
cargo compartment 581
Crash, see Collision 42
Crash event data 33
Cross Traffic Alert – CTA 358, 359, 360, 361
Cruise control 289, 290
manage speed 290, 291
temporary deactivation 293
turn off 294
INDEX
664
CTA – Cross Traffic Alert 358, 359, 360, 361
Curb weight 653
Customer Privacy Policy 35
CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 208
D
Data
recording 33
transferring between vehicle and work-
shop 590
Data sharing 526
Daytime running lights 156
Decals
location 648
Defrosting 224
Detection of cyclist 343
Dimensions 651
Dipstick, electronic 601
Direction of rotation 540
Disengaging the shiftlock 431
Display
driver information 84
Display lighting 166
Distance Alert 295, 296
limitations 297
DivX
®
501
Door mirrors 173, 175
compass 470, 471
dimming 174
outer 173, 175
power folding 175
resetting 175
store position 190, 191
Driveline
transmission 427
Drive mode 433
changing 435
ECO 435
Driver Alert Control 368
operation 369, 370
Driver Alert Control limitations 370
Driver performance 92, 93
Driver profile 138
edit 139, 140, 141
select 139
Driver support system 276
Driving
cooling system 455
with a trailer 460
Driving economy 447
Driving through standing water 449
driving with a trailer
towball load 654
towing capacity 654
E
ECO climate 435
ECO mode 435
activate with function button 438
Economical driving 435, 447
Electrical outlet 572
use 574
Electrical system 612
Electric parking brake 421
Electronic immobilizer 255
emergency brake lights 163
Emission inspection readiness 588
Engine
overheating 455
start 414
Start/Stopfunction 438
turn off 416
Engine braking 418, 445
INDEX
665
Engine compartment
coolant 603
engine oil 600
overview 600
Engine drag control 277
Engine oil 600
filling 601
filter 600
grade and volume 656
Engine shutdown 416
Engine specifications 655
Engine temperature
high 455
Environment 27
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control 312
see Messages and symbols 312, 328
Error messages in BLIS 357
Ethanol content
max. 10% by volume 451
Exterior dimensions 651
F
Federal Clean Air Act 588
Ferry transport 442
Flat tire 560
Flooded road 449
Fluids, volumes 646, 658
Fluids and oils 657, 658
Fog lights
front 161
rear 162
Four-C 442
Front seat
blower 227
climate 216
heating 218, 219
temperature 229
ventilation 220
Front seat manual 188
Front seats, power 189
adjusting passenger seat from driver's
seat 196
adjusting seat 189
Lumbar support 195
massage 192, 193
multifunction control 192, 193, 194, 195
Side bolsters 194
store position 190, 191
FSC, environmental labeling 24
Fuel 451
Travel Link service 494
Fuel filling 450
Fuel gauge 89
Fuel requirements 451, 452
Fuel tank
volume 658
Fuse box 617
Fuses
below the glove compartment 622
general 617
in engine compartment 619
in the cargo compartment 625
replacing 618
G
Gasoline grade 451
Gauge
fuel gauge 89
Gear selector positions
automatic transmission 428
Glass
laminated/reinforced 170
Glove compartment 575
Gracenote
®
499
Grocery bag holders 579
Gross vehicle weight 653
INDEX
666
Guide lines for Park Assist Camera 397
H
Handbrake 421, 422
Hand wash 635
Hard disk
space 526
Hazard warning flashers 163
HDC 445
HD radio 483
Head restraint 199
Head-up display 144
activate and deactivate 145
cleaning 630
replacing windshield 599
settings 146
store position 146, 190, 191
Heated washer nozzles 180
Heating
Seats 218, 219
steering wheel 221, 222
windows 225, 226
high beams 158, 159
High engine temperature 455
Hill Descent Control 445, 446
activate with function button 446
Hill Start Assist 426
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 426
Hoisting the vehicle 596
HomeLink® 467
programming 468
use 469
HomeLink® remote control
programmable 467
Home safe lighting 164
Honk 201
Hood, opening 598
Horn 201
I
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 208
IC (Inflatable Curtain) 60
ID, Volvo 26
Identification number 38
Ignition mode 416, 417
Immobilizer 255
Electronic immobilizer 255
Indicator symbols 95
Individual drive mode 433
Infant seats 67
Inflatable curtain 60
Inflatable Curtain 60
Inflating tires 565
Inflation pressure
adjusting 546
Checking 545
decal 547
recommended 547
Inflation pressure monitoring 547
action 551
Status 550
Inflation pressure table 659
Information display 84, 88
Infotainment (Audio and media) 474
Instrument cluster 84
settings 88
Instrument illumination 166
Instrument lighting 166
Instrument panel 84
App menu 104, 105
messages 106
settings 88
Instruments and controls 82
INDEX
667
Instruments overview
left-hand drive vehicle 82
Integrated booster cushion 75
folding down 78
folding up 77
IntelliSafe
driver support 28
Interior Air Quality System 208
Intermittent wiping 180
Internet, see Internet-connected vehicle 519
Internet-connected vehicle 519
book service and repair 593
No connection or poor connection 524
send car data 594
system updates 591
iPod®, connecting 502
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 74
J
Jack 553
Jump-start 456
K
Key 241
Keyboard 128, 131
change language 131
Keyless
locking/unlocking 257
settings 259
touch-sensitive surfaces 256
Key tag 241
L
Labels
location 648
Laminated glass 170
Lamps
changing 604
location 606
specifications 611
Trailer 462
Lane Keeping Aid
operation 373
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) 370, 372, 373,
374, 375, 377
Language 134
Leather upholstery, cleaning instructions 632
Leveling control 442
settings 444
License agreement 98, 527
Lifting tools 553
Light bulbs, specifications 611
Light control 154, 166
Lighting
Active Bending Lights 161
approach lighting 164
automatic high beam 159
automatic lighting controls, passenger
compartment 165
brake lights 163
controls 154, 164, 166
cornering illumination 162
daytime running lights 156
display lighting 166
emergency brake lights 163
front fog lights 161
Hazard warning flashers 163
high beams 158, 159
home safe lighting 164
in passenger compartment 164, 166
instrument illumination 166
instrument lighting 166
light bulbs, specifications 611
light locations 606
low beams 157
position lights 156
INDEX
668
rear fog light 162
settings 155
Turn signals 160
Lighting, replacing bulbs 604
backup lights 610
daytime running lights/front parking
lights 608
front turn signals 609
high beams 607
low beams 607
rear fog light 610
remove plastic cover 605
Limp home 427
Load anchoring eyelets
cargo compartment 580
Load anchoring hooks 579
Load carriers 578
Load index 542
Loading
general 577
load anchoring eyelets 580
long load 578
Lock indication 240
setting 241
Locking/unlocking
Tailgate 245, 259
Locking wheel bolts 553
Locks
Locking 244
unlocking 244
Low battery charge level
start battery 456
Low beams 157
Low oil level 601
Low-speed driving 444
activate with function button 445
M
Maintained climate comfort 236
start/stop 237
Maintenance 588
corrosion protection 640
Max. axle weight 653
Max. roof load 653
Media player 496, 498
compatible file formats 503, 504
voice control 150
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control 312
Collision warner with auto-brake 351
Messages in BLIS 357
Messages in display 106, 142
handling 107, 142
saved 109, 143
Mileage 89
Misting
condensation in headlights 634, 637
Mood lighting 166
N
Net
cargo compartment 585
O
Occupant safety 43
Occupant weight sensor 56
Octane rating 452
Oil, see also Engine oil 656
On-board diagnostics 588
On-board Diagnostic socket 37
Option/accessory 21
Outside temperature gauge 94
Overheating 455, 460
Owner's information 16
INDEX
669
OWNER'S MANUAL 21
environmental labeling 24
in cellular phone 20
in the center display 17, 18
P
Paddle at steering wheel 201
Paint
color code 642
paint damage and touch-up 641, 642
Panoramic roof
opening and closing 177
pinch protection 170
sun shade 176, 179
ventilation position 178
PAP – Park Assist Pilot 404, 406, 408,
409, 411, 412
Park Assist Camera 394, 395, 397, 399,
401, 402, 403
settings 400
Park Assist Camera limitations 401
Park Assist Pilot 404, 406, 408, 409,
411, 412
function 404, 406, 409, 411, 412
limitations 409
operation 406, 408
Symbols and messages 412
Park Assist Pilot – PAP 404, 406, 408,
409, 411, 412
parking
on hills 423
Parking Assist 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 393
function 388, 389, 390
Parking brake 421
activate and deactivate 422
automatic activation 423
Low battery charge level 424
Parking climate 232
Symbols and messages 238
Passenger compartment filter 209
Passenger compartment interior 570
center console 571
electrical outlet 572
glove compartment 575
sun visor 576
Passenger compartment lighting 164, 166
auto switch 165
Passing assistance 307, 308, 324, 325
personal information (Customer Privacy
Policy) 35
Phone 510
changing to another 514
connect 511
connect automatically 513
connect manually 513
delete 514
disconnect 514
phone call 515, 517
text message 516
voice control 149
Pilot Assist 314, 317, 318, 320, 321,
322, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328
pass 324, 325
pinch protection 170
resetting 171
PIN code 523
Polishing 635
Position lights 156
Power 655
Power folding door mirrors 175
Power panoramic roof 176
Power save mode 456
Power seats 189
Power tailgate 264
Power windows 171, 172
pinch protection 170
Preconditioning 233
start/stop 233
timer 234
Pressure wash 638
Privacy Policy (Customer Privacy Policy) 35
INDEX
670
Private locking 269
activation/deactivation 269
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 456
R
Radar sensor 301, 330
limitations 331
Radar unit 330
Radio 479
changing radio waveband and radio sta-
tion 480
HD radio 483
RBDS 483
search radio station 481
settings 482
SiriusXM® Satellite radio 486, 487, 489
start 479
voice control 150
Radio favorites 481
Rain sensor 181, 182
Rain sensor's memory function 182
Rear camera 394, 395, 397, 399, 400,
401, 402, 403
Rear door
sun shade 173
Rear seat
blower 228
climate 216
folding backrest 197
head restraint 199
heating 219
temperature 230
Rear sensors 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 393
Rearview/door mirrors
dimming 174
heating 226
interior 173
Rearview mirror 173
dimming 174
Rear window
heating 226
washers 184, 185
wipers 184, 185
Recalls 45
Recommendations when driving 448
Recommendations when loading 577
Recovery 466
Red Key 251
settings 251
Refrigerant 599
climate system 658
Refueling
filling 450
fuel filler door, fuel flap 450
Remote immobilizer 255
Remote key 241
battery replacement 247
connecting to driver profile 140
detachable key blade 252
loss 250
Range 246
Remote updates 591
Reporting safety defects 44
Resetting door mirrors 175
Resetting settings 136
change of owner 136
Driver profile 141
Resetting trip odometer 92
Retractable towbar 457
Road Sign Information 362, 363, 364
limitations 367
operation 364, 365, 366
Road trip 448
Roof load, max. weight 653
Run-off Mitigation 379, 380, 381
INDEX
671
S
Safety 42
pregnancy 43
Safety belt, see Seat belt 47
Safety defects, reporting 44
Safety mode 61
starting/moving 62
Sealing compound 560
Seat, see Seats 188
Seat belt reminder 51
Seat belts 47
Automatic locking retractor/Emergency
locking retractor 65
buckling/unbuckling 48
pregnancy 43
seat belt reminder 51
seat belt tensioner 50
securing child restraint systems 67, 69, 71
Seat belt tensioner 50
resetting 51
Seats
heating 218, 219
manual front seat 188
power front seats 189
store position 190, 191
ventilation 220
whiplash protection 46
Sensors
air quality 209
climate 205
Sensus
connection and entertainment 30
Sensus Navigation 364
Service position 645
Service program 588
Set time interval 296
settings
Categories 137
contextual 135
resetting 136
Shiftlock 431
deactivate 431
Side airbag 59
Side Impact Protection System 59, 60
SIM card 523
SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 59, 60
Sirius Satellite radio
Travel link 490
SiriusXM
®
Satellite radio
traffic information 486, 487, 489
Ski hatch 580
Slippery conditions 449
Slippery road conditions 449
Software updates 33
Sound experience 475
Sound settings 474, 517
phone 518
playing media 496, 498
text message 517
Spare tire 557, 558
Speed camera 366
Speed Limiter 281, 284, 285, 289
getting started 282
shut down 284
temporary deactivation 283
Speed symbols, tires 542
Spin control 277
Stability and traction control system 277, 280
operation 278, 279
Stability system 277
Stains 629, 631, 632, 633, 634
Start/Stop
deactivate 440
Driving 438
limitations 440
vehicle function 438
Start and lock system
type designations 255
Start battery 456, 612
overload 456
INDEX
672
Start engine 414
Starting the engine
after a collision 62
Start the vehicle 414
Steel cargo grid 583
Steering assistance at risk of colli-
sion 378, 379, 380, 381, 382, 383, 384,
385, 387
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end col-
lision 384, 385
Steering power level, see Steering wheel
resistance 276
Steering resistance at risk of head-on colli-
sion 381, 382, 383
Steering wheel 201
heating 221, 222
keypad 201
paddle 201
steering wheel adjustment 201
Steering wheel keypad 201
Steering wheel paddles 429
Steering wheel resistance, speed-depend-
ent 276
Stone chips and scratches 641, 642
Stop/start function 438
Storage compartments 570
center console 571
glove compartment 575
sun visor 576
Sunroof
pinch protection 170
Sun shade
panoramic roof 176, 179
pinch protection 170
rear door 173
Sun visor 576
mirror lighting 165
Support battery 615
Symbols
indicator symbols 95
warning symbols 97
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control 312
center display's status bar 126
Collision warner with auto-brake 351
parking climate 238
Symbols and messages for Assistance at
risk of collision 387
system updates 591
T
Tailgate
locking/unlocking 245, 259
open/close with foot movement 268
power 264
unlocking from inside 262
Technician certification 38
Temperature
adjusting 229, 230, 231
perceived 205
Temporary spare
spare tire 557
Temporary tire sealing system
execution, checking 561
Inflating tires 565
location 560
overview 560
sealing compound 560
Terms and conditions
services 35
users 526
Tire dimensions 542, 552
Tire pressure monitoring
calibrating 549
Tires 538
direction of rotation 540
glossary of terms 541
INDEX
673
inflation pressure table 659
mounting 556
pressure 659
removal 554
rotation 539
specifications 542, 659
storage 538
tire pressure monitoring 547
tire sealing 560
Tread depth 559
tread wear indicator 541
winter tires 559
Tire sealing system 561
Tire tread 541
Tools 552
Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-
tems) 72
Top view 134
Total airing function 241
Towbar
retractable 457
Towing 463
Towing capacity and towball load 654
Towing eyelet 464
TPMS - Tire Pressure Monitoring System 547
Traction control 277
Traffic information 482
Trailer 461
driving with a trailer 460
Lamps 462
swaying 461
Trailer Stability Assist 461
trailer 461
Trailer stabilizer 278
Transmission 427
automatic 428
Transmission fluid
grade 657
Travel Link 490
Fuel 494
Notifications 493
Sports 495
weather 492
Tread depth 541, 559
Tread wear indicator 541
Trip computer 89, 91
Trip odometer 89
Trip odometer resetting 92
Trip statistics 92
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control 310
Troubleshooting the camera sensor 336, 339
TSA - Trailer Stability Assist 278, 461
Tunnel detection 157
Turn off engine 416
Turn signals 160
Type approval
radar system 334
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 544
Units 134
Unlocking
settings 245
with key blade 253
USB
socket for connecting media 503
V
Vehicle care 634, 635, 637, 638, 639, 640
leather upholstery 632
Vehicle Event Data 33
Vehicle functions
in the center display 124
Vehicle key bat. low 247
INDEX
674
Vehicle modem
connecting vehicle to Internet 522
settings 523
Vehicle recovery 466
Vehicle status 592
inflation pressure 550
Vehicle upholstery 629, 631, 632, 633, 634
Vehicle weight 653
Ventilation 210, 211
Seats 220
Video 500, 502
settings 501
Voice control 147
climate 206
phone 149
radio and media 150
settings 150
VOL mark 538
Volvo ID 26
create and register 26
W
Warning light
Adaptive Cruise Control 301
stability and traction control system 277
Warning lights
airbags SRS 97
alternator does not charge 97
brake system error 97
low oil pressure 97
parking brake applied 97
seat belt reminder 97
starter battery not charging 97
WARNING 97
Warning sound
parking brake 424
warning symbols 97
Warning symbols
safety 42
Warranties 588
Washer
Headlights 183
rear window 184, 185
washer fluid, filling 646
Windshield 183
Washer fluid 180, 646
Washer nozzles, heated 180
Waxing 635
Weights
Curb weight 653
Wheel bolts 553
locking 553
Wheels
cleaning 640
mounting 556
removal 554
Snow chains 559
Wheels and tires
Load index and speed symbol 542
Whiplash protection 46
Whiplash Protection System 46
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 46
Wi-Fi
connecting vehicle to Internet 521
delete network 525
sharing Internet connection, tethering,
hotspot 523
technology and security 525
Window
sun shade 173
Windows and glass 170
Windshield
heating 225
projected image 144, 146
Windshield washing 183
INDEX
676
WARNING
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen-
ger vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To mini-
mize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not
idle the engine except as necessary, service
your vehicle in a well ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go
to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle.
TP 26295 (English - USA & Canada), AT 1817, MY19, Copyright © 2000-2018 Volvo Car Corporation
